JP2020081645A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably reporting a period when a predetermined game state is completed so as to switch to another game state.SOLUTION: In losing variation display in a final round as a completion condition of a time-shortening game state to which a game state is shifted after completion of a special game state, an output level of a musical sound that is outputted from acoustic devices 281, 282 as BGM of variation display of the final round and is continuous from before starting variation display of the final round to during execution of variation display of the final round is made smaller than an output level before starting variation display of the final round during a fixed period before completion including time TB2 when variation display of the final round is completed. Accordingly, a player can report that variation display of a final round (a round in which a predetermined completion condition is satisfied) in a time-shortening state is underway by a change in an output level of sound as BGM of the variation display.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 67

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a ball game machine.

As a typical example of the game machine, there is a pachinko machine or a slot machine as a ball game machine, and in the conventional game machine, a game machine that generates a plurality of game states is known. For example, in the normal game state, a lottery is performed when a player enters a starting opening provided in the game area, and when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered and a large number of game balls enter the winning opening. There is known a gaming machine that becomes possible and, after the special gaming state, shifts to a shorter time gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2005-144670, A

However, there is a possibility that there is room for improvement in the configuration for switching and controlling the gaming state.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably notifying when a predetermined gaming state ends and switches to another gaming state. Is.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to claim 1,
Production control means for controlling execution of production,
Variation control means for controlling variable display of symbols displayed on a predetermined display section when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied,
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a first result in which a special game state occurs after the end of the variable display or a second result in which the special game state does not occur after the end of the variable display can be selected. A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery,
In the normal game state, the special game state, and the game state in which the variable display can be executed a plurality of times by shifting after the special game state ends, the display result of the variable display corresponding to the second result is A game state control means for performing control to generate a plurality of types of game states including at least a predetermined game state that ends when a variable display is displayed repeatedly until the final variation display in which a predetermined end condition is satisfied, Machine,
The effect control means,
From the start of the final display of the variable display, while outputting the final display of the variable display, output a continuous musical tone,
In a certain period before the end including the stop timing of the variable display in the final variable display, the output of the musical sound is made smaller than before the start of the final variable display, or the musical sound is not output, It is characterized in that it has means for controlling the output of the musical sound.
Further, the gaming machine according to claim 2,
Production control means for controlling execution of production,
Variation control means for controlling variable display of symbols displayed on a predetermined display section when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied,
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a first result in which a special game state occurs after the end of the variable display or a second result in which the special game state does not occur after the end of the variable display can be selected. A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery,
In the normal game state, the special game state, and the game state in which the variable display can be executed a plurality of times by shifting after the special game state ends, the display result of the variable display corresponding to the second result is A game state control means for performing control to generate a plurality of types of game states including at least a predetermined game state that ends when a variable display is displayed repeatedly until the final variation display in which a predetermined end condition is satisfied, Machine,
The effect control means,
In the final variation display, a musical sound including the same melody as the intermediate variation display executed before the final variation display is output,
The output of the musical sound is made smaller than the output of the musical sound in the intermediate variable display in a certain period before the end including the stop timing of the variable display in the final variable display, or the musical sound is not output. In addition, it has a means for controlling the output of the musical sound.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably notifying when a predetermined gaming state ends and switches to another gaming state.

Front perspective view of a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in the open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in still another open state Pachinko machine front view Front view of the pachinko machine with the front block removed Front view of the game board Rear perspective view of the pachinko machine Rear view of a pachinko machine Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Flow chart showing an example of main control main processing Flowchart showing an example of main control interrupt processing Time chart for explaining the time when the suggestive effect appears in the variable display of the decorative pattern Schematic diagram showing screen transition of the decorative pattern display device according to the time chart of FIG. Schematic diagram showing a screen transition diagram of the decorative pattern display device according to the time chart of FIG. Schematic diagram showing a screen transition diagram of the decorative pattern display device according to the time chart of FIG. (A) is a screen diagram showing an example of a screen in which the player can select whether or not to restore the variable display of the decorative symbol that was performed before the transition to the special game state in the special game state, b) is a screen diagram showing an example of a screen displayed when the variable display of the decorative symbol is restored in the special game state The figure which shows an example of the appearance probability of the pending full tank production in the pachinko machine of 1st Embodiment. Time chart for explaining suggestive production cancel function The schematic diagram which shows the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment used as an own machine, and the other pachinko machine communicatively connected with the said pachinko machine. Screen diagram showing an example of display contents of the decorative pattern display device when operating the selection operation device during the operable period that occurs during variable display of the decorative pattern The figure which shows an example of the appearance probability of the reservation full tank production in the pachinko machine of 5th Embodiment. The figure explaining an example for making it easy to increase the number of times the right to hold the unit game relating to the special symbol is increased. Front view of the game board in the pachinko machine according to the seventh embodiment (A) is a front view of a reel device, (b) is a front view of a middle reel Front view for explaining the operation of the lottery result display device The schematic diagram which shows the transition of the display by the reel device in the case where the 2nd sub-symbol warning is given. The schematic diagram which shows the transition of the display by the reel device in the case where the 2nd sub-symbol warning is given. Schematic diagram showing the transition of the display by the reel device when the countdown notice is given 30A is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the reel device in the game board, and FIG. 30B is a simplified cross-sectional view of the main configuration of the game board taken along the line AA of FIG. 30A is a simplified cross-sectional view of the main configuration including the reel device taken along the line BB in FIG. 30A, and FIG. 30B illustrates a group of fish displayed beyond the display area of the reel device. Front view for (A) is an enlarged front view around the upper and lower starting winning devices in the game board of the pachinko machine according to the eighth embodiment, (b) is a sectional view of the game board taken along the line CC of FIG. 32(a), 32C is a top view of FIG. 32A viewed from the upper side, and FIG. 32D is the vicinity of the information display part when a player playing the pachinko machine according to the eighth embodiment obliquely looks at the lower left direction. Figure showing the appearance of (A) is a front view of the reel device of the ninth embodiment, (b) is a simplified sectional view of the reel device taken along the line D-D of FIG. 33(a), and (c) is a front view of the gaming machine. Is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine cut in the vertical direction at a position approximately at the center in the left-right direction, and (d) is a top view of the pressing operation device and the wave lamp. (A) is a front view of the reel device in the case where the display area of each symbol row by three reels is a basic display area, (b) is a reduced display area of each symbol row by three reels A front view of the reel device in the case of a display region, (c) is a top view of the reel device schematically showing a mechanism for changing the display region of the symbol row, (d) is a reduced display region of the symbol column Top view of the reel device schematically showing the reeled state Exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine according to the eleventh embodiment as seen from the front side. Disassembled perspective view of the drum base seen from the front side Perspective view of the light guide plate unit seen from the rear side Exploded perspective view of the light guide plate unit seen from the front side Exploded perspective view of the light guide plate unit seen from the rear side Exploded perspective view of the light guide plate unit seen from the rear side (A) is a schematic diagram explaining the advancing direction of the light which injected into the lower end surface in a light guide plate, (b) is a front view of the light guide plate which shows an example of how to shine. (A) is a front view of the reel device in the case where each of the three reels is in a basic state, and (b) is a basic state, cut along the rotation axis through the rotation axis. Partial cross-sectional view of the left reel, (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the left reel cut along the rotation axis through the rotation axis in a state where the width of the symbol row of the left reel is narrowed, ( (d) is a front view of the reel device when the width of the left and right symbol rows by the left and right reels is narrowed, (e) is the case where the display area of each symbol row is reduced by the movement of each of the three reels. Front view of reel device Timing chart showing the operation of each configuration when changing the size of the display area of each symbol row (A) is a perspective view of the light guide plate of the fourteenth embodiment seen from the rear side, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide plate of the fourteenth embodiment obtained by cutting the substantially center in the left-right direction in the up-down direction, ) Is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper portion of the light guide plate when the drive solenoid is in the protruding state, and (d) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper portion of the light guide plate when the drive solenoid is in the retracted state. Figure Front view of the screen portion of the light guide plate of the fourteenth embodiment Front view of two light guide plates that overlap in the front-back direction and the light guide plate (A) is a screen diagram for explaining the display area of the decorative pattern display device in the pachinko machine of the sixteenth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the screen transition of the decorative pattern display device with the increase in the number of holding Explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the type of lottery results based on the starting winnings stored in the main control board, the variation time, etc. Flowchart showing the display effect setting process executed by the sub-control board Time chart showing an example of game state transition Front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of the eighteenth embodiment Rear view of the pachinko machine of the eighteenth embodiment Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine of the eighteenth embodiment. The flowchart which shows an example of the main control main process in the pachinko machine of 18th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows an example of the main control interruption processing in the pachinko machine of 18th Embodiment. Flowchart showing an example of nail state related processing Flowchart showing an example of setting suggestion information related processing (A) is a front view for explaining the lottery result display section, (b) is an explanation according to an example of the display mode of the lottery result display section when the game mode of the third stage probability of each type is set Figure Explanatory diagram related to an example of production extension function Enlarged front view around the reel device Perspective view of the light guide plate of the twenty-first embodiment seen from the front side. Front view of the light guide plate of the twenty-first embodiment Front view of the light guide plate of the twenty-first embodiment Front view of the light guide plate of the twenty-first embodiment Front view of the light guide plate of the twenty-first embodiment The typical front view of the light guide plate of 22nd Embodiment which shows an example of how to light. Time chart showing the change in the output level of the musical sound during the variable display of the special symbol executed during the time saving game state

Regarding the embodiment of the game machine according to the present invention, a pachinko machine 100 as an example of a ball game machine, which is a kind of game machine, will be described, and then a modification and other kinds of game machines will be described. First, regarding the embodiment of the pachinko machine 100, a structural configuration, an electrical configuration, and various control processes will be sequentially described.

<Structural structure>
First, the configuration of the structural portion of the pachinko machine 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. 1 to 4 are perspective views showing various states of the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 1 shows a closed state of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 2 shows a front block 102 and an intermediate block 103 integrated with an outer frame 101. 3 shows a state in which the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103, and FIG. 4 shows a state in which the rear block 104 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103. Shows. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 6 shows a state in which the front block 102 of the pachinko machine 100 is removed from the state of FIG. Various wirings are omitted in each drawing, and a part of the configuration of the game board 400 is omitted in FIGS. 3 and 6.

The pachinko machine 100 includes, for example, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, an outer frame 101, a front block 102, an intermediate block 103, and a rear block 104, and these parts are relatively operated by a predetermined operation. It is configured to be displaceable.

The outer frame 101 has a function as a main body supporting unit that supports the main body of the pachinko machine 100. The outer frame 101 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 2, a substantially quadrilateral frame in which a top plate portion 111, a bottom plate portion 112, a left side plate portion 113, and a right side plate portion 114 are assembled, and the pachinko machine 100 is installed. It is fitted into a game machine installation facility (island facility) provided in the game hall and is firmly fixed by a fixture (not shown). In addition, in the pachinko machine 100, the outer frame 101 is not an indispensable configuration, and the outer frame 101 or the outer frame 101 has the same inner shape, and a main body portion corresponding to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 excluding the outer frame 101 is provided. The island facility may be provided with a part of a supporting mechanism that supports the locking mechanism or a locking mechanism that locks the main body part.

Intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided on one side in the left-right direction of the outer frame 101 (on the side of the left side plate portion 113). The outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 are connected (joined) by the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 pivots on one end side (left side) in the left-right direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 100. The base end side and the other end side (right side) are configured to be rotatable forward with the pivoting tip side.

The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided, for example, as shown in FIG. 1, at the upper end and the lower end of the outer frame 101 so as to be separated from each other. In each of the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, for example, the shaft support portion provided in the outer frame 101 supports the shaft portion provided in the intermediate block 103 from below, and the shaft portion is provided in the shaft hole provided in the shaft support portion. It is configured so as to be rotatable when the is inserted. The configuration in which the main body of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is rotatable is not limited to the above-described configuration, and a shaft hole is provided on the intermediate block 103 side and a shaft portion is formed on the outer frame 101 side. Other configurations may be used.

The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided with a function of releasing the connection state between the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined detaching operation, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is attached to the outer frame 101. In contrast, it is detachably attached. For example, the connection state of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101 is released by performing a predetermined detaching operation of opening the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101 by a certain amount or more and moving the intermediate block 103 upward by a certain amount. It As a result, the main body of the pachinko machine 100 can be removed from the outer frame 101.

The front block 102 is arranged so as to overlap with the front side of the middle block 103, and the middle block 103 and the front block 102 are connected by front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 provided on the left side in front view. The front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, support the front block 102 rotatably forward with respect to the intermediate block 103, and remove it by a predetermined removal operation. It is configured to be possible.

The rear block 104 is arranged on the rear side with respect to the middle block 103 so as to overlap with each other, and the middle block 103 and the rear block 104 are separated by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 (see FIG. 8) provided on the left side in front view. It is connected. The rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 have the same structure as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 and the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132, and support the rear block 104 so as to be rotatable rearward with respect to the intermediate block 103. Moreover, it is configured to be detachably supported by a predetermined detaching operation.

In the pachinko machine 100, an intermediate block locking mechanism that restricts opening and closing of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101, a front block locking mechanism that restricts opening and closing of the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103, an intermediate block locking mechanism and a front block locking mechanism. A lock operation mechanism that is operated to unlock or lock the block locking mechanism is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the intermediate block 103 is provided with a key cylinder 141 as a lock operation mechanism exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening of the front block 102.

As a predetermined operation on the key cylinder 141, when a right rotation operation is performed by an operation key (not shown), the movable portion 143 of the intermediate block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 operates. As a result, the engaged portion 142 provided on the outer frame 101 as a part of the intermediate block locking mechanism is disengaged from the movable portion 143, and the intermediate block 103 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 101. Become.

On the other hand, the movable portion 144 of the front block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 operates in response to the leftward rotation operation of the predetermined operation key on the key cylinder 141. As a result, the engaged portion 145 provided on the front block 102 as a part of the front block locking mechanism is disengaged from the movable portion 144, and the front block 102 is placed in the open/close permitted state with respect to the intermediate block 103. Become.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a rear block opening/closing restriction mechanism that restricts opening/closing of the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103. The rear block opening/closing restriction mechanism allows the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103 to switch between a state in which opening/closing is prohibited (opening/closing prohibited state) and a state in which opening/closing is permitted (opening/closing permitted state) by a predetermined operation. It is said that.

The rear block opening/closing restricting mechanism is configured by, for example, as shown in FIG. 4, two opening/closing restricting portions 150A and 150B provided in the intermediate block 103 and one opening/closing restricting portion 150C provided in the rear block 104. .. The three opening/closing restriction units 150A to 150C are provided with rotating pieces 151A to 151C that can be rotated. The rotating pieces 151A to 151C change a state of engagement with an opening portion arranged so as to overlap with each other in the closed state of the rear block 104 due to a rotation operation, whereby an open/close prohibited posture corresponding to the open/close prohibited state. And an opening/closing allowable posture corresponding to the opening/closing allowed state can be switched. When all the turning pieces 151A to 151C are set in the opening/closing allowable posture, the turning pieces 151A to 151C can pass through the openings, and the rear block 104 enters the opening/closing allowed state with respect to the intermediate block 103. The open/close prohibited posture and the open/close permitted posture may be switched between the open/close prohibited state and the open/close permitted state by changing at least one of the positions and orientations of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C, and is configured to rotate only at a fixed position. It may be configured to move in a fixed direction, or may be configured to operate by a combination of movement and rotation. Hereinafter, the same applies to the change in posture when the constituent members of each device move between a plurality of postures.

Of the three rotating pieces 151A to 151C, two rotating pieces 151A and 151B corresponding to a part of them are formed on the rear block 104 in the open/close prohibited state of the rear block 104, as shown in FIG. One rotating piece 151C, which is exposed to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening and corresponds to the remaining portion, is exposed to the front side of the intermediate block 103, as shown in FIG. For this reason, it is not possible to switch all the rotation pieces 151A to 151C to the open/close permissible postures only by an operation from one side such as the back side of the pachinko machine 100 or the front side of the intermediate block 103, and thus, the crime prevention performance is achieved. Has been raised.

In addition, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a game ball movement restriction mechanism that restricts the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, for example, the game ball movement restricting mechanism is configured by a combination of a flow-down restricting piece 161 provided on the intermediate block 103 and a restricting changing portion 162 provided on the front block 102. The downflow restricting piece 161 is biased by a coil spring (not shown) toward the front side where the front block 102 is located.

In a state in which the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (closed state of the front block 102), the flow-down restriction piece 161 is in a movement-allowed state that allows the flow of the game ball, and specifically, the restriction. The changing portion 162 pushes and pushes the intermediate block 103 to the rear side. The flow-down restricting piece 161 is arranged rearward with respect to a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 in the movement permitting state. Thereby, in the closed state of the front block 102, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is allowed.

On the other hand, in the state where the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the front block 102 is in the open state), the pressing of the flow-down regulation piece 161 by the regulation changing portion 162 is released, and compared with the closed state of the front block 102. As a result, the downflow restricting piece 161 is set in a movement prohibited state in which it projects toward the front block 102. The flow-down restriction piece 161 projects into the guide passage in the movement prohibited state and blocks the flow of the game ball to the downstream side. As a result, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is prohibited.

In the pachinko machine 100, as shown in FIG. 2, for example, the intermediate block 103 is closed to the outer frame 101 at the lower end on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation front side (left side in rear view). An open/closed detection switch 108 for detecting whether or not the intermediate block is provided is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, for example, the intermediate block is provided at the lower end on the front side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation tip side (right side in front view). An open/close detection switch 109 for detecting whether or not the front block 102 is closed is provided for 103.

Next, each structure of the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the rear block 104 will be described in order.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 is a substantially rectangular member that forms substantially the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 100 and has a thickness in the front-rear direction, and decorates the front surface portion of the pachinko machine 100. It has a function as a front decoration means. The front block 102 is mainly configured by a base frame 201 made of synthetic resin, and a plurality of functional components are attached to the front and rear of the base frame 201. On the front surface side of the base frame 201, a front decoration 210 that forms the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 surrounds the opening 210A along the outer edge of the opening 210A that includes the front view central portion of the front block 102. Is installed. In the state where the base frame 201 forming the front block 102 and the front decorative body 210 are combined, the opening 210</b>A is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction over a wide range except the outer peripheral portion where the front decorative body 210 is attached. Through this opening 210A, the intermediate block 103 including the game board 400 located on the rear side of the front block 102 is configured to be visible to the player.

Further, in the front block 102, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, a central panel 220 provided on the back side of the base frame 201 so as to close the opening 210A, a main storage mechanism 230 for storing game balls, It is provided with an auxiliary storage mechanism 240 for storing the game balls, and a firing operation device 250 operated by the player for firing the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230.

Further, in the front block 102, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, as a part of the front decorative body 210, an opening peripheral portion 211 that surrounds the peripheral edge of the opening 210A and a portion that protrudes forward on the lower side of the opening 210A. Upper protrusion 217, a lower protrusion 218 located below the upper protrusion 217 and protruding forward, and an upper protrusion 217 and a lower protrusion on the right side of the lower protrusion 218. A flat portion 219, which is formed in a substantially flat region located on the back side of 218 and in which the firing operation device 250 is disposed, is formed. The main storage mechanism 230 is disposed on the upper protrusion 217, and the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 is disposed on the lower protrusion 218.

The central panel 220 has a function as a cover body that allows the rear side to be visible while closing the opening 210A that is formed through in the front-rear direction in a state where the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 are combined. The central panel 220 includes, for example, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, a panel frame 221 (see FIG. 3) attached from the rear side of the base frame 201 and a light transmissive member fitted to the front side of the panel frame 221. Front plate 222 (see FIG. 1) and a light-transmissive rear plate 223 (see FIG. 3) that is fitted to the front side of the panel frame 221 in a substantially parallel manner with the front plate 222 with a predetermined gap. There is.

The main storage mechanism 230 has a function of storing the game balls acquired according to the progress of the game and the game balls lent from the game hall. The main storage mechanism 230 includes, for example, as shown in FIG. 1, a storage portion 231, a ball removing mechanism (not shown), and a ball removing operation member 232 for operating the ball removing mechanism. In the storage portion 231, an inlet 231A for allowing a game ball to flow from the inside of the pachinko machine 100 to the storage portion 231, and an outlet (not shown) for causing the game ball to flow from the storage portion 231 to the inside of the pachinko machine 100, A discharge port (not shown) formed upstream of the outflow port is provided. By opening this discharge port, the game balls are discharged from the storage unit 231 to the player side without being taken into the pachinko machine 100. The ball removal mechanism has a function of switching the discharge destination of the game ball between the outflow port and the discharge port.

The game ball obtained according to the progress of the game and the game ball lent out in accordance with the lending operation to the lending operation device 292 described later mainly flow into the storage section 231 through the inflow port 231A. In addition, the storage portion 231 is formed with an opening on the upper side, and through this opening portion, a game ball owned by the player is manually inserted, or a game ball that is rented out at the game hall is supplied.

The game balls that have flowed into the storage unit 231 are sequentially guided to the side where the outlet and the outlet are formed (the upper right side in FIG. 1) while being aligned in a line. When the ball removing operation (for example, the pressing operation) on the ball removing operation member 232 is not performed, the game ball is guided to the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) described later through the outlet. On the other hand, when the ball removing operation for the ball removing operation member 232 is performed, the game ball is guided to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 1) through the discharge port.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 opens and closes the storage portion 241 having the inflow ports 241A and 241C (see FIG. 5) of the game ball and the discharge port 241B (see FIG. 1), and the discharge port 241B. A ball-removing mechanism 243 for operating the ball-removing mechanism 243 and a ball-removing operation member 242 for operating the ball-removing mechanism 243 are provided. The game balls and the like acquired in accordance with the progress of the game mainly flow into the main storage mechanism 230, but if the storage portion 231 is full, it flows into the storage portion 241 through the inflow port 241A. Further, even in response to the ball removing operation on the ball removing operation member 232, the game ball flows into the storing section 241 from the storing section 231 through the inflow port 241C.

The bottom surface of the storage section 241 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 241B. When the discharge port 241B is opened by a ball removing operation (for example, a pressing operation) on the ball removing operation member 242, all the game balls stored in the storage section 241 can be sequentially released to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. In addition, when the discharge port 241B is completely opened by the ball removing operation on the ball removing operation member 242, the discharge port 241B is kept in the open state until a return operation (for example, a pressing operation again) is performed on the ball removing operation member 242. Maintained. A ball overflow switch 249 (see FIG. 10) that detects whether or not game balls are excessively stored in the storage portion 241 is provided at the back of the inflow port 241A.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the firing operation device 250 includes a pedestal 251 projecting forward from the flat portion 219 of the front decorative body 210, and a rotatable firing handle 252 provided around the pedestal 251. A variable resistor 253 (see FIG. 10) that detects the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 252, a contact sensor 254 (see FIG. 10) that detects that the player is in contact with the firing handle 252, and a firing handle 252 It includes a firing stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) for invalidating the ejection of the game ball accompanying the rotation operation by the operation of the player. When the firing handle 252 is rotationally operated by the player, a game ball is ejected from the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) toward the game board 400 (see FIG. 3) at a strength corresponding to the amount of rotational operation. If the contact sensor 254 does not detect contact between the firing handle 252 and the player, or if the firing operation is invalidated by operating the firing stop switch 255, the firing handle 252 is being rotated. However, the game ball is not ejected from the launch device 330.

Further, behind the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102, frame light emitting devices 271-275 (see FIG. 10) are provided. The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 are disposed so as to overlap with the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decorative body 210 on the back side, and are attached to the base frame 201. As shown in FIG. 5, the opening peripheral portion 211 includes an upper center edge portion 211A, an upper left side edge portion 211B and an upper right side edge portion 211C located on both left and right sides of the upper side center edge portion 211A, and an upper left side edge portion. It has a left-side edge portion 211D located below 211B and a right-side edge portion 211E located below to the upper-right side edge portion 211C as light emitting portions, and frame light emission is performed corresponding to each light emitting portion. Devices 271-275 are installed.

The frame light emitting devices 271-275 include an upper central frame light emitting device 271 corresponding to the upper central edge part 211A, an upper left frame light emitting device 272 corresponding to the upper left side edge part 211B, and an upper right frame light emitting corresponding to the upper right side edge part 211C. The device 273, the left frame light emitting device 274 corresponding to the left edge portion 211D, and the right frame light emitting device 275 (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the right edge portion 211E are configured. Each of the frame light-emitting devices 271-275 is a light-emitting diode (LED) as one or a plurality of light-emitting means, an electronic component such as a resistor for controlling the LED, and these electronic components are integrated and electrically connected. And a printed circuit board.

Further, in the front block 102, as shown in FIG. 5, for example, an upper left acoustic output port 211F and an upper right acoustic output port 211G are provided above the opening peripheral edge portion 211, and these upper left acoustic output ports 211F are provided. A left upper acoustic device 281 and a right upper acoustic device 282 (see FIGS. 3 and 10) are provided corresponding to the respective upper right acoustic output ports 211G. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 are attached to the base frame 201 so as to be located at the back (rear) of the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decorative body 210.

Further, in the front block 102, as shown in FIG. 1, for example, a game ball lending device 290 is provided on the right side of the upper surface of the upper protrusion 217. The game ball lending device 290 is a frequency display device 291 for displaying a numerical value according to the balance of bills, cards, etc. inserted in a card unit (not shown) arranged side by side on the pachinko machine 100, and a game ball lending device. It includes a lending operation device 292 that is operated by the player when receiving the money, and a return operation device 293 that is operated by the player when returning the bills, cards, and the like inserted in the card unit. When a lending operation is performed on the lending operation device 292 in a valid state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into the card unit and the numerical values corresponding to those amounts are displayed on the frequency display device 291, the lending operation is performed. Accordingly, a predetermined number of game balls are lent out from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) in the rear block 104, and the display of the frequency display device 291 is updated along with the renting of the game balls. On the other hand, when a return operation is performed on the return operation device 293 in the valid state, an equivalent of a banknote corresponding to the balance or a card recording the balance is returned from the card unit according to the return operation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with an input operation device 260 that allows a player to perform an input operation different from the shooting operation. The input operation device 260 includes, for example, a push operation device 261 that can perform a push operation, a rotation operation device 262 that can perform a rotation operation, and a selection operation device 263 that can perform an up/down/left/right direction operation. With these operation devices 261-263, an effect selection operation for selecting an effect executed in the pachinko machine 100, a device setting operation for setting the volume and the light amount of each apparatus that executes the effect of the pachinko machine 100, or a player. It is possible to execute information setting operation, etc. that enables execution of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the game before the previous time by inputting information, and these operations can be executed by the player or the manager of the game hall as necessary. It is said that.

For example, although details will be described later, the pressing operation device 261 functions as an operation device for causing a predetermined suggestive effect to appear during a period in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 (see FIG. 7). To do. The "indication effect" is an effect that suggests the degree of ease (or degree of expectation) of transition to the special game state after the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

It should be noted that an input operation unit (for example, an annular rotation operation unit in the rotation operation device 262) with which the player comes into contact with the input operation device 260 is rotated, moved up and down by an input operation unit drive means such as a motor or a solenoid, or It is preferable that an operation such as a vibration is configured to be executable by control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, control of the sub control board 940 (see FIG. 10)), either before or after the input operation, or during the input operation, or By operating the input part at a plurality of timings, it is possible to diversify the effect accompanied by the input operation, such as positively prompting the input operation.

Next, the intermediate block 103 will be described. The intermediate block 103 is a member having a substantially rectangular shape having substantially the same size as the front block 102, and by attaching the front block 102 and the rear block 104, a function of bringing the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 into an integrated state. have. The intermediate block 103 is configured by attaching a plurality of functional components including the game board 400 to the base frame 301.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the intermediate block 103 includes a base frame 301 having an opening, a game board 400 (see FIG. 3) attached from the front side while covering the opening of the base frame 301, and the base frame. A game board support mechanism that rotatably and detachably supports the game board 400 with respect to 301, a game board fixing mechanism that fixes the position of the game board 400 to the base frame 301, and a game ball on the game board 400. Based on a command from the main control unit 370, a launching unit 330 (see FIG. 3) for ejecting, a main control unit 370 (see FIG. 4) mounted on the back side of the game board 400 to integrally control the progress of the game. And a sub-control device 390 (see FIG. 4) for controlling game effect and status notification.

In the base frame 301, as shown in FIG. 3, a guide passage portion 301A in which a guide passage for guiding a game ball discharged from a payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) described later to the front block 102 is formed, A plurality of wirings (not shown) and an opening 301B in which the signal relay device 311 is located are provided. The opening 301B has a shape penetrating in the front-rear direction below the game board 400, and the plurality of wirings inserted into the opening 301B are various devices provided in the front block 102 (for example, the frame light emitting device 271 to 271). 275, the upper left audio device 281 and the upper right audio device 282) and the devices (for example, the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390) provided on the back side of the intermediate block 103 or the rear block 104, for electrical connection. The signal relay device 311 including the wiring has a function as a relay board that relays a part of the wiring.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 400 is a flat plate-shaped base body 401 having through holes through which game balls such as a discharge port 401A can pass forward and backward, and an outer rail that smoothly curves from the lower left to the upper right of the base body 401. 402, an inner rail 403 that smoothly curves from the lower right to the upper left of the base body 401, a return ball prevention mechanism 404 attached to the upper left end of the inner rail 403, and an upper right end of the outer rail 402. The recoil prevention member 405 is attached. The outer rail 402 guides a game ball shot from a launching device 330 described later into the game area. The return ball prevention mechanism 404 prevents the game ball once released into the game area from the launch passage 401B formed in the portion where the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 face each other in parallel, and returns to the launch passage 401B. The recoil prevention member 405 has a shock absorbing property that prevents a large recoil of the game ball such that the game ball heading to the right beyond the upper center of the game board 400 returns to the left side via the upper center again. However, for example, it is formed of a material such as a vibration damping rubber.

As shown in FIG. 3, a return ball passage portion 163 is formed in the lower portion of the front block 102 on the back side. There is a gap between the guide member 335 that guides the game ball from the launching device 330 toward the launching path 401B and the outer rail 402, and the launching device 330 launches the ball but does not exceed the return ball prevention mechanism 404. The game ball returning in the passage 401B is returned from the inflow port 241A (see FIG. 5) to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 5) via the return ball passage portion 163 arranged below this gap.

The game ball that has advanced beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404 reaches the game area and moves (flows down) while falling within the game area by its own weight. The game area has a substantially circular outer peripheral shape, and is partitioned into a shape in which most of the area has a front-back width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. The outer peripheral portion of the game area is generally defined by the outer rails 402 and the inner rails 403, the front side is partitioned by the rear plate 223 of the central panel 220 into a substantially planar shape, and the rear side is substantially planar by the base 401 of the game board 400. It is divided into Various structures provided in the game area will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, the launch device 330 includes a ball feed mechanism 331 that sequentially sends the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 to a launch position, and a ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 (FIG. 10). (See), a firing mechanism 333 for ejecting the game ball arranged at the firing position, a firing solenoid 334 (see FIG. 10) for driving the firing mechanism 333, and a game ball fired from the firing mechanism 333 on the game board 400. And a guide member 335 for guiding to the firing path 401B. The firing device 330 operates according to the firing operation on the firing operation device 250 as described above, and the drive control of the firing solenoid 334 is changed according to the firing operation on the firing operation device 250 to adjust the firing force.

As shown in FIG. 4, the main controller 370 includes a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 371 having a two-part structure that houses the main control board 920. The main control board 920 is housed inside a light-transmitting board case 371 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace.

The main controller 370 is rotatably attached to the back side of the game board 400. Specifically, the mounting portion 372 is rotatably connected and fixed to the back side of the base 401 of the game board 400, and the main control device 370 is mounted on the mounting portion 372. Thereby, not only the back side (front surface side) of the main control device 370, but also the front side (back surface side) of the main control device 370 by rotating the mounting portion 372, the main control device 370 on the game board 400. It can be easily confirmed with the device attached. The main control device 370 may be connected to the mounting portion 372 so as not to be removed without leaving a trace, and the removal status of the main control device 370 may be easily managed.

The sub-control device 390 includes a sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 391 having a split structure for housing the sub-control board 940. Like the main control board 920, the sub-control board 940 is housed inside a translucent board case 391 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace. It is attached to the back side.

Here, in the game board 400, various structures arranged in the game area will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 400.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 includes a base body 401, a flow-down changing member such as a nail 411 or a windmill 412 that changes the flow-down direction or flow-down speed of a game ball, and a central portion arranged substantially in the center of the base body 401. The structure 420, the middle start winning device 431 arranged on the lower side with respect to the central structure 420, and the starting device according to the second special symbol arranged on the lower right side with respect to the central structure 420 (specifically The right start winning device 432), the big winning devices 433 and 434 (specifically, the lower big winning device 433 and the upper big winning device 434) arranged below the right starting winning device 432, and the right start. The starting device 436 related to the normal symbol arranged on the upper side (upstream side) of the winning device 432, and the upper right side of the game board 400 and arranged on the upper side (upstream side) with respect to the upper and lower large winning devices 433 and 434. The winning combination operating device 435 and the general winning award devices 439A and 439B arranged on the left and right sides of the middle starting award device 431 are provided.

The middle starting prize device 431 is a winning device in which two winning devices (specifically, the left middle starting prize device 431A and the right middle starting prize device 431B) are integrated. The left inside starting winning device 431A is a starting device relating to the first special symbol, and the right inside starting winning device 431B is a starting device relating to a second special symbol similar to the right starting winning device 432. That is, the medium starting prize winning device 431 is a winning device having two functions as a starting device relating to the first special symbol and a starting device relating to the second special symbol.

The middle starting prize device 431 includes a distribution unit 620 that distributes the game balls that have entered from the entrance 611 to either the left middle starting prize device 431A or the right middle starting prize device 431B. The distribution unit 620 is configured such that each time a game ball enters from the entrance 611, the winning devices 431A and 431B to which the game ball is distributed are alternately switched. As a result, the game balls that have entered the middle start winning device 431 basically enter alternately to the left middle starting winning device 431A or the right middle starting winning device 431B.

In addition, the middle-start prize device 431 does not cause a part of the game ball that has entered from the entrance 611 to enter any of the middle-start prize devices 431A and 431B, and has a very low probability of being on the right side or the left side of the middle-start prize device 431. It has a function of discharging onto the game board 400 from the opening formed in the. The probability that the game ball that has entered through the entrance 611 is discharged without entering the starting winning devices 431A and 431B is, for example, about 1/100, and preferably about 1/1000.

Further, the game board 400 is provided with a plurality of switches as detection means for detecting passage of a game ball corresponding to the above-mentioned left inside starting winning device 431A and the like (see FIG. 10), corresponding to each switch. The entry of the game ball into the predetermined area can be detected. For example, a middle-start winning prize switch (left-side middle starting winning prize switch 441A) that detects a game ball that has entered the left-side middle starting winning device 431A, a middle-start winning switch (right-side middle) that detects a gaming ball that has entered the right-side starting winning device 431B. Start prize winning switch 441B), right start winning prize switch 442 for detecting a game ball that has entered the right starting prize winning device 432, lower big prize switch 443 that detects a game ball that has entered the lower big prize device 433, upper big prize device 434. Upper prize winning switch 444 that detects the game ball that has entered, winning combination operation switch 445 that detects the game ball that has entered the winning combination operation device 435, start switch 446 that detects the game ball that has entered the starting device 436, and lower prizes A non-specific passage switch 447 that detects a game ball that has entered a non-specific passage (not shown) formed inside the device 433, and a specific passage (not shown) formed inside the lower major winning device 433 The game board 400 is provided with a specific passage switch 448 for detecting the played game balls, and general prize switches 449A, 449B for detecting the game balls that have entered the general prize devices 439A, 439B, respectively.

In addition, the game board 400 is provided with various sensors to prevent fraud (see FIG. 10), and an abnormality occurring in the pachinko machine 100 can be detected. For example, a magnetic sensor 491, a vibration sensor 492, a radio wave sensor 493, etc. are installed on the game board 400.

The central structure 420 and the entrance portion of the game ball of the starting device 436 constitute a ball entrance, and the game ball that has entered each ball entrance is discharged to the game area. Game balls of the respective winning devices, specifically, the left middle starting winning device 431A, the right middle starting winning device 431B, the right starting winning device 432, the lower big winning device 433, the upper big winning device 434, and the general winning devices 439A, 439B. The entrance portion of each constitutes a winning opening, and the game balls that have entered each winning opening are guided through a through hole formed in the base 401 to a collecting and discharging passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401. In addition, the game balls that have not entered each winning device are guided to the collection and discharge passage through the discharge port 401A provided at the most downstream side portion of the game area. The game ball guided to the collecting and discharging passage is discharged from the pachinko machine 100 to a game ball circulating device (not shown) provided in the game hall. When a game ball enters any of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9).

Each winning device may be configured separately from other winning devices, and like the middle starting winning device 431, two or more winning devices (for example, the left middle starting winning device 431A and the right middle starting winning device 431A). The winning device may be configured by a device in which 431B) is integrated. Further, the starting device such as the left middle starting winning device 431A does not necessarily have to be a winning opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when the game balls enter, and the game balls are not returned to the game area without being paid out. It may be used as a ball entrance to be discharged.

Each of the general winning device 439A and the general winning device 439B guides the entered game ball to the back side of the base 401 without changing the probability of the game ball entering them. The middle-start prize device 431 does not change the entrance probability to the entrance 611, but as described above, a part of the game balls that have entered the middle-start prize device 431 is placed on either the left-right middle-start prize device 431A or 431B. Without entering (that is, without being guided to the back side of the base 401), is discharged onto the game board 400 (that is, a game area).

In addition, the right start winning a prize device 432 which relates to the 2nd special design has the mechanism which changes the entry probability of the game sphere inside that. It should be noted that the mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball does not need to be provided only in the starting device according to the second special symbol, and instead of or in addition to it, the starting device according to the first special symbol, a general winning device. 439A, 439B, may be provided in any or a plurality of winning devices such as the middle starting winning device 431 including the starting device according to the first special symbol and the starting device according to the second special symbol. Further, the mechanism for changing the entering probability of the game ball may be constituted by a driving means such as an electrically driven solenoid, and is represented by a mechanism operated by the own weight of the game ball entering a predetermined area. It may be configured by a mechanism that operates mechanically.

The right start winning a prize device 432 which relates to the 2nd special design, the right approach regulation mechanism 452 and the right approach regulation mechanism which change the entry probability of the game sphere inside due to the transition between the entry permission posture and the entry prohibition posture. And a right entry restriction solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10) that drives 452. The right entry regulation mechanism 452 includes two movable pieces driven by the right entry regulation solenoid 462, and when the right entry regulation mechanism 452 is in the entry prohibited posture, the two movable pieces enter the entrance (the winning opening). ) Is narrowed (or closed), the game ball cannot enter the right start winning device 432, but when the right entry regulation mechanism 452 is in the entry allowable posture, the two movable pieces have their tips. The game ball can enter the right start winning device 432 by adopting the arrangement in which the interval between the parts is enlarged. The right approach control mechanism 452, when the winning ball is selected by a lottery (hereinafter also referred to as "ordinary symbol lottery") based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol is detected by the start switch 446, the right approach In response to the drive by the restriction solenoid 462, the approaching attitude is changed a predetermined number of times and a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 7, the lower-large prize winning apparatus 433 has a lower-entry restricting mechanism 453 that restricts the entry of the game ball into the inside of the lower-entry restricting mechanism 453 by a transition between the allowable-entry attitude and the prohibited-entry attitude, and the lower-entry restriction. The lower entry restriction solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the mechanism 453, and the transition between the non-guided posture and the guided posture to move the game ball that has entered the lower big winning device 433 to the non-specific passage or the specific passage. A distribution mechanism (not shown) for distribution and a switching solenoid 465 (see FIG. 10) for changing the attitude of the distribution mechanism to switch the guidance destination of the game ball are provided. When the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 of the lower big prize device 433 is in the entry prohibited posture, the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 closes the entrance (winning hole), so that the game ball cannot enter the lower big prize device 433. When the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 is in the entry allowable posture, the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 opens the entrance to allow the game ball to enter the lower prize winning apparatus 433. In addition, when the game ball that has entered the lower-large prize winning device 433 is guided to a non-specific path when the distribution mechanism is in the non-guided attitude that projects forward, and when the distribution mechanism is in the guided attitude that retracts backward. Will be guided to a specific passage. The specific passage, the non-specific passage, and the distribution mechanism are provided for diversifying the transition of the game state, and when the game ball enters the specific passage, the player is given a favorable game state as a privilege. ..

As shown in FIG. 7, the upper prize winning apparatus 434 has an upper entry regulation mechanism 454 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry permitted posture and the entry prohibited posture, and the upper entry regulation. An upper entry restriction solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the mechanism 454 is provided. When the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 is in the entry prohibited posture, the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 closes the entrance (winning hole) so that the game ball cannot enter the upper special winning apparatus 434, but the upper entry regulation mechanism 454. Is a permitted entry posture, the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 opens the entrance to allow the game ball to enter the upper prize winning apparatus 434.

In addition, as the entry allowable posture and the entry prohibited posture as a mechanism for changing the entering probability of the game ball into the inside of the right entry regulation mechanism 452, etc., each mechanism is configured to form a winning opening (or a ball entrance) of each device. Corresponding to the posture change of the operating member that switches between the special state in which the game ball can enter and the normal state in which the game ball cannot enter, at least one of the position and direction of the operating member differs depending on each posture. I wish I had it. Further, as a mechanism for changing the probability of entry of the game ball such as the right approach regulation mechanism 452, it is not always necessary to set the state in which the game ball cannot enter to the normal state. In the state, the posture of the operating member may be changed to a state in which the game ball is more likely to enter than in the normal state.

The game balls can enter the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 when a lottery for a big hit is won. Specifically, a lottery based on the game ball that has entered the left-side starting start prize device 431A related to the first special symbol being detected by the left-side starting start prize switch 441A (hereinafter also referred to as "first special symbol lottery"). When winning, or based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the right middle starting prize winning device 431B or the right starting winning prize device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right middle starting prize winning switch 441B or the right starting prize winning switch 442. When the lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “second special symbol lottery”) is won, at least one of the lower entry regulation solenoid 463 and the upper entry regulation solenoid 464 is activated. By this operation, at least one of the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 and the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 takes the entry permitted posture for a given number of times for a given number of times. In addition, the distribution mechanism shifts to the guiding posture in response to the operation of the switching solenoid 465 after a predetermined time has passed from the shift of the lower approach regulating mechanism 453 to the approaching allowable posture, and further switches a predetermined time after shifting to the guiding posture. When the solenoid 465 is stopped, it returns to the non-guided posture.

The winning combination operation device 435 is a device for setting conditions necessary for the lower-winning prize device 433 and the upper-winning prize device 434 to start operating. After winning the big hit lottery, on condition that the game ball of the winning combination operation device 435 has passed, either the lower big prize device 433 or the upper big prize device 434 starts to operate. Therefore, when the player wins the big hit, the player can start the special game state at the timing intended by the player. In addition, it is not always necessary that either the lower big winning device 433 or the upper big winning device 434 starts the operation on the condition that the game ball of the winning combination operating device 435 has passed, and instead of that, or In addition, one of the lower-winning prize device 433 and the upper-winning prize device 434 may be configured to start operating after the elapse of a predetermined time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 is integrated with display devices 471 to 473 that display variable displays of symbols and lottery results, and display devices 476 to 478 that display the number of times games are held. A display having a plurality of light emitting units is provided in a lower left portion corresponding to a part of the game board 400. The plurality of light emitting units are preliminarily divided into light emitting areas corresponding to the respective devices, and the state of each device is displayed by the light emitting state.

Specifically, on the game board 400, along with the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol is variably displayed, or the first special symbol is fixedly displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. With the special symbol display device 471 relating to the special symbol and the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol is variably displayed, or the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. Special symbol display device 472 related to the special symbol, special symbol hold display device 476 that displays the number of times the unit game related to the first special symbol is held, and special symbol hold that displays the number of times the unit game related to the second special symbol is held And a display device 477 is provided. The right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol are respectively reserved up to four times. Here, the unit game is a one-time game executed based on one start prize, and a lottery determination based on the lottery determination executed based on the one start prize and a lottery based on the prize determination. It refers to a series of games from the start to the end of variable display until the result is displayed.

When the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, it is assumed that the game ball that has entered the left middle starting prize winning device 431A is detected by the left middle starting winning prize switch 441A (see FIG. 10). Also, the right to the unit game related to the first special symbol is not added. Similarly, when the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the right middle start winning a prize device 431B or the right starting award winning device 432 is the right middle starting prize winning switch 441B (Fig. 10) or the right start winning a prize switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not added.

Each of the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol is composed of a plurality of light emitting units, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). .. Each of the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol is expressed by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting units (a combination of light emitting states (light off, lighting, blinking) including a light emitting color). The special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol are the number of holding times depending on the combination of the light emitting states (light off, lighting, blinking) of the two single-color light emitting units. indicate.

Further, in the game board 400, with the ordinary symbol lottery, the ordinary symbol is variably displayed, and the ordinary symbol is fixedly displayed as the stop symbol according to the lottery result, and the ordinary symbol is related. A normal symbol hold display device 478 for displaying the number of times the right to hold a unit game is held is provided. The right to the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to 4 times. When the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not added even if the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446.

The normal symbol display device 473 is composed of a plurality of light emitting units, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). Usually, the design is expressed by the light emitting patterns of the plurality of light emitting units. Further, the normal symbol holding display device 478 displays the number of holding times by a combination of the light emitting states (light off, lighting, blinking) of the two single color light emitting units.

In addition, in the game board 400, in the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the decorative symbol is variably displayed or the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed so as to overlap the rear of the central structure 420. A decorative pattern display device 479 is provided. The variable display and final display of the decorative symbols are controlled by the sub-control board 940, and are synchronized with the variable display and final display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the main control board 920. In the variable display of the decorative symbol, more complicated and various effects are executed than in the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display and confirmed display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the variable display and confirmed display of the decorative symbol are not always changed at the same timing, or the stopped display is displayed as the confirmed display. It is not necessary to set, and it is also possible to set such that a fixed display is performed at substantially the same timing by starting the fluctuation at substantially the same timing while providing a slight time difference at each timing.

In addition, the game board 400 includes a board surface light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of various structures, and the board surface light emitting device 490 accompanies the progress of the game under the control of the sub control board 940. Various light emission effects and status notification by light emission are executed.

Here, various game states and transitions between the game states will be described. The normal game state (hereinafter also abbreviated as "normal game state") is a state in which the variable display time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol and the normal symbol is long (hereinafter also referred to as "non-time saving state"). Correspond.

If you win the big hit in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game ball enters the specific passage (internal passage of the lower big winning device 433) during the special game state that shifts based on the winning. Depending on whether or not the game state to be transferred after the special game state is different. If the game ball does not enter the specific passage during the special game state, the first special symbol lottery, the state that the variable display time of the second special symbol and the normal symbol is shorter than the non-time saving state (hereinafter, "time saving state" , And the winning state of the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is the same as the normal gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as "low probability state") is a gaming state ( In the following, also referred to as "time saving game state"). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the specific passage during the special game state, it is a time saving state, and the winning probability of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is higher than the normal game state. (Hereinafter, also referred to as “high-probability state”) to a gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as “probability variation gaming state”).

The time saving game state is maintained until the total number of unit games relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), but thereafter, it returns to the normal game state. In addition, the probability variation game state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), but then returns to the normal game state.

The game state and the transition between the game states do not necessarily have to have the above-described configuration, and for example, the high-probability state may be configured to continue until the next big hit, or the above-mentioned game state may be changed depending on other contents. At least one may be configured, a game state different from each of the above-mentioned game states may be further included, and a configuration in which the game states are transitioned by a condition different from the above condition may be adopted.

Next, the operation of the main devices of the game board 400 will be described generally in chronological order. In the main control board 920, a winning random number related to a special symbol (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol), a big hit symbol random number, a stop pattern random number, various variation pattern random numbers are generated, and various game states. In the case where the game ball that has entered the left middle starting prize winning device 431A, which is the starting device relating to the first special symbol, is detected by the left middle starting winning prize switch 441A (see FIG. 10), the first special symbol starts winning. At the time of starting winning of the first special symbol, if the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number, the winning random number, the big hit symbol random number and the stop pattern random number relating to the special symbol are acquired, It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

The unit game by the random number acquired based on the start winning of the first special symbol is not in the special game state and is not in the unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol. If the right of the unit game relating to the symbol is not reserved, it is started immediately after the storage of those random numbers. In addition, even when not in the special game state, when the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol or the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved , After the end of the unit game related to all the special symbols (first special symbol and the second special symbol) that was held before the current prize, the unit game based on the present starting prize is started. When each random number is obtained based on the starting prize of the first special symbol during the special game state, the unit game by the random number is all held before the present starting prize after the special game state. It is started after the unit game relating to the special symbol.

In addition, the unit game by the random number acquired based on the start winning of the second special symbol is not in the special game state and is not in the unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the first special symbol and the If the right of the unit game relating to the two special symbols is not reserved, it is started immediately after the storage of those random numbers. In addition, even when not in the special game state, when the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol or the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved , After the end of the unit game related to all the special symbols (first special symbol and the second special symbol) that was held before the current prize, the unit game based on the present starting prize is started. When each random number is acquired based on the starting winning of the second special symbol during the special gaming state, the unit game by the random number is all held before the starting winning of this time after the special gaming state. It is started after the unit game relating to the special symbol.

That is, the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in the order of the start winning. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to have a configuration in which the unit games relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed in the order of the start winning, and one of the special symbols is executed in preference to the other special symbol. The unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol may be prioritized over the unit game relating to the first special symbol, for example. That is, during the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the starting prize of the first special symbol is obtained, and if the starting prize of the second special symbol is subsequently obtained, the starting prize is obtained later. The unit game based on the starting winning of the second special symbol may be preferentially executed, or the two special symbols may not be alternative but may be simultaneously variable.

If the big hit in the first special symbol lottery based on the start winning of the first special symbol, if the jackpot winning of the first special symbol lottery based on the obtained jackpot symbol random number, the stop symbol ( The type of jackpot pattern) is determined. The type of this stop symbol corresponds to the type of jackpot, for example, the number of rounds (for example, 6 rounds and 16 rounds) corresponding to the number of times the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 or the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 takes the entry allowable posture, or A plurality of types of big hits are set corresponding to the types of game states such as a game state (whether or not to shift to the probability variation game state) after the special game state, and a big hit symbol is set for each type. When the big hit is not won in the first special symbol lottery, a lost symbol different from the big hit symbol is set as the stop symbol.

After the first special symbol lottery, based on the current game state, lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, the value of various fluctuation pattern random numbers, the number of times the right to hold the unit game relating to the first special symbol, the first special The variation display time of the symbol is determined, and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is selected. The variation pattern of the decorative design is roughly classified into a variation pattern in which the reach display is performed before the decorative design corresponding to the stop design (big hit design or lost design) related to the first special design is confirmed and displayed (hereinafter, “reach design”. Also referred to as "variation pattern"), there is a variation pattern in which the reach display is not performed before the decorative design corresponding to the case where the stop design related to the first special design is the lost design is confirmed.

In addition, the "reach display" means that the variable display of the decorative symbol in the unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started to be displayed, and then the left and right display areas of the decorative symbol display device 479 are fixedly displayed. The display result when the remaining decorative design is confirmed and displayed, in which some combinations corresponding to the combination of decorative designs are a big hit, and the variable display continues in the central display area (that is, It is a display that suggests to the player that there is a possibility of a big hit depending on the stop pattern).

The reach display includes a normal reach which is a reach display with a relatively short fluctuation display time (for example, about 25 seconds to about 30 seconds) and a reach display with a fluctuation display time longer than the normal reach (for example, about 60 seconds to about 180 seconds). Super reach and is included. The types of reach display are not limited to two types, normal reach and super reach, and may be three or more types including a special reach which is a reach display having a variable display time longer than that of super reach.

The reach variation pattern is provided for each type of reach display such as normal reach and super reach. Note that only one type of normal reach may be set, or a plurality of types with different variable display times may be set. When a plurality of types of normal reach are set, a reach variation pattern is provided for each type of normal reach. Similarly, only one type of super reach may be set, or a plurality of types with different variable display times may be set. When multiple types of super reach are set, the reach variation pattern is provided for each type of super reach.

After the variable display time of the first special symbol is determined and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is selected, the variable display of the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the decoration in the decorative symbol display device 479. The variable display of symbols (variation effect) is started, and in the first special symbol, the variable display is continued in a fixed pattern over the variable display time, and in the decorative pattern, the variation pattern over the variable display time. The variable display according to is continued. After that, with the passage of the variable display time, the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is fixedly displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is fixedly displayed as the decorative symbol. The finalized display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is continued for at least a predetermined fixed time.

If the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, after the fixed display of the first special symbol, the game state shifts to the special game state. In the special gaming state, the lower entry control mechanism 453 of the lower special prize device 433 and the upper entry control mechanism 454 of the upper special prize device 434 are allowed to enter a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of jackpot. . When a predetermined number (for example, 8) of game balls are detected by the special winning switches 443, 444 in each of the entry allowable postures of the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 and the upper entry regulation mechanism 454, or a predetermined maximum. When the allowed entry time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 or the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 shifts to the entry prohibited posture. Then, after the elapse of the predetermined entry prohibition time, either the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 or the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 returns to the entry permitted posture again. This approach restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of jackpot.

The lower entry regulation mechanism 453 and the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 are configured such that only one of them takes a permitted entry posture during the special game state, and after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed from the start of the special game state (after the opening period) One shifts to the first approach permission posture. In addition, the special game state ends after a predetermined entry prohibition time has elapsed since the last return to the entry prohibition posture and a predetermined standby time has elapsed after that (after the ending period). After the end of the special gaming state, as described above, the state shifts to the time saving gaming state or the probability variation gaming state.

In various game states, the game ball that has entered the right-side middle start winning device 431B or the right-start winning device 432 which is the starting device related to the second special symbol is the right-side middle-start winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10) or the right-start winning switch. When it is detected by 442 (see FIG. 10), the second special symbol is a starting prize. The control of the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control relating to the above-mentioned first special symbol. That is, if the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number at the time of starting winning of the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is acquired, and the unit game based on this starting prize is executed. To be done. Further, the determination of the stop symbol according to the second special symbol lottery, the selection of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol, the execution of the variable display, and the transition control of the gaming state, etc., is executed in the same manner as the control relating to the first special symbol To be done.

In various game states, when the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446, if the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not retained up to the maximum number of times, the winning random number related to the normal symbol is acquired. Then, it is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920. At this time, if it is not during the unit game related to the normal symbol, immediately after the storage, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started. On the other hand, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started after the end of the unit game based on the right of the unit game related to the already-acquired normal symbol.

In the unit game related to the normal symbol, it is determined whether or not it is won based on the value of the winning random number, and when it is won, a predetermined hit symbol is set as a stop symbol. On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is not won, a predetermined lost symbol is set as a stop symbol. After the normal symbol lottery, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the normal symbol display device 473, and in the non-time saving state, the variable display is continued in a fixed pattern for a predetermined variation display time, and in the time saving state. The variable display with a fixed pattern is continued for a predetermined variable display time shorter than the non-time saving state. With the lapse of a predetermined time according to the gaming state, the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is fixedly displayed for a certain period of time.

When the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is a winning symbol, after the normal symbol is confirmed and displayed, the right entry restriction mechanism 452 of the right starting winning device 432 shifts to the entry permission posture at least once. Specifically, when the player wins in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state and special gaming state), the right start winning device 432 allows entry for a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, about 0.1 seconds). In the case of winning in the time saving state (time saving game state and probability variation game state), a predetermined maximum allowable entry time longer than that in the case where the right start winning device 432 is in the non-time saving state (for example, about 4.8 seconds). ) Intermittently (for example, divided into three times) to shift to the entry permission posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right start prize switch 442, the right entry regulation mechanism 452 shifts to the entry prohibited posture without waiting for the maximum entry allowable time to elapse. Also, the operation of the right start winning device 432 in the unit game relating to the present normal symbol is completed even if the number of times of transition to the entry allowable posture has not reached the predetermined number.

Next, a configuration relating to the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described.

In order to receive the second special symbol lottery (hereinafter, this lottery may be referred to as "right special symbol lottery") based on the start winning to the right start winning a prize device 432, first, in the ordinary symbol lottery Of course, the game ball has to enter the right starting prize winning device 432 in the entry permitted state of the right starting prize winning device 432 based on the winning. The winning probability for a normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the short-time gaming state, but the stay time in the entry-permitted state of the right starting winning device 432 based on the winning in the normal gaming state (for example, Since 0.1 second) is set to be extremely short compared to the staying time in the time saving state (for example, about 4.8 seconds), in the normal gaming state, the opportunity per unit time to receive the right special symbol lottery , Per unit time that can receive the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery (hereinafter, these lottery may be referred to as "center side special symbol lottery") based on the start winning to the medium start prize winning apparatus 431 It is much smaller than the opportunity. On the contrary, in the time saving state such as the time saving game state or the probability variation game state, the opportunity per unit time to receive the right special symbol lottery is significantly larger than the opportunity per unit time to receive the central side special symbol lottery. ing.

Therefore, the player wins the big hit in the center side special symbol lottery, and in the subsequent special game state, aims to shift to the probability variation game state by allowing the game ball to enter the specific passage. On the other hand, in the time saving game state and the probability variation game state, the game is aimed at winning the big hit in the right special symbol lottery before each game state ends.

Specifically, in the game board 400, a central structure body 420 is provided in the center of the game area where the game balls flow down, and a game method (left-handed game) in which the game balls flow down mainly from the left side of the central structure body 420. Method) and a game method (right-handed game method) in which a game ball flows down mainly from the right side of the central structure 420 can be selectively performed. The player plays the game by the left-handed gaming method in the normal gaming state, and plays the game by the right-handed gaming method in the time saving gaming state and the probability variation gaming state. Further, since the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 are arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, the game is performed by the right-handed gaming method even in the special gaming state.

Next, the rear block 104 will be described. 8 and 9 are a rear perspective view and a rear view showing the pachinko machine 100, respectively. Note that the outer frame 101 is omitted in FIG. 8 for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the rear block 104 is configured by attaching other members and devices to the base body 501. The base block 501 and the intermediate block 103 are connected by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137, so that the rear block 104 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the intermediate block 103.

The rear block 104 continuously rectifies the game balls (for example, in one row) on the downstream side of the game ball tank 510 with the game ball tank 510 as a ball storage unit that stores the game balls and aligns them in one stage. A tank rail 520 as a ball alignment section, a case rail 530 as a ball guide section for guiding a game ball flowing from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the tank rail 520, and a payout of the game ball on the downstream side of the case rail 530. A payout device 540 that rents out game balls, and a guidance as a ball guide portion that guides the game balls flowing out from the payout device 540 on the downstream side of the payout device 540 to a guide passage (not shown) formed in the base 501. A member 550, a payout control device 560 that controls the payout of the game balls and the lending of the game balls by the payout device 540, and a power supply that converts external power into power of a predetermined voltage required by various devices and outputs the power. A power supply/launch control device 570 having a function as a means and a function as a launch control means for controlling the launch of a game ball based on a launch operation to the launch operating device 250 in cooperation with the main control board 920, and a payout control device 560. Further, it is provided with a relay device 950 which relays a signal between the game ball lending device 290 (see FIG. 1) and a card unit (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 100.

The base body 501 is integrally molded of resin (for example, ABS resin), and includes a base portion 502 corresponding to the front side portion and a protective cover portion 503 located behind the base portion 502. The base portion 502 has an upper portion formed in a substantially frame shape along the outer shape of the rear block 104, and a lower portion formed in a substantially flat shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction, to which other devices are attached. It has a function as an attached part.

The protective cover portion 503 is formed in a substantially plate shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. Further, the protective cover portion 503 does not cover the entire back surface of the intermediate block 103, but covers a part of the back surface of the intermediate block 103, such as a part of the main controller 370, which needs frequent inspection and confirmation, to the back surface of the pachinko machine 100. The size is set so as to form a window portion for exposure. On the back surface of the protective cover portion 503, a large number of vent holes 503A having a function of improving the heat radiation performance of the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390 are formed.

The game ball tank 510 is a horizontally long box-shaped container that opens upward, and one end side in the longitudinal direction thereof is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from a ball circulating device (not shown) of the island facility. An opening (not shown) is formed at one end side in the longitudinal direction different from the side where the game balls are supplied in the game ball tank 510. The bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 gently inclines in the longitudinal direction, and the game ball supplied to the game ball tank 510 moves to the opening side by its own weight. Further, the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is inclined in a direction (front-back direction) orthogonal to the longitudinal direction as compared with the longitudinal direction, and guides the game ball to the side where the opening is provided (for example, the front side). .. Further, on the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510, a metal antistatic plate (not shown) is attached so as to overlap therewith, and the antistatic plate is connected to the ground potential so that the inside of the game ball tank 510 and The static electricity of the game ball on the downstream side is removed.

The tank rail 520 is attached to the side where the opening of the game ball tank 510 is formed, and the game ball flows through the opening of the game ball tank 510. The tank rail 520 has a passage forming member 521 that forms a passage of a substantially gutter-shaped game ball having a width that allows the game balls to pass in a line, and the height gradually increases as the upper surface of the passage formed by the passage forming member 521. Is provided with a rectifying member 522 that has a top surface portion that becomes lower and gradually rectifies the game balls flowing down the passage from a vertically overlapping height to a one-step height. The passage formed by the tank rail 520 is gently inclined toward the downstream side and guides the game ball to the opposite side of the game ball tank 510.

The case rail 530 is formed vertically so as to be continuous with the lower side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball from the tank rail 520 flows in. On the case rail 530, the game balls are curved left and right so as not to flow vigorously, and are continuous downward. In addition, a ball break detection unit 539 for detecting a ball break is provided in the middle of the ball passage in the case rail 530. The storage ball switch 591 (see FIG. 10) is built in the out-of-ball detection unit 539, and the storage ball switch 591 causes a ball clogging or the like on the case rail 530 or on the upstream side of the storage ball switch 591 to cause a game ball in the case rail 530. Detects an out-of-ball condition that is not normally replenished.

The payout device 540 includes a delivery mechanism for delivering the game balls, a payout motor 542 (see FIG. 10) as a drive unit for driving the delivery mechanism, and a payout counting switch 592 (see FIG. 10). In response to the operation of the payout motor 542 based on the control by the payout control device 560, the game balls stored in the ball passage are discharged to the downstream side. Passage of the released game balls through the ball passage is detected by the payout counting switch 592, whereby the payout control device 560 (payout control board 930) counts the number of payouts of the game balls.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the payout control device 560 and the power supply/launch control device 570 are mounted so as to overlap with the lower rear surface of the base portion 502 of the base body 501 so as to be positioned on the lower rear surface side of the rear block 104. Has been. The rear block 104 including the payout control device 560 and the power supply/launch control device 570 can be continuously used even when the game board 400 is replaced with another game board due to a model change or the like.

The payout control device 560 includes a payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10) and a board case for accommodating the payout control board 930. It is housed inside a substrate case that is sealed so that it cannot be opened.

The power supply/launch control device 570 includes a power supply/launch control board 900 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that houses the power/launch control board 900. The power/launch control board 900 is similar to the main control board 920. And is housed inside a sealed substrate case.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko machine 100 includes control circuit devices such as a power supply/launch control board 900, a power supply monitoring board 910, a main control board 920, a payout control board 930, and a sub control board 940. Note that, in FIG. 10, a relay circuit device that only relays various signals is omitted. Below, these major control circuit devices will be individually described in detail.

The power supply/launch control board 900 includes a power supply unit 901 that supplies electric power of a predetermined voltage to each unit of the pachinko machine 100 via a power supply path (broken line in the drawing), and a launching device according to the operation of the launching operation device 250. A firing control unit 902 that controls the drive of 330 and a signal relay unit 903 that relays the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 and the ball overflow signal from the ball overflow switch 249 are provided.

The power supply unit 901 takes in external electric power (for example, 24 V AC) supplied from the outside and converts it into internal electric power (for example, 24 V DC), and also generates various electric power from the internal electric power. The electric power generated by the power supply unit 901 is electric power of a drive voltage (for example, DC 12 V) for driving devices such as various solenoids and various motors, drives various switches, and executes control processing. It also includes power for a control voltage (for example, DC 5 V) for controlling the voltage, power for a backup voltage for holding the contents of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the like.

The power supply unit 901 supplies various powers generated from the internal power to the power supply monitoring board 910, the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, the sub control board 940, and the like. Specifically, the power monitoring board 910 is supplied with the power of the internal power, the driving voltage, the control voltage, and the backup voltage. Electric power of a driving voltage, a control voltage, and a backup voltage is supplied to the main control board 920, and these electric powers are supplied via the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Electric power of a drive voltage and a control voltage is supplied to the payout control board 930. Electric power of a driving voltage and a control voltage is supplied to the sub control board 940. The firing control unit 902 and the signal relay unit 903 are supplied with the drive voltage and the control voltage.

A power switch 909 is connected to the power supply unit 901, and when the power switch 909 is in the off state, the acquisition of external power is stopped. The pachinko machine may be turned off by turning off the power switch 909 or by removing a power plug (not shown) connected to the power supply unit 901 via the power switch 909 from an external power supply outlet (not shown). A state in which the supply of electric power to the inside of the machine 100 is stopped or a state in which the supply of external electric power itself is stopped is collectively referred to as a “power failure state”.

The power supply unit 901 is configured to normally output the power of the control voltage for a predetermined period even after the transition to the power failure state. As a result, the main control board 920 can save the state and end the control so as to return to the current control state.

The firing control unit 902 cooperates with the main control board 920 to control the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 of the firing device 330. The ball feeding solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 are permitted to operate when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the fact that the player is touching the firing handle 252 (see FIG. 1) is detected based on the contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 254, and the firing stop switch 255 for stopping the firing is provided. The firing control unit 902 outputs a firing permission signal in the ON state to the main control board 920 on condition that the firing control unit 902 is not operated. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a firing solenoid control signal and a ball feeding solenoid control signal to the firing control unit 902 based on the firing permission signal and the firing abnormality signal. The firing control unit 902 operates the ball feeding solenoid 332 based on the ball feeding control signal in the ON state, and operates the firing solenoid 334 based on the reception of the firing solenoid control signal in the ON state and the resistance value of the variable resistor 253. Let As a result, the game balls are sequentially launched from the launching device 330 with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 (the amount of rotational operation of the launch handle 252).

The signal relay unit 903 outputs an initialization signal in the ON state to the main control board 920 when the initialization switch 907 is pressed. In the main control board 920, the storage information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 is initialized in response to the reception of the initialization signal in the ON state. The initialization switch 907 does not necessarily have to be configured to output a signal to the main control board 920 via the signal relay unit 903. For example, the initialization switch 907 is directly mounted on the main control board 920. The initialization switch 907 may be housed in the substrate case 371, and thereby it is possible to suppress an illegal signal input aiming at a section where a signal is transmitted.

Further, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state ball overflow signal to the main control board 920 when the ball overflow switch 249 detects a game ball. In the main control board 920, the low-speed payout signal is output to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the ON state, and the payout control board 930 that has received the low-speed payout signal determines the rotation speed of the payout motor 542 (the payout speed). The payout speed of the game balls from the device 540 is reduced. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a high speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the off state, and the payout control board 930 that has received the high speed payout signal determines the rotation speed of the payout motor 542. Speed up.

The power supply monitoring board 910 performs power supply and various signal transmission between the power supply/launch control board 900 and the main control board 920, and a power supply monitoring section 911 that monitors the power supply state from the power supply/launch control board 900. And a signal relay unit 912 for relaying. The power supply monitoring unit 911 also outputs a power failure signal to the main control board 920 in response to the transition to the power failure state, and monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 901. When the voltage is less than 22 V for a predetermined time, it is determined that the power is out, and an on-state power outage signal is output to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 recognizes the shift to the power failure state by receiving the power failure signal in the ON state.

The main control board 920 comprehensively controls the operation of the pachinko machine 100. An MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer is mounted on the main control board 920. The MPU includes a CPU (not shown) as an arithmetic processing unit, a ROM (not shown) that stores various control programs and fixed data executed by the CPU, and various data temporarily when the control program is executed. RAM (not shown) for storing the like. In addition, various circuits such as a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission/reception circuit (not shown) are mounted on the main control board 920. There is. The RAM of the main control board 920 is configured so that internal data can be maintained (backed up) by the power supply of the backup voltage from the power supply/launch control board 900 even after the transition to the power failure state.

The payout control board 930 controls the payout operation of the game balls by the payout apparatus 540 according to the instruction from the main control board 920 and the payout operation of the game balls by the payout apparatus 540 according to the operation of the game ball lending apparatus 290. The payout control board 930, like the main control board 920, includes an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer including a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown) and a RAM (not shown), and a timer circuit. Various circuits such as a counter circuit (not shown), a clock circuit (not shown), a signal transmitting/receiving circuit (not shown), etc. are mounted.

The payout control board 930 is equipped with an input/output port as a connecting means for connecting to another device so that information can be communicated. For example, bidirectional information input/output communication is possible with the main control board 920 and the relay device 950. Is connected to the open/close detection switches 108 and 109, the storage ball switch 591, and the payout counting switch 592 so that only one-way information input communication is possible, and the payout motor 542 is only one-way information. Only output communication is possible. Like the RAM of the main control board 920, the RAM of the payout control board 930 may have a backup function capable of maintaining internal data for a certain period in a power failure state, or the RAM of the main control board 920. Unlike the above, the internal data may not be maintained in the power failure state.

The sub control board 940 controls operations of various effect devices, various light emitting devices, various audio devices, and the like, based on an instruction from the main control board 920. The sub control board 940 is equipped with an input/output port as a connecting means for connecting to another device so that information can be communicated. For example, the sub control board 940 is connected to the main control board 920 so that only one-way information input communication is possible. The input operation device 260 is bidirectionally connected so that information can be communicated therewith, and the decorative pattern display device 479 and the like are connected so that only one-way information output communication is possible.

<Various control processes>
Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 will be described. The control processing in the main control board 920 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when a power failure state is restored and a main processing that is interrupted periodically (in this embodiment, at a period of 2 ms (milliseconds)). The timer interrupt processing is performed.

First, the main processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. 11. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main processing” in FIG. 11).

In the main processing of the main control board 920, first, a series of control start processing (program start processing S1001 to random number initial setting processing S1019) for starting up the main control board 920 and initializing various information is executed only once. , After that, the interrupt prohibition process S1020 for prohibiting the interrupt, and the winning random number initial value counter (partial area of RAM) and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter (partial area of RAM) related to the special symbol and the normal symbol A random number initial value updating process S1021 for updating the value of the winning random number initial value counter (a partial area of the RAM), and a first fluctuation type counter for determining a fluctuation display time (fluctuation time), a fluctuation pattern, etc. The fluctuation counter updating process S1022 for updating the value of the fourth fluctuation type counter (a part of the RAM) and the interrupt permission process S1023 for permitting the interrupt are repeatedly executed. If a timer interrupt request occurs before the interrupt permission process S1023, the timer interrupt process is executed immediately after the interrupt permission process S1023.

In a series of control start processing, a program start processing S1001 that sets an initial value in a stack pointer (a partial area of RAM) that controls the execution of a program, an interrupt mode setting processing S1002 that sets an interrupt mode, and a payout control board. A startup standby process S1003 of waiting for a predetermined time until the 930, the sub control board 940, and the like are booted is executed.

After the startup standby process S1003, a determination process S1004 of the output state of the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 of the power/launch control board 900, a determination process S1005 of the value of the power failure information (a part of the RAM), and a saving Information storage state determination processing S1007 is performed, and based on these determination results, it is determined whether or not to delete the stored information in the RAM. Here, the saved information is information necessary for returning to the game state before the power failure, and corresponds to a partial area of the RAM that was updated according to the progress of the game before the power failure, and is executed. The value of the counter concerning the unit game in the inside, the value of the counter stored by the start winning, and the like are exemplified.

The storage state of the stored information is determined as follows. First, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated (checksum calculation processing S1006), and the current checksum value and a power failure monitoring processing S1202 accompanying the transition to the previous power failure state (see FIG. 12). ), it is determined whether the exclusive OR of the checksum value and the RAM determination value, which is the two's complement of the checksum value, is “0” (determination process S1007). It is determined whether or not the checksum value at the time of transition to the power failure state is the same.

When the initialization signal is in the ON state (S1004: Y), when the power failure information is not the predetermined power failure value indicating that the saving information has been saved and completed at the time of transition to the power failure state (S1005: N), or saving When the information is not normally retained (S1007:N), the RAM clear processing S1008 of erasing the stored information in the RAM is executed. After it is determined that the stored information is normally held (S1007: Y) or after the RAM clearing process S1008 is executed, a hardware for initializing various devices connected to the main control board 920. Wear initialization processing S1009 is executed.

After the hardware initialization process S1009, a process S1010 of determining whether or not the power failure information is a power failure value is executed. When the power failure information is the power failure value (S1010:N), the RAM recovery setting processing S1011 for initializing various information including the recovery of the retained information and the recovery command indicating the completion of the setting are set (recovery command Output process S1012). By the restoration of the held information in the RAM restoration setting process S1011, the control state of the main control board 920 is restored to the control state immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state.

On the other hand, when the power failure information is not the power failure value (S1010:Y), various information is initialized without the restoration of the holding information (RAM initialization processing S1013), and an initialization command indicating the completion of the setting is output. (Initialization command output process S1014).

In the RAM restoration setting process S1011 and the RAM initial setting process S1013, the power failure information is set to a predetermined energization value different from the power failure value, and various error statuses such as fraud detection error immediately before the transition to the previous power failure status. Even if occurs, all of those error states are canceled. Further, either the return command or the initialization command is output from the main control board 920 to both the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940, and the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940 which have received the return command or the initialization command. In each of the above, a predetermined initialization process is executed.

After the initial setting (determination process S1004 to initialization command output process S1014) of the RAM according to the situation at the time of startup, if the condition device was operating at the time of the transition to the previous power failure state, the special game state is set. Preparations for returning are made (special game state return preparation processing S1015). Specifically, in the special game state return preparation process S1015, the operation states of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are determined, and the process corresponding to the game situation during the power failure state is executed in the sub control board 940. It

After the special game state return preparation process S1015, it is determined whether the time saving state flag is set or not by determining whether it is the time saving state or the non-time saving state (determination process S1016), which is the time saving state. In this case (S1016:Y), the time saving command is output (time saving command output processing S1017). On the other hand, in the non-time saving state (S1016:N), the non-time saving command is output (non-time saving command output process S1018). After that, the value of the winning random number counter (partial area of the RAM) relating to the special symbol is initialized (random number initial setting process S1019).

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process (abbreviated as “main control interrupt process” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920.

In the timer interrupt process of the main control board 920, first, an interrupt start process S1201 for starting a timer interrupt is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the interrupt control register. As a result, interrupts other than this timer interrupt are prohibited. After that, a power failure monitoring process S1202 to external information output process S1221 related to substantial control such as game progress control of the pachinko machine 100 and monitoring of various sensors is sequentially executed. However, when the game progress is stopped based on detection of various frauds (S1207: Y), the control signal output process S1208 to the external information output process S1221 are not executed. Finally, the interrupt permission process S1222 for permitting the next timer interrupt is executed, and the current timer interrupt process ends. In the following, various types of main processing will be individually described.

In the power outage monitoring process S1202, the value of the power outage information (a part of the RAM) is updated based on the output state of the power outage signal output from the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Specifically, the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, and when the ON state is detected for all three times, it is determined to be the power failure state. If it is not determined in this determination that there is a power outage, the power outage information is maintained at the energization value.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the power outage monitoring process S1202 that there is a power outage, the following process is executed. First, the value of the power failure information is changed from the energization value set in the RAM restoration setting process S1011 or the RAM initial setting process S1013 (see FIG. 11) to a predetermined power failure value. Also, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated, and the two's complement of the checksum value is set as the RAM determination value. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 enters an infinite loop that does not perform substantial control such as progress of games and monitoring of various sensors, and the state of the RAM after the RAM determination value is set is held based on the backup power. It Since the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, each processing of the timer interrupt is executed twice after the reception of the power failure signal is detected for the first time.

In the random number updating process S1203, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the ordinary symbol are updated. Specifically, if the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is a value different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), it is changed to a value larger than the current value by "1", and the special symbol is changed. If the value of the winning random number counter related to is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). However, if the changed value is the same as the circulation initial value for the winning random number counter for the special symbol, the value of the winning random number counter for the special symbol is the same as the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol. Value, and the circulation initial value is also set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter.

The big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are also updated in the same manner as the winning random number counter related to the special symbol. However, as the update range defined by the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value of each counter, a unique value is set for each counter, and multiple counters are updated asynchronously. Refers to an initial value counter unique to each counter. For example, the winning random number counter relating to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter relating to the special symbol have the same range of values, and the jackpot symbol random number counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter have the same range of values, The winning random number counter related to the normal symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the ordinary symbol have the same value range.

In the random number initial value updating process S1204, the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number initial value counter, and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, if the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is a value different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), it is changed to a value larger than the current value by "1", and the special value is changed. When the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the symbol is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). Also for the symbol random number initial value counter related to special symbols and the winning random number initial value counter related to normal symbols, except that the specified maximum value and specified minimum value are unique values to those counters, the winning random number initial related to the special symbol It is updated as in the case of the value counter.

In the variation counter updating process S1205, the values of the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter for determining the variation display time (variation time), the variation pattern, and the like are updated. Specifically, when the value of the first fluctuation type counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "187"), it is changed to a value that is "1" larger than the current value, and the first fluctuation When the value of the type counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). The second variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter are also updated in the same manner as the first variation type counter except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are values unique to those counters. To be done.

In addition, the winning random number counter, the big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selecting counter and the variation type counters related to the special symbol and the ordinary symbol do not necessarily have to have the above configuration, and at least a part of the above counter is configured as another configuration. For example, the initial value counter may not be used to update from a constant initial value, or the random number generating IC may be used to refer to the value as needed without using a program. .

In the game stop determination process S1206, when the fraud detection information is the fraud detection value, the game stop value is updated and various information for stopping the progress of the game is set. On the other hand, if the injustice detection information is not the injustice detection value or is already the game stop value, each process for stopping the game progress is not executed and the game stop determination process S1206 ends. The fraud detection information is set to the fraud detection value when various fraud occurrences are detected in the fraud detection processing S1211. Further, in the determination processing S1207, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped depending on whether or not the fraud detection information is the game stop value.

In the control signal output process S1208, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol, and the ordinary symbol Normally, signals for controlling various notification devices such as the symbol display device 473 are output. Further, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, various actuators such as a ball feed solenoid 332, a launch solenoid 334, a right approach regulation solenoid 462, a lower approach regulation solenoid 463, an upper approach regulation solenoid 464, and a switching solenoid 465 are operated. A control signal is output.

In the switch reading process S1209, the medium start prize winning switches 441A and 441B, the right start prize winning switch 442, the lower prize winning switch 443, the upper prize winning switch 444, the winning combination operation switch 445, the starting switch 446, the non-specific passage switch 447, the specifying The signal states from the passage switch 448 and the general winning switches 449A and 449B are read, and changes in the detection state of the game ball by various switches are detected.

Specifically, in the switch reading process S1209, the signal states from the various switches are read into the input buffer (a part of the RAM) twice at predetermined time intervals, and the signals from the various switches are read. For each of the following, a signal state read for the first time (hereinafter abbreviated as “first signal state”) and a signal state read for the second time (hereinafter abbreviated as “second signal state”) A change in the detection state of various switches is detected based on the detection state detected by the previous timer interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as “previous detection state”). Then, for each switch, when the previous detection state is the off state, when the first signal state is the on state and the second signal state is the on state, it is determined that the switch is the on state transition. Then, a detection flag (a partial area of the RAM) corresponding to the type of switch is set. As described in the power failure monitoring process S1202, even if the power supply is stopped, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice, so that the ON state of various switches is immediately after the power supply is stopped. Even when it is started, the detection flags of various switches can be set accurately.

In the timer update process S1210, various timers (predetermined area of RAM) used for variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, control of each game state, and fraud monitoring are updated.

In the fraud detection process S1211, a fraudulent act such as forcibly entering a game ball into various prize winning devices or forcing various prize winning devices to operate is detected. Specifically, the right start winning device 432, the lower big winning device 433, and the upper big winning device 434 are forcibly moved to the allowable entry postures, and the game balls are guided to a specific passage of the lower big winning device 433 by vibration. , Induction of forced malfunction of the right start winning device 432, the lower big winning device 433, and the upper big winning device 434 by radio waves, induction of game balls to various winning devices by magnetic attraction, left middle starting winning device 431A, Occurrence of a situation in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act such as guiding a game ball to the right middle start prize device 431B, the right start prize device 432, the lower big prize device 433, and the upper big prize device 434 at an abnormal timing is performed. To detect.

In the winning detection response processing S1212, control based on the detection of the game ball by the various switches provided on the game board 400 is executed. Specifically, in the case where the medium start prize switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the left middle start prize switch 441A (see FIG. 10) and the right middle start prize switch 441B (see FIG. 10). The middle start winning counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) and the first payout counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) are updated. Further, when the right start prize switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the right start prize switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the first payout counter is updated. Further, when the lower big prize switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the lower big prize switch 443 (see FIG. 10), or when the game ball is detected by the upper big prize switch 444 (see FIG. 10). When the upper prize winning switch detection flag is set based on this, the special winning counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) and the second payout counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) are updated.

In the firing control process S1213, the launch-related information for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launching device 330 is updated. Specifically, the operation flag of the ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 and the operation flag of the firing solenoid 334 that drives the firing mechanism 333 are updated.

In the input signal monitoring process S1214, based on the output state of the signal from the opening/closing detection switch 108 (see FIG. 10) via the payout control board 930, an intermediate block is output to the outer frame 101 (see FIGS. 1 and 2). It is detected whether 103 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is closed. Further, based on the output state of the signal from the opening/closing detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10), the intermediate block 103 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is compared with the front block 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). It is detected whether (see 3) is closed.

In the payout state monitoring process S1215, the information indicating the payout control state output from the payout control board 930 is monitored, and various payout state commands corresponding to the payout control state are set as necessary. The sub-control board 940 that has received the payout state command causes the decorative symbol display device 479, the upper left acoustic device 281, the upper right acoustic device 282, and the like to perform notification according to the type of the payout state command.

In the payout signal output process S1216, various prize ball commands are set based on the values of the first payout counter and the second payout counter as necessary, and output to the payout control board 930. The first payout counter and the second payout counter are updated according to the setting of the prize ball command. For example, the first payout counter is incremented by 1 each time a game ball corresponding to one winning is detected, and is decremented by 1 each time a prize ball command based on the winning is set. In the payout control board 930, a prize is given to the main control board 920 every time the control for paying out the number of game balls (for example, three) corresponding to the winning is executed (specifically, shortly before the payout is completed). When the ball command is requested and the payout of the prize balls is continued, a further prize ball command is output from the main control board 920. The second payout counter is a counter that is updated corresponding to a prize (for example, 13 pieces) having a different number of prize balls from the first payout counter, and a prize ball command based on the value of the second payout counter is paid out. When 930 is received, the payout control board 930 executes control for paying out a number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command.

In the special symbol-related processing S1217, the suspension control of the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the control of the unit game relating to the first special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the reservation control of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol reservation display device 476 related to the first special symbol is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game according to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the lower big winning device The operation control of 433 and the special winning apparatus 434 is further executed.

Further, in the unit game relating to the first special symbol, each information for displaying the variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 is selected. For example, in the unit game relating to the first special symbol, the variation pattern of the variable display of the decorative symbol executed by the decorative symbol display device 479 is the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, and the various variation pattern random numbers. The value is selected based on the number of times the right to hold the unit game relating to the first special symbol is held.

Further, in the special symbol related processing S1217, the suspension control of the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol and the control of the unit game relating to the second special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the reservation control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol reservation display device 477 related to the second special symbol is executed. In addition, in the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the lower major winning device. Operation control of 433 and the special winning device 434 is further executed.

Further, in the unit game relating to the second special symbol, each information for displaying the variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 is selected. For example, in the unit game related to the second special symbol, the variation pattern of the variable display of the decorative symbol executed by the decorative symbol display device 479 is the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, and the various variation pattern random numbers. The value is selected based on the number of times the right to hold the unit game relating to the second special symbol is held.

In the normal symbol related processing S1218, the control of holding the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol and the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game relating to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol hold display device 478 is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol display device 473 related to the normal symbol is executed, and when the normal symbol lottery is won, the operation control of the right start winning device 432 is further executed. ..

In the display control process S1219, the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol in the special symbol related process S1217, the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol, the special symbol holding display device 476 relating to the first special symbol, and Based on various information updated to control the operation of the special symbol hold display device 477 or the like related to the second special symbol, output data for specifically operating those devices is combined. The combined output data is output to each device in the control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt.

Further, in the display control process S1219, various commands corresponding to the respective information for displaying the variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbol selected in the special symbol related process S1217 on the decorative symbol display device 479 are set. For example, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol related process S1217 is set. The set command is output to the sub control board 940 in the control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt. The sub control board 940 controls the decorative symbol display device 479 based on the command received from the main control board 920.

In the motor control process S1220, operation control of various motors is executed. In the external information output process S1221, output data to be output to an external device such as a data display device (not shown) or a management device (not shown) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 100 is set.

<Suggestive production that appears in variable display of decorative patterns>
In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 479 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 471 or the special symbol display device 472 is a predetermined reach display (for example, In the case of a mode including a super reach, it is configured such that a predetermined suggestive effect can be made to appear by pressing the pressing operation device 261.

With reference to FIG. 13 to FIG. 16, a description will be given of suggestive effects that appear in variable display of decorative symbols. FIG. 13 is a time chart for explaining the time when the suggestive effect appears in the variable display of the decorative symbol. Note that, in FIG. 13, as an example of the variable display in which the suggestive effect can appear, a variable display including a super reach having a variable display time of 90 seconds is illustrated. 14 to 16 are schematic diagrams showing screen transitions of the decorative symbol display device 479 along the time chart of FIG. 13, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 13, at time ts, when the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the decorative symbol display device 479, each symbol constituting the decorative symbol. Will start scrolling. The display data forming the variable display of the decorative pattern is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940 in association with each fluctuation pattern command that the sub control board 940 can receive from the main control board 920. Has been done.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the decorative design includes a design in the left column (hereinafter also referred to as “left design”), a design in the right column (hereinafter also referred to as “right design”), and a left design. It is composed of three rows of symbols including the symbol between the right symbol and the symbol (hereinafter also referred to as "middle symbol"). In the example shown in FIG. 13, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are assumed to have started the variable display of the decorative symbols that were stopped at “6”, “5”, and “3”, respectively.

A predetermined time period (for example, 4 seconds later) after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started at time ts, the first operable period is started (time t1). The first operable period started at time t1 ends after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the start (time t2). The first operable period from the time t1 to the time t2 is a period in which the player can perform the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261. Note that the time t2 does not necessarily have to be a predetermined time after the start of the first operable period, and the first operable period ends at the timing when the player performs a pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261. The display corresponding to the operation may be performed, and even in the other operable periods described below, each operable period is ended at the timing when the pushing operation is performed, and the display of the effect corresponding to the operation is performed. You may start.

When the first operable period starts at time t1, as shown in FIG. 14, the decorative symbol display device 479 that variably displays the decorative symbol indicates that the pushing operation with respect to the pressing operation device 261 is possible. An image 601 reminiscent of FIG. 6 and a character 602 “Enemy has come!” are displayed as a comment on the production that prompts a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261.

Each display data related to the display of the image 601 and the characters 602 is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940, and the start time (that is, the time of day) of the first operable period is controlled by the control of the sub control board 940. It is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 at t1) and is erased at the end time of the period (that is, time t2).

When the player does not perform the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period, as illustrated in FIG. 13, after a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started at time ts. At the timing of (after), of the decorative symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner, the left symbol stops (time t4)
On the other hand, when the player performs a pushing operation on the press operation device 261 in the first operable period, when the first operable period ends at time t2, the first special effect, which is one of the suggested effects, is started. .. As shown in FIG. 14, three types of pattern 1A, pattern 1B, and pattern 1C are prepared as the first special effect, and the first of the one pattern selected from these three types is prepared. The special effect is started at time t2 by the control of the sub control board 940.

The pattern 1A is a pattern including a character 611A such as "The army has arrived!" and a red frame (red frame) 612A surrounding the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479. The pattern 1B is a pattern including a character 611B such as "A thief has come!" and a yellow frame (yellow frame) 612B surrounding the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479. The pattern 1C is a pattern including a character 611C such as "A cat has come!" and a blue frame (blue frame) 612C surrounding the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479. Each display data relating to the display of the pattern 1A, the pattern 1B, and the pattern 1C is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940. The combination of the character and the frame need not be set to be the same each time, and the character and the frame may be selected by lottery.

The lottery for selecting which of the pattern 1A, the pattern 1B, and the pattern 1C is selected as the first special effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “first special effect lottery”) is performed by the control by the sub-control board 940. Specifically, in the first special effect lottery, the sub control board 940 acquires the value of the first special effect selection counter (a partial area of the RAM) provided on the sub control board 940, and then the first special effect concerned. It is performed by referring to the first special effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940 for the value of the selection counter.

The first special effect selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 ms (millisecond)), and at the update timing, the value of the counter is a value different from the specified maximum value (for example, "99"). In this case, the value is changed to a value larger than the current value by “1”, and when the value of the counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”).

When the sub control board 940 selects the pattern of the first special effect by the first special effect lottery, the sub control board 940 receives from the main control board 920 a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation display of the decorative pattern that is currently being executed. The timing may be the timing when the first operable period starts or ends.

As the first special effect selection table, the first hit time table that is referred to when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being executed, , The first out-of-miss table referred to when the jackpot is not won in the lottery is prepared.

The selection probability of each pattern (pattern 1A, pattern 1B, pattern 1C) in the first hit time table and the first out-of-time table is the winning probability in each special symbol lottery, and the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being executed (ie, The variable display including the reach display) is set in consideration of the probability of being selected when the special symbol lottery does not result in a big hit.

Specifically, when the pattern 1A appears, after the decorative pattern that is currently being variably displayed is confirmed (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that corresponds to the decorative symbol that is currently being variably displayed is It is set to have the highest possibility of transitioning to the special gaming state (after being confirmed and displayed), and when pattern 1C appears, transition to the special gaming state after the decorative pattern that is currently displayed in a variable manner is confirmed and displayed. Is set to be the least likely.

Therefore, when the first special effect appears, the player recognizes the degree of expectation for the special game state by looking at the characters included in each pattern. In other words, when the player sees the character 611A "The army of XX has come!" included in the pattern 1A, the player has the highest expectation for the special game state, while the "cat" included in the pattern 1C is included. When the character 611C that says "I came!" is seen, the degree of expectation for the special game state is the lowest.

Similarly, when the first special effect appears, the player recognizes the degree of expectation for the special game state by looking at the frame portion of each pattern. That is, when the player sees the pattern 1A in which the frame 612A is red, the player has the highest expectation for the special game state, while the player sees the pattern 1C in which the frame 612C is blue, the special game state. Have the lowest expectations for.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the first hit time table, the selection probability of the pattern 1A is the highest (for example, 60%), the selection probability of the pattern 1B is the second highest (for example, 20%), and the pattern 1C. Is set to be the lowest (for example, 10%). On the other hand, in the first out-of-range table, the selection probability of pattern 1C is the highest (for example, 60%), the selection probability of pattern 1B is the second highest (for example, 20%), and the selection probability of pattern 1A is the lowest. (For example, 10%) is set.

As shown in FIG. 13, the first special effect ends after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the start of the first special effect (time t3). The first special effect (Pattern 1A, Pattern 1B, Pattern 1C) is displayed on a layer in front of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is currently being executed. Therefore, when the first special effect ends at time t3, the execution is performed. The variable display of the decorative pattern inside appears again. Then, at time t4, the left symbol stops.

After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the left symbol stops at time t4, the second operable period starts (low time t5) during the low-speed fluctuation (scroll) before the right symbol stops. The first operable period started at time t5 ends after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the start (time t6). The second operable period from the time t5 to the time t6 is a period in which the player can perform the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261.

When the second operable period starts at time t5, as shown in FIG. 15, an image 603 that reminds the player that the pressing operation device 261 can be pushed is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. Is displayed. The display data relating to the display of the image 603 is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940, and the decoration is performed at the start time (that is, time t5) of the second operable period by the control of the sub control board 940. It is displayed on the symbol display device 479 and is erased at the end time of the period (that is, time t6).

When the player does not perform the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the second operable period, as shown in FIG. 13, after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds, 30 seconds from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol at the time ts). At the timing of (after), the right symbol that scrolls slowly (slowly changes) is stopped so that the reach display is displayed (time t7). For example, in the configuration where the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are fixedly stopped with the same symbol when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. 15, the left symbol is " When it is stopped at "7", the reach display is generated by stopping at the right symbol at "7" at time t7.

On the other hand, when the player performs a pushing operation on the press operation device 261 in the second operable period, when the second operable period ends at time t6, the second special effect, which is one of suggested effects, is the sub-control board. It is started by the control of 940. As the second special effect, as shown in FIG. 15, four types of pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C, and pattern 2D are prepared, and one of these four types is selected. The second special effect of the pattern is started at time t6.

The pattern 2D is a pattern in which the right symbol that scrolls at a low speed is stopped so that the reach display is displayed, as in the case where the player does not perform the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the second operable period.

As shown in FIG. 15, the pattern 2C starts moving again (display Q1) after being temporarily stopped so that the right pattern that scrolls at a low speed becomes the reach display, and shifts only one from "7" where the right pattern becomes the reach display. It stops at "8" (display Q2), and the middle symbol is short and temporarily stopped (display Q3). When a series of displays Q consisting of these displays Q1 to Q3 is displayed, the symbols in the right and left middle three columns are re-scrolled. The symbols in the respective columns to be re-scrolled are stopped so that the left symbol stops at the same symbol as the symbol stopped at time t4, and then the right symbol undergoes low speed scrolling to reach display. That is, the pattern 2C is a pattern configured as a continuous effect as if the variable display is simulated twice.

The pattern 2B is the same as the pattern 2C up to the part where the right symbol scrolls slowly in the re-scrolled three columns of symbols. In the pattern 2B, after a series of display Q is performed again thereafter, the symbols in the right and left middle three columns start the second re-scrolling. The symbols in the respective columns in which the second re-scrolling is started are stopped so that the left symbol stops at the same symbol as the symbol stopped at the time t4, and then the right symbol undergoes the low-speed scroll to reach the reach display. That is, the pattern 2B is a pattern configured as a continuous effect as if the variable display is simulated three times.

The pattern 2A is the same as the pattern 2B up to the part where the right symbol scrolls slowly in the second re-scrolling. In the pattern 2A, after a series of display Q is performed again thereafter, the symbols in the three columns in the left and right sides start re-scrolling for the third time. The symbols in the respective columns that have started re-scrolling for the third time stop after the left symbol stops at the same symbol as the symbol stopped at time t4, and then the right symbol stops at low speed scrolling to reach the display. That is, the pattern 2A is a pattern configured as a continuous effect as if the variable display is simulated four times.

In addition, regarding the pattern (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C) for performing continuous production in the second special production, the frame of each color that surrounds the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479 appears during production. For example, in the pattern 2C, as shown in FIG. 15, a blue frame 613C appears in the display Q3 (that is, the display in which the middle symbol is short and is temporarily stopped) forming the series of displays Q.

On the other hand, in the pattern 2B, the blue frame 613B1 appears in the display Q3 that constitutes the first series of displays Q, and the yellow frame appears in the display Q3 that constitutes the second series of displays Q. To do. That is, a frame of different color appears in the series of display Q performed for the first time and the series of display Q performed for the second time.

In the pattern 2A, a blue frame 613A1 appears in the display Q3 that constitutes the first series of displays Q, and a yellow frame appears in the display Q3 that constitutes the second series of displays Q. A red frame appears in the display Q3 that constitutes the series of displays Q performed the third time. That is, different colored frames appear in the series of displays Q performed the first time, the series of displays Q performed the second time, and the series of displays Q performed the third time. In Pattern 2A, a rainbow-colored (rainbow-colored) frame may appear before the right pattern stops after the third re-scrolling. In this case, the variable display indicates a big hit. Correspondingly, it is set to always transit to the special game state after the variable display.

Each display data related to the above-described pattern 2A, pattern 2B, and pattern 2C display is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940. For the pattern 2D, the display data forming the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed is diverted.

The lottery for selecting which of the pattern 2A, the pattern 2B, the pattern 2C, and the pattern 2D is selected as the second special effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “second special effect lottery”) is performed by the control by the sub control board 940. Specifically, in the second special effect lottery, the sub control board 940 acquires the value of the second special effect selection counter (a partial area of the RAM) provided on the sub control board 940, and then the second special effect concerned. It is performed by referring to the second special effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940 for the value of the selection counter.

The second special effect selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 milliseconds), and when the value of the counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, “99”) at the update timing, Is changed to a value larger than the current value by "1", and when the value of the counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). Note that a counter that is common to the above-described first special effect selection counter may be used as the second special effect selection counter.

When the sub control board 940 selects the pattern of the second special effect by the second special effect lottery, the sub control board 940 receives from the main control board 920 a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation display of the decorative pattern that is currently being executed. The timing may be the timing when the second operable period starts or ends.

As the second special effect selection table, the second hit time table that is referred to when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being executed. A second out-of-miss table that is referred to when the jackpot is not won in the lottery is prepared.

The selection probability of each pattern (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C, pattern 2D) in the second hit time table and the second out-of-time table is the winning probability in each special symbol lottery and the variable display of the currently executed decorative symbol. (That is, the variable display including the reach display) is set in consideration of the probability of being selected when the special symbol lottery does not result in a big hit.

Specifically, when the pattern 2A appears, after the decorative pattern that is currently being variably displayed is confirmed and displayed (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol that is currently being variably displayed is It is set to have the highest possibility of transitioning to the special gaming state (after being confirmed and displayed), and when the pattern 2D appears, transition to the special gaming state after the decorative pattern that is currently displayed in variation is confirmed and displayed. Is set to be the least likely. The patterns 2B and 2C are set to have the second highest probability and the third highest probability, respectively.

Therefore, as the second special effect, when the pattern 2A for performing continuous effect as if the variable display is simulated four times appears, the player maximizes the degree of expectation for the special game state. In the case where the pattern 2D which is the reach display is displayed without the continuous effect even though the pressing operation device 261 is operated, the player makes the lowest expectation.

Further, in the pattern 2A, the pattern 2B, and the pattern 2C that perform the continuous effect among the second special effects, the frames (frames 613C, 613B1, 613A1, etc.) surrounding the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 are surrounded. ) Is configured to appear. The number of times the color of the frame changes in each pattern is four times in pattern 2A, twice in pattern 2B, and once in pattern 2C, so that the player can change the color of the frame each time. Improves expectations for special game states.

Furthermore, the change in the color of the frame in the patterns 2A, 2B, and 2C is likely to transition to the special game state, like each pattern (pattern 1A, pattern 1B, and pattern 1C) that constitutes the first special effect. It is configured to change in the order of blue→yellow→red as the height increases. In other words, in the second special effect, the order of changing the color of the frame in each pattern (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C) in which the continuous effect is performed has a certain regularity with the possibility of transitioning to the special game state. Is configured to be. Therefore, the player synergistically increases the degree of expectation for the special game state as the color of the frame sequentially changes in accordance with the regularity.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the second hit time table, the selection probability of the pattern 2A is the highest (for example, 60%), the selection probability of the pattern 2B is the second highest (for example, 30%), and the pattern 2C. Is set to have the third highest selection probability (for example, 8%), and the pattern 2D has the lowest selection probability (for example, 2%). On the other hand, in the second out-of-range table, the selection probability of the pattern 2D is highest (for example, 70%), the selection probability of the pattern 2C is second highest (for example, 18%), and the selection probability of the pattern 2B is third. It is set to be high (for example, 10%) and the selection probability of the pattern 2A is lowest (for example, 2%).

As shown in FIG. 13, the second special effect ends by stopping so that the right symbol becomes a reach display after a predetermined time from the start of the second special effect (time t10). In addition, in FIG. 13, only one time is illustrated as the time t10 which is the end time of the second special effect, but the execution time of the second special effect is different for each pattern (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C, pattern). 2D), the four times corresponding to each pattern of the second special effect can be time t10.

For example, in the pattern 2D, the time t7, which is the stop time of the right symbol when the player does not perform the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261, during the second operable period, becomes the time t10. On the other hand, in the pattern 2A, for example, the timing 60 seconds after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started at time ts is time t10. Further, in each of the patterns 2B and 2C, for example, the timing 40 seconds and 50 seconds after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started at the time ts is the time t10.

The execution time of the second special effect may correspond to the preselected variable display time. For example, re-scrolling may be performed corresponding to each pattern (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C, pattern 2D). The variable display having a longer variable display time may be selected as the number of times is larger, and the pattern may be determined by determining the number of re-scrolls by determining the variable display time by the main control board 920. .. Further, the length of the effect (battle effect) executed after the right symbol is stopped is different, the timing of the right symbol stop in the first time and the second time and thereafter is the same in each pattern, and the length is different corresponding to each pattern. It may be configured to execute the Sano production.

At time t7 or at time t10 after the end of the second special effect, when the right symbol stops in the reach display, the third operable period starts. The third operable period ends after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the start (time t8 or time t11). The third operable period is a period in which the player can perform a pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261.

When the third operable period is started by stopping the right symbol in the reach display, as shown in FIG. 16, the decorative symbol display device 479 is a game that the push operation device 261 can be pushed. An image 605 that reminds the person and a character 606 “Recruiting a helper!” are displayed as a comment on the production that urges the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261.

Each display data related to the display of the image 605 and the character 606 is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940, and the decorative pattern is displayed by the control of the sub control board 940 at the start time of the third operable period. It is displayed on the device 479 and is deleted at the end of the period.

As shown in FIG. 13, when the third operable period started at time t7 ends at time t8, regardless of whether or not the player has pressed the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period. The battle effect, which is one of the suggested effects, is started by the control of the sub control board 940. Similarly, when the third operable period started at time t10 ends at time t11, regardless of whether the player has operated the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period, The battle effect is started by the control of the sub control board 940.

The battle effect is an image effect in which the character until the final stop of the middle symbol is considered as an enemy such as a XX army, bandit, or cat, and a battle situation. As the battle effect, as shown in FIG. 16, four types of patterns 4A, 4B, 4C, and 4D are prepared, and one of the four patterns selected from these four types is prepared. The battle effect starts at time t8 or time t11.

The pattern 4A is a pattern showing that the enemy is fighting overwhelmingly in a priority situation. The pattern 4B is a pattern showing that the enemy is fighting in a priority situation. Pattern 4C is a pattern showing a state of fighting against an enemy in a situation inferior. The pattern 4D is a pattern showing a state of fighting in an overwhelmingly inferior situation against the enemy.

Each display data relating to the display of the pattern 4A, the pattern 4B, the pattern 4C, and the pattern 4D is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940. Each of these patterns 4A, 4B, 4C, and 4D may have a configuration in which only display data corresponding to the video effect showing the situation of each battle is prepared, or can appear in the first special effect. It is also possible to have a configuration in which display data corresponding to a plurality of types of video effects showing the battle situation are prepared for each type of enemy.

In addition, each pattern 4A, 4B, 4C is a pattern of a long presentation time used when the right symbol is stopped at time t7 (that is, when the pressing operation device 261 is not pressed at the second operation time). , And a pattern of a short effect time used when stopped at time t10 after the end of the second special effect (that is, when the pressing operation device 261 is pressed at the second operation time). On the other hand, regarding the pattern 4D, the time when the right symbol stops is the same regardless of whether or not the second special effect is performed (that is, whether or not the pressing operation device 261 is pressed at the second operation time). Therefore, there is prepared one effect time pattern that is shared by the case where the pressing operation device 261 is pressed and not operated during the second operation time.

The lottery for selecting which of the pattern 4A, the pattern 4B, the pattern 4C, and the pattern 4D is selected as the battle effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “battle effect lottery”) is performed by the control by the sub-control board 940. Specifically, in the battle effect lottery, the sub-control board 940 acquires the value of the battle effect selection counter (a part of the RAM) provided on the sub-control board 940, and the value of the battle effect selection counter is obtained. , The battle effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940.

The battle effect selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 milliseconds), and when the value of the counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, “99”) at the update timing, When the value of the counter is changed to a value that is larger than the current value by "1" and is the specified maximum value, the value is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). It should be noted that a counter that is common to at least one of the first special effect selection counter and the second special effect selection counter described above may be used as the battle effect selection counter.

The timing when the sub control board 940 selects the battle effect pattern by the battle effect lottery is the timing when the sub control board 940 receives from the main control board 920 a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation display of the decorative symbol that is currently being executed. Alternatively, it may be the timing when the third operable period starts or ends.

As the battle effect selection table, the fourth hit time table that is referred to when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being executed, A fourth out-of-miss table that is referred to when the jackpot is not won in the lottery is prepared.

The selection probability of each pattern (pattern 4A, pattern 4B, pattern 4C, pattern 4D) in the fourth hit time table and the fourth out-of-range table is the winning probability in each special symbol lottery, and the variable display of the currently executed decorative symbol. (That is, the variable display including the reach display) is set in consideration of the probability of being selected when the special symbol lottery does not result in a big hit.

Specifically, when the pattern 4A appears, after the decorative pattern that is currently being variably displayed is confirmed (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol that is currently being variably displayed is It is set to have the highest possibility of transitioning to the special gaming state (after being confirmed and displayed), and when the pattern 4D appears, transition to the special gaming state after the decorative pattern that is currently being displayed is confirmed and displayed. Is set to be the least likely. The patterns 4B and 4C are set so that the probability is second and third highest, respectively.

Therefore, when the pattern 4A that performs a video effect showing that the enemy is overwhelmingly prioritized as a battle effect appears, the player maximizes the expectation for the special game state. Then, when the pattern 4D for performing the video effect showing that the player is fighting overwhelmingly inferior to the enemy appears, the player lowers the degree of expectation.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, in the fourth hit time table, the selection probability of the pattern 4A is highest (for example, 80%), the selection probability of the pattern 4B is second highest (for example, 15%), and the pattern 4C. Is set to have the third highest selection probability (for example, 5%) and the pattern 4D has the lowest selection probability (for example, 0%). On the other hand, in the fourth out-of-range table, the selection probability of the pattern 4D is highest (for example, 80%), the selection probability of the pattern 4C is second highest (for example, 15%), and the selection probability of the pattern 4B is third. It is set to be high (for example, 4%) and the selection probability of the pattern 4A is lowest (for example, 1%).

The battle effect started at time t8 or time t11 is, as shown in FIG. 13, a timing after a predetermined time (90 seconds in the example shown in FIG. 13) after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started at time ts. Then, the middle symbol finally stops in the symbol according to the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery (that is, the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed) and ends (time te).

In the configuration where the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are fixedly stopped when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the left symbol and the right symbol both stop at "7". If it is, if the first or second special symbol lottery is a big hit, the middle symbol finally stops at "7" at time te. On the other hand, if the first or second special symbol lottery is not a big hit, the middle symbol finally stops at a symbol other than "7" (for example, "8") at time te. Immediately before or at the same time as this stop, the result of the battle effect is also displayed. If the first or second special symbol lottery is a big hit, an image in which the character on the ally side wins is displayed, and if it is not a win An image is displayed in which the enemy character wins and the teammate loses.

As shown in FIG. 13, when the player performs a pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the third operable period started at time t7, when the third operable period ends at time t8, the suggestive effect 1 The third special effect, which is the third special effect, is started by the control of the sub control board 940. Similarly, when the player performs a pushing operation on the press operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t10, similarly, when the third operable period ends at time t11, the third special effect starts. It

As the third special effect, as shown in FIG. 16, three types of pattern 3A, pattern 3B, and pattern 3C are prepared, and the third of one pattern selected from these three types. The special effect is started at time t8. As described above, at time t8 or time t11, the battle effect is also started, but the third special effect is displayed in the image layer in front of the battle effect, so the player is in charge of the third special effect. Until the end, the third special effect will be seen on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

The pattern 3A is a pattern including a character 614A such as "A man has come!" and a red frame 615A surrounding the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479. The pattern 3B is a pattern including a character 614B "A fighter has come!" and a yellow frame 615B surrounding the periphery of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479. The pattern 3C is a pattern including a character 614C such as "A dog came!" and a blue frame 615C surrounding the periphery of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479. Each display data related to the display of the pattern 3A, the pattern 3B, and the pattern 3C is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940.

The lottery for selecting which of the pattern 3A, the pattern 3B, and the pattern 3C is selected as the first special effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “third special effect lottery”) is performed by the control by the sub-control board 940. Specifically, in the third special effect lottery, the sub control board 940 acquires the value of the third special effect selection counter (a part of the RAM) provided on the sub control board 940, and then the third special effect. It is performed by referring to the third special effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940 for the value of the selection counter.

The third special effect selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 milliseconds), and when the value of the counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, “99”) at the update timing, Is changed to a value larger than the current value by "1", and when the value of the counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). It should be noted that a counter common to at least one of the above-described first special effect selection counter, second special effect selection counter, or battle effect selection counter may be used as the third special effect selection counter.

When the sub control board 940 selects the pattern of the third special effect by the third special effect lottery, the sub control board 940 receives from the main control board 920 a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation display of the decorative pattern that is currently being executed. The timing may be the timing when the third operable period starts or ends.

As the third special effect selection table, the third hit time table that is referred to when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being executed. A third out-of-miss table that is referred to when the jackpot is not won in the lottery is prepared.

The selection probability of each pattern (pattern 3A, pattern 3B, pattern 3C) in the third hit time table and the third out-of-range table is the winning probability in each special symbol lottery, and the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being executed (ie, The variable display including the reach display) is set in consideration of the probability of being selected when the special symbol lottery does not result in a big hit.

Specifically, when the pattern 3A appears, after the decorative pattern that is currently being variably displayed is confirmed (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol that is currently being variably displayed is It is set to have the highest possibility of transitioning to the special gaming state (after being fixedly displayed), and when the pattern 3C appears, transition to the special gaming state after the decorative pattern that is currently displayed in variable display is definitely displayed. Is set to be the least likely.

Therefore, when the third special effect appears, the player recognizes the degree of expectation for the special game state by looking at the characters included in each pattern. In other words, when the player sees the character 614A that says "XX man came!" included in the pattern 3A, the player has the highest expectation for the special game state, while it includes the pattern "3C". When the character 614C "Dog came!" is seen, the degree of expectation for the special game state is set to the lowest.

Similarly, the player recognizes the degree of expectation for the special game state by looking at the frame portion of each pattern when the third special effect appears. That is, when the player sees the pattern 3A in which the frame 615A is red, the player has the highest expectation for the special game state, while the player sees the pattern 3C in which the frame 615C is blue, the special game state. Have the lowest expectations for.

In particular, the correlation between the color of the frame of each pattern (pattern 3A, pattern 3B, pattern 3C) forming the third special effect and the possibility of transitioning to the special game state, each pattern forming the first special effect ( Since the pattern 1A, the pattern 1B, and the pattern 1C) are configured in the same manner, the player sensuously determines the degree of expectation of the special game state for the color of the frame in the third special effect from the regularity of the color of the frame. it can.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the third hit time table, the selection probability of the pattern 3A is highest (for example, 70%), the selection probability of the pattern 3B is second highest (for example, 25%), and the pattern 3C. Is set to be the lowest (for example, 5%). On the other hand, in the third out-of-range table, the selection probability of the pattern 3C is highest (for example, 80%), the selection probability of the pattern 3B is second highest (for example, 18%), and the selection probability of the pattern 3A is lowest. (For example, 2%) is set.

As shown in FIG. 13, the third special effect started at time t8 or time t11 ends after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the start (time t9 or time t12). The third special effect (Pattern 3A, Pattern 3B, Pattern 3C) is displayed in a layer in front of the battle effect, so that the player has finished the third special effect at time t9 or time t12. The battle effect will be seen on the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 is a mode that includes the predetermined reach display, the pressing operation device 261 is pressed to perform the predetermined operation. Suggestive production can be revealed.

In the example illustrated in FIG. 13, the operable period during which the pressing operation device 261 can be pushed in is three times (that is, the first operable period and the second operable period) while the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed once. , And a third operable period), and the player presses the pressing operation device 261 in each operable period, so that the suggestive effect (that is, the first special effect, the first special effect, or the second special effect, depending on the time at which the operation is performed is performed. The second special effect and the third special effect can be displayed (displayed) on the decorative symbol display device 479.

Therefore, in the variable display of the decorative pattern in the example shown in FIG. 13, three operable periods are provided while one variable display is performed, so that the press operation device 261 in each operable period The suggestive effect can be displayed in various patterns (more specifically, eight patterns) depending on the presence or absence of an operation.

First, the first pattern causes the first special effect to appear at time t2 by performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period started at time t1, and starts at time t5. By performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the second operable period, the second special effect is displayed at time t6, and the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is performed in the third operable period started at time t10. This is a pattern that causes the third special effect and the battle effect to appear at time t11.

The second pattern is to perform the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period started at the time t1, thereby causing the first special effect to appear at the time t2, and the second special effect started at the time t5. By performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period, the second special effect is displayed at time t6, and the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is not performed during the third operable period started at time t10. Thus, at time t11, only the battle effect is revealed without causing the third special effect to be revealed.

In the third pattern, the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period started at time t1, so that the first special effect appears at time t2, and the second special effect starts at time t5. By not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period, the second special effect is not displayed, and by performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t7, This is a pattern for displaying the third special effect and the battle effect at time t8.

In the fourth pattern, the pressing operation device 261 is pressed in the first operable period started at time t1, so that the first special effect appears at time t2 and the second special effect starts at time t5. By not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period, the second special effect is not displayed, and the pressing operation is not performed on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t7. , At the time t8, only the battle effect is revealed without causing the third special effect to be revealed.

In the fifth pattern, the second special effect is not displayed by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period started at time t1, and the second operation is started at time t5. By performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the period, the second special effect is displayed at time t6, and by performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t10, This is a pattern for displaying the third special effect and the battle effect at time t11.

In the sixth pattern, the second special effect is not displayed by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period started at time t1, and the second operation is started at time t5. By performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the period, the second special effect is displayed at time t6, and the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is not performed during the third operable period started at time t10. , At the time t11, only the battle effect is revealed without causing the third special effect to be revealed.

In the seventh pattern, the second special effect is not displayed by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period started at time t1, and the second operation is started at time t5. By not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the period, the second special effect is not displayed, and by performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t7, the time t8 is reached. Is a pattern for displaying the third special effect and the battle effect.

The eighth pattern does not cause the second special effect to appear by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period that starts at time t1, and the second operation that starts at time t5 is possible. By not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the period, the second special effect is not displayed, and by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t7, This is a pattern in which only the battle effect is displayed without displaying the third special effect at t8.

In this manner, when the operable period provided a plurality of times is provided while the variable display is performed once, a plurality of patterns of patterns are selected depending on whether the pressing operation device 261 is operated in each operable period. The suggestive effect can be displayed with one of the patterns.

As described above, the variable display including the super-reach with the variable display time of 90 seconds has been illustrated as an example of the variable display provided with the operable period of a plurality of times. However, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the variable display time is changed. Also, in the variable display including the super reach of the length other than 90 seconds, the operable period is similarly provided a plurality of times. Regardless of the type of reach display included, a variable display time longer than a predetermined time (variable display including reach display) may be provided with a plurality of operable periods. .. The number of operable periods provided may differ depending on the length of the variable display time. Further, the number of operable periods provided for one variable display may be one.

Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, after the variable display capable of showing a plurality of suggestive effects, such as the variable display including the super reach shown in FIG. When the gaming state transitions to the special gaming state, the variable display of the decorative symbol that was performed on the decorative symbol display device 479 before the transition to the special gaming state, including the suggestive effect that can appear during the variable display It is configured so that it can be restored.

In order to realize such a configuration, the sub-control board 940 executes a variable display capable of producing a plurality of suggestive effects, such as the variable display including the super reach shown in FIG. 13, and supports the variable display. When the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) is a big hit, the stop symbol of each row immediately before the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (for example, the example of FIG. 13) "653"), a lottery result of the first special effect lottery, a lottery result of the second special effect lottery, a lottery result of the third special effect lottery, a lottery result of the battle effect lottery, and a fixed display of the decorative symbol. The stop symbols (for example, “777” in the example of FIG. 13) of each column in FIG.

These pieces of information (that is, the stop symbol before the variable display of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol of the fixed display of the decorative symbol, and the lottery result of each effect lottery) are configured to store all of this information at a predetermined timing. Alternatively, one or more pieces of information may be stored at each timing at a plurality of timings. The timing for storing the information may be the timing at which the variable display ends (that is, the timing at which the confirmed display is displayed), the timing at which the variable display starts, or each performance lottery It may be the timing to be given.

<Restoration of suggested production in special game state>
In a configuration in which a plurality of suggestive effects appear while one variable display is performed, a suggestive effect that appears later is less likely to transition to a special game state than a suggestive effect that appears earlier. In this case, the player may be disappointed in the game because he/she loses the expectation of changing from the currently displayed variable display to the special game state. In order to prevent such discouragement, the player can choose not to intentionally operate the press operation device 261 during the operable period.

However, in some cases, such as when the fixed display of the decorative symbol is a display indicating that the jackpot has been won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the player does not allow it to appear at his own will. Sometimes you may want to know what would have happened if the suggestive production was revealed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, during the period of the special game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol, which was performed in the decorative symbol display device 479 before the transition to the special game state, It is configured so that it can be restored including suggestive effects that can appear during variable display.

The configuration will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is a screen diagram showing an example of a screen in which the player can select, in the special game state, whether to restore the variable display of the decorative symbol that was performed before the transition to the special game state. Is. FIG. 17B is a screen diagram showing an example of a screen displayed when the variable display of the decorative symbol is restored in the special game state.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, after the variable display capable of displaying a plurality of suggestive effects, such as the variable display including the super reach shown in FIG. 13, the game state is changed to the special game state. In this case, when a predetermined round (for example, the third round) is started among a plurality of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) executed in the special gaming state, before the transition to the special gaming state. As a screen (hereinafter also referred to as a "restore selection screen") that allows the player to select whether or not to restore the variable display of the decorative pattern that has been performed, a screen as shown in FIG. Displayed on device 479.

As shown in FIG. 17A, the restoration selection screen is a character 621 that informs the player that the variable display of the decorative pattern that was performed before the transition to the special game state can be restored, and the decoration An image 622 that reminds the player that a pressing operation can be performed on the pressing operation device 261 to restore the variable display of the symbols, and a round number display 631 that informs the player of the current round number in the special gaming state. It is configured as a screen displayed on the special game state screen including.

The character 621 and the image 622 are displayed on the special game state screen at the timing when a predetermined round (for example, the third round) is started in the special game state, and a predetermined time after the display is started (for example, 5 seconds). Will be deleted later). That is, the restoration selection screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 over a period from the start of a predetermined round in the special game state to the lapse of a predetermined time such as 5 seconds. Each display data related to the display of the character 621 and the image 622 is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940, and the sub control board 940 controls display and erasure.

When the player performs a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the period when the restoration selection screen is displayed, the sub control board 940 displays the decorative pattern that has been changed before the transition to the special game state being executed. With respect to each information stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (that is, a stop symbol before the variable display of the decorative symbol, a stop symbol of the fixed display of the decorative symbol, and a lottery result of each production lottery), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. , Restoring including suggestive effects that can appear in the variable display.

That is, in the case of the example of FIG. 13 described above, when the variable display of the decorative symbol stopped at “653” is started and the first operable period comes, as shown in FIG. 17B, the image 601 is displayed. And characters 602 are displayed. After that, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the first operable period, the first special effect according to the stored lottery result of the stored first special effect lottery is executed.

When the second operable period comes after the left symbol stops at “7”, the image 603 is displayed. After that, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the second operable period, the second special effect corresponding to the stored lottery result of the stored second special effect lottery is executed.

When the third operable period comes after the right symbol stops at "7" so as to reach the display, the image 605 and the character 606 are displayed. After that, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the third operable period, the third special effect corresponding to the stored lottery result of the third special effect lottery and the stored lottery result of the battle effect lottery are used. The battle effect is displayed, and when the variation display time (for example, 90 seconds in the example of FIG. 13) of the variation display being executed has elapsed, the middle symbol finally stops at “7”. That is, the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed as "777".

On the other hand, when the press operation device 261 is not operated during the third operable period, the battle effect according to the stored lottery result of the stored battle effect lottery is displayed and executed as in the case where the press operation device 261 is operated. At the timing when the variable display time of the variable display inside has elapsed, the medium symbol finally stops at "7".

Therefore, when the variable display of the decorative symbol, which was performed before the transition to the special game state being executed, is restored as described above, the player has an operable period provided three times (first operable period). , Second operable period, and third operable period), the first special effect, the second special effect by pressing the pressing operation device 261 during all operable periods or some operable periods. Or, you can see the special effect that you want to see among the third special effects.

That is, in the variable display of the restored decorative symbol, the operable period corresponding to the operable period in which the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the variable display of the decorative symbol that was performed before the special game state. When the player operates the press operation device 261, the player sees the special pattern seen during the variable display of the decorative symbol that was performed before the special gaming state even in the variable display of the restored decorative symbol. You can see the production again.

On the other hand, in the variable display of the restored decorative design, an operation corresponding to the operable period during which the pressing operation device 261 is not operated during the variable display of the decorative design that was performed before the special game state is possible. When the player operates the pressing operation device 261 for the period, the player restores the special effect that was not seen during the variable display of the decorative symbol that was performed before the special game state. It can be seen in the variable display of decorative patterns.

Therefore, for example, in the variable display of the decorative pattern in the example shown in FIG. 13, as described above, the suggestive effects (first special effect, second special effect, third special effect) are provided in eight patterns from the first to the eighth. Special effect, and battle effect) can be displayed, but in the variable display of the restored decorative design, the same pattern is displayed in the variable display of the decorative design that was performed before the special gaming state. The suggestive effect can be displayed in a pattern, or the suggestive effect can be displayed in a different pattern.

Here, the restoration of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not necessarily have to restore the entire period from the start to the end of the variable display, and a part of the variable display may be restored, or a start winning occurs. The period during which the variable display is executed a plurality of times from the time when the variable display corresponding to the winning of the big hit is executed may be restored, or the time when the player restores may be selectable.

The restoration selection screen may be displayed a plurality of times during the special gaming state, such as displaying the restoration selection screen in the third and seventh rounds in the special gaming state. That is, the variable display of the decorative symbol may be restored a plurality of times during the special game state. By adopting a configuration in which the variable display of the decorative pattern can be restored multiple times, the player suggests a plurality of types of patterns different from the pattern that appears in the variable display of the decorative pattern that was performed before the special game state. Can be revealed.

When the variable display of the decorative symbol, which was performed before the transition to the special game state being executed, is restored to the decorative symbol display device 479, the restoration is performed as shown in FIG. 17(b). A round number display 641 indicating the current round number is displayed in a predetermined area (for example, the lower right part of the screen) so that the player can recognize the current round number while playing. The display of the round number display 641 is controlled by the sub control board 940. Instead of displaying the number of rounds display 641, a reduced screen of the special game state screen may be displayed in a predetermined area.

<Hold full production>
In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, both the number of times of holding the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the number of holding the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol are both the maximum number, that is, for both special symbols. When the number of holdings reaches eight in total, a predetermined effect (hereinafter, this effect is also referred to as "holding full tank effect") appears on the decorative pattern display device 479 under a predetermined condition.

The held full tank effect may be an effect that is immediately executed when the total number of holdings reaches eight, or a variable display is executed for a certain period (for example, a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times)). Or a special period that continues until a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses, and the start of the special period changes the background color of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 479. The effect may be suggested to the player by displaying it or displaying a specific color on the peripheral portion of the display screen. In addition, in the hold full production, a specific sound effect is output at the timing when the number of holds reaches eight, a specific character that does not appear except during a special period appears during variable display, or a decorative pattern. Expectation for the lottery result of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) for the suspension every time the suspension display has a specific movement (for example, high speed movement) or the suspension display color is 1 A color that indicates the degree (for example, the color of the display section that indicates the hold is displayed in blue, yellow, red, gold, and rainbow colors, and the color order is the same as the other colors that indicate the degree of expectation. It is an effect such as that displayed in the above-mentioned manner, and it is an effect with a special feeling that cannot be seen at all or in other situations other than the special period.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the number of times of holding the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and the number of times of holding the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol are both the maximum number (upper limit of the number of holding times). If reached, in all of these holds, the probability of appearance of the full tank production depending on whether or not the hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is included Are configured differently.

In more detail, when the hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery is included in the hold for the maximum number of times, it is held with a higher probability than when the hold that is won in the special symbol lottery is not included. It is configured so that a full tank production is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 18, when the holdings for the special symbol lottery are included in the holdings for the maximum number of times, the holding full tank effect appears with a probability of 80%. If the symbol lottery does not include the winning hold, the reserved full tank effect is displayed only with a probability of 10%.

The lottery for displaying the reserved full tank effect (hereinafter also referred to as “reserved full tank effect lottery”) is performed under the control of the sub-control board 940. Specifically, the holding full tank production lottery, the sub-control board 940, when the number of each holding times for the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached the maximum number of times, the holding provided in the sub-control board 940 By acquiring the value of the full tank effect counter (a part of the RAM) and referring to the reserved full tank effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940 for the value of the reserved full tank effect counter. Done.

The main control board 920 notifies the sub-control board 940 of information relating to the number of holdings at a predetermined timing each time the number of holdings for each special symbol changes. The sub-control board 940 can determine whether or not each of the numbers of times of holding for the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached the maximum number based on the information notified from the main control board 920.

In addition, the main control board 920, for example, at a timing when the number of times of holding for the special symbol is increased due to the occurrence of the start winning of each special symbol, a predetermined command including information on the number of times of holding of each special symbol (hereinafter This command is also referred to as a "hold command") is transmitted to the sub control board 940 to notify the sub control board 940 of information relating to the number of hold times. In addition, the main control board 920, for example, at the timing when the main control board 920 transmits the fluctuation pattern command (that is, the timing when the number of times of holding for the special symbol decreases), the main control board 920 sends the fluctuation pattern command including information on the number of times of holding to the sub control board. By transmitting the information to the sub-control board 940, the sub-control board 940 is notified of the information on the number of times of holding.

The hold command includes information on the number of times each special symbol is held, as well as information on a lottery result of each special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). When the sub-control board 940 receives the hold command from the main control board 920, the information relating to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is associated with the reception order of the hold command (that is, the order in which the start winning is generated) RAM. Is stored in a predetermined area of, and thereafter, when the corresponding hold is exhausted (that is, the held unit game is executed), the information is erased. Based on the information stored in the RAM, the sub-control board 940 can determine whether or not the hold for the first special symbol and the second special symbol includes the hold that is won in the special symbol lottery. ..

The pending full production counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 ms (milliseconds)), and at the update timing, the value of the counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "99"). Is changed to a value larger than the current value by “1”, and when the value of the counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”).

As the hold full production selection table, the first table to be referred to when the hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery is included in the hold for the maximum number of times, and the special symbol lottery during the hold for the maximum number of times A second table to be referred to when the winning hold that has won is not included is prepared. The first table is set so that the appearance of the reserved full tank production is selected with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 80% as in the example shown in FIG. 18). The second table is also set so that the appearance of the reserved full tank production is selected with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 10% as in the example shown in FIG. 18).

The sub-control board 940 executes the reserved full tank effect when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected in the reserved full tank effect lottery.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub-control board 940 is configured to perform the holding full production lottery when the number of times each of the holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number. However, when the main control board 920 reaches the maximum number for each of the numbers of holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the holding full tank production lottery similar to the holding full tank production lottery performed by the sub control board 940 is performed. It may be configured to perform a performance lottery. In such a configuration, the main control board 920 notifies the sub-control board 940 of information to notify when the appearance of the reserved full production is selected in the reserved full production lottery, and the sub-control board 940. Executes the reserved full tank effect when the information is received from the main control board 920.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, during the period of the special game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol that was being performed in the decorative symbol display device 479 before the transition to the special game state is pressed during the variable display. The suggestion effect (first special effect, second special effect, third special effect) that can be displayed by operating the operation device 261 is configured to be restored.

Therefore, even when the player does not intentionally operate the press operation device 261 during the operable period provided for the appearance of the suggestive effect, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, The player can later restore and see a suggested effect that has not been seen because the pressing operation device 261 was not operated.

As a result, the player may have negative emotions in the game, such as regret not having seen the suggestive effect that could be seen during the variable display of decorative patterns Since it is possible to reduce the interest, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when both the number of times of holding the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the number of holding the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol reach the maximum number The reserved full tank effect is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 under a predetermined condition. Therefore, since the player has the purpose of increasing the number of times of holding for each special symbol, the motivation for the game is improved.

In particular, when the hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery is included in the hold for the maximum number of times, there is a high probability that the hold full tank production is higher than when the hold that is won in the special symbol lottery is not included. Is configured to appear. In other words, in the case where the hold that is won in the special symbol lottery is included in the hold, the hold full tank effect is more likely to appear than in the case where the hold that is won in the special symbol lottery is not included. The appearance of the reserved full tank effect can create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state. Therefore, the progress of the game can be improved, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Here, the lottery result of the reserved full production may be suggested to the player by a variable display different from the variable display related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, for example, to the player. At the timing when the number of holdings, which triggers the lottery for holding full production, reaches the upper limit, a part of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 479 (for example, the upper right corner) is circular in a front view in the circumferential direction. Displays a roulette in which fan-shaped areas with "hit" and "miss" are arranged in order, and one of each area is lit in sequence to perform variable display by roulette effect and hold Corresponding to the lottery result of the full tank effect, finally, an effect in which the lighting portion stops in the area of “win” or “miss” may be executed, and then the reserved full tank effect may be executed. .. As a result, it is possible to easily show the player that the reserved full tank production is likely to be executed.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, a function that allows the player to cancel the execution of the second or subsequent suggestive effect among the plurality of suggestive effects that can appear during one variable display (hereinafter, This function is also referred to as a "implication effect canceling function"). In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first embodiment will be designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 19 is a time chart for explaining the suggestive effect canceling function. Note that FIG. 19 exemplifies a case where the player cancels the suggestive effect in the variable display including the super reach in which the variable display time shown in FIG. 13 is 90 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 19, when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period from time t1 to time t2, and the first special effect is performed in the period from time t2 to time t3. After the first special effect ends at time t3, the first cancelable period starts at time ta1 (for example, 1 second after the end of the first special effect). The first cancelable period ends at time ta2, which is a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds after) from time ta1.

The first cancelable period may be provided in a period before the second operable period is started. Therefore, for example, the first cancelable period may start at time t3 when the first special effect ends, or the first cancel period ends at time t4 when the left symbol stops. Good.

In the first cancel period, the sub-control board 940 is controlled to inform the player that the subsequent suggestion effect display can be canceled based on the display data prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940. Characters and images are displayed. For example, a character similar to the image 601 is displayed, in which a character indicating a comment is displayed to inform the player that the display of the subsequent suggestion effect can be canceled, or the player is reminded that the pressing operation device 261 can be pushed. The image is displayed.

When the player performs a pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first cancel period, the second operable period and the third operable period do not occur, and when the player stops at the time t7 so that the right symbol becomes the reach display, The non-battle effect is started by the control of the sub control board 940.

The non-battle effect is an effect that is different from the suggestion effects such as the first special effect and the battle effect, in a manner that does not recall the degree of ease of transition to the special game state after the decorative design is confirmed and displayed. The non-battle effect is, for example, an introduction video of a character that appears in a suggestion effect such as the first special effect that can appear in the variable display, and the display data thereof is prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940.

As shown in FIG. 19, the second operable period starts at time t5 on the condition that the player does not operate the pressing operation device 261 in the first cancel period. When the player operates the press operation device 261 in the second operable period from time t5 to time t6, and the second special effect is performed in the period from time t6 to time t10, the second special effect is performed. The second cancelable period starts at time ta3 (for example, 5 seconds before the end of the second special effect) within the production execution period. The second cancelable period ends at time ta4, which is a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after time ta3.

The second cancelable period may be provided in the period before the third operable period is started. Therefore, for example, the second cancelable period may start at time t6 when the second special effect starts, or the right symbol stops (or the second special effect ends) time t10. Alternatively, the second cancellation period may end.

In the second cancel period, similar to the first cancel period described above, the display of the subsequent suggestive effect to the player based on the display data prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940 is canceled by the control of the sub control board 940. Characters and images that inform you of what you can do are displayed.

When the player performs a pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the second cancel period, the third operable period does not occur, and at the time t10, when the right symbol is stopped so as to reach the display, the game is performed in the first cancel period. The non-battle effect similar to the case where the person performs the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is started by the control of the sub control board 940.

It should be noted that the effect time of the non-battle effect started at time t10 by the player operating the pressing operation device 261 in the second cancel period is the first cancel except when the second special effect is the pattern 2D. It is shorter than the battle effect started at time t7 due to the player operating the press operation device 261 during the period.

The display data of the battle effect started at time t10 when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 in the second cancellation period also corresponds to the time t7 when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 in the first cancellation period. Like the display data of the battle effect that is started in 1., it is prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940.

Although not shown in FIG. 19, during the third operable period, the player does not operate the pressing operation device 261 during the first cancellation period, and the player does not operate the pressing operation device 261 during the second cancellation period. Is started at time t7. When the third operable period occurs, at least the battle effect appears as the suggested effect regardless of whether or not the player operates the pressing operation device 261 in the third operable period.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, among a plurality of suggestive effects (first special effect, second special effect, third special effect, battle effect) that can appear during one variable display, Since the player has a function (the suggestive effect cancel function) that allows the player to cancel the execution of the suggestive effects (the second special effect, the third special effect, the battle effect) from the second time onward, the suggestive effect that appears later is It is possible to suppress the situation indicating that the possibility of transitioning to the special game state is lower than that of the suggestion effect that has appeared earlier. Therefore, the player loses his/her expectation for the occurrence of the special game state due to the content of the suggestive effect that has appeared later, and thereby, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the operable period that occurs during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the predetermined suggestion effect is the decorative pattern of the pachinko machine 100 which is the own device. While being displayed on the display device 479, when the selection operation device 263 is operated during the operable period, a predetermined suggestive effect is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 of another pachinko machine 100. .. In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first embodiment will be designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 20 is a pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment which is the own machine (hereinafter, this pachinko machine is also referred to as “pachinko machine 100A” for convenience), and another pachinko machine 100 communicably connected to the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a machine 100 (hereinafter, this pachinko machine is also referred to as “pachinko machine 100B” for convenience).

As shown in FIG. 20, the pachinko machine 100A is communicatively connected to the pachinko machine 100B via a LAN 651. The connection between the pachinko machine 100A and the pachinko machine 100B is not limited to the LAN 651, and may be directly connected by a cable or the like, or may be a wireless connection according to various standards such as Bluetooth (registered trademark).

Further, the pachinko machine 100B, which is a communication partner of the pachinko machine 100A, may be the pachinko machine 100 installed at a specific position with respect to the pachinko machine 100A, such as on the right side of the pachinko machine 100A, or the game hall ( Of the plurality of pachinko machines 100 installed in the hall, a predetermined pachinko machine 100 designated by the pachinko machine 100A may be used. In addition, the number of the pachinko machines 100B that are the communication partners of the pachinko machines 100A may be one or plural.

When the operable period (for example, the first operable period in the first embodiment) occurs during the variable display of the decorative pattern in the pachinko machine 100A, the player presses the pressing operation device 261 in the operable period. In this case, the suggestive effect (for example, the first special effect in the first embodiment) corresponding to the operable period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100A, which is its own machine.

On the other hand, when the player performs the directional operation in the predetermined direction (for example, right direction) on the selection operation device 263 during the operable period generated in the pachinko machine 100A, the suggestion effect corresponding to the operable period is given. The information is transmitted to the pachinko machine 100B, which is predetermined as a communication partner, via the LAN 651.

The information transmitted by the pachinko machine 100A to the pachinko machine 100B (information related to the suggested effect corresponding to the operable period) is selected by the pattern selected as the suggested effect (for example, the first special effect lottery in the first embodiment). Information indicating the first special effect pattern). The transmission of information to the pachinko machine 100B is performed by the control of the sub control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100A.

When the pachinko machine 100B receives the information from the pachinko machine 100A, based on the received information, the suggested effect of the pattern selected in the pachinko machine 100A, that is, the player presses the press operation device 261 during the operable period. The suggestive effect (for example, the first special effect in the first embodiment) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100A in the case of displaying is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100B. The display control in the pachinko machine 100B is performed by the control of the sub-control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100B.

That is, in the pachinko machine 100A of the present embodiment, when the player presses the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period that occurs during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the suggestive effect corresponding to the operable period. Can be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100A, which is the player's own machine, and when the player performs a predetermined direction operation on the selection operation device 263 during the operable period, the operation is performed. The suggestion effect corresponding to the possible period can be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100B which is another pachinko machine.

The pachinko machine 100B controls the sub-control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100B to display the suggestive effect on the decorative pattern display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100B based on the information received from the pachinko machine 100B. A reduced screen of a screen (for example, a screen on which variable display is performed) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100B based on a game is a predetermined area of the decorative symbol display device 479 (for example, a screen Displayed in the lower right part of.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100A of the present embodiment, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the operable period that occurs during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the suggested effect is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100A which is the own device. On the other hand, when the selection operation device 263 is operated during the operable period, the suggestion effect is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 of the other pachinko machine 100B.

In this way, the display position of the suggestive effect can be changed by operating the pressing operation device 261 or the selection operation device 263 during the operable period, so that the suggestive effect is displayed according to the operation of the player. It becomes possible to add variety to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, when the selection operation device 263 is operated during the operable period, the suggested effect is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 of the other pachinko machine 100B, so that the suggested effect is played on the other pachinko machine 100B. It can be seen together with the player, and can have a different interest than when playing the game alone.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment, when the selection operation device 263 is operated instead of the press operation device 261 during the operable period during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the predetermined suggestion effect is the decorative pattern display device. It is configured to be displayed in an area different from the area in which the variable display of the decorative pattern in 479 is displayed. In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first embodiment will be designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 21 is a screen view showing an example of the display contents of the decorative symbol display device 479 when the selection operation device 263 is operated during the operable period that occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbol. When the operable period (for example, the first operable period in the first embodiment) occurs during the variable display of the decorative pattern in the pachinko machine 100, the player presses the press operation device 261 in the operable period. In this case, the suggested effect (for example, the first special effect in the first embodiment) corresponding to the operable period is displayed on the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

On the other hand, when the player performs a direction operation in a predetermined direction (for example, right direction) on the selection operation device 263 during the operable period generated in the pachinko machine 100, the operation can be performed as shown in FIG. Suggestive effects corresponding to the period are displayed in the right area 479A of the decorative symbol display device 479.

In contrast to the right area 479A where the suggestive effect is displayed, the left area 479B displays the content when the player does not operate the press operation device 261 during the operable period (for example, the first embodiment in the first embodiment). (Variable display after one operable period) is displayed.

When the suggestion effect displayed in the right area 479A ends, the continuation of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. Alternatively, the continuation of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be displayed in the left area 479B and nothing may be displayed in the right area 479A, and the continuation of the variable display of the decorative pattern in each of the left and right areas 479A and 479B. May be displayed.

Note that the control related to the above-described display in this embodiment is performed by the sub control board 940.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the selection operation device 263 is operated instead of the pressing operation device 261 in the operable period that occurs during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the suggestive effect is the decorative pattern of the decorative pattern display device 479. It is displayed in an area different from the area in which the variable display is displayed.

In this way, the display position of the suggestive effect can be changed by operating the pressing operation device 261 or the selection operation device 263 during the operable period, so that the suggestive effect is displayed according to the operation of the player. It becomes possible to add variety to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the player, the suggestion effect displayed by operating the selection operation device 263, and the content displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when neither the press operation device 261 nor the selection operation device 263 is operated. And can be seen at the same time, the interest in the game is improved.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, when the number of times of holding the right of each unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number (upper limit of the number of holding times), all of these In the hold, the appearance probability of the hold full production was different depending on whether or not the hold that was won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) was included.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 of the fifth embodiment, when the number of times of holding the right of each unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number (upper limit of the number of holding times) The appearance probability of the reserved full tank effect is configured to differ depending on how many times the arrival is within a predetermined period. In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first embodiment will be designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as the number of times each of the holding numbers for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number in the predetermined period, the probability of appearance of the reserved full tank production increases. Is configured so that there is a portion where Hereinafter, the above “predetermined period” is also referred to as a “holding number monitoring period”.

For example, as shown in FIG. 22, when the number of times each of the holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached the maximum number, is the first time within a predetermined period, the reserved full tank effect is With the probability of 50%, when the second time is the second time, the reserved full tank effect is shown with a probability of 70%, and when it is the third time, the reserved full tank effect is shown with a probability of 80%. If it is the fourth and subsequent times, the reserved full tank effect is displayed with a probability of 95%.

Here, when the number of times of each hold for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the upper limit a plurality of times during a predetermined period, not only the appearance probability of the reserved full tank production is changed, but also the production contents are different. You may make it the structure made to be able to. The player may be provided with a privilege when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected for a predetermined number of times during a predetermined period, and as the privilege, for example, a plurality of times during the predetermined period. Only when the appearance of the hold full tank effect is selected, the hold full tank effect may be executed by an effect using a different character for each number of times, or the hold full tank effect may be performed multiple times during a predetermined period. When the appearance of the ton effect is selected, it is possible to restore the variable display of the decorative design described above during the special game state thereafter, and the number of times the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected during the predetermined period is The number of restorations may increase as the number increases. As a result, even if the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is once selected and the reserved full tank effect is executed, the player is allowed to continue playing the game so that the number of reserved times reaches the upper limit again during the predetermined period. It is possible to suppress the situation in which the player is distracted by the reserved full tank production and interrupts the game and the operation of the gaming machine is reduced.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold count monitoring period is a starting point at the time when each of the hold counts for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number at a certain time, and all of these hold numbers are It is a period until it is exhausted (that is, until the unit game related to the first or second special symbol is played the maximum number of times).

It should be noted that, from the starting point, the unit game relating to the first or second special symbol may be a period until a predetermined number of times is greater or less than the maximum number of times as a holding frequency monitoring period, or predetermined from the starting point. The period until the predetermined time elapses may be set as the hold count monitoring period. Further, as the starting point of the number-of-holds monitoring period, not only the time when the number of each holding for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number, a predetermined time (for example, 0 minutes every hour) Alternatively, it may be a time point when the player gives an instruction by a predetermined method.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the holding full tank production lottery is the same as the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, the sub-control board 940, the maximum number of times each hold for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is maximum. When the number of times is reached, the value of the reserved full tank effect counter (a part of the RAM) provided on the sub control board 940 is acquired, and the value of the reserved full tank effect counter of the sub control board 940 is acquired. It is performed by referring to the reserved full production effect selection table prepared in the ROM.

As the hold full production effect selection table of the present embodiment, it is referred to when it is the first time in the hold count monitoring period that each of the hold counts for the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached the maximum number. A first table, a second table referred to in the case of the second time, a third table referred to in the case of the third time, and a fourth table referred to in the case of the fourth time or later are prepared.

The first table is set so that the appearance of the reserved full tank production is selected with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50% as in the example shown in FIG. 22), and the second table is also predetermined. The appearance of the reserved full tank effect is set to be selected with the determined probability (for example, the probability of 70% as in the example shown in FIG. 22). Similarly, the third table and the fourth table are also set so that the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected with a predetermined probability.

The sub-control board 940 has a period flag (a partial area of the RAM) set when the holding count monitoring period is set, and each holding count for the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the holding count monitoring period. Each of them has an arrival counter (a partial area of the RAM) that counts the maximum number of times and a remaining period counter (a partial area of the RAM) that counts the remaining period of the pending count monitoring period. The initial values of the arrival counter and the remaining period counter are “0”.

The sub-control board 940 sets the period flag and sets the arrival counter to 1 when each of the numbers of holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number in the state where the period flag is not set. In addition, the total of the upper limit values of the number of holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol (in the present embodiment, "8") is set in the remaining period counter. Then, the sub-control board 940 refers to the first table, performs the reserved full tank effect lottery, and executes the reserved full tank effect when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected.

The sub-control board 940, in a state where the period flag is set, when each of the number of times of each holding for the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached the maximum number, the increment counter is incremented by 1 from the remaining period counter. Subtract one. Then, the sub-control board 940 refers to the table corresponding to the value of the arrival counter in the reserved full tank effect selection table to perform the reserved full tank effect lottery, and when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected. Perform the hold full production.

Further, when the value of the remaining period counter becomes “0” by updating the remaining period counter, the sub-control board 940 determines that the hold count monitoring period has ended, cancels the setting of the period flag, and reaches the arrival counter. Is set to the initial value "0".

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub-control board 940 is configured to perform the reserved full tank production lottery, but the main control board 920 holds the same as the reserved full tank production lottery performed by the sub-control board 940. It may be configured to perform a full tank production lottery. In such a configuration, the main control board 920 notifies the sub-control board 940 of information to notify when the appearance of the reserved full production is selected in the reserved full production lottery, and the sub-control board 940. Executes the reserved full tank effect when the information is received from the main control board 920.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the number of times of holding the right of each unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number (upper limit of the number of holding times), the arrival is predetermined. It is configured such that the appearance probability of the reserved full tank effect differs depending on how many times it has reached within the period.

Therefore, within the predetermined period, when the number of holdings for each special symbol reaches the upper limit again, the suggestive effect is more likely to appear than when the number of holdings reaches the upper limit before that, so the player With the purpose of increasing the number of holdings for each special symbol, it is possible to face a game in which a game ball is shot aiming at entry into the starting device for each special symbol. This can improve the player's willingness to play.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the sixth embodiment, it is easy to increase the number of times of holding the right of each unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol (easy to store the hold). In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first embodiment will be designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

In the special game state, the number of times of holding the unit game relating to the special symbol tends to reach the upper limit due to the game ball shot during the special game state, so if the reach display appears in the variable display of the decorative symbol, The player who sees it stops firing the game ball so as not to increase the number of holdings before the occurrence of the special game state (that is, during the variable display), considering that the special game state will occur thereafter. There are many cases. That is, the appearance of the reach display in the variable display of the decorative symbol may be one of the reasons why the holding of the unit game related to the special symbol is difficult to increase.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the variable display including the reach display is selected as the variable display of the decorative symbol executed in the decorative symbol display device 479 (that is, the sub-control board 940 is the main In the case of receiving a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation display including the reach display from the control board 920), when there is a hold that is won in the special symbol lottery among the holds for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Is configured so that, with a predetermined probability, a variable display that includes the same variable display time (variation time) as the selected variable display but does not include the reach display (that is, complete loss variation display) is executed multiple times. To be done.

For example, FIG. 23A is a time chart showing an example of variable display including reach display. In this example, the variable display time of the variable display is 60 seconds. In the variable display including the reach display, when the right symbol stops and the reach display occurs, the player tends to stop the firing of the game ball for a relatively long period until the middle symbol stops thereafter.

On the other hand, FIG. 23B is a time chart showing an example of the complete loss variation display. The variable display time of the variable display including the reach display is configured to be longer than the variable display time of the complete loss variable display. In this example, the variable display time of the variable display is 20 seconds.

FIG. 23C is a time chart showing a variable display having a variable display time of 60 seconds, which is composed of a complete loss variable display having a variable display time of 20 seconds. As shown in FIG. 23C, by repeating the complete loss variation display shown in FIG. 23B three times, the same variation display time as the variation display including the reach display shown in FIG. Second) variable display is configured.

For each of the variable displays including the reach display prepared in advance in the ROM of the sub-control board 940, it is necessary to set the complete-miss variable display to configure the variable display having the same variable display time as the variable display including the reach display. The information that defines whether to combine in this way is prepared in advance in the ROM of the sub control board 940. Based on the information, the sub-control board 940 configures the variable display by combining the target complete-miss variation display so that the variation display time is the same as the variation display including the reach display.

On the other hand, when the variable display including the reach display is selected as the variable display of the decorative symbols to be executed in the decorative symbol display device 479, the special symbol lottery is won in the hold for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Even if there is no pending hold, as in the case where there is a pending win in the special symbol lottery, with a certain probability, the same variation display time as the selected variation display, complete loss variation display multiple times A variable display including is configured to be executed.

However, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the probability that the variable display including the complete loss variation display for a plurality of times is executed is that the special symbol lottery is won during the suspension for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The case where there is a hold is higher than the case where there is no hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery during the hold for the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

The lottery (hereinafter, also referred to as “non-reach mode lottery”) whether or not to execute the variable display including the complete loss variation display a plurality of times is performed by the control by the sub-control board 940. Specifically, in the non-reach mode lottery, when the sub control board 940 receives a change pattern command corresponding to a change display including a reach display from the main control board 920, a selection counter (provided on the sub control board 940 ( This is performed by acquiring the value of a partial area of RAM) and referring to the selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940 for the value of the selection counter.

The selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 ms (milliseconds)), and when the value of the counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, “99”) at the update timing, When the value of the counter is changed to a value that is larger than the current value by "1" and is the specified maximum value, the value is changed to the specified minimum value ("0").

As the selection table, the first table to be referred to when there is a hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery in the hold for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the hold for the first special symbol or the second special symbol There is prepared a second table to be referred to when there is no hold in which a special symbol lottery is won. The first table has a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 80%) of execution of variable display including a plurality of complete-miss variation display for the same variation display time as the variation display indicated by the received variation pattern command. Is set to be performed. The second table also has a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 10%) that the variable display including the complete loss variation display for the same variation display time as the variation display indicated by the received variation pattern command can be executed. Set to be selected.

In the non-reach mode lottery, the sub-control board 940 selects, in the non-reach mode lottery, when the execution of the variable display including the plurality of complete loss variation displays for the same variation display time as the variation display indicated by the received variation pattern command is selected. Execute variable display including multiple display.

If the variation display indicated by the reach variation pattern received from the main control board 920 causes a special gaming state after that (that is, if the special symbol lottery is won), the sub-control board 940 displays a complete loss variation. It is controlled so that the stop symbol (fixed symbol) in the variable display consisting of a combination of is a big hit symbol.

In FIG. 23, the variable display time of the variable display including the reach display is an integer multiple of the variable display time of the complete loss variable display, but the variable display time of the variable display including the reach display is completely lost. If the variable display time of the variable display is not an integral multiple of the variable display time, the sub-control board 940 extends or shortens each variable display time of the one or more complete loss variable display, so that the entire variable display time is The variation display time of the variation display (variation display including the reach display) corresponding to the reach variation pattern received from the control board 920 is controlled.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the variable display including the reach display is selected as the variable display of the decorative symbol, the special symbol lottery is won during the suspension for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If there is a pending display, the variable display that includes the multiple variable display without the reach display (that is, complete loss display) with the same variable display time as the selected variable display is executed with a certain probability. Is configured.

In this way, by making it difficult to execute the variable display including the reach display, it is possible to suppress the event that the player stops the firing of the game ball when the reach display appears, so the first special symbol And it is possible to easily increase the number of times of holding the right of each unit game relating to the second special symbol (easy to store the holding). Therefore, in the configuration in which the above-mentioned hold full tank effect is performed, the hold for each special symbol is easily accumulated, and the hold full tank effect is likely to appear, so that the player cannot see the hold full tank effect. This makes it harder to feel dissatisfied and suppresses the decline in interest in games.

Only when there is a hold that wins the special symbol lottery among the holds for each special symbol, instead of the variable display including the reach display, the variable display including the variable display that does not include the reach display appears multiple times. Therefore, in the case where there is a hold that wins the special symbol lottery among the holds for each special symbol, the hold is easier to accumulate than when there is no hold that wins the special symbol lottery. Therefore, in the case where there is a hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery among the holds for each special symbol, the hold full tank production is easier to appear than when there is no hold that is won in the special symbol lottery. The appearance of the reserved full tank effect can create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state. As a result, the progress of the game can be made more comfortable, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Also, since the variable display including multiple variable displays that do not include the reach display appears instead of the variable display including the reach display, the reach display of the variable display time corresponding to the variable display including the reach display is not included. It is not necessary to have the display data of the variable display exclusively, and the display data of the variable display that does not include the reach display and that has a shorter variable display time than the variable display including the reach display can be used. As a result, the storage capacity consumption of the pachinko machine 100 is preferably suppressed.

<Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 29. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment, the decorative pattern is displayed on the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479 (variable display, stop display), but in the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment, Cylindrical reels 711L, 711M, 711R having decorative patterns drawn on the outer peripheral surface are provided side by side, and the decorative patterns are variably displayed by rotating these reels 711L, 711M, 711R respectively. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to sixth embodiments will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the structural configuration of the game board 400X of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. 24 is a front view of the game board 400X in the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment, FIG. 25(a) is a front view of the reel device 710, and FIG. 25(b) is a middle reel. It is a front view of 711M.

Similar to the game board 400, the game board 400X also includes a game area formed by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 in a substantially circular shape on the front surface side of the base body 401, and a game ball launched from the launching device 330. When enters the game area beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404, the game ball moves (flows down) while falling in the game area by its own weight.

As shown in FIG. 24, the game board 400X is provided with a downflow change member such as a nail 411 and a windmill 412, a central structure body 420 arranged substantially in the center of the base body 401, and the like as in the game board 400. At the same time, with respect to the upper start winning prize device 1431 arranged below the central structure 420, the lower starting prize winning device 1432 arranged below the upper starting prize winning device 1431, and the lower starting prize winning device 1432. And a big winning device 1434 arranged on the lower side, and starting devices 1436A and 1436B arranged on both left and right sides of the central structure 420 are provided. Here, the upper start winning device 1431 is a winning device in which two winning devices (specifically, the left starting winning device 1431A and the right starting winning device 1431B) are integrated, like the middle starting winning device 431.

On the game board 400X, switches (detection means) for detecting passage of a game ball corresponding to the left and right starting prize winning devices 1431A and 1431B, the lower starting prize winning device 1432, and the left and right starting devices 1436A and 1436B, respectively. A plurality of (not shown) are provided, and the entry of the game ball into a predetermined area corresponding to each switch can be detected.

Specifically, a left-side starting prize switch that detects a game ball that has entered the left-side starting prize device 1431A, a right-side starting prize switch that detects a game ball that has entered the right-side starting prize device 1431B, and a game that has entered the lower-side starting prize device 1432. The lower start winning switch that detects the ball, the big winning switch that detects the game ball that entered the big winning device 1434, the left start switch that detects the game ball that entered the left starting device 1436A, and the right starting device 1436B A right start switch for detecting a game ball is installed on the game board 400. These respective switches are connected to the main control board 920 similarly to the general prize switches 449A and 449B (see FIG. 10) which detect the game balls that have entered the general prize devices 439A and 439B, respectively.

In the following, for the sake of convenience, the left-side starting prize switch, the right-side starting prize switch, the lower-side starting prize switch, the big winning switch, the left-side starting switch, and the right-side starting switch are referred to as "left-side starting prize switch 1441A" and " It is also referred to as a “right side starting prize switch 1441B”, a “lower starting prize switch 1442”, a “big winning switch 1444”, a “left side starting switch 1446A”, and a “right side starting switch 1446B”.

The entrance part of the game ball in the left side starting winning device 1431A, the right starting winning device 1431B, the lower starting winning device 1432, and the big winning device 1434 constitutes a winning hole, and the gaming ball entering each winning hole is formed on the base 401. It is guided to a recovery and discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the substrate 401 through the through hole. On the other hand, the game balls that have not entered each winning device are guided to the collection and discharge passage through the discharge port 401A. When a game ball enters any of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9). For each of the above winning devices, the entrance portion of the game ball in the left side starting device 1436A and the right side starting device 1436B constitutes a ball entrance, and the game ball that has entered each ball entrance is discharged to the game area.

The left-side starting prize winning device 1431A is a starting device according to the first special symbol, like the left-side middle starting winning device 431A, and the right-side starting winning device 1431B is similar to the right-side middle starting prize winning device 431B and is related to the second special symbol. It is a device. That is, the upper side starting winning device 1431 is a winning device having two functions as a starting device relating to the first special symbol and a starting device relating to the second special symbol.

The upper side starting prize winning device 1431 is provided with a distribution unit (not shown in FIG. 24) for allocating the game ball entered from the entrance 1611 to either the left side starting winning device 1431A or the right side starting winning device 1431B. The distribution unit is provided on the back surface side of the base body 401, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 1611 is guided to the back surface side of the base body 401 by a passage (not shown) and is used for distribution by the distribution unit. ..

Like the distribution unit 620, the distribution unit of the upper-side starting winning device 1431 is configured such that each time the game ball enters from the entrance 1611, the winning devices 1431A and 1431B to which the game balls are distributed are alternately switched. .. As a result, the game balls that have entered the upper start winning device 1431 basically enter the left starting winning device 1431A or the right starting winning device 1431B alternately.

The upper start winning device 1431 is configured so that the probability of entering the entrance 1611 does not change. On the other hand, the upper-side starting prize winning device 1431 does not cause a part of the game ball that has entered through the entrance 1611 to enter into either the left or right starting winning devices 1431A and 1431B, and is formed at a predetermined position with a very low probability. It has a function of discharging from the outlet to a collecting and discharging passage (not shown). That is, a part of the game ball that has entered the upper start winning device 1431 through the entrance 1611 is discharged to the collecting and discharging passage without entering any of the left and right starting winning devices 1431A and 1431B. The probability that the game ball that has entered through the entrance 1611 will be discharged to the collection and discharge passage without entering the starting winning devices 1431A and 1431B is, for example, about 1/100, preferably about 1/1000. May be

The lower side starting winning device 1432 is a starting device related to the second special symbol, like the right starting winning device 432. The lower side starting prize winning device 1432 has a mechanism for changing the probability of the game ball entering the inside thereof, like the right starting prize winning device 432. The mechanism for changing the probability of entering the game ball does not have to be provided only in the lower starting prize winning device 1432, and instead of or in addition thereto, one of the other winning devices such as the upper starting prize winning device 1431 or the like. You may provide in multiple numbers. Further, the mechanism for changing the entering probability of the game ball may be constituted by a driving means such as an electrically driven solenoid, and is represented by a mechanism operated by the own weight of the game ball entering a predetermined area. It may be configured by a mechanism that operates mechanically.

The lower start prize winning device 1432, like the right start prize winning device 432, has an approach restriction mechanism 1452 that changes the probability of a game ball entering the inside by the transition between the allowance attitude and the prohibition attitude, and the entrance restriction mechanism. An entry restriction solenoid (not shown) for driving the mechanism 1452 is provided. The entrance restriction solenoid that drives the entrance restriction mechanism 1452 is connected to the main control board 920, similarly to the right entrance restriction solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10 ). Note that, hereinafter, the above-described entry restriction solenoid that drives the entry restriction mechanism 1452 is also referred to as an “entry restriction solenoid 1462” for convenience.

The entry regulation mechanism 1452 includes two movable pieces that are driven by the entry regulation solenoid 1462. When the entry regulation mechanism 1452 is in the entry prohibited posture, the two movement pieces constrict the entrance (winning hole). The game ball cannot enter the lower starting prize winning device 1432 by adopting (or closing) the arrangement, but when the entry restricting mechanism 1452 is in the entry permitting posture, the two movable pieces are separated from each other by the distance between their tip portions. The game ball can enter the lower start winning a prize device 1432 by adopting such an arrangement as to expand.

When the entry control mechanism 1452 wins in the lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “ordinary symbol lottery”) based on the fact that the game balls that have entered the left and right starting devices 1436A and 1436B related to the normal symbol are detected by the start switch 1446. , The entry permitting solenoid 1462 is driven to shift to the entry permission posture a predetermined number of times and a predetermined time.

The special winning device 1434, like the upper special winning device 434, includes an entrance restricting mechanism 1454 for restricting the entrance of the game ball into the inside thereof by the transition between the admissible attitude and the entrance prohibiting attitude, and the entrance restricting mechanism 1454. An entry restriction solenoid (not shown) for changing the posture is provided. The entry restriction solenoid that changes the attitude of the entry restriction mechanism 1454 is connected to the main control board 920, similarly to the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10 ). Note that, hereinafter, the above-described entry restriction solenoid that changes the attitude of the entry restriction mechanism 1454 is also referred to as “entry restriction solenoid 1464” for convenience.

The entry restriction mechanism 1454 includes a plate-shaped movable piece that is disposed on the front surface side of the special winning apparatus 1434 and is driven by the entry restriction solenoid 1464. The game piece cannot enter the big winning device 1434 because the movable piece closes the entrance (winning hole), but when the entry restricting mechanism 1454 is in the entry allowable posture, the movable piece moves forward with the lower side as an axis. By being pushed down and opening the entrance, the game ball can enter the special winning device 1434.

The big winning device 1434 allows a game ball to enter when a lottery for a big hit is won. Specifically, if the game ball that has entered the left-side starting winning device 1431A related to the first special symbol is selected in the lottery (that is, the first special symbol lottery) based on being detected by the left-side starting winning switch 1441A, or , A lottery based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the right starting winning a prize device 1431B or the lower starting award winning device 1432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right starting award winning switch 1441B or the lower starting award winning switch 1442 (that is, the second When winning the special symbol lottery), the entry restriction solenoid 1464 of the special winning device 1434 operates. By this operation, the entry restricting mechanism 1454 takes the entry allowing posture for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined number of times.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24, on the game board 400, a reel device 710 is provided in the opening of the central structure body 420 as a device for displaying a decorative symbol (variable display, stop display) instead of the decorative symbol display device 479. It is provided. The reel device 710 is attached to a plate-shaped base body 701 arranged on the back surface side of the game board 400.

As shown in FIG. 25A, the reel device 710 has three rotating bodies arranged side by side in the left-right direction, that is, a cylindrical left reel 711L, a middle reel 711M, and a right reel (right symbol row). ) 711R. The left reel 711L constitutes a left symbol row, the middle reel 711M constitutes a middle symbol row, and the right reel 711R constitutes a right symbol row.

Each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reel 711L, 711M, 711R. The rotation axes of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R are arranged on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction.

Each of these reels 711L, 711M, 711R is connected to a reel drive motor (not shown in FIG. 25) which is a stepping motor, and is rotated by the drive of each reel drive motor. In the following, for the sake of convenience, the reel drive motors connected to the left reel 711L, the middle reel 711M, and the right reel 711R are referred to as "reel drive motor 721L", "reel drive motor 721M", and "reel drive motor 721M", respectively. It is also referred to as "reel drive motor 721R".

The reel drive motors 721L, 721M, and 721R are all connected to the sub-control board 940, and are independently driven under the control of the sub-control board 940. Accordingly, the reels 711L, 711M, 711R can rotate individually, that is, independently.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the decorative pattern is drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R, and by individually rotating these reels 711L, 711M, 711R, the decorative pattern Variable display is realized. The decorative design is composed of a main design 712 and a sub design 713 formed smaller than the main design 712.

The main symbol 712 is a symbol that can form a jackpot symbol. The main symbol 712 is configured as a symbol including information (hereinafter, this information is “numerical information”) that defines individual numerical values such as numbers and characters corresponding to the numbers, and is “1” in the present embodiment. It is constituted as a symbol to which each number from to 9 is attached, and the jackpot symbol is constituted by a combination of three identical main symbols 712.

The main symbols 712 are sequentially arranged so that each number from "1" to "9" circulates around each reel 711L, 711M, 711R. More specifically, in the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R, each main symbol 712 to which each number except for a part (specifically, "4") of "1" to "9" is attached, The reels 711L and 711R are arranged so that the reels 711L and 711R move in descending order when the reels 711L and 711R rotate clockwise when viewed from the left side in front view. On the other hand, in the middle reel 711M, the respective main symbols 712 with the numbers from "1" to "9" are changed in ascending order when the middle reel 711M is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front view left side. Is arranged as. In addition, although a configuration in which the sub symbol 713 is arranged is illustrated at a position corresponding to “4”, the main symbol 712 with the number “4” is included in each reel 711L, 711M, 711R. Good.

The sub symbol 713 is a symbol that cannot form a jackpot symbol. In the present embodiment, the sub symbol 713 is configured as a symbol with a predetermined symbol that does not include numerical information. The sub symbol 713 is composed of a first sub symbol 713A provided on each reel 711L, 711M, 711R and a second sub symbol 713B provided only on the middle reel 711M as shown in FIG. 25(b). ..

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the second sub symbol 713B is arranged between the main symbol 712 with the number "3" and the main symbol 712 with the number "5" in the middle reel 711M. To be done. The second sub symbol 713B is provided in place of the symbol "4" in the main symbol 712, and is larger than the first sub symbol 713A as the other sub symbol 713 so that the player can easily recognize it. It is composed by.

In addition, the first sub-pattern 713A, each reel 711L, 711M, 711R except between the main symbol 712 numbered "3" and the main symbol 712 numbered "5" in the middle reel 711M. It is arranged between the main symbols 712 arranged in.

The reels 711L, 711M, 711R are arranged such that the front side thereof protrudes forward from the front surface of the base body 701, have a semi-circular cross section when viewed from the front view left side, and extend in the left-right direction. Is covered with a resin cover. The resin cover is configured as a light guide plate on one surface side (for example, a back surface side) of which a predetermined decorative design (for example, a school of fish) is formed by fine irregularities, and at least one side of the resin cover above and below (for example, By irradiating light from light emitting portions (not shown) provided on the upper side and the lower side, an image of the predetermined decorative design can be displayed from the front so as to be visible.

Further, in the game board 400, as shown in FIG. 24, a holding lamp 720 that displays the number of times of holding the unit game related to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is in the opening of the central structure 420. In addition, it is provided at a lower position with respect to the reel device 710. The hold lamp 720 is composed of a number of light-emissible parts (eight in this embodiment) corresponding to the sum of the upper limit values of the number of times of holding for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Specifically, a light emitting means such as an LED is provided on the back side of each of the holding lamps 720, and the sub-control board 940 controls the light emitting means so that the holding lamp 720 overlaps the front side of the light emitting means and emits light. The part is configured to be turned on or off. The hold lamp 720 is connected to the sub-control board 940, and each lamp is individually turned on or off according to the increase/decrease in the number of times of holding the unit game related to the special symbol by the control of the sub-control board 940.

Further, the game board 400 is provided with a lottery result display device 730 inside the opening of the central structure 420 and on the right side of the holding lamp 720. The lottery result display device 730 is a device that suggests the lottery result of the reserved full tank effect to the player by a variable display different from the variable display related to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol). It is composed of (four in this embodiment) lamps. The lottery result display device 730 is connected to the sub control board 940, and each lamp is individually turned on or off under the control of the sub control board 940.

Here, the operation of the lottery result display device 730 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a front view for explaining the operation of the lottery result display device 730. Note that, in FIG. 26, the reel device 710 and the holding lamp 720 are also displayed together.

As shown in FIG. 26, the lottery result display device 730 is composed of four lamps 730A to 730D. The first lamp 730A is the smallest lamp among the lamps 730A to 730D and is arranged on the leftmost side. The second lamp 730B is the second smallest lamp and is arranged on the right side of the first lamp 730A. The third lamp 730C is the second largest lamp and is arranged on the right side of the second lamp 730B. The fourth lamp 730D is the largest lamp and is arranged on the right side of the third lamp 730C.

During the variable display of the decorative symbols by the reel device 710, that is, during the rotation of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R, the number of times the unit game for special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is held reaches the upper limit. Then, in the lottery result display device 730, as shown in FIG. 26(a), one of the lamps 730A to 730D looks like a roulette wheel in the right direction (arrow Q direction) from the first lamp 730A. After the fourth lamp 730D is lit so as to sequentially move, and then the fourth lamp 730D is lit, the pattern returns to the first lamp 730A again and sequentially moves rightward from the first lamp 730A and is lit. The display is also referred to as “lamp fluctuation display”).

In the lamp fluctuation display by the lottery result display device 730, the moving speed of the lighting lamps in the lamps 730A to 730D (lighting interval of the lamps) is fast, and after the high speed fluctuation, the moving speed is gradually reduced, and the lamp fluctuation is gradually decreased. When a predetermined variable display time elapses from the start of the display, one of the lamps 730A to 730D that corresponds to the lottery result of the reserved full production is turned on and finally stopped (stopped display).

More specifically, when the appearance of the pending full tank production is selected in the pending full tank production lottery, as shown in FIG. 26B, the lottery result display device 730 displays the lamps 730A to 730D. After performing the variable display, the fourth lamp 730D is turned on and stopped. On the other hand, when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is not selected in the reserved full tank effect lottery, the lottery result display device 730 causes the lamps other than the fourth lamp 730D, that is, the first lamp 730A and the second lamp 730B. , Or the third lamp 730C is stopped and displayed.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the timing at which the stop display is performed on the lottery result display device 730 is fixedly displayed after the reach display appears in the variable display of the decorative symbol performed on the reel device 710. A configuration is provided for adjusting the variation display time of the variation display (ramp variation display) by the lottery result display device 730 so as to deviate from the period (hereinafter, this period is also referred to as a “reach effect period”).

Specifically, when the lamp fluctuation display by the lottery result display device 730 is started by the number of times of holding of the unit game relating to the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) has reached the upper limit, the lamp variation is displayed. On the other hand, the elapse timing of the predetermined basic variation display time (for example, 3 seconds) (that is, the timing at which the stop display is performed in the lottery result display device 730) is the reach in the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in the reel device 710. In the production period, the fluctuation display time of the lamp fluctuation display is extended.

The sub-control board 940, when starting the lamp fluctuation display by the lottery result display device 730 when the number of times of holding the unit game related to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches the upper limit, is being executed. It is determined whether the variable display of the decorative pattern is the variable display including the reach display.

Next, when the sub-control board 940 determines in the above determination that the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed is the variable display including the reach display, when the lamp variable display is performed only for the basic variable display time, , It is determined whether or not the timing of stop display on the lottery result display device 730 arrives during the reach effect period in the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed.

Further, when the sub-control board 940 determines in the above determination that it is time to stop and display in the lottery result display device 730 during the reach production period in the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed, in the lottery result display device 730. The variation display time of the lamp variation display is extended so that the timing of the stop display comes after the reach effect period in the variation display of the decorative pattern that is being executed ends (that is, after the confirmation display is made).

For example, the lamp fluctuation display may be changed so that the timing of stop display on the lottery result display device 730 comes after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the timing at which the finalized display is displayed in the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed. Extend the variable display time. The variation display time of the lamp variation display may be extended so that the timing of the stop display on the lottery result display device 730 comes at the timing when the confirmation display is displayed in the variation display of the decorative symbol that is being executed.

Alternatively, a period from the timing at which the lamp variation display is stopped and displayed on the lottery result display device 730 when the variation display is performed for the basic variation display time to the timing at which the final display is displayed in the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed ( Hereinafter, this period may also be referred to as a “reach production remaining period”), and the fluctuation display time of the lamp fluctuation display may be extended by a uniform time. In this case, for example, if the reach production remaining period is 5 seconds or less, the variation display time of the lamp variation display is extended by 6 seconds, and if the reach production remaining period is 5 seconds or more and 10 seconds or less, the lamp variation display is displayed. The variable display time may be extended by 11 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27 to FIG. 29, the prefetching effect executed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. The "read-ahead effect" is a kind of suggestive effect, and when the right of the unit game related to the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is suspended, the special symbol lottery for the suspension is performed. Based on the result, it is an effect that gives a notice about a specific game state (for example, a special game state) that occurs after the end of the unit game performed by the digestion of the hold.

Here, the pre-reading effect that gives a notice about a specific game state that occurs after the end of the unit game may be an effect that always transits to a specific game state when the effect occurs, or the effect When the occurrence occurs, it may be a transition to a specific game state, but may be an effect that can be executed even if it does not transition to a specific game state, an effect that makes the player expect a transition to a specific game state. including. The pre-reading effect is not limited to an effect that gives a notice of a specific game state that occurs immediately after the end of the unit game in which the effect is executed, but a specific game state that occurs after one or more variable displays are executed. It may be a production that gives notice.

27 and 28 are schematic diagrams showing the transition of the display by the reel device 710 when the second sub-symbol predictor notice is given, and FIG. 29 is the transition of the display by the reel device 710 when the countdown notice is given. It is a schematic diagram which shows.

The second sub-symbol precursor notice and the countdown notice are both types of pre-reading effects. The sub-control board 940 determines whether to execute the pre-reading effect based on the predetermined effect target information received from the main control board 920, and what kind of pre-reading effect is to be executed when the pre-reading effect is executed. decide.

Specifically, when the starting prize of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is generated, the main control board 920, based on the value of the random number acquired based on the occurrence of the starting symbol, the starting prize. While performing the corresponding special symbol lottery, the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning is determined. This determination is performed before the variable display executed based on the start winning is started. The main control board 920, the information corresponding to whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is won (hereinafter, also referred to as "win/win correspondence information"), and the variable display time that has been or will be determined. The information corresponding to (hereinafter also referred to as “variable display time correspondence information”) is used as effect target information, and a command including the effect target information is output to the sub-control board 940.

Here, the effect target information may be information selected or determined based on the value of the random number acquired by the main control board 920 based on the occurrence of the start winning. For example, the information indicating whether or not the player has won The information indicating the display time may be used as the production target information, and for example, information indicating a rough variable display time such as whether or not the variable display includes the reach display as the variable display time is output as the variable display time corresponding information. Good. In addition, the value of the acquired random number itself is used as the performance target information, and the value of the random number itself acquired by the main control board 920 is output to the sub control board 940, and the same selection is made for both the main control board 920 and the sub control board 940. It may be configured to include control for determining the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the variable display time depending on the method.

The command including the effect target information may be a hold command or a command dedicated to outputting the effect target information. Further, the effect target information may not include the variable display time correspondence information, and may be configured by only the hit/miss information. When the sub-control board 940 receives the effect target information from the main control board 920, based on the effect target information and the number of times of holding the right of the unit game related to the special symbol, the unit game corresponding to the effect target information is generated. It is determined whether or not to execute a pre-reading effect for giving advance notice of the game state that occurs after the end. When the sub-control board 940 determines to execute the pre-reading effect, it determines the type of the pre-reading effect to be executed. In addition, when execution of the prefetch effect is determined, the unit game of the special symbol for the effect target information corresponding to the prefetch effect is also referred to as “variable display of the prefetch object”.

First, with reference to FIG. 27 and FIG. 28, the second sub symbol precursor warning will be described. The second sub-symbol predictor notice, the lost symbol including the second sub-symbol 713B of the middle reel 711M is displayed as the stop symbol on the middle line L2 which is one of the effective lines, and then the variable display of the prefetch target is executed. This is a pre-reading effect in which the middle reel 711M is kept stopped without changing (rotating). The control of the second sub symbol warning is performed by the sub control board 940, and the control of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R described below is performed by the sub control board 940.

The "effective line" is a line that transitions to the special game state when the big hit symbol is displayed as a stop symbol on the line. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, the uppermost upper line L1, the lowermost lower line L3, and the middle line L2 between the upper line L1 and the lower line L3 are three. A valid line is set. The number of effective lines is not limited to the above-mentioned form, and may be more, such as five effective lines including two obliquely upward and downward rightward effective lines, or a small number such as only the middle stage line L2. You may.

For example, when the start winning of the special symbol to be prefetched occurs in the state where the number of times of holding the unit game of the special symbol is 2, as shown in FIG. 27, the variable display two before the prefetch target is started. After that, the variation display ends when the lost symbol including the second sub symbol 713B of the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed on the middle stage line L2 which is one of the activated lines as a stopped symbol.

More specifically, the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R that are changed in the variable display two before the prefetch target are first stopped so that the middle reel 711M displays the second sub symbol 713B on the middle line L2. To control. Since the second sub symbol 713B is a symbol that does not form a big hit symbol, the second sub symbol 713B is displayed on the middle line L2, so that the big hit symbol is not stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, but the middle line. It is shown to the player that the lost symbol has already been stopped and displayed as the stopped symbol which is stopped and displayed on L2.

When the middle reel 711M is stopped, then, the left reel 711M is controlled so as to be stopped while the main symbol 712 is displayed on the middle line L2. In each reel 711L, 711M, 711R, since the main symbol 712 and the sub symbol 713 (713A, 713B) are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, the second sub symbol 713B of the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2. In the state in which the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711R is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, the symbols of the left reel 711L and the middle reel 711R are displayed in any of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the lower line L3. It is shown to the player that the reach display is not formed with the symbol and the lost symbol is already stopped and displayed on all the activated lines L1 to L3.

After the left reel 711L is stopped, the right reel 711R is controlled to be stopped. The right reel 711R controls so that the stop symbol stopped and displayed on the middle stage line L2 is different depending on whether it is the variable display of the prefetch target or the variable display performed before the prefetch target. When the variable display is performed before the prefetch target, the main symbol 712 or the sub symbol 713 which is not the reach display in the combination with the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711L stopped on the middle line L2 is controlled to be stopped. To do. Therefore, in the variable display two before the prefetch target, the player is informed that the reach display is not formed by the left and right reels 711L and 711R on each of the activated lines, and the variable display is stopped with a missing symbol. indicate.

After the end of the variable display two before the prefetch target, the variable display in the unit game of the special symbol that has been suspended next (variable display one before the prefetch target) is started. In the variable display, the left and right reels 711L, while the middle reel 711M is stopped without changing (rotating) (that is, while the state in which the second sub symbol 713B is displayed in the middle line L2 is maintained), The fluctuation of 711R is started.

The "state in which the middle reel 711M is stopped without changing (rotating)" is not limited to the middle reel 711M being completely stopped, and the second sub symbol 713B is within a predetermined range including the middle line L2. It may be accompanied by an operation such as rocking, for example, in a state in which the second sub-pattern 713B is moving up and down and stopped within a range overlapping with a virtual straight line as the middle line L2 in a front view. Alternatively, in this state, the middle reel 711M may be stopped without changing (rotating).

The left and right reels 711L and 711R that fluctuate in the previous variable display of the prefetch target are controlled so that the left reel 711L first stops in a state in which one of the main symbols 712 is displayed on the middle line L2. Therefore, even in the variable display, similarly to the above-described variable display two before the prefetch target, in the situation where the right reel 711R is variably displayed, the lost symbols have already been stopped and displayed on all activated lines. It is suppressed that the reach display is formed by the symbol of the left reel 711L and the symbol of the middle reel 711R as shown by the person.

Here, in the pre-reading effect in the present embodiment, only the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R are changed, and reach display is formed or not formed by these two reels 711L and 711R, and reach display is performed. In order that the player can pay attention to whether or not the main symbol 712 is formed, the variation display in which the variation of the middle reel 711M is not performed is intentionally set. In this case, if a combination of some of the big hit symbols is stopped and displayed by the symbols on the left reel 711L and the symbols on the middle reel 711M, the player recognizes that the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R are directed to the player. There is a possibility that the reach display is formed by the left reel 711L and the middle reel 711M, and it is expected that the special effect is developed. Therefore, during execution of the prefetching effect, when the left reel 711L is stopped, the reach display is controlled not to be formed depending on the design of the left reel 711L and the design of the middle reel 711M.

The pre-reading effect should be controlled by changing the probability (expectation level) of transitioning to the special game state depending on how many times before the variable display of the pre-reading target the pre-reading effect has started. Is preferable, the larger the number of times the variable display is continuously executed, it is preferable to control so that the probability (expectation) of transitioning to the special game state is set higher, and the main symbol 712 as a big hit symbol. The number of prize balls (for example, the number of rounds) that the player can obtain in the special game state is set differently according to the type, or the game state transitioning after the special game state is the main symbol 712 as a jackpot symbol. It is preferable to set it differently depending on the type because the type of the main symbol 712 forming the reach display stopped and displayed on the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R in the pre-reading effect can be noticed.

After stopping the left reel 711L, similarly to the variation display before the variation display being executed, the main symbol 712 or the sub symbol that is not the reach display in the combination with the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711L stopped on the middle line L2 The right reel 711R is controlled to stop so that 713 is stopped and displayed. As a result, even in the variable display one before the prefetch target, as in the above-described variable display two before the prefetch target, each of the activated lines L1, L2, L3 is reached by the left and right reels 711L, 711R. The player is shown the state in which no display is formed, and the variable display is stopped and displayed with a lost design.

Here, as the stop control of the right reel 711R during the pre-reading effect, the player can take time to pay attention to whether or not the reach display is performed in combination with the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711L, or not. The main symbol 712 of the right reel 711R (in this embodiment, the same main symbol 712) capable of forming a reach display in combination with the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711L is near the middle line L2 and is slightly closer to the upper side. The movement is controlled to be slower, and the speed is controlled so that the speed becomes even slower so that the vehicle may stop where it overlaps the middle line L2. Then, in the variable display before the prefetch target, the main symbol 712 is moved to the lower side from a state where it is likely to stop at a position where it overlaps with the middle line L2, and the main symbol 712 stops at the lower line L3, and the middle line L2. The sub-pattern 713 may be controlled to stop.

After the end of the variable display immediately preceding the prefetch target, the variable display of the prefetch target is started. In the variable display of the pre-reading target, the left and right reels 711L and 711R are also changed in a state in which the middle reel 711M is stopped without changing, similarly to the above-described variable display of the pre-reading target.

As shown in FIG. 28, the left and right reels 711L and 711R that change in the variable display of the prefetch target are controlled to form the reach display on the middle line L2 and stop the display. For example, in the variable display of the prefetch target, like the variable display before the prefetch target illustrated above, the main symbol 712 that is the same as the main symbol 712 that is stopped on the left reel 711L is likely to stop when it overlaps with the middle line L2. It may be controlled so as to be even slower, and then, from a state where it is likely to stop at a position where it overlaps with the middle-stage line L2, it may be controlled so that the perfect symbol 712 and the main symbol 712 stop at the middle-stage line L2.

In the variable display of the pre-reading target, after the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stopped and displayed while forming the reach display, the change of the middle reel 711M is started, and then the middle reel 711M is stopped, so that the change of the pre-reading target is changed. The display ends. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 by the stop of the middle reel 711M, after the stop display (that is, after the end of the variable display of the prefetch target), the game state transitions to the special game state. .. On the other hand, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 by the stop of the middle reel 711M, after the stop display, the game state is set to the normal game state without transitioning to the special game state.

As for the second sub-symbol predictor notice, in the above, the case where the starting winning of the special symbol to be pre-read is generated in the state where the number of holdings of the unit game of the special symbol is 2 is exemplified, but the unit of the special symbol When the start prize of the special symbol that is the prefetch target occurs in the state where the number of times the game is held is 1, or when the number of holding the number of unit games of the special symbol is 3 or more, the start prize of the special symbol that is the target of the prefetch is Even when it occurs, it may be configured to give the second sub-symbol predictor similarly.

Next, the countdown notice will be described with reference to FIG. The countdown notice is a look-ahead effect that counts down the number of change displays executed before the change display of the read-ahead target is executed in the change display before the change display of the read-ahead target by the number included in the main symbol 712. .. The control of the countdown notice is performed by the sub control board 940.

For example, when the start winning of the special symbol to be prefetched occurs in the state where the number of holdings of the unit game of the special symbol is 3, as shown in FIG. 29, the variable display 3 before the prefetch target is started. After that, the variable display is stopped after the main symbol 712 with the number “3” on the middle reel 711M is positioned in the middle line L2, and then the left and right reels 711L and 711R are activated lines L1 and L2. , L3, the stop symbol is stopped so as to be a lost symbol, and the process ends.

After the end of the variable display three prior to the prefetch target, the variable display in the unit game of the special symbol that has been suspended next (variable display two before the prefetch target) is started. The variable display is stopped after the main symbol 712 with the number “2” on the middle reel 711M is positioned in the middle line L2, and then the left and right reels 711L and 711R are activated lines L1, L2, L3. In, it ends by being stopped so that the stop symbol becomes a lost symbol.

After the end of the variable display two before the prefetch target is started, the variable display one before the prefetch target is started, and in the variable display, the main symbol 712 with the number “1” on the middle reel 711M is the middle line. After being stopped in the state of being located at L2, the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stopped by stopping the stop symbols on each of the activated lines L1, L2, and L3 so as to be lost symbols.

After the end of the preceding variable display of the prefetch target, the variable display of the prefetch target is started, and the big hit symbol or the lost symbol is stopped as a stop symbol. In the variable display of the prefetch target, the left reel 711L, the right reel 711R, and the middle reel 711M are stopped in this order.

In addition, as for the countdown notice, in the above, the case where the starting prize of the special symbol to be prefetched occurs in the state where the number of holdings of the unit game of the special symbol is 3 is illustrated, but the number of holdings of the unit game of the special symbol is held. When the start winning of the special symbol to be prefetched occurs in the state of 2 or when the start winning of the special symbol to be prefetched occurs in the state where the number of holdings of the unit game of the special symbol is 4 or more Similarly, the countdown notice may be given in advance. Further, in the state where the number of times of holding the unit game of the special symbol is 2, a countdown notice may be given when the starting winning of the special symbol to be read ahead occurs.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the number of times of holding the special symbol reaches the upper limit, the lottery result display device 730 displays the lamp fluctuation for a predetermined fluctuation display time, and then the lamps 730A to 730D. Since the lottery result of the held full tank production lottery is notified by the position of the lamp that is stopped and displayed, it is possible to appropriately amplify the expectation for the execution of the held full tank production during the period in which the lamp fluctuation display is executed. ..

In particular, since the position of the lamp to be stopped and displayed is different depending on whether the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected in the reserved full tank effect lottery or when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is not selected, It is easy for the person to intuitively judge whether or not the appearance of the reserved full production is selected from the position of the lamp that is stopped and displayed. In addition, since the stop display for notifying the lottery result of the held full production effect lottery is performed within the range of the lamps 730A to 730D that form the lottery result display device 730, the line of sight of the player when seeing the stop display is It is hard to scatter and the player can easily grasp the position of the stop display.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result display device 730 displays the lottery result of the pending full tank production lottery, the stop display (that is, the display of the lottery result of the pending full tank production lottery) is performed. The timing is configured to be out of the reach production period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the stop display on the lottery result display device 730 during an effect that the player wants to pay attention to, such as a suggestion effect executed in the reach effect period. As a result, the player's interest can be concentrated on effects such as suggestive effects that are executed during the reach effect period, so that the expectation that the player has for the variable display that is being executed due to the suggestive effects can be improved appropriately. Can be made In addition, since the display time of the stop display on the lottery result display device 730 does not overlap with the display time of the suggestion effect or the like, the player misses the lottery result of the held full production lottery displayed by the lottery result display device 730. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as a second sub-symbol predictive notice, after the loss symbol including the second sub-symbol 713B of the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, before the variable display of the prefetch target. In the variable display executed in step 1 and the variable display of the prefetch target, since the variable display of the left and right reels 711L and 711R is performed while the middle reel 711M is stopped, the player changes the left and right reels 711L and 711R. Since the display is started, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the lottery result for the variable display of the prefetch target that comes after that.

In particular, since the middle reel 711M that has been stopped from the variation display before the variation display of the prefetch target starts variation in synchronization with the reach display being formed on the middle line L2 by the left and right reels 711L and 711R, I strongly impressed that the end time of the variable display of the prefetch target (that is, the display of the lottery result for the variable display of the prefetch target) was approaching, thereby further increasing the expectation of the lottery result for the variable display of the prefetch target. be able to.

Also, in the second sub-symbol warning, the middle reel 711M stopped prior to the left and right reels 711L and 711R is synchronized with the fact that the reach display is formed on the middle line L2 by the left and right reels 711L and 711R. Since it continues to be stopped until it is changed, it is easy to attract the player's attention to the changing reel 711M in the change display of the prefetch target, and it is possible to suitably increase the expectation of the lottery result for the change display of the prefetch target. ..

Further, in the second sub-symbol predictor notice, in the middle reel 711M that has been stopped from the variable display prior to the variable display of the prefetch target, the second sub-pattern 713B that continues to be stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 constitutes a big hit symbol. Since it is a non-symbol, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle line L2 in the variable display executed before the variable display of the prefetch target, that is, before the variable display of the prefetch target is executed. ..

Further, in the second sub-symbol predictor notice, in the variable display before the variable display of the prefetch target, a part of the symbols that do not form the big hit symbol, such as the second sub-symbol 713B, is a middle symbol row of the middle line L2 ( Since it continues to be displayed on the middle reel 711M) during the entire period of the variable display, the player recognizes that the big hit symbol is not displayed on the middle line L2 in the variable display before the variable display of the prefetch target, and thereafter, It is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for the variable display of the read-ahead target that arrives.

In particular, in the second sub-symbol predictor notice, the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row (middle reel 711M) of the middle line L2 are the second sub symbol 713B that is uniquely provided on the middle reel 711M among the sub symbols 713. Therefore, it is easy to get the player's attention, and it is easy to let the player recognize that the second sub-symbol precursor notice has started. Further, in the second sub-symbol predictor notice of the present embodiment, the second sub-symbol 713B is, among the plurality of activated lines L1, L2, L3, the middle symbol row (middle reel 711M) of the middle-stage line L2 located in the middle. Since this is also displayed, it is easy to attract the player's attention in this respect as well, and it is easy for the player to recognize that the second sub-symbol precursor notice has started.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as the countdown notice, in the variable display before the variable display of the prefetch target, the number of the variable display executed before the variable display of the prefetch target is executed is set to the middle reel 711M. Since it counts down by the number included in the main symbol 712, the player visually recognizes the main symbol 712 of the middle reel 711M in the variable display during execution, and thereafter, the variable display of the prefetch target is executed. It is possible to grasp the number of times of variable display executed. Since the number of times is counted down every time the variable display is performed, it is possible to amplify the expectation of the lottery result for the variable display of the prefetch target that is gradually approaching.

Further, in the countdown notice, the countdown of the number of times of variable display executed before the variable display of the prefetch target is executed is performed by changing the main symbol 712 of the reel to which the decorative symbol (main symbol 712, sub symbol 713) is variably displayed. Since it is performed using the player, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the countdown.

Further, in the countdown notice, the middle reel 711M, which counts down the number of variable displays executed before the variable display of the prefetch target is executed, is stopped prior to the left and right reels 711L and 711R. Since it is easy to distinguish the reel (middle reel 711M) to be performed from the other reels (left and right reels 711L and 711R), it is possible to prevent the player from missing the countdown.

<Eighth Embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment, the base 401 of the game board 400X is configured as a flat plate member having light transmissivity (translucency), and the characteristics of the base 401 are used to make the game interesting. Has been devised to enhance the. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to seventh embodiments will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 30 and FIG. 31, using the light-transmitting substrate 401, the display area of the reel device 710 is exceeded by the display area where the reel device 710 can be viewed in front view and the outer portion thereof. A school of fish will be described as an example of the light-emitting display for effect displayed as. 30A is an enlarged front view around the reel device 710 in the game board 400X, and FIG. 30B is a simplified main configuration of the game board 400X taken along the line AA in FIG. 30A. FIG. 31A is a simplified cross-sectional view of the main configuration including the reel device 710 taken along the line BB of FIG. 30A, and FIG. It is a front view for explaining the school of fish displayed as.

Note that the central structure 420 is not shown in FIGS. 30(a), 30(b), and 31(b). Further, in FIG. 30B, for reference, a part of the nail 411 provided on the base body 401 is illustrated, and the outer shape of the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710 is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line, and the rear plate. 223 is shown by a dashed-dotted line. Further, in FIG. 31A, the rear plate 223 is illustrated by a dashed line for reference. 30(b) and 31(a), cross-section hatching is omitted.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the base 401 of the game board 400X is configured as a light-transmissive flat plate member. As shown in FIG. 30A, the base 401 is formed with an opening 401D that constitutes an opening to which the central structure 420 is attached. The central structure 420 is made of a translucent resin material that is attached by being fitted into the opening 401D from the front and allows a part of the school of fish displayed on the back side to be visible. The illustration is omitted in FIG.

On the front surface of the base 401, on the left side and the right side of the reel device 710, there are drawn fish patterns 741 of various sizes, which form a part of a school of fish (a school of fish) that continues in the left direction. It is drawn by printing a colored paint having a light property. The fish pattern 741 drawn on the base 401 also includes a pattern partially cut off by the peripheral edge (edge) of the opening 401D like the pattern 741A.

Like the base 401, the base 701 disposed on the back surface side of the game board 400 is also configured as a light-transmissive flat plate member. As shown in FIG. 30A, on the front surface of the base body 701, a part of a school of fish that faces left along with the fish drawn by the design 741 inside the opening 401D and on the left side and the right side of the reel device 710. The fish pattern 742 that constitutes the above is drawn in various sizes.

The fish pattern 742 drawn on the base body 701 is paired with a pattern 741 (for example, the pattern 741A), which is only a part of the fish by itself like the pattern 742A but is partially interrupted by the peripheral edge of the opening 401D. It also includes the pattern that makes up one fish when viewed from the front.

Further, the fish pattern 742 drawn on the base body 701 includes a pattern partly interrupted by the boundary with the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710 like the patterns 742B, 742C and 742D. The pattern 742B drawn on the left side of the resin cover 715 and the pattern 742D drawn on the right side of the resin cover 715 may be one side and the other side in which one fish is divided into left and right, As a result, it can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the pattern continuously expresses a group of fish as an integrated object in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 30B, a board surface light emitting device 490A which is a part of the board surface light emitting device 490 is provided on the back side of the base 401. The board surface light emitting device 490A is arranged such that the light emitting means E1 such as an LED can emit light toward the front where the base 401 is located. Therefore, by turning on (emits) the light emitting means E1 arranged on the back side of the area where the fish pattern 741 is drawn on the base 401, the pattern 741 emerging in the light can be displayed.

On the other hand, on the back side of the base body 701, a board surface light emitting device 490B which is a part of the board surface light emitting device 490 is provided. The board surface light emitting device 490B includes a light emitting means E2 such as an LED and a light emitting means E4 (see FIG. 31A) directed to the base 701. Therefore, by turning on the light emitting means E2 arranged on the back side of the area where the fish pattern 742 is drawn on the base 701, the pattern 742 emerging in the light can be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30B, between the opening 401D of the base body 401 and the peripheral edge of the base body 701, a plate-like member having a light-transmitting property extending in the front-back direction substantially perpendicular to the base bodies 401, 701. Is provided with a side wall portion 702. On the surface of the side wall portion 702 (the surface facing the inside of the opening 401D), a pattern 741 (for example, a pattern 741A) partially cut off by the peripheral edge of the opening 401D and a pattern 742 (for example, a pattern 742A) paired with the pattern 741. ) Is connected to the picture (not shown). As a result, it is possible to prevent the fish configured by the combination of the design 741 and the design 742 from being seen as being divided by the step between the base 401 and the base 701.

A board surface light emitting device 490C that is a part of the board surface light emitting device 490 is provided on the back side of the side wall portion 702 (outside the opening 401D). The board surface light emitting device 490C includes a light emitting means E3 such as an LED provided so as to be able to emit light toward the side wall portion 702. Therefore, by turning on the light emitting means E3 arranged on the back side of the area where the picture is drawn on the side wall portion 702, the picture emerging in the light can be displayed.

The resin cover 715 of the reel device 710 is a light-transmitting cover that covers the front side of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R. As shown in FIG. 31A, the resin cover 715 of the present embodiment is configured in an arc shape whose side cross section curves along the cross section of each reel such as the middle reel 711M. The resin cover 715 includes a translucent outer cover 715A integrated with the base body 701, and a light guide plate 715B arranged on the rear side of the outer cover 715A.

In the light guide plate 715B, a fish pattern 743 forming a part of a school of fish facing left is formed with fine irregularities on one surface side (for example, the back surface side) of a resin plate having light transparency. The light emitting means E4 such as an LED provided in the board surface light emitting device 490B is arranged along the upper end of the light guide plate 715B with respect to the upper end thereof, and along the lower end thereof with respect to the lower end of the light guide plate 715B. It is arranged.

The light guide plate 715B is visible from the front side to the back side when the light emitting means E4 is not turned on, and the player covers the resin cover 715 (the outer cover 715A and the light guide plate 715B) as shown in FIG. The reels 711L, 711M, and 711R can be visually recognized through. On the other hand, when the light emitting means E4 is turned on, the light emitted from the light emitting means E4 is incident on the upper and lower ends of the light guide plate 715B, whereby the light guide plate 715B (resin cover 715) is exposed to the light shown in FIG. As shown in (b), a fish pattern 743 forming a part of the school of fish is displayed.

Like the patterns 743B and 743C, the fish pattern 743 displayed on the light guide plate 715B is a pattern in which a part of the fish is drawn by itself, but a part of the pattern is interrupted by the boundary with the resin cover 715. Also included is a picture that forms a fish when viewed from the front when paired with 742 (for example, pictures 742B and 742C).

The patterns 743B, 743C and the like, which form a fish by pairing with the pattern 742 that is partly interrupted by the boundary with the resin cover 715, are predetermined below the top of the resin cover 715 located at the top. Are formed so as to be displayed within the range of the regions R1 and R2.

The “predetermined region” is, for example, 2/5 from the top side in the height difference (height in the front-rear direction) between the top of the resin cover 715 (the top of the outer cover 715A) and the upper and lower ends of the outer cover 715A. It is a lower region, preferably a region below 1/2 from the top side in the height difference, and may be a region below 3/5 from the top side in the height difference. The end of the “predetermined region” on the side of the base 701 may or may not be in contact with the base 701, but is preferably in contact with the base 701.

Since the regions R1 and R2 are closer to the surface (front surface) of the base body 701 than the vicinity of the top of the resin cover 715, a pattern 742 (for example, a pattern 742B, 742C) and the pattern 743 paired with the pattern 742 (for example, the patterns 743B and 743C) can be kept low in height (height in the front-rear direction). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the distortion when the pair of the patterns 742 and 743 is viewed from the front, and it is possible to make it difficult for the fish pattern formed by the pattern 742 and the pattern 743 to form a sense of strangeness.

Here, each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R of the reel device 710 has a shape that bulges in an arc shape toward the front side in a side view, and the light guide plate 715B (resin cover 715) also has a shape of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R. It is configured in a shape that bulges in an arc shape in the front side along the surface shape of. Therefore, the reels 711L, 711M, and 711L, 711M, so as to be positioned between the base 401 forming the game area where the game balls flow down and the transparent plate (rear plate 223) positioned on the front side of the base 401, or near the front of the transparent plate. 711R and the front end of the light guide plate 715B (resin cover 715) are arranged, the upper and lower ends of the display area of the reel device 710 which are visible in the front view are displaced rearward from the front surface of the base 401. It will be. The base body 701 is arranged in a plane so as to be at substantially the same front and rear positions as the upper and lower end portions of the display area of the reel device 710 that can be visually seen in a front view, whereby the fish displayed on the light guide plate 715B is displayed. A sense of unity between the design 743 and the design 742 displayed on the base body 701 can be expressed, and the design of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R located inside the base body 701 when viewed from the player side is on the base body 701. It can be emphasized and displayed in comparison with the displayed pattern 742, and the result of the win or failure can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in addition to turning on the light emitting means E4 to display the fish pattern 743 on the light guide plate 715B, by turning on the light emitting means E1 to E3, a group of fish facing the left direction can be displayed. It is possible to display in a wide area from the right side of the base 401 to the left side of the base 401 with the reel device 710 (resin cover 715) interposed therebetween. At this time, by controlling the lighting timing of the light emitting means E1 to E4, it is possible to perform an effect in which the school of fish moves from right to left in a wide area sandwiching the reel device 710.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a configuration in which the player can visually recognize the flow-down path of the game balls that have entered the upper start winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611 will be described.

FIG. 32A is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the upper and lower starting winning devices 1431 and 1432 in the game board 400X of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment. 32B is a cross-sectional view of the game board 400X taken along the line CC of FIG. 32A, and FIG. 32C is a top view of FIG. 32A viewed from above. FIG. 32D is a diagram showing the appearance of the vicinity of the information display unit 753 when a player who is playing the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment obliquely looks at the lower left direction.

Note that, in FIG. 32A, the distribution unit 1620 is shown in a schematic outer shape. In FIG. 32(c), the right side portion of the upper starting winning device 1431 is omitted, and the upper surfaces of the guide passage 1612, the first passages 1613A and 1613B, and the second sub passage 1614A are omitted.

32B and 32C, the nails 411 are illustrated except for the nails 411A (a part of the nails 411) arranged in the lower right direction from the upper side of the information display unit 753 on the left side in the front view of the gaming machine. And the lower start winning device 1432 is not shown. In addition, in FIG. 32B, for reference, a part of one of the nails 411A embedded in the base body 401 is illustrated, and other parts of the nail 411A that project to the front side of the base body 401 are illustrated. The two-dot chain line is shown, and the rear plate 223 is shown by the one-dot chain line. In FIG. 32C, for reference, a portion of the nail 411A projecting to the front side of the base body 401 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and the rear plate 223 is illustrated by a one-dot chain line.

32(b) and 32(c), for reference, a part of the game ball that has entered the upper start winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611 is shown, and part of the upper starting winning device 1431 The flow path of the is shown by the arrow.

As shown in FIGS. 32(a) to 32(c), on the back side (rear side) of the base 401 of the game board 400X, the game balls that have entered the upper start winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611 are distributed to the distribution unit 1620. A guide passage 1612 for guiding, a left and right first passages 1613A, 1613B through which the game balls sorted by the sorting unit 1620 flow down, and second passages 1614A, 1614B branching from the left and right first passages 1613A, 1613B, respectively. Is provided.

Each of these passages 1612, 1613A, 1613B, 1614A, 1614B is formed by a passage forming member 1631 provided on the back side (rear side) of the base 401, as shown in FIGS. 32(b) and 32(c). It The passage forming member 1631 is made of a resin having a light transmitting property.

As shown in FIGS. 32(b) and 32(c), the guide passage 1612 penetrates the base 401 to guide the game ball (for example, the game ball P1) entering from the entrance 1611 to the back side of the base 401. It is a passage that guides the game ball downward on the upper side of the distribution unit 1620 after guiding from the formed opening 401C to the position above the distribution unit 1620 to the back side (rear side).

The game balls that have passed through the guide passage 1612 are provided for distribution by the distribution unit 1620. The distribution unit 1620 corresponds to the distribution unit of the upper side starting winning device 1431 in the pachinko machine 100 of the seventh embodiment. That is, like the distribution unit 620, the distribution unit 1620 alternately switches the distribution destination every time the game ball enters from the entrance 1611.

Specifically, the distribution unit 1620, the game ball guided by the guide passage 1612, the left first passage 1613A located on the left side of the distribution unit 1620 in the game machine front view, or in the game machine front view The distribution is performed alternately to the right first passage 1613B located on the right side of the distribution unit 1620.

As shown in FIG. 32A, the left-side first passage 1613A will be described later among the upstream-side passage 1613A1 that constitutes the upstream-side passage in the left-side first passage 1613A and the game ball that has passed through the upstream-side passage 1613A1. It is composed of a downstream passage 1613A2 through which the game balls that have not entered the left second passage 1614A flow down.

As shown in FIG. 32(c), the upstream passage 1613A1 guides the game ball (for example, the game ball P2) distributed to the left side by the distribution unit 1620 to the left side and then to the back side (rear side). It is a passage that guides and then guides in a substantially vertical downward direction (from the front to the back in the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 32(c)).

As shown in FIGS. 32(a) and 32(c), the downstream passage 1613A2 is a passage provided downstream of the inlet of the left second passage 1614A branched from the upstream passage 1613A1. The downstream side passage 1613A2 guides the game ball guided in the substantially vertical downward direction by the upstream side passage 1613A1 to the collecting and discharging passage (not shown) after continuously guiding the gaming ball in the substantially vertical downward direction.

As shown in FIGS. 32(a) to 32(c), the left side second passage 1614A is a passage formed by branching to the left in a downwardly extending portion of the upstream passage 1613A1. The left side second passage 1614A guides the game ball (for example, the game ball P3) that has entered from the left side first passage 1613A (upstream side passage 1613A1) to the left side, and then guides in a substantially vertical downward direction like the game ball P4. After that, it guides to the collection and discharge passage.

The probability of a game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613A1 entering the left side second passage 1614A is set to be much lower than the probability of the game ball entering the downstream passage 1613A2. The probability of a game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613A1 entering the left second passage 1614A is, for example, about 1/200, and preferably about 1/2000.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), the left side starting prize switch 1441A is provided so as to be able to detect a game ball flowing down the downstream passage 1613A2. Therefore, when the game ball passing through the left side first passage 1613A enters the downstream side passage 1613A2 from the upstream side passage 1613A1, the game ball is detected by the left side starting prize winning switch 1441A.

Therefore, the game ball distributed to the left side first passage 1613A by the distribution unit 1620 enters the left side starting prize winning device 1431A by passing through the downstream side passage 1613A2, and is detected by the left side starting prize winning switch 1441A. It will be a starting prize of the design.

On the other hand, when the game ball passing through the left side first passage 1613A enters the left side second passage 1614A from the upstream side passage 1613A1, the game ball is not detected by the left side starting winning switch 1441A. Therefore, when the game ball passing through the upstream side passage 1613A1 enters the left side second passage 1614A without entering the downstream side passage 1613A2, the start winning of the first special symbol does not occur.

On the other hand, the right side first passage 1613B is, as shown in FIG. 32(a), an upstream side passage 1613B1 that constitutes an upstream side passage in the right side first passage 1613B and a game ball that has passed through the upstream side passage 1613B1. It is composed of a downstream passage 1613B2 through which game balls that have not entered the right second passage 1614B described later flow down.

As shown in FIG. 32(c), the upstream passage 1613B1 guides the game balls distributed to the right side by the distribution unit 1620 to the right side, and then to the back side (rear side) like the upstream passage 1613A1. It is a passage that guides in a substantially vertical downward direction.

As shown in FIG. 32A, the downstream passage 1613B2 is a passage provided on the downstream side of the inlet of the right second passage 1614B branched from the upstream passage 1613B1. The downstream passage 1613B2 guides the game ball, which is guided in the substantially vertical downward direction by the upstream passage 1613B1, in the substantially vertical downward direction, and then to the recovery discharge passage.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), the right second passage 1614B is a passage formed by branching to the right in a downwardly extending portion of the upstream passage 1613B1. The right side second passage 1614B guides the game ball, which has entered from the right side first passage 1613B (upstream side passage 1613B1), to the right side and then to the substantially vertical downward direction, and then to the recovery and discharge passage.

The probability of a game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613B1 entering the right side second passage 1614B is set to be much lower than the probability of the game ball entering the downstream passage 1613B2. The probability that a game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613B1 enters the right side second passage 1614B is, for example, about 1/200, and preferably about 1/2000.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), the right start prize winning switch 1441B is provided so as to detect the game ball flowing down the downstream passage 1613B2. Therefore, when the game ball passing through the right side first passage 1613B enters the downstream side passage 1613B2 from the upstream side passage 1613B1, the game ball is detected by the right start winning award switch 1441B.

Therefore, the game ball distributed to the right side first passage 1613B by the distribution unit 1620 enters the right side starting prize winning device 1431B by passing through the downstream side passage 1613B2, and is detected by the right side starting prize winning switch 1441B to be the second special prize. It will be a starting prize of the design.

On the other hand, when the game ball that passes through the right side first passage 1613B enters the right side second passage 1614B from the upstream side passage 1613B1, the game ball is not detected by the right side start winning switch 1441B. Therefore, when the game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613B1 enters the right side second passage 1614B without entering the downstream passage 1613B2, the start winning of the second special symbol does not occur.

A region J in the base 401 corresponds to a range surrounded by a thick line in FIG. 32A, and an image such as the above-described pattern 741 is not drawn in this range, and a region in which the image or the like is drawn is shown. It is configured as a region having higher visibility when viewed from the front side than the rear side. As shown in FIG. 32(a), the region J is the front of the entire left and right upstream passages 1613A1, 1613B1, the left and right downstream passages 1613A2, 1613B2 and the left and right second passages 1614A, 1614B. It is provided at the position where it overlaps.

As described above, since the passage forming member 1631 forming each of the passages 1613A1, 1613B1, 1613A2, 1613B2, 1614A, 1614B is made of a resin having a light-transmitting property, the player starts from the entrance 1611 to the upper start winning device. The flow-down path of the game ball that has entered 1431 can be visually recognized through the area J of the base 401.

Therefore, when the game ball enters the entrance 1611, the player visually recognizes the flow path of the game ball through the region J of the base 401, so that the game ball is distributed to either the left or right by the distribution unit 1620. It is possible to know whether or not the player has been assigned to the player or whether or not the player has entered the passage (that is, the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2) in which the start winning of the special symbol occurs.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32(a), information display units 751 to 754 are provided to notify the player of characteristic areas on the game board 400X.

The information display unit 751 is provided near the entrance 1611 on the front surface of the upper starting winning device 1431. The character string “IN” is displayed on the surface of the information display portion 751. Therefore, the player can recognize that the area into which the game ball has entered is the entrance 1611 of the upper start winning device 1431 by looking at the character string “IN”. That is, the character string of “IN” displayed on the information display unit 751 can be recognized by the player as the area (that is, the entrance 1611) to which the information display unit 751 is attached is the entrance of the upper start winning a prize device 1431. Information (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as "starting winning device entrance information").

The information display portion 752 is provided on the front surface of the base 401 so as to overlap the left and right downstream passages 1613A2, 1613B2 at positions near the branching positions with the second passages 1614A, 1614B. A character string of “lucky” is displayed on the surface of the information display portion 752.

Therefore, the player sees the character string of "lucky", the area where the game ball has entered (that is, the downstream passage 1613A2, 1613B2), the start of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) You can recognize that this is a winning area. That is, the character string "Lucky" displayed on the information display unit 752 is a special symbol when the area where the information display unit 752 is attached (that is, the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2) has a game ball entered. It functions as information by which the player can recognize that the area where a prize is won (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as "starting prize area information").

The information display part 753 is a passage wall forming a passage extending leftward or rightward of the second passages 1614A, 1614B in the passage forming member 1631 so as to overlap the inlets of the left and right second passages 1614A, 1614B slightly downstream. It is provided on the back side of the passage wall (for example, the passage wall portion 1631A of FIG. 32C) which is the rear side of the gaming machine in front view. The character string “OUT” is displayed on the surface of the information display portion 753.

Therefore, the player can recognize that the area where the game ball has entered (that is, the second passages 1614A, 1614B) has entered the area where the starting winning of the special symbol cannot be achieved by looking at the character string "OUT". .. That is, the character string “OUT” displayed on the information display unit 753 is a special symbol even if the game ball enters the area to which the information display unit 753 is attached (that is, the left and right second passages 1614A and 1614B). It functions as information (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as "non-start prize area information") that allows the player to recognize that the area does not generate a start prize.

The information display unit 754 is provided on the front surface of the lower starting prize winning apparatus 1432 so as to overlap the opening 1432A for guiding the game ball that has entered the lower starting prize winning apparatus 1432 to the back side (rear side) of the base 401. The character string “GO” is displayed on the surface of the information display portion 754.

Since the game ball that has entered the opening 1432A is detected by the lower start prize winning switch 1442, the player sees the character string "GO", and the area where the game ball has entered is the second special symbol start prize. It can be recognized that it is the area. That is, the character string of “GO” displayed on the information display unit 754 functions as the start winning area information similar to “Lucky” displayed on the information display unit 752.

Among the information display portions 751 to 754, on the surface of the information display portions 751, 752, 754, there is information that gives the player an expectation for a starting winning of a special symbol, such as starting winning device entrance information and starting winning area information. It is displayed. The information display portions 751, 752, 754 are provided at positions such as the upper and lower starting prize winning devices 1431, 1432 and the front surface of the base 401 that the player can directly see through the front plate 222 and the rear plate 223.

Therefore, since the information display portions 751, 752, 754 are arranged at positions that are relatively easy to be visually recognized, when the game ball enters the area corresponding to each of the information display portions 751, 752, 754, the special holding by the player is held. The expectation for the starting winning of the symbol can be appropriately amplified.

As shown in FIG. 32A, from the upper side to the right side of the information display portion 753 on the left side, five nails 411A arranged in descending right direction are arranged. As shown in FIGS. 32(b) and 32(c), the information display portion 753 on the left side is within the range of the vertical direction and the range of the horizontal direction in which these five nails 411A are arranged. Is also set up to fit.

When the nail 411A is erected in such an arrangement with respect to the information display unit 753 on the left side, and the player whose viewpoint is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 while playing is obliquely looking at the lower left direction, To the player, as shown in FIG. 32(d), the information display portion 753 on the left side seems to overlap with the rear side of the five nails 411A.

As a result, the visibility of the information display portion 753 on the left side is obstructed by the five nails 411A overlapping the front side when the player who is playing the game obliquely looks at the lower left direction. On the surface of the information display portion 753, information such as a character string of "OUT" (that is, non-starting winning area information) that reduces the expectation of the player for the starting winning of the special symbol is displayed. Since the visibility of the information display unit 753 is obstructed by the nail 411A of the book, the impression of the character string “OUT” displayed on the information display unit 753 is unlikely to remain for the player.

Even if the game ball that has entered the upper start winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611 enters the area corresponding to the information display portion 753 (that is, the second passage 1614A, 1614B on the left and right), the special symbol does not start. The information display unit 753 can prevent the player from making a strong impression. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player's discouragement that the starting prize of the special symbol has not been achieved even though the game ball has entered the upper starting prize device 1431 from the entrance 1611.

Similarly to the information display unit 753 on the left side, the five nails 411B arranged in descending left direction are arranged on the information display unit 753 on the right side from the upper side to the left side of the information display unit 753 (see FIG. 32(a. )), the information display portion 753 is provided so as to be included in any of the vertical range and the horizontal range in which the five nails 411B are arranged.

Therefore, when a player whose viewpoint is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 because he is playing the game obliquely looks at the lower right direction, the information display unit 753 on the right side of the player is behind the five nails 411B. Since it appears to overlap on the side, the visibility of the information display portion 753 is hindered by the five nails 411A overlapping on the front side. As a result, like the case of the information display portion 753 on the left side described above, it is possible to suppress the player's disappointment with respect to the fact that the starting winning of the special symbol is not achieved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 32A, in each of the left and right information display portions 753, the character string of “OUT” displayed on the surface thereof has the nail 411A or the nail 411B corresponding to each information display portion 753. Are arranged along the arrangement direction of. That is, the character string “OUT” displayed on the information display unit 753 on the left side is arranged in the lower right direction similarly to the arrangement of the nails 411A, and the character string “OUT” displayed on the information display unit 753 on the right side is , The nails 411B are arranged in the lower left direction similarly to the arrangement of the nails 411B.

In this way, by arranging the character strings displayed on the information display unit 753 along the arrangement direction of the nails 411A or 411B, for example, as shown in FIG. Since the nail 411A can be overlapped on the rear side, the visibility of the information display portion 753 can be appropriately reduced.

Since the information display portion 753 is provided on the back side (rear side) of the base body 401 as shown in FIG. 32C, the visibility of the information display portion 753 viewed through the base body 401 is The visibility is lower than the visibility of the information display portions 751, 752, 754 that can be visually recognized without passing through the base 401.

In particular, in front of the information display portion 753, not only the base 401 but also the passage wall portion 1631A and the like, among the passage wall portions forming the passage extending to the left or right of the second passages 1614A and 1614B, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Since there is the passage wall portion of, the visibility of the information display portion 753 is further reduced.

Therefore, since the base 401 and the passage wall portion 1631A overlap with the front side of the information display portion 753, the impression of the character string “OUT” displayed on the information display portion 753 is less likely to be impressive. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the discouragement of the player in the case where the starting prize of the first special symbol is not achieved even though the game ball has entered the upper starting prize device 1431 from the entrance 1611.

Further, as shown in FIG. 32(c), the upstream passage 1613A1 is configured as a passage that guides the game ball to the left side and then to the back side. Therefore, the passage wall that forms the left end of the upstream passage 1613A1. The portion 1631B is configured as a wall surface that is substantially vertical to the base body 401 and extends in the vertical direction. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, since the passage wall portion 1631B is arranged so as to overlap with the front side of the information display portion 753 on the left side in the field of view of the player who obliquely looks at the lower left direction, the information display portion 753 is visually recognized. The sex is hindered by the passage wall portion 1631B overlapping the front side. Therefore, also in this respect, the impression of the character string of "OUT" displayed on the information display portion 753 is less likely to remain in the player, so that the player is more discouraged for not having the start winning of the special symbol. Can be suppressed to.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is possible to display a group of fish facing leftward in a wide area from the right side of the base 401 to the left side of the base 401 with the reel device 710 (resin cover 715) interposed therebetween. Therefore, compared to the case where the fish school is displayed using only the light guide plate 715B of the resin cover 715, the effect of displaying the fish school can be made to have a high impression.

In particular, since the base 701 is also configured to display the pattern 742 that forms a part of a continuous school of fish facing the left direction, as in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the opening 401D of the base 401 and the light guide plate. Even if there is a structural separation from the 715B, the pattern 742 prevents discontinuity between the pattern 743 displayed on the light guide plate 715B and the pattern 741 displayed on the base 401. Can be supplemented. As a result, the effect produced by the school of fish displayed beyond the display area of the light guide plate 715B can be realized as a suitable effect in which unnaturalness due to discontinuity is suppressed.

In addition, since one fish composed of the pattern 741 and the pattern 742 is displayed at the boundary between the periphery of the opening 401D of the base 401 and the base 701 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, a continuous group of fish facing leftward is displayed. It can suppress that the nature becomes unnatural in the boundary portion. Similarly, since one fish composed of the pattern 743 and the pattern 742 is displayed at the boundary between the light guide plate 715B and the base body 701 when viewed from the front of the game machine, the continuity of the school of fish that faces toward the left side is concerned. It is also possible to suppress unnaturalness at the boundary.

Further, on the side wall portion 702 as well, a pattern (not shown) that connects the pattern 741 partially interrupted by the periphery of the opening 401D and the pattern 742 paired with the pattern 741 is displayed. The discontinuity in the height direction (front-back direction) due to the difference in height between the base body 701 and the base body 701 can be compensated by the pattern displayed on the side wall portion 702. Therefore, it is possible to more appropriately suppress unnaturalness due to discontinuity in the effect produced by the school of fish that faces to the left and continues.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the visibility of the information display unit 753 when the player who is playing the game obliquely looks at the lower left or lower right direction is such that the nails 411A and 411B overlapping the front side of the information display unit 753. Or, because it is obstructed by the passage wall portion 1631A and the passage wall portion 1631B, even if the game ball has entered the upper start winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611, the player in the case where the start winning of the special symbol is not achieved Discouraged can be suitably suppressed.

On the other hand, since the information display portion 753 is provided at a position where the nails 411A and 411B do not overlap with each other when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, when the information display portion 753 is viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the word “OUT” is displayed. It can be seen sufficiently. Therefore, the information display unit 753, for the player viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the region to which the information display unit 753 is attached is a region where the start winning of the special symbol does not occur even when the game ball enters. Can be reported appropriately.

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment, half mirrors 761A and 761B capable of reflecting light emitted from the pressing operation device 261 and the like are provided on the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to eighth embodiments will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 33(a) is a front view of the reel device 710 of the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 33(b) is a simplified cross-sectional view of the reel device 710 taken along the line DD of FIG. 33(a). .. FIG. 33C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 100 cut in the vertical direction at a substantially central position in the left-right direction in the gaming machine front view, and FIG. 33D is a pressing operation device 261 and wave motion. It is a top view of the lamp 771.

Note that, in FIG. 33B, the illustration of the light guide plate 715B and the board surface light emitting device 490B is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 33C, the island 10 on which the pachinko machine 100 is installed is also shown. Further, in FIG. 33C, for reference, the head of the player X in the game is shown, and the optical paths of the light emitted by the upper center frame light-emitting device 271 and the press operation device 261 are indicated by a chain double-dashed line. It is illustrated in. In addition, in FIGS. 33B and 33C, cross-section hatching is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B, on one surface side of the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710 (the front side of the outer cover 715A in this embodiment), among the effective lines arranged in the vertical direction, A half mirror 761A and a half mirror 761B are provided above and below the display area of the middle line, leaving the display area of the middle line. Although the resin cover 715 of the present embodiment has the configuration including the light guide plate 715B (not shown in FIG. 33B), it may be a simple transparent cover without the light guide plate 715B.

The half mirrors 761A and 761B are semi-transmissive mirrors, and transmit light from the back side (rear side) of the resin cover 715 to the front, while reflecting light from the front side (front side) of the resin cover 715. You can As the half mirrors 761A and 761B, it is possible to appropriately use a transparent plate or the like on which aluminum is vapor-deposited.

In the present embodiment, each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is configured as a hollow cylindrical body having a transparent decorative pattern drawn on the outer peripheral surface thereof. The reels 711L, 711M, 711R have a common internal structure, and the internal structure of the middle reel 711M will be representatively described below with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 33B, inside the middle reel 711M, three light emitting devices 718A to 718C that irradiate light from inside to a region visible from the resin cover 715 on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M. Is provided.

Among the light emitting devices 718A to 718C, the light emitting device 718A arranged on the uppermost side is a light emitting device that irradiates light to the upper line area of the effective line of the symbol on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M. It is provided with a light emitting means E6 such as an LED which is slightly oriented upward. By turning on (emits) the light emitting means E6, of the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M, the symbols located on the upper line can be displayed in a light emitting manner.

On the other hand, the light-emitting device 718C arranged at the lowermost side is a light-emitting device that irradiates light to the area of the lower line of the effective line, and includes a light-emitting means E8 such as an LED that is directed slightly toward the front. There is. By turning on the light emitting means E8, it is possible to cause the symbols located on the lower line among the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M to be displayed in a light emitting manner.

The light emitting device 718B arranged between the light emitting device 718A and the light emitting device 718B is a light emitting device that irradiates light to the region of the middle line of the effective line, and emits light such as an LED that is directed substantially horizontally forward. Means E7 are provided. By turning on the light emitting means E7, it is possible to cause the symbols located on the middle line among the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M to be displayed by light emission.

Lighting (light emission) and extinction of these light emitting devices 718A to 718C are independently controlled by the sub control board 940. Therefore, the symbols positioned on the upper line, the symbols positioned on the middle line, and the symbols positioned on the lower line can be independently luminescently displayed.

A partition wall 719A is provided between the light emitting device 718A and the light emitting device 718B. The partition wall 719A prevents the light emitted from the light emitting device 718A (light emitting means E6) from entering the area of the middle line, and the light emitted by the light emitting device 718B (light emitting means E7) enters the area of the upper line. It has a function to prevent that.

A partition wall 719B is provided between the light emitting device 718B and the light emitting device 718C. The partition wall 719B prevents the light emitted from the light emitting device 718B (light emitting means E7) from entering the lower line area, and the light from the light emitting device 718C (light emitting means E8) enters the middle line area. It has a function to prevent that.

When the light emitting device 718A is turned on (emits light), the half mirror 761A provided on the upper side of the display area of the middle line transmits the light from the light emitting means E6 to the front side, whereby the pattern positioned on the upper line is changed. It will be visible from the front. On the other hand, in the half mirror 761A at that position, when the light emitting device 718A or the like is turned off, the front side (front side) becomes a mirror because light is not emitted from the back side (rear side), and thus the front side (rear side) Side) to reflect light from.

Similarly, when the light emitting device 718C is turned on, the half mirror 761B provided on the lower side of the display area of the middle line transmits the light from the light emitting means E8 to the front side, whereby the pattern located on the lower line. Can be seen from the front. On the other hand, in the half mirror 761B at that position, when the light emitting device 718C and the like are turned off, the front side (front side) becomes a mirror because light is not emitted from the back side (rear side), whereby the front side (rear side) Side) to reflect light from.

As shown in FIG. 33C, the resin cover 715 that covers the front side of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R projects forward from the base body 701 in an arc shape in a side sectional view. The half mirrors 761A and 761B are provided on the upper and lower portions of the resin cover 715 along the surface of the resin cover 715 (outer cover 715A). Therefore, the half mirror 761A provided on the upper side is the light emitting device. When the 718A or the like is turned off, it functions as a mirror having a convex surface facing the front upper side in a side sectional view. Further, the half mirror 761B provided on the lower side functions as a mirror having a convex surface that faces the front lower side in a side sectional view when the light emitting device 718C and the like are turned off.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the half mirror 761A provided on the upper portion of the resin cover 715 is different from the upper central frame light emitting device 271 provided on the upper central edge portion 211A (see FIG. 5) of the front decorative body 210. It is provided at a position where the emitted light is reflected and the reflected light can be visually recognized by the player during the game. Thereby, when the upper center frame light emitting device 271 is turned on, the player can visually recognize the image G1 of the emitted upper center frame light emitting device 271 reflected on the half mirror 761A as shown in FIG. 33(a). ..

The pressing operation device 261 of the present embodiment is configured to be turned on (emitted) or turned off under the control of the sub control board 940. In other words, in the pressing operation device 261, the operation section that is pressed by the player is configured as a light emitting section having a light-transmitting property, and the light emitting means such as an LED provided on the back side of the light emitting section is provided as a sub-control board. It is turned on or off under the control of 940.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the half mirror 761B provided in the lower portion of the resin cover 715 reflects the light emitted from the pressing operation device 261 and the reflected light can be visually recognized by the player in the game. It is provided at various positions. Thereby, when the press operation device 261 is turned on, the player can visually recognize the image G2 of the emitted press operation device 261 reflected on the half mirror 761B as shown in FIG. 33(a).

Further, as shown in FIG. 33( d ), wave lamps 771 are provided on the left and right of the pressing operation device 261. The wave lamp 771 is composed of three lamps 771A to 771C arranged from the side of the pressing operation device 261 toward the outside. Each of the lamps 771A to 771C constituting the wave lamp 771 is provided with a light emitting means such as an LED on the back side thereof, and by controlling the light emitting means by the sub control board 940, the light emitting means overlaps with the front side of the light emitting means. The translucent light emitting unit is configured to be turned on or off.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the half mirror 761AB provided on the lower side portion of the resin cover 715 reflects the light emitted from the wave lamp 771 (lamps 771A to 771C) and reflects the reflected light during the game. It is provided at a position visible to the player. Accordingly, when the wave lamp 771 is turned on, the player can visually recognize the image G3 of the emitted wave lamp 771 reflected on the half mirror 761B as shown in FIG. 33(a).

Since the half mirrors 761A and 761B are not arranged in the display area of the middle line of the resin cover 715, the light emitting device 718B and the like are constantly lit to position the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R in the middle line. It is possible for the player to always see the design.

As shown in FIG. 33C, the holding lamp 720 is provided on the rear end side (the side close to the base body 701) of the lower half mirror 761B. Since the lower half mirror 761B is configured as a convex surface that faces the front lower side in a side sectional view, the light of the holding lamp 720 is likely to be reflected downward by the half mirror 761B, and is difficult for the player to see.

Therefore, the visibility of the image G2 (image of the pressing operation device 261) and the image G3 (image of the wave lamp 771) reflected on the half mirror 761B can be suppressed from being hindered by the image of the holding lamp 720 reflected on the half mirror 761B. ..

Further, while the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771 are located on the front lower side of the resin cover 715, the holding lamp 720 is on the rear end side of the lower half mirror 761B and the pressing operation device 261. It is provided at a position closer to the half mirror 761B than the wave lamp 771.

Therefore, the image G2 of the pressing operation device 261 and the image G3 of the wave lamp 771 can be visually recognized in the front region of the half mirror 761B (the region on the top side of the resin cover 715), while the holding lamp 720 that can be visually recognized by the player. Image is limited to the rear end side of the half mirror 761B. Therefore, even when the player visually recognizes the image of the holding lamp 720 reflected on the half mirror 761B, it is difficult for the image of the holding lamp 720 to hinder the visibility of the images G2 and G3.

Although not shown in FIG. 33C, the lottery result display device 730 is also on the rear end side (the side close to the base body 701) of the lower half mirror 761B, similarly to the hold lamp 720. Since it is provided at a position closer to the half mirror 761B than the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771, the visibility of the images G2 and G3 is less likely to be disturbed by the image of the lottery result display device 730 displayed on the half mirror 761B.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), between the left reel 711L and the middle reel 711M, and between the middle reel 711M and the right reel 711R, substantially along the winding direction of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R. A partition part 717 having a circular shape is provided. The partition part 717 is fixedly provided so as not to rotate independently of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R, and the reel side lamp 717A is provided in the area on the front side of the partition part 717, which is the back side of the half mirror 761B. It is provided.

The reel side lamp 717A is provided with a light emitting means such as an LED on the back side thereof, and by controlling the light emitting means by the sub-control board 940, the reel side having a light transmitting property overlapping the front side of the light emitting means. The light emitting unit as the lamp 717A is configured to be turned on or off.

In the present embodiment, the reel side lamp 717A is, for example, at a timing that is synchronized with the lighting timing of the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771, and corresponds to the emission color of the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 (same color, specific color The colors are in a corresponding relationship). Since the reel side lamp 717A is provided on the back side of the half mirror 761B, when the reel side lamp 717A is turned on, the player can visually recognize the light of the reel side lamp 717A passing through the half mirror 761B.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the upper half mirror 761A, which is a mirror having a convex surface facing upward in the side cross-sectional view, reflects the light emitted from the upper center frame light emitting device 271 and reflects the reflected light. It is provided at a position where a player who is playing the game can see it. Therefore, when the upper center frame light emitting device 271 is turned on, the player visually recognizes the image G1 reflected on the half mirror 761A, without shifting the line of sight to the upper center frame light emitting device 271. It is possible to recognize that 271 emits light and in what color the upper center frame light emitting device 271 emits light.

The frame light emitting device provided in the upper center edge portion 211A, such as the upper center frame light emitting device 271, may emit light as part of the suggestive effect that is performed during the period in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed. Since the player generally tends to pay attention to the variable display during the variable display of the decorative pattern, even when the upper center frame light emitting device 271 is illuminated as a part of the suggestive effect, The player can recognize the light emission status of the upper center frame light emitting device 271 from the image G1 reflected on the half mirror 761A while watching the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Further, the lower half mirror 761B, which is a mirror having a convex surface facing the front lower side in a side cross-sectional view, reflects light emitted from the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771, and the reflected light is played during the game. It is provided at a position visible to a person. Therefore, when the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 is turned on, the player visually recognizes the image G2 or the image G3 reflected on the half mirror 761B to shift the line of sight to the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771. Instead, it is possible to recognize that the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 has emitted light, and what color the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 has emitted.

The push operation device 261 may emit light in synchronization with an operable period during which the push operation device 261 can be operated, or a notification period for reporting the operable period before the operable period. As the operable period, a period during which the pressing operation device 261 can be operated to display a special effect that is one of suggestive effects, a period during which the pressing operation device 261 can be operated to perform volume adjustment, and the like. A period during which the push operation device 261 can be operated to change the music played during the game is included.

Since the player generally tends to pay attention to the variable display during the variable display of the decorative pattern, even if the pressing operation device 261 is illuminated during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the game is played. It is possible for the person to recognize the light emission state of the press operation device 261 from the image G2 reflected on the half mirror 761B while watching the variable display of the decorative pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing (operable time) of the pressing operation device 261 without noticing the light emission of the pressing operation device 261.

Like the push operation device 261, the wave lamp 771 may also emit light in synchronization with the operable period of the push operation device 261 or the notification period for the operable period. However, even when the wave lamp 771 is emitted during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the player recognizes the light emission state of the wave lamp 771 from the image G3 reflected on the half mirror 761B while watching the variable display of the decorative pattern. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, the player does not notice the light emission of the wave lamp 771 and can prevent the operation time of the pressing operation device 261 from being missed.

In addition, regardless of the operation timing of the pressing operation device 261, even when the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 is emitted as a part of the suggestive effect, the player sees the variable display of the decorative pattern while watching the half mirror. The suggestive effect can be recognized by visually recognizing the image G2 and the image G3 reflected in the 761B.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the reel side lamp 717A is a color corresponding to the emission color of the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 at the timing synchronized with the lighting timing of the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771. Is configured to emit light. Therefore, the notification of the operation time is given not only by the light reflected by the half mirror 761B (that is, the images G2 and G3 reflected on the half mirror 761B) but also from the reel side lamp 717A provided between the reels which is easily noticed by the player. Since direct light is used, it is possible to more appropriately prevent the player from missing the notification of the operation time.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 34. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment, the display area of each symbol row displayed by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is variably configured. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to ninth embodiments will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 34(a) is a front view of the reel device 710 when the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is a basic display area, and FIG. 34(b) is each reel 711L. , 711M, 711R is a front view of the reel device 710 when the display area of each symbol row is a reduced display area. FIG. 34(c) is a top view of the reel device 710 schematically showing a mechanism for changing the display area of the symbol row, and FIG. 34(d) schematically shows a state in which the display area of the symbol row is reduced. FIG. 7 is a top view of the reel device 710 schematically shown. Note that, in FIGS. 34C and 34D, the gears 781 to 783 are illustrated as circles with tooth shapes omitted.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, basically, the reels 711L, 711M, 711R are arranged such that the center axes of these reels are on the same line. As a result, the symbol rows of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R are arranged in a row in the left-right direction without overlapping each other in the basic state. Therefore, in the basic state, the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is configured to have a width of W1 (length in the left-right direction).

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the player operates a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261), the reels 711L, 711M, 711R move, and as a result, FIG. 34(b). As shown in, the width of the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R becomes the length W2 shorter than the length W1. That is, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player can reduce the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R by operating the predetermined operation unit.

As shown in FIG. 34(c), between the left reel 711L and the middle reel 711M, and between the middle reel 711M and the right reel 711R, the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R are arranged substantially along the winding direction. A partition part 717 having a circular shape is provided. The two partition parts 717 support the rotation shaft of the middle reel 711M so that the middle reel 711M can rotate.

On the rear side of one of the two partition parts 717 (in the present embodiment, the right partition part 717), an extending part 786 is provided which extends across the rotation axis of the middle reel 711M and extends substantially horizontally to the rear side. .. On the right side surface (that is, the surface on the side away from the middle reel 711M) of the right partition portion 717 and the extended portion 786, a rack gear (not shown) in which gear teeth are toothed with respect to the tooth portion of the gear 781 is formed in a substantially horizontal direction. Is formed linearly.

The gear 781 is connected to a drive mechanism (not shown) whose drive is controlled by the sub control board 940, and operates by the drive control of the drive mechanism by the sub control board 940. The gear 781 is provided so as to mesh with a rack gear formed on the partition 717 and the extension 786, whereby a rack gear formed on the partition 717 and the extension 786 and the gear 781 are racked. The and-pinion mechanism can move the middle reel 711M in the front-rear direction.

The left reel 711L is provided with an extending portion 787 that extends substantially horizontally to the left from the rotation axis of the left reel 711L. On the rear side surface of the extending portion 787, a rack gear (not shown) in which gear teeth of the gear 782 are toothed is linearly formed in a substantially horizontal direction.

The gear 782 is connected to a drive mechanism (not shown) whose drive is controlled by the sub control board 940, and operates by the drive control of the drive mechanism by the sub control board 940. The gear 782 is provided so as to be meshed with the rack gear formed in the extending portion 787, whereby the rack and pinion mechanism formed by the rack gear formed in the extending portion 787 and the gear 782 causes the left reel 711L. Can be moved left and right.

The right reel 711R is provided with an extending portion 788 that extends substantially horizontally from the rotation axis of the right reel 711R to the right. On the rear side surface of the extending portion 788, a rack gear (not shown) in which gear teeth of the gear 783 are toothed is linearly formed in a substantially horizontal direction.

The gear 783 is connected to a drive mechanism (not shown) whose drive is controlled by the sub control board 940, and operates by the drive control of the drive mechanism by the sub control board 940. The gear 783 is provided so as to be meshed with the rack gear formed in the extending portion 788, whereby the rack and pinion mechanism by the rack gear formed in the extending portion 788 and the gear 783 causes the right reel 711R. Can be moved left and right.

When the player operates a predetermined operation unit (for example, the push operation device 261) in the state where the display area of each symbol row by the reels 711L, 711M, 711R is shown in FIG. 34(a), first, the gear 781 is As a result, the middle reel 711M moves rearward (in the direction of arrow M1) so as to be behind the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R.

Next, the gears 782 and 783 are operated, whereby the left reel 711L moves to the right (arrow M2 direction) and the right reel 711R moves to the left (arrow M3 direction). In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is assumed that the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R have substantially the same movement amount.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 34B, the display of the middle reel 711M positioned behind the reels 711L and 711R by the left reel 711L moving to the right and the right reel 711R moving to the left. The area is reduced within a range in which the numerical information of the main symbol can be recognized. Therefore, the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is reduced in the width direction (horizontal direction).

In addition, when the player operates a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261) in a state where the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is shown in FIG. After the reels 711L and 711R are opened to the left and right, the middle reel 711M moves forward and returns to the state shown in FIG. 34(a).

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player can reduce the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R by operating a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that it is difficult to see the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Further, when the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is reduced, the left symbol row (left reel 711L) and the right symbol row (right reel 711R), which are the symbol rows that can constitute reach display, are , Is located on the front side of the middle symbol row (middle reel 711M), whereby the reach display can be displayed in the same size as the symbol before the reduction of the display area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the expectation for the reach display from being lost by reducing the display area of each symbol row.

Further, when the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is reduced, the middle reel 711M moves to the rear side (back side), and the left and right reels 711L, 711R are substantially the same in the direction in which they approach each other. Is configured to move a distance of. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the center of the display area of each symbol row from moving due to the reduction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's line of sight when viewing the variable display of the decorative symbols due to the reduction of the display area of each symbol row from moving to the left or right due to the reduction.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 40. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment, the light guide plate unit 810 including the light guide plate 715B having the curved portion can be suitably assembled. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to tenth embodiments will be designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 400X viewed from the front side. Note that, in FIG. 35, the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390 mounted on the back surface side of the game board 400X are shown together. In addition, in FIG. 35, a part of the structures arranged on the front surface side of the base body 401 such as the inner and outer rails 402 and 403 and the nail 411 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 35, in the game board 400X, a drum base 801 that holds the reel device 710 is arranged on the back side of the base 401. A reel device 710 including three rows of reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is mounted on the drum base 801 from the rear side (back side) of the drum base 800. The resin cover 715 is attached to the front side of the drum base 801 as a light guide plate unit 810 described later together with the base body 701 and the like.

FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the drum base 801 as seen from the front side, and FIG. 37 is a perspective view of the light guide plate unit 810 as seen from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 35, the drum base 801 is a resin base having an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the base 401. An opening 801A is formed through the drum base 801 at the position where the reel device 710 is attached. The reel device 710 is mounted on the drum base 801 by inserting the reels 711L, 711M, 711R side from the back side of the opening 801A and fixing them with a fixing member (not shown) such as a screw.

Substrates 803 on which light emitting means 802 such as LEDs are mounted are provided on the left and right sides of the opening 801A. The light emitting means 802 is located behind the region of the base 401 on which the fish pattern 741 is drawn and the region of the base 701 on which the fish pattern 742 is drawn, and is capable of emitting light toward these regions. It is a means. That is, the light emitting means 802 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment corresponds to the light emitting means E1 (see FIG. 30(b)) and the light emitting means E2 (see FIG. 30(b)) in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. .. Light emission control of the light emitting unit 802 is performed by the sub control board 940.

The board 803 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is one of the board surface light emitting device 490A (see FIG. 30(b)) and the board surface light emitting device 490B (see FIG. 30(b)) in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. It corresponds to the left and right parts of the reel device 710. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the illustration of the board corresponding to the board surface light emitting device 490C (see FIG. 30B) is omitted.

A holding unit 809 is provided below the opening 801A. The holding unit 809 includes a substrate (not shown) on which the holding lamp 720 and the lottery result display device 730 are mounted, and a light-transmissive cover portion that covers the front surface of the substrate.

A light guide plate unit 810 is arranged in front of the substrate 803 and the holding unit 809. The light guide plate unit 810 includes an outer cover 715A integrated with the base body 701, a light guide plate 715B (see FIG. 36) arranged on the rear side of the outer cover 715A, and a curved portion of the light guide plate 715B to bend the outer cover 715A. A pressing member 811 (see FIG. 36) that can be pressed on both the left and right sides of the portion, a light source unit 812 including a light emitting unit (not shown) that irradiates the upper end surface of the light guide plate 715B, and the light guide plate 715B. And a light source unit 813 including a light emitting means 834 for irradiating light to the lower end surface of the.

On the left and right sides and the upper side of the outer cover 715A of the base body 701, a picture sticker 703 and a picture sticker 704 on which a fish picture 742 is printed by a colored paint having translucency are attached to the front surface side. Behind the picture sticker 703, a light emitting means 802 capable of emitting light toward the picture sticker 703 is located. In addition, behind the design sticker 704, a light emitting means 825 such as an LED arranged on the front end side of the upper surface of the substrate 822 (see FIG. 36) of the light source unit 812 and capable of emitting light toward the design sticker 704 is provided. positioned.

By turning on (emits) the light emitting means 802 located on the rear side of the picture sticker 703 and the light emitting means 825 located on the back side of the picture sticker 704, it is possible to display the picture pattern 742 emerging in the light. .. The light emitting means 825 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment corresponds to the light emitting means E2 (see FIG. 30(b)) of the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. Light emission control of the light emitting means 825 is performed by the sub control board 940.

A region 701A on the back side of the sticking position of the picture sticker 703 on the base 701 is subjected to light diffusion processing (for example, embossing) having fine irregularities. Although not shown in FIG. 37 and FIGS. 39 and 40 to be described later, the region on the back side of the attachment position of the picture seal 703 on the base 701 is also subjected to the light diffusion processing similar to the region 701A. By performing such light diffusion processing, the entire area of each of the pattern sticker 703 and the pattern sticker 704 can be illuminated by the irradiation light from the light emitting means 802 or the light emitting means 825.

As shown in FIG. 35, on the upper front side of the light guide plate unit 810, a substrate 806 on which the light emitting means 804 and the light emitting means 805 such as LEDs are mounted is provided. The light emitting means 804 is located on the rear side of the upper portion of the central structure 420 and is a light emitting means for radiating light forward. The light emitting means 805 is a light emitting means that is located on the rear side of the upper portion of the central structure 420 in the base 401 and emits light toward the front. Light emission control of these light emitting means 804 and 805 is performed by the sub control board 940. A lens 807 that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting units 804 and 805 is provided on the front side of the substrate 806.

Next, the configuration of the light guide plate unit 810 will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. 38 and 40. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the light guide plate unit 810 seen from the front side. 39 and 40 are both exploded perspective views of the light guide plate unit 810 viewed from the rear side. 38 and 40, the screws 871A, 871B, 872A, 872B, 881A, 881B, 882A, 882B, 896 are not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, an outer cover 715A integrated with the base body 701 is arranged in front of the light guide plate unit 810. The front surface of the outer cover 715A includes a curved portion 715A1 curved along the curved surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R of the reel device 710, and a side portion 715A2 that is provided between the left and right ends of the curved portion 715A1 and the base body 701. Equipped with.

A region 715A3 (a surface on the side facing the reel device 710) on the rear side (back side) of the curved portion 715A1 on which a light diffusing process (for example, a graining process) having fine irregularities is applied is formed. 39) is provided. Similar to the region 715A3, a strip-shaped region (not shown), which has been subjected to light diffusion processing to make fine unevenness, is also provided on the rear surface on the upper side of the curved portion 715A1.

Note that a region 715A3 formed below the curved portion 715A1 and a band-shaped region similar to the region 715A3 formed above are a lower line L3 (see FIG. 27) and an upper line in a front view of the gaming machine, respectively. It is provided so as not to overlap the symbols stopped and displayed on L1 (see FIG. 27). Further, the inner surface (the surface facing the reel device 710) of the left and right side portions 715A2 is also subjected to light diffusion processing (for example, grain processing) having fine irregularities.

Protrusions 891 (see FIG. 39) projecting rearward are provided along the left and right edges of the outer cover 715A on the rear (back side) surface of the base body 701 that is connected to the outer cover 715A. There is. A screw hole into which a screw 896 used for fixing the pressing member 811 can be screwed is formed in substantially the center of the protrusion 891. The screw hole and the screw 896 are arranged such that the longitudinal direction thereof is in the front-back direction, and after the pressing member 811 is arranged at a position separated from the rear side of the outer cover 715A, the screw 896 is gradually tightened to gradually tighten the screw 896. , Can be integrated by bringing their relative positions in the front-rear direction closer to each other.

Projections 892 and 893 (see FIG. 39) are provided on the upper and lower sides of the projections 891 respectively provided on the left and right sides of the outer cover 715A so as to project rearward from the rear surface of the base body 701. The two protrusions 892 located on the upper side are protrusions that are respectively inserted into the through holes 843A and 843B (see FIG. 38) of the light source unit 812. On the other hand, the two protrusions 893 located on the lower side are protrusions inserted into the through holes 853A and 853B of the light source unit 813, respectively.

A screw hole into which screws 871A and 871B (see FIG. 39) used when fixing the light source unit 812 can be screwed is formed substantially at the center of the protrusion 892. On the other hand, a screw hole into which screws 881A and 881B (see FIG. 39) to be used when fixing the light source unit 813 can be screwed is formed substantially in the center of the protrusion 893. These screw holes and the screws 871A, 871B, 881A, 881B are arranged such that the longitudinal direction is the front-rear direction, and the light source units 812 and 813 are arranged at positions separated from the rear side of the outer cover 715A. , The screws 871A, 871B, 881A, and 881B are fixed (temporarily fixed) so that the light source units 812 and 813 and the outer cover 715A are integrated so as not to be separated from each other in the front and rear, and then the vertical alignment is appropriately performed. Alternatively, the light guide plate 715B, which will be described later, can be gradually corrected while being completely fixed and integrated.

Further, a through hole 701B through which a screw (not shown) for fixing the light guide plate unit 810 to the drum base 801 is inserted is formed around the outer cover 715A. After the assembly of the light guide plate unit 810 is completed, a screw inserted from the rear side of the through hole 701B is screwed into a screw hole (not shown) formed at a predetermined position on the back side of the drum base 801 to guide the screw. The light plate unit 810 can be fixed to the drum base 801.

A light guide plate 715B is disposed behind the outer cover 715A integrated with the base body 701. The light guide plate 715B is curved along the curved surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R of the reel device 710 and is located on the rear side of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A, and is located above the curved portion 715B1. The flat portion 715B2 and the flat portion 715B3 located below the curved portion 715B1 are provided. The luminous fish pattern 743 is formed by fine unevenness on one surface side (for example, the back surface side) of the curved portion 715B1.

Here, since the light guide plate 715B is provided by being curved along the curved surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R of the reel device 710, the light guide plate 715B is generally provided on the front side along the curved surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R of the reel device 710. The fish pattern 743 that is light-emitted and displayed on the bending portion 715B1 can be arranged at positions separated by a certain distance. Therefore, even if the player's viewpoint position changes due to the player's height or posture, the position at which the fish pattern 743 is displayed on the front side of the reel device 710 may be greatly displaced. Instead, the fish pattern 743 can be displayed at an appropriate position located a certain distance forward from the surface of the reel 711L, 711M, 711R.

A light source unit 813 that irradiates the lower end surface 715B4 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B with light is disposed below the light guide plate 715B. The light source unit 813 includes a substrate base 831 arranged on the rear side of the lower plane portion 715B3 of the light guide plate 715B, a substrate 832 held by the substrate base 831, and a reflector arranged on the front side of the plane portion 715B3. And 833.

The substrate base 831 is provided with a recess 831A (see FIG. 38) whose lower side and front side are open so that the substrate 832 can be housed therein, and the substrate 832 is housed and fixed in the recess 831A. On the substrate 832, a plurality of light emitting means 834 are arranged on the upper surface of the substrate 832 along the longitudinal side edge of the substrate 832.

The light emitting means 834 is a light emitting means for irradiating the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B with light, and is constituted by a light emitting means having directivity in the light emitting direction (output direction) such as an LED. The light emitting means 834 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment corresponds to the light emitting means E4 (see FIG. 31) in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. The light emission control of the light emitting means 834 is performed by the sub control board 940.

In the state where the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the light emitting unit 834 directs the light irradiation direction to the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B toward the lower end surface 715B4 (that is, directs the upward direction). It is provided so as to line up along the lower end surface 715B4. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38, the plurality of light emitting means 834 project forward from the front surface 831B of the substrate base 831 when the substrate 832 is housed in the recess 831A.

In the reflector 833, a surface 833B (see FIG. 39) facing the surface 831B of the substrate base 831 with the light guide plate 715B sandwiched is a light-impermeable surface having a mirror-finished surface (for example, chrome plating). Configured as. Similarly, the surface 831B of the substrate base 831 is also configured as a light-impermeable surface whose surface is mirror-finished. Thereby, in the state where the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the light of the light emitting means 834 emitted from the lower side of the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B toward the lower end surface 715B4 is the surface 831B and The light reflected by the surface 833B is guided to the lower end surface 715B4 so that the light can be properly incident on the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B.

A through hole 851A is provided on the left end side of the board base 831 in the gaming machine front view, and a through hole 852A is provided inside the through hole 851A (right side of the through hole 851A in the gaming machine front view). There is. On the other hand, a through hole 851B is provided on the right end side of the board base 831 in the front view of the gaming machine, and a through hole 852B is provided inside the through hole 851B (on the left side of the through hole 851B in the front view of the gaming machine). Has been.

A through hole 853A that communicates with the through hole 851A in a state where the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B is provided on the left end side of the reflector 833 in a front view of the gaming machine. On the other hand, a through hole 853B communicating with the through hole 851B in a state where the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B is provided on the right end side of the reflector 833 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

Further, inside the through hole 853A in the reflector 833 (on the right side of the through hole 853A in the front view of the gaming machine), a protrusion 854A (see FIG. 39) protruding rearward from a rear surface 833B (see FIG. 39) is provided. Has been. When the light source unit 813 is attached to the light guide plate 715B, the protrusion 854A is a protrusion that is inserted into the through hole 862A formed in the lower left side of the light guide plate 715B when viewed from the front of the gaming machine and the through hole 852A of the substrate base 831. Is.

On the other hand, inside the through hole 853B in the reflector 833 (on the left side of the through hole 853B in the front view of the gaming machine), a protrusion 854B protruding rearward from a rear surface 833B (see FIG. 39) is provided. When the light source unit 813 is attached to the light guide plate 715B, the protrusion 854B is inserted into the through hole 862B formed in the light guide plate 715B on the lower right side of the gaming machine front view and the through hole 852B of the substrate base 831. It is a protrusion.

A screw hole into which the screw 882A can be screwed is formed substantially in the center of the protrusion 854A, and a screw hole into which the screw 882B can be screwed is formed in the substantially center of the protrusion 854B. Therefore, after the board base 831 and the reflector 833 are combined so that the protrusion 854A is inserted into the through hole 862A and the through hole 852A, and the protrusion 854B is inserted into the through hole 862B and the through hole 852B, the screw 882A is protruded. By screwing the screw 882B into the screw hole of the portion 854A and screwing the screw 882B into the screw hole of the protrusion 854B, the light source unit 813 can be fixed (attached) to the light guide plate 715B as shown in FIG. 40.

Here, the screws 882A and 882B are arranged such that the longitudinal direction thereof is the front-back direction. Therefore, by fixing the screws 882A and 882B (temporary fixing), the substrate base 831 and the reflector 833 are integrated so as not to be separated from each other in the front and rear, and thereafter, the relative positions of the light source unit 813 and the light guide plate 715B. The angle and the angle can be slowly aligned so as not to be unduly deformed, and a complete fixing operation can be performed to integrate them.

As shown in FIG. 39, in the through hole 862A formed in the light guide plate 715B, the displacement of the position of the protrusion 854A inserted into the through hole 862A with respect to the through hole 862A is hardly permitted in any of the vertical and horizontal directions. The protrusion 854A has a substantially circular shape having a size matching the outer diameter of the protrusion 854A. Therefore, the protrusion 854A inserted into the through hole 862A is positioned at a substantially constant position by the through hole 862A.

On the other hand, in the through hole 862B, the maximum height H3 in the vertical direction is the same as the maximum height in the vertical direction of the through hole 862A, but the maximum width W4 in the horizontal direction is larger than the maximum width W3 in the horizontal direction of the through hole 862A. It is formed in a long hole shape that is slightly larger in the left-right direction with respect to the outer diameter of the large protruding portion 854B. Therefore, the protrusion 854B inserted into the through hole 862B is positioned at a substantially constant position in the vertical direction with respect to the through hole 862B, like the protrusion 854A inserted into the through hole 862A. With respect to the horizontal direction, the allowable positioning range is larger than that in the vertical direction. Accordingly, the distance between each of the plurality of light emitting means 834 provided in the light source unit 813 and the lower end surface 715B4 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B is made substantially constant, and the fish pattern 743 by the light guide plate 715B is formed. It is possible to make the luminescent display look good with little variation in the amount of light in the left-right direction.

When the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the through hole 851A of the substrate base 831 communicates with the through hole 853A of the reflector 833, and the through hole 851B of the substrate base 831 communicates with the through hole 853B of the reflector 833. .. A screw 881A inserted into the communicating through holes 851A and 853A and a screw 881B inserted into the communicating through holes 851B and 853B are screwed into a protrusion 893 (see FIG. 39) protruding rearward from the base body 701. Thus, the light source unit 813 fixed to the lower side of the light guide plate 715B can be fixed to the base 701.

As shown in FIG. 39, the through hole 853A of the reflector 833 and the through hole 851A of the substrate base 831 corresponding to the through hole 853A have a maximum height H5 in the vertical direction larger than a maximum width W5 in the horizontal direction. It is formed in an elongated hole shape that is slightly larger in the vertical direction with respect to the outer diameter of the portion 893. The maximum height H5 is greater than the maximum vertical height H3 of the through holes 862A and 862B. Similarly, the through hole 853B of the reflector 833 and the through hole 851B of the substrate base 831 corresponding to the through hole 853B also have the same shape as the through hole 853A, that is, slightly above and below the outer diameter of the protrusion 893. It is configured in the shape of a large oblong hole.

Therefore, the through holes 851A and 853A that communicate with each other and the protrusions 893 that are inserted into the through holes 851B and 853B that communicate with each other have vertical displacements relative to the through holes 851A and 853A or the through holes 851B and 853B in the left-right direction. Allowed compared to displacement. As a result, the allowable range for positioning the light source unit 813 with respect to the base body 701 is larger in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction.

A light source unit 812 that irradiates the upper end surface 715B5 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B with light is arranged above the light guide plate 715B. The light source unit 812 includes a substrate base 821 arranged on the rear side of the upper flat portion 715B2 of the light guide plate 715B, a substrate 822 held by the substrate base 821, and a reflector 823 arranged on the front side of the flat portion 715B2. It has and.

The substrate base 821 includes a recess 821A whose upper side and front side are open so that the substrate 822 can be housed therein, and the substrate 822 is housed and fixed in the recess 821A. On the substrate 822, a plurality of light emitting means (not shown) are arranged on the lower surface of the substrate 822 along the longitudinal side edge on the front side of the substrate 822. In the following, for convenience, the light emitting means provided on the lower surface of the substrate 822 is also referred to as “light emitting means 824”.

The light emitting means 824 is a light emitting means for irradiating the upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B with light, and is constituted by a light emitting means such as an LED having directivity in the light emitting direction (output direction) similar to the light emitting means 834. It The light emitting means 824 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment corresponds to the light emitting means E4 (see FIG. 31) in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. Light emission control of the light emitting means 824 is performed by the sub control board 940.

In the state where the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the light emitting unit 834 directs the light irradiation direction to the upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B toward the upper end surface 715B5 (that is, to direct the light downward). ) It is provided so as to line up along the upper end surface 715B5. Therefore, the plurality of light emitting units 824 project forward from the front surface 821B of the substrate base 821 when the substrate 822 is housed in the recess 821A.

Further, the substrate 822 is provided with a light emitting means 825 such as an LED that irradiates light toward the picture sticker 704 (that is, toward the front) on the front end side of the upper surface of the substrate 822.

In the reflector 823, a surface 823B (see FIG. 39) that faces the surface 821B of the substrate base 821 with the light guide plate 715B interposed therebetween is mirror-finished in the same manner as the surface 833B of the reflector 833. Composed as a face. The surface 821B of the substrate base 821 is also configured as a light-impermeable surface whose surface is mirror-finished. Accordingly, in the state where the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the light of the light emitting means 824 emitted from the upper side of the upper end surface of the light guide plate 715B toward the upper end surface 715B5 is the surface 821B and the surface 823B. The light is guided to the upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B so as to be appropriately incident on the upper end surface 715B5.

A through hole 841A is provided on the left end side of the board base 821 in the front view of the gaming machine, and a through hole 842A is provided inside the through hole 841A (on the right side of the through hole 841A in the front view of the gaming machine). There is. On the other hand, a through hole 841B is provided on the right end side of the board base 821 in the front view of the gaming machine, and a through hole 842B is provided inside the through hole 841B (on the left side of the through hole 841B in the front view of the gaming machine). Has been.

A through hole 843A having the same shape as the through hole 841A, which communicates with the through hole 841A when the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, is provided on the left end side of the reflector 823 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. .. On the other hand, a through hole 843B having the same shape as the through hole 841B, which communicates with the through hole 841B in a state where the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, is provided on the right end side of the reflector 823 in a front view of the gaming machine. ing.

Further, inside the through hole 843A in the reflector 823 (on the right side of the through hole 843A in a front view of the gaming machine), a protrusion 844A protruding rearward from a rear surface 823B (see FIG. 39) is provided. When the light source unit 812 is attached to the light guide plate 715B, the protrusion 844A is a protrusion that is inserted into the through hole 861A formed on the upper left side of the light guide plate 715B when viewed from the front of the gaming machine and the through hole 842A of the substrate base 821. Is.

On the other hand, inside the through-hole 843B in the reflector 823 (on the left side of the through-hole 843B in the gaming machine front view), a protrusion 844B protruding rearward from a rear surface 823B (see FIG. 39) is provided. When the light source unit 812 is attached to the light guide plate 715B, the protrusion 844B is inserted into the through hole 861B formed in the light guide plate 715B on the upper right side of the gaming machine front view and the through hole 842B of the substrate base 821. Is.

A screw hole into which the screw 872A can be screwed is formed substantially in the center of the protrusion 844A, and a screw hole into which the screw 872B can be screwed is formed in the substantially center of the protrusion 844B. Therefore, after the board base 821 and the reflector 823 are combined so that the protrusion 844A is inserted into the through hole 861A and the through hole 842A and the protrusion 844B is inserted into the through hole 861B and the through hole 842B, the screw 872A is protruded. By screwing into the screw hole of the portion 844A and screwing the screw 872B into the screw hole of the protrusion 844B, the light source unit 812 can be fixed (attached) to the light guide plate 715B as shown in FIG.

Here, the screws 872A and 872B are arranged such that the longitudinal direction thereof is the front-back direction. Therefore, by fixing (temporarily fixing) the screws 872A and 872B, the substrate base 821 and the reflector 823 are integrated so as not to separate before and after, and thereafter, the relative position between the light source unit 812 and the light guide plate 715B. The angle and the angle can be slowly aligned so as not to be unduly deformed, and a complete fixing operation can be performed to integrate them.

The through-hole 861A formed in the light guide plate 715B is similar to the above-described through-hole 862A in that the displacement of the position of the protrusion 844A inserted into the through-hole 861A with respect to the through-hole 861A is hardly permitted in any of the upper, lower, left and right directions. It is configured in a substantially circular shape having a size that matches the outer diameter of the protrusion 844A. Therefore, the protrusion 844A inserted into the through hole 861A is positioned at a substantially constant position by the through hole 861A.

Like the through hole 862B described above, the through hole 861B is also formed in an elongated hole shape that is slightly larger in the left-right direction with respect to the outer diameter of the protrusion 844B. Therefore, the protrusion 844B inserted into the through hole 861B is positioned at a substantially constant position in the vertical direction with respect to the through hole 862B, like the protrusion 844A inserted into the through hole 861A. With respect to the horizontal direction, the allowable positioning range is larger than that in the vertical direction. Thereby, the distance between each of the plurality of light emitting means 824 provided in the light source unit 812 and the upper end surface 715B5 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B is made substantially constant, and the fish pattern 743 by the light guide plate 715B is made closer to each other. It is possible to make it look good with little variation in the amount of light in the left-right direction.

When the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the through hole 841A of the substrate base 821 communicates with the through hole 843A of the reflector 823, and the through hole 841B of the substrate base 821 communicates with the through hole 843AB of the reflector 823. .. The screw 871A inserted into the communicating through holes 841A and 843A and the screw 871B inserted into the communicating through holes 841B and 843B are screwed into a protrusion 892 (see FIG. 39) protruding rearward from the base body 701. Thus, the light source unit 812 fixed on the upper side of the light guide plate 715B can be fixed to the base 701.

The through holes 843A and 843B of the reflector 823, and the through holes 841A and 841B of the substrate base 821 corresponding to the through holes 843A and 843B, respectively, are the same as the above-described through holes 853A, 853B, 841A and 841B. It is formed in an elongated hole shape that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the portion 892 in the vertical direction. Therefore, the allowable range for positioning the light source unit 812 with respect to the base body 701 is larger in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction, as in the case of the light source unit 813 described above.

On the rear side of the light guide plate 715B, pressing members 811 are arranged on both left and right ends of the light guide plate 715B. The pressing member 811 is provided on the right or left side in a front view of the gaming machine from a pressing portion 811A configured to have a curved shape of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and a frame portion connecting both ends of the pressing portion 811A. And a mounting portion 811B. The mounting portion 811B is provided at a position corresponding to the protruding portion 891 (see FIG. 39) protruding rearward from the base body 701, and a through hole communicating with the screw hole of the protruding portion 891 is formed. Therefore, the pressing member 811 can be fixed to the base body 701 by screwing the screw 896 inserted into the through hole of the mounting portion 811B into the screw hole of the protrusion 891.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, after the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B to which the light source units 812 and 813 are fixed is arranged on the rear side of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A, the screw is applied. Prior to fixing the light source units 812 and 813 to the base body 701 by 871A, 871B, 881A, and 881B, the left and right pressing members 811 are fixed to the base body 701 with screws 896.

The pressing portion 811A is a portion for pressing the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B against the curved portion 715A1 (toward the curved portion 715A1) when the pressing member 811 is fixed to the base body 701. The pressing portion 811A is configured to have a front end portion that follows the curved shape of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A. Therefore, when the pressing member 811 is fixed (attached) to the base body 701, the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B is removed from the predetermined gap between the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and the pressing portion 811A. If it is deformed, the pressing portion 811A presses the left and right ends of the bending portion 715B1, and the shape of the bending portion 715B1 is held in a corrected state so as to match the shape of the bending portion 715A1.

Here, the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B does not necessarily have to come into contact with at least one of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and the holding portion 811A of the holding member 811, and when a certain amount or more of deformation occurs. The design size may be set so that it contacts only for a limited time, or the size may be set so that it always contacts either.

Further, when the left and right holding members 811 are fixed to the base body 701 with the screws 896, the gap between the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and the holding portion 811A of the holding member 811 has the screws 871A, 871B, 881A, 881B on the rear side. The screw 896 is fixed such that the screw 896 becomes narrower as it is fixed. Therefore, the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and the pressing portion 811A of the pressing member 811 can gradually correct a certain amount or more of the deformation of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B. Since the force due to the tightening of the screw 896 can be used, the worker can easily perform the attaching work of the holding member 811 while suppressing the damage of the light guide plate 715B and the like.

The pressing member 811 is formed in a mesh shape having an opening through which light can pass from one surface to the other surface between the pressing portion 811A and the frame portion connecting both ends of the pressing portion 811A. Light emitted from the reel device 710 and the light guide plate 715B inside the member 811 passes to the outside via the pressing member 811. The side portion 715A2 of the outer cover 715A emits light by the light.

In the present embodiment, as described above, before the light source units 812 and 813 are fixed to the base body 701 by the screws 871A, 871B, 881A, 881B, the pressing member 811 is fixed to the base body 701 by the screws 896. However, after the light source units 812 and 813 are temporarily fixed to the base body 701 by the screws 871A, 871B, 881A, and 881B, the pressing member 811 is fixed to the base body 701 by the screws 896, and then the screws 871A, 871B, The light source units 812 and 813 may be fixed to the base 701 by 881A and 881B. By performing temporary fixing with screws 871A, 871B, 881A, and 881B, the position of the light guide plate 715B with respect to the outer cover 715A can be substantially positioned, so that the light guide plate 715B can be accurately attached.

Further, the screws 872A for integrating the light source units 812, 813 and the light guide plate 715B are within the range of the four corners where the light source units 812, 813 are fixed to the base 701 by the screws 871A, 871B, 881A, 881B. A fixed position is provided in which 872B, 882A, 882B are arranged. Specifically, the light source unit 812 is fixed to the base body 701 near each of the two screws 872A and 872B for integrating the light source unit 812 and the light guide plate 715B, on both outer sides sandwiching the screws 872A and 872B. Fixed positions (screws 871A, 871B) are provided. Further, a fixing position for fixing the light source unit 813 to the base body 701 near each of the two screws 882A and 882B for integrating the light source unit 813 and the light guide plate 715B, and on both outer sides sandwiching the screws 882A and 882B. (Screws 881A, 881B) are provided. Therefore, the integrated shape of the light source units 812 and 813 and the light guide plate 715B makes it easy to hold the light source unit 813 without changing it in the situation where the light source unit 813 is fixed to the base body 701, and suppresses the performance defect of the light guide plate 715B. The fish pattern 724 using the light guide plate 715B can be luminescently displayed with a good appearance.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the through holes 841A and 843A and the through holes 841B and 843B formed on both the left and right sides of the upper light source unit 812 are arranged above and below the outer diameter of the protrusion 892 formed on the base body 701. It has a long hole shape that is slightly larger in the direction. Similarly, the through holes 851A, 853A and the through holes 851B, 853B formed on both the left and right sides of the lower light source unit 813 are also vertically arranged with respect to the outer diameter of the protrusion 893 formed on the base body 701. It is composed of a slightly large oblong hole.

Therefore, the allowable range for positioning the light source units 812 and 813 with respect to the base body 701 is relatively allowed in the direction in which the plate surface of the light guide plate 715B is continuous (vertical direction). By fixing the light plate 715B to the base 701 via the light source units 812 and 813, even if the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B is deformed due to a manufacturing error or the like, the light guide plate 715B is deformed due to the deformation. Displacement in the direction in which the plate surface of is continuous (vertical direction) is allowed. Therefore, in order to suppress the manufacturing cost of the light guide plate 715B including the curved portion, even if a large variation in the manufacturing of the light guide plate 715B is allowed, when the light guide plate 715B is integrated with the base body 701 and the outer cover 715A, the curve It is possible to prevent the load on the portion 715B1 in the vertical direction (that is, the force that stretches or compresses the curved portion 715B1) from being applied, and to prevent the light guide plate 715B from being damaged when the light guide plate unit 810 is assembled.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the through holes 861A and 861B formed on the left and right above the light guide plate 715B are both the protrusions 844A of the light source unit 812 inserted into the through holes 861A and 861B. , 844B with respect to the vertical displacement of the position. Similarly, the through holes 862A and 862B formed on the left and right below the light guide plate 715B are also vertically positioned above and below the projections 854A and 854B of the light source unit 813 inserted into the through holes 862A and 862B. The displacement is so small that it is not allowed.

Therefore, the light source units 812 and 813 can be positioned and integrated with the light guide plate 715B at suitable positions in the direction in which the plate surface of the light guide plate 715B is continuous (vertical direction). Thus, the position of the light emitting means 824 with respect to the upper end surface 715B5 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B and the position of the light emitting means 834 with respect to the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B (see FIG. 39) are both suitable. Since they can be matched, the performance defect of the light guide plate 715B due to the displacement of the light emitting means 824 or the light emitting means 834 can be suppressed, and the fish pattern 724 using the light guide plate 715B can be displayed in a good-looking manner by light emission.

It should be noted that, of the through holes 861A and 861B formed on the left and right on the upper side of the light guide plate 715B, one through hole 861A has a size such that the displacement of the position with respect to the corresponding protrusion 844A in the left and right direction is hardly permitted. On the other hand, the other through-hole 861B is configured so that the lateral displacement of the position with respect to the corresponding protrusion 844B is relatively allowed. Similarly, of the through holes 862A and 862B formed on the lower left and right sides of the light guide plate 715B, one through hole 862A also has a size in which the displacement in the left and right direction with respect to the corresponding protrusion 854A is hardly permitted. On the other hand, the other through hole 862B is configured such that the lateral displacement of the position with respect to the corresponding protrusion 854B is relatively allowed.

Therefore, even if there is a manufacturing error in the installation position of the protrusions 844A and 844B in the light source unit 812 or the installation position of the protrusions 854A and 854B in the light source unit 813, the manufacturing error is caused by the through hole 861B or the through hole 862. Can be absorbed by the lateral displacement allowed by Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the manufacturing error of the protrusions 844A, 844B, 854A, 854B from adversely affecting the positioning accuracy of the light source units 812 and 813 with respect to the light guide plate 715B in the vertical direction.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, after pressing the left and right sides of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B on which the light source units 812 and 813 are attached vertically to the curved portion 715A1 with the pressing member 811, the light source The units 812 and 813 are fixed to the base 701.

Therefore, since the light guide plate 715B is fixed to the base body 701 integrated with the outer cover 715A in a state where the shape of the bend portion 715B1 is corrected in advance to the shape of the bend portion 715A1 by the pressing member 811, the bend of the light guide plate 715B. Even when the portion 715B1 is deformed due to manufacturing error or the like, when the light guide plate 715B is fixed to the base body 701, a vertical load is applied to the bending portion 715B1 (that is, the bending portion 715B1 is stretched or compressed). Force) can be suppressed. Also in this respect, it is possible to prevent the light guide plate 715B from being damaged when the light guide plate unit 810 is assembled.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment is characterized by how the light guide plate 715B shines. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to eleventh embodiments will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

41A is a schematic diagram for explaining the traveling direction of light that has entered the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B, and FIG. 41B is a front view of the light guide plate 715B showing an example of how light is emitted. Is.

As shown in FIG. 41A, the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B has a left and right smaller than the left and right width of one light emitting means 834 in a front view (or a direction view along the thickness direction of the light guide plate 715B). A plurality of trapezoidal recesses Z having a width are formed in a continuous shape. The lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B has trapezoidal recesses Z formed in the left and right widths that are smaller than the light irradiation width of one light emitting means 834. In addition, a plurality of recesses Z are formed in the shape. The plurality of recesses Z are preferably provided in an amount of 5 or more, and more preferably 10 or more, within the irradiation width of light by one light emitting unit 834. The width of the trapezoid forming each recess Z is preferably set to 0.5 mm or less, and more preferably 0.1 mm or less.

The recess Z has a side Z1 that is a bottom of the recess Z and extends substantially horizontally, a side Z2 that is connected to the left end C1 of the side Z1 and extends in the lower left direction, and a side Z2 that is connected to the right end C2 of the side Z1 and extends in the lower right direction. And an extending side Z3.

The light emitting means 834 arranged below the end face 715B4 is configured by a light emitting means having directivity in the light irradiation direction (output direction), such as an LED, as described above. Therefore, the side Z1 of the recess Z is substantially orthogonal to the light irradiation direction (output direction) of the light emitting unit 834 when the light source unit 813 is attached to the lower side of the light guide plate 715B. That is, since the light emitted from the light emitting means 834 is incident substantially perpendicular to the side Z1 of the recess Z, the light incident from the side Z1 is in a direction substantially perpendicular to the side Z1 (direction of arrow F1). Proceed inside the light guide plate 715B.

Since the light guide plate 715B is made of a resin having a refractive index (absolute refractive index) larger than 1, such as acrylic resin, the light guide plate 715B enters from the side Z2 or the side Z3 inclined with respect to the light irradiation direction of the light emitting means 834. Light is refracted according to the relationship of (sin (incident angle φ1)/sin (refractive angle φ2))=(refractive index of light guide plate 715B/refractive index of air). In this case, the incident angle φ1 is the incident angle of the light incident on the light guide plate 715B (side Z2 or side Z3) from the air, and the refraction angle φ2 is the refraction angle of the light incident on the light guide plate 715B. ..

For example, when the light guide plate 715B is made of acrylic resin, the refractive index of the light guide plate 715B is about 1.5 which is the refractive index of the acrylic resin. In the following, the refractive index of the light guide plate 715B is calculated as 1.5 for convenience. On the other hand, since the refractive index of air is approximately 1 (hereinafter, the refractive index of air is 1 for convenience), the light incident from the side Z2 or the side Z3 is (sin(incident angle φ1)/sin( Refraction according to the relationship of refraction angle φ2))=1.5.

The incident angle φ1 of the light from the light emitting means 834 with respect to the side Z2 of the recess Z is equal to the angle θ1 of the angle between the side Z2 inclined in the lower left direction of the recess Z and the side Z1 extending substantially horizontally, that is, the incident angle φ1=angle. Since it is θ1, the refraction angle φ2 of the light incident from the side Z2 is a value of φ2 that satisfies sin(refraction angle φ2)=(sin(angle θ1)/1.5). For example, when the angle θ1 is about 41°, the refraction angle φ2 is about 26°.

That is, when the angle θ1 formed by the side Z2 inclined in the lower left direction and the side Z1 is approximately 41°, the light emitted from the light emitting means 834 is approximately 41° with respect to the side Z2 of the recess Z in the light guide plate 715B. At an incident angle of φ1 and is refracted at a refraction angle of φ2 of approximately 26° and travels in the light guide plate 715B in the direction of arrow F2. Accordingly, when the angle θ1 is approximately 41°, the traveling direction of the light incident from the side Z2 (arrow F2 direction) is leftward with respect to the traveling direction of the light incident from the side Z1 (arrow F1 direction). The direction is inclined by an angle θ2 of about 15°.

The magnitude of the angle θ2 changes according to the magnitude of the angle θ1. Therefore, by changing the angle between the two adjacent sides Z1 and Z2 (that is, the angle θ1) in the recess Z, the angle formed by the traveling directions of the lights respectively incident from the side Z1 and the side Z2 (that is, the angle θ1). , Angle θ2) can be changed. For example, by setting the angle θ1 formed by the sides Z1 and Z2 to be approximately 60°, the angle θ2 formed by the traveling directions of the lights respectively incident from the sides Z1 and Z2 can be made approximately 25°. it can.

As for the side Z3 of the recess Z, similarly to the side Z2, the incident angle φ1 of the light from the light emitting means 834 with respect to the side Z3 is equal to the angle formed by the side Z3 inclined in the lower right direction of the recess Z and the side Z1 extending substantially horizontally. .. Therefore, according to the angle of the side Z3 with respect to the side Z1, the traveling direction of the light incident from the side Z3 (arrow F3 direction) can be inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the light incident from the side Z1 (arrow F1 direction). ..

In the example shown in FIG. 41A, the angle formed by the side Z1 and the side Z3 is configured to be equal to the angle θ1 formed by the side Z1 and the side Z2, so that the light is incident from the side Z1 and the side Z3, respectively. The angle formed by the traveling directions of the respective lights is equal to the angle θ2 of the angles formed by the traveling directions of the respective lights incident from the side Z1 and the side Z2. Therefore, when the angle θ2 is about 15°, the light incident from the recess Z travels in the direction substantially equal to the light irradiation direction of the light emitting means 834 (direction of arrow F1) and to the left and right with respect to the light. The light is separated into light traveling in a direction inclined by approximately 15° (arrow F2 and arrow F3 directions). The angle θ1 formed by the sides Z1 and Z2 and the angle θ2 formed by the sides Z1 and Z3 do not necessarily have to be the same.

Since the traveling direction of the light incident from the side Z1 (direction of arrow F1) and the traveling direction of the light incident from the side Z2 (direction of arrow F2) intersect at an angle θ2, the intersection of the side Z1 and the side Z2 (that is, the side In a region D1 extending from the left end C1 of Z1 at an angle θ3 equal to the angle θ2, a region (or an arrow F1 direction or an arrow F2 direction) in which neither the light incident from the side Z1 nor the light incident from the side Z2 enters Light is weaker than the light that travels to the area).

Similarly, since the traveling direction of light incident from side Z1 (direction of arrow F1) and the traveling direction of light incident from side Z3 (direction of arrow F3) intersect at a predetermined angle, the intersection of side Z1 and side Z3. (In other words, the region D2 extending from the right end C2 of the side Z1 at an angle equal to the angle is also a region in which neither the light incident from the side Z1 nor the light incident from the side Z3 enters (or the direction of the arrow F1 or This is a region where light weaker than the light advancing in the direction of arrow F3 enters.

By continuously providing the plurality of recesses Z on the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B, as shown in FIG. 41(b), the light incident from the lower side of the light guide plate 715B is separated into three directions. The inside of the light guide plate 715B can be moved upward.

That is, the light radiated to the range K1 of the end surface 715B4 enters from the side Z1 of each recess Z included in the range K1 and is in the arrow F1 direction (that is, the direction substantially equal to the light irradiation direction of the light emitting means 834). ), a strip-shaped region 981A formed by light traveling in the direction Z), a strip-shaped region 981B formed by light incident from the side Z2 and traveling in the direction of arrow F2, and a strip-shaped region 981B incident from the side Z3 and traveling in the direction of arrow F3. A band-shaped region 981C formed by light is formed.

It should be noted that the light that is incident from the lower end surface 715B4 and guided by the light guide plate 715B is guided so as to almost exit from the light guide plate 715B when it exceeds the apex X of the curved portion 715B1 that projects and curves forward. The curvature of curvature of the optical plate 715B and the plate thickness may be set. In this case, the light traveling in the regions 981A, 981B, and 981C disappears near the apex X of the curved portion 715B1 and does not reach the upper portion. Further, it is preferable that the irradiation intensity of light by the light emitting means 834 is set so that the light incident from the end surface 715B4 and guided by the light guide plate 715B can at least reach the top X of the curved portion 715B1.

When the light emitting means 834 is constituted by a light emitting means capable of emitting light of a plurality of colors, when the light emitting means 834 irradiates the range K1 with light of a predetermined color (for example, red light), a region 981A, a region 981B, And light of the color can be made to travel in the region 981C. Therefore, when the light emitting unit 834 irradiates the range K1 with red light, only the regions 981A, 981B, and 981C of the fish pattern 743 drawn with fine unevenness on one surface side of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B overlap. In the areas 981A, 981B, and 981C, the red light is emitted and displayed in red by the red light traveling upward.

Further, as described above, since the recess Z is formed in a shape that forms the regions D1 and D2 where the irradiation light from the light emitting means 834 does not enter, the end surface 715B4 is formed between the regions 981A and 981B. A region 982 where the light applied to the range K1 does not travel is formed. Similarly, a region 983 in which the light applied to the range K1 does not travel is formed between the regions 981A and 981BC. Therefore, in the fish pattern 743 drawn on the curved portion 715B1, the area 982 and the portion within the area 983 are not luminescently displayed by the light applied to the range K1. Thereby, for example, when the range K1 is irradiated with red light, it is possible to display the range between the region 981B and the region 98C in a mottled red color.

When a color (for example, blue light) different from the color of the range K1 is applied to the range K2 of the end surface 715B4 different from the range K1, the light enters from the side Z1 of each recess Z included in the range K2. Then, a strip-shaped region 983A composed of light of a different color from the regions 983A to 983C traveling in the arrow F1 direction and light of different colors from the regions 983A to 983C entering from the side Z2 and traveling in the arrow F2 direction. It is possible to form a band-shaped region 983B configured by the above and a band-shaped region 983C configured by light of a different color from the regions 983A to 983C which are incident from the side Z3 and travel in the arrow F3 direction.

Therefore, when the light emitting means 834 irradiates the range K2 with blue light, only the regions 983A, 983B, and 983C of the fish pattern 743 drawn with fine unevenness on one surface side of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B overlap. In the areas 983A, 983B, and 983C, blue light is emitted and displayed by blue light traveling upward.

When the light emitting unit 834 irradiates the range K1 with red light and the light emitting unit 834 irradiates the range K2 with blue light, the regions 981A and 981B of the fish pattern 743 drawn on the curved portion 715B1. , 981C and the regions 983A, 983B, 983C are overlapped with each other, the red light traveling in the regions 981A, 981B, 981C and the blue light traveling in the regions 983A, 983B, 983C are mixed and displayed in purple. ..

As for the upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B, by providing a trapezoidal recess Z in a front view similar to the above-mentioned lower end surface 715B4, as shown in FIG. 41(b), from the upper side of the light guide plate 715B. The incident light can be separated into three directions and can be moved downward in the light guide plate 715B.

That is, the light radiated to the range K3 of the end surface 715B5 enters from the side Z1 of each recess Z included in the range K3 and is in the arrow F1 direction (that is, the direction substantially equal to the light irradiation direction of the light emitting means 824). ) A band-shaped region 991A formed by the light advancing to ), a band-shaped region 991B formed by the light entering from the side Z2 and advancing in the direction of arrow F2, and a band-shaped region 991B entering from the side Z3 and advancing in the direction of arrow F3. A band-shaped region 991C formed by light is formed.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as in the example shown in FIG. 41(b), the recess Z formed in the upper end surface 715B5 is in the light traveling direction in the region 991A (that is, the arrow F1 direction). And an angle formed by each of the light traveling directions in the region 991B or 991C (that is, the directions of the arrows F2 and F3) is between the light traveling direction in the region 981A and each light traveling direction in the region 981B or the region 981C. It is set to be different from the angle formed. That is, in the recess Z formed on the upper end surface 715B5, the angle formed by the side Z2 or the side Z3 with respect to the side Z1 is the angle formed by the side Z2 or the side Z3 with respect to the side Z1 in the recess Z formed on the lower end surface 715B4. Is set to be different from.

The angle formed by the light traveling direction in the region 991A (that is, the arrow F1 direction) and each light traveling direction in the region 991B or the region 991C (that is, the arrow F2 and F3 directions) is defined as the light traveling direction in the region 981A. , The angle formed by each of the light traveling directions in the region 981B or the region 981C can be randomized in the light emission display of the fish pattern 743 in the bending portion 715B1, and the light emission display of the pattern 743 is monotonous. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 41(b), the light emitted to the range K4 located on the left end side in the front view of the gaming machine on the end surface 715B5 is from the side Z1 of each recess Z included in the range K4. Light guiding that separates into two directions, a band-shaped region 993A formed by light that enters and travels in the direction of arrow F1 and a band-shaped region 931B formed by light that enters from side Z2 and travels in the direction of arrow F2. Is configured.

In this light guiding, the side Z3 (that is, the side on the left end side of the end face 715B5 in the front view of the gaming machine) of the recess Z included in the range K4 is substantially orthogonal to the side Z1 (that is, the light emitting unit 824). The shape can be realized by making the shape substantially parallel to the irradiation direction of light.

Even if the light emitted from the light emitting means 824 to the range K4 is guided to the left in the gaming machine front view, the light exits from the left end of the light guiding plate 715B in the gaming machine front view before reaching the bending portion 715B1. Therefore, it is meaningless to guide light in that direction. Therefore, by guiding the light in the two directions of the region 993A and the region 993B, the light emitted by the light emitting unit 824 can be transmitted to the bending portion 715B1 without waste.

It should be noted that a range similar to the range K4 located on the right end side in the front view of the gaming machine in the end surface 715B5 is also constituted by light that enters the recess Z included in the range from the side Z1 and proceeds in the direction of the arrow F1. It may be configured to guide light in two directions, that is, a strip-shaped region and a strip-shaped region formed by light that enters from the side Z3 and proceeds in the direction of arrow F3. That is, the recess Z included in the range may have a shape in which the side Z2 (that is, the side on the right end side of the end surface 715B5 in the front view of the gaming machine) is substantially orthogonal to the side Z1.

Regarding the lower end surface 715B4, in the predetermined range on the left and right end sides in the front view of the gaming machine, the shape of the recess Z included in the range is incident from the side Z1 similarly to the recess Z included in the range K4. Then, the light is guided in two directions, that is, a strip-shaped region formed by the light traveling in the arrow F1 direction and a strip-shaped region formed by the light incident from the side Z2 or Z3 and traveling in the arrow F2 direction or the arrow F3 direction. It may be configured to shine.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the upper end surface 715B5 and the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B are formed in a shape in which a plurality of trapezoidal recessed portions Z are continuous in a front view, and thus the light emitting means 824. , 825 includes a predetermined direction (direction in which the regions D1 and D2 are formed) in which light incident on the light guide plate 715B does not travel or travels as relatively weak light, and with respect to the predetermined direction, The light is emitted from the light emitting means 824, 825 so as to shine more strongly than the portion extending in the predetermined direction in the areas on both sides inclined to the one and the other with respect to the light emitting means 824, 825 (for example, the areas 981A, 981C for the area 982). Light can travel (guide) in the light guide plate 715B. Therefore, since the light guide plate 715B can have randomness in how it shines, it is possible to prevent the light emission display of the pattern 743 from becoming monotonous, thereby making it possible to diversify the display mode of the light guide plate 715B. ..

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the thirteenth embodiment, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment, the display area of each symbol string displayed by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is variably configured. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to twelfth embodiments will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the structural configuration of the left and right reels 711L and 711R in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 42(a), 42(b), and 42(c). FIG. 42(a) is a front view of the reel device 710 in the case where each symbol row on each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is in a basic state.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is in a basic state, as shown in FIG. 42(a), each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R Of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R in each symbol row in the direction along the rotation axis is configured to have the same width W11.

Of the three rows of reels 711L, 711M and 711R, the left and right reels 711L and 711R include a first reel body 1701 located on the side of the middle reel 711M and a second reel body 1702 located on the side away from the middle reel 711M. It is composed of a combination of.

The first reel body 1701 has a cylindrical shape with an opening on the side away from the middle reel 711M, and the second reel body 1702 has a diameter slightly smaller than that of the first reel body 1701 with the side on the middle reel 711M opened. It has a cylindrical shape. By inserting the opening side edge 1702A of the second reel body 1702 into the first reel body 1701 from the opening side edge 1701A side, reels 711L and 711R that are one cylindrical body are formed.

The left and right reels 711L and 711R are cylindrical bodies in which the first reel body 1701 and the second reel body 1702 are combined as described above, and therefore the insertion amount of the second reel body 1702 with respect to the first reel body 1701 is changed. By doing so, the width of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711R (that is, the width of each reel 711L, 711R) can be changed.

42B is a partial cross-sectional view of the left reel 711L taken along the rotation shaft 1701B and cut along the rotation shaft 1701B in a basic state, and FIG. 42C shows the left reel 711L of the left reel 711L. FIG. 37 is a partial cross-sectional view of the left reel 711L cut along the rotation shaft 1701B through the rotation shaft 1701B in a state where the width of the symbol row is narrowed (reduced). 42(b) and 42(c), cross-section hatching is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 42(b), the left reel 711L has an opening side edge 1702A of the second reel body 1702 located on the left side in the gaming machine front view, and a first reel body located on the right side in the gaming machine front view. It is a cylindrical body formed by inserting it from the opening side edge 1701A side of 1701.

A rotation shaft 1701B extending inward from the side surface is provided at a position on the rotation axis on the side surface of the first reel body 1701. The rotating shaft 1701B is connected to a reel drive motor 721L fixed to a base (not shown) provided inside the first reel body 1701.

Although not shown, the first reel body 1701 and the second reel body 1702 are engaged with each other so that the reel bodies 1701 and 1702 are not displaced from each other in the circumferential direction. Accordingly, when the reel drive motor 721L is driven, the first reel body 1701 and the second reel body 1702 rotate integrally.

In addition, as a configuration for suppressing the positional displacement of the first reel body 1701 and the second reel body 1702 in the circumferential direction, for example, the first reel body 1701 located outside of the first reel body 1701 and the second reel body 1702 is used. On the surface on the back side with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the second reel body 1702 located inside, a convex portion (not shown) protruding inward from the surface is continuously provided in the left-right direction corresponding to the rotation axis direction. On the outer peripheral surface of the first reel body 1701, a concave portion (not shown) corresponding to the convex portion is provided at a position corresponding to the convex portion of the first reel body 1701, and the convex portion of the first reel body 1701 and the second reel body 1702. A configuration for engaging with the concave portion of is exemplified.

In such a configuration, at least one pair of protrusions and recesses is formed in the circumferential direction of each reel body 1701, 1702. By providing a plurality of the pair of convex portions and concave portions, it is possible to more appropriately suppress the circumferential deviation of the reel bodies 1701 and 1702, and as the number increases, the circumferential direction of the reel bodies 1701 and 1702 increases. The deviation can be suppressed appropriately. The installation positions of the pair of protrusions and recesses are not particularly limited, but the appearance of the decorative pattern on the left reel 711L is a recess by providing it so as to avoid the drawing position of the decorative pattern drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the left reel 711L. It can be suppressed from being damaged by formation.

Further, as another configuration for suppressing the positional displacement of the first reel body 1701 and the second reel body 1702 in the circumferential direction, for example, a radius smaller than the radius of the outer peripheral surface is inside the outer peripheral surface of the first reel body 1701. Is provided on the inner side of the outer peripheral surface of the second reel body 1702 and is smaller than the first inner peripheral surface of the first reel body 1701 by one size. A circumferential surface having a radius (hereinafter, also referred to as “second inner circumferential surface”) is provided, and a convex portion projecting inward from the inner surface is provided on the inner surface of the first inner circumferential surface, which corresponds to the rotation axis direction. Are provided continuously in the direction, and on the outer surface of the second inner peripheral surface, concave portions corresponding to the convex portions of the first reel body 1701 are provided at positions corresponding to the convex portions, and the convex portions and the concave portions are engaged with each other. Alternatively, the configuration may be made.

As shown in FIG. 42B, an engagement groove 1702B extending over the entire circumference in the circumferential direction is formed on the surface on the back side of the outer peripheral surface of the second reel body 1702. In the present embodiment, the engagement groove 1702B is provided with two projecting portions 1702C projecting inward from the outer circumferential surface of the second reel body 1702 and extending in the circumferential direction over the entire circumference. It is formed by being provided in parallel with each other with a distance of the mating groove 1702B. That is, the engagement groove 1702B is composed of the groove between the two protruding portions 1702C. The engagement groove 1702B may be a groove formed on the surface on the back side of the outer peripheral surface of the second reel body 1702.

Inside the left reel 711L, a drive solenoid 1711 serving as a drive source for moving the second reel body 1702 with respect to the first reel body 1701 is provided on the outer peripheral surface side of the reel 711L. The drive solenoid 1711 is fixed to a base (not shown) provided inside the first reel body 1701 so as not to change with respect to the rotation of the first reel body 1701 (that is, the rotation of the left reel 711L). The solenoid main body 1711A is provided with a plunger 1711B that can be retracted from the solenoid main body 1711A.

The plunger 1711B has a shape in which the tip end on the side away from the solenoid body 1711A is bent in a substantially L shape. In the following, the tip of the plunger 1711B on the side away from the solenoid body 1711A is also simply referred to as the "tip of the plunger 1711B". The tip of the plunger 1711B is slidably engaged with an engagement groove 1702B formed in the second reel body 1702 with respect to the engagement groove 1702B.

The drive solenoid 1711 is connected to the main control board 920, and under the control of the main control board 920, the projecting attitude in which the plunger 1711B projects from the solenoid main body 1711A side and the retractable attitude in which the plunger 1711B retracts into the solenoid main body 1711A side are switched. Configured to be possible.

The drive solenoid 1711 is maintained in the projecting posture in a basic state, and shifts to the retracted posture when a predetermined timing for narrowing the width of the symbol row comes during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the "predetermined timing for narrowing the width of the symbol row" is the acceleration period in the variable display of the decorative symbol, that is, the rotation of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is at a predetermined speed. It is a predetermined timing set within the acceleration period up to.

When the drive solenoid 1711 is in the projecting posture, the width of the left symbol row (that is, the width of the left reel 711L) is the width W11 of the symbol row in the basic state, as shown in FIG. 42(a). It is said that.

On the other hand, when the drive solenoid 1711 is in the retracted posture, the plunger 1711B retracts to the solenoid body 1711A side, whereby the engagement groove 1702B of the second reel body 1702 is pulled toward the first reel body 1701 side by the plunger 1711B.

Since the plunger 1711B is slidably engaged with the engagement groove 1702B, when the drive solenoid 1711 shifts to the retracted posture during the variable display of the decorative pattern (that is, during the rotation of the left reel 711L). In particular, the force attracted to the first reel body 1701 side by the plunger 1711B acts on the entire circumference of the engagement groove 1702B by the rotation of the left reel 711L.

Therefore, when the drive solenoid 1711 is moved to the retracted position, the entire second reel body 1702 moves to the right side toward the first reel body 1701 side, that is, the middle reel 711M side (that is, FIG. ) In the direction of arrow M11). As a result, the insertion amount of the second reel body 1702 with respect to the first reel body 1701 is increased as compared with the case where the drive solenoid 1711 is in the projecting posture (that is, the left reel 711L is in the basic state). The width of the pattern row becomes smaller. Specifically, the width of the left symbol row changes from the length W11 to a length W12 shorter than the length W11.

Since the drive solenoid 1711 is moved to the retracted position during the acceleration period in the variable display of the decorative pattern, that is, during the period in which the reels 711L, 711M, 711R rotate at a relatively low speed, the plunger 1711B moves to the second position. The force of pulling the reel body 1702 toward the first reel body 1701 is likely to be applied uniformly over the entire circumference of the second reel body 1702. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the process of increasing the insertion amount of the second reel body 1702 into the first reel body 1701.

The right reel 711R has the same shape as that of the left reel 711L shown in FIGS. 42(b) and 42(c), which is obtained by horizontally reversing the cross section. Therefore, in the right reel 711R, by moving the drive solenoid 1711 to the retracted posture, the moving direction of the second reel body 1702 located on the right side of the first reel body 1701 is opposite to that of the left reel 711L. It operates in the same manner as the left reel 711L except that it is in a certain left direction (that is, the direction opposite to the arrow M11 direction). Therefore, the width of the right symbol row (that is, the width of the right reel 711R) changes from the length W11 to W12 when the drive solenoid 1711 shifts to the retracted posture.

The drive source for moving the second reel body 1702 with respect to the first reel body 1701 does not have to be the drive solenoid 1711 and may be various motors such as a stepping motor and a DC motor. When various motors are used as the drive source, a drive mechanism that is driven by the motors and draws the entire second reel body 1702 toward the first reel body 1701 may be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42(a), FIG. 42(d), FIG. 42(e), and FIG. 43, each symbol displayed by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. A change in the size of the column display area will be described.

FIG. 42(d) is a front view of the reel device 710 when the width of the left and right symbol columns by the left and right reels 711L, 711R is narrowed, and FIG. 42(e) shows the reels 711L, 711M, 711R. It is a front view of the reel device 710 when the display area of each symbol row is reduced by movement.

The width of the left and right symbol rows is changed during the variable display of the decorative symbol as described above, but in FIG. 42(d), each symbol column is stopped so that the shape of the decorative symbol can be easily identified. It is illustrated as if it is done. Similarly, the reduction of the display area of each symbol row by the movement of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is also performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, as will be described later, but in FIG. In order to make it easy to identify the shape, it is illustrated as if each symbol row is stopped.

In addition, FIG. 43 is a timing chart showing the operation of each configuration when the size of the display area of each symbol row is changed. Note that the timing chart of FIG. 43 conceptually shows the operation order of each configuration, and the interval of each timing from time t1 to time t8 is not necessarily proportional to the actual time interval.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the state where the right of the unit game according to the first special symbol or the right of the unit game according to the second special symbol is not reserved, the first special symbol or the second special symbol When the variable display of symbols in the unit game according to is started, the width of the left and right symbol rows (that is, the width of the left and right reels 711L and 711R) is narrowed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43, in a state where the right of the unit game relating to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not reserved, the unit relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol When the variable display of symbols in the game is started (time t1), the reel drive motors 721L, 721M, 721R for the reels 711L, 711M, 711R start rotating from the stopped state. As a result, the reels 711L, 711M, 711R start to rotate, and the variable display of decorative symbols is started.

The rotation speeds of the reel drive motors 721L, 721M, and 721R are gradually accelerated after being started at time t1 and at time t4 until the rotation of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R reaches a predetermined speed. Thereby, the changing speed of the decorative pattern is gradually accelerated. That is, the period from time t1 to time t4 is the acceleration period in the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The drive solenoids 1711 provided on the left and right reels 711L and 711R are driven at the timing of time t2 which is after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the time t1 within the acceleration period in the variable display of the decorative pattern. Then (that is, the non-energized state is switched to the energized state), and accordingly, the protruding posture is switched to the immersed posture.

Since the drive solenoid 1711 is switched to the retracted posture, the engagement groove 1702B of the second reel body 1702 on each reel 711L, 711R is pulled toward the first reel body 1701 side by the plunger 1711B of the drive solenoid 1711. The displacement of the second reel body 1702 with respect to the first reel body 1701 gradually increases by utilizing the rotation of the reels 711L and 711R, and reaches a maximum displaceable value at time t3.

As a result, the widths of the left and right reels 711L and 711 (see FIG. 42(a)), which have the maximum width W11 when the drive solenoid 1711 is in the projecting posture (that is, the basic state), At time t3, as shown in FIG. 42(d), the length becomes the minimum width W12. The time t3 may be the time after the acceleration period ends.

Since the width of each of the left and right reels 711L and 711 has been narrowed from the length W11 to the length W12, the width of the display area of each symbol row by the three rows of reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is in the basic state. As shown in FIG. 42(d), the length W21 (see FIG. 42(a)) changes to a length W22 shorter than the length W21.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the left and right reels 711L and 711 (left and right symbol rows) are displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol (more specifically, during the acceleration period in the variable display of the decorative symbol). By narrowing the width of each, the size of the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R can be made smaller than the size of the display area in the basic state.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, each reel 711L. The main symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of 711M and 711R are, as shown in FIG. 42(a), Arabic numerals displayed on a 7-segment display, that is, one horizontal line extending in a substantially horizontal direction and the horizontal line. It is a number composed of two vertical lines arranged at both ends.

Three-row reel 711L. Of the 711M and 711R, in the left and right reels 711L and 711R formed by the combination of the first reel body 1701 and the second reel body 1702, the two vertical lines that make up the numbers are the respective reel bodies 1701 and 1702. One horizontal line is drawn across both reel bodies 1701 and 1702.

Therefore, when the width of the left and right symbol rows (that is, the width of the left and right reels 711L and 711R) is narrowed by the drive of the drive solenoid 1711, as shown in FIG. 42(d), the number as the main symbol is changed. Since the horizontal lines that are formed are only apparently short, it is possible to prevent the appearance of numbers from being unnatural by narrowing the width of the left and right symbol rows.

Each reel 711L. The main symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of 711M and 711R do not necessarily have to be the Arabic numerals displayed on the 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 42(a), but the Arabic numerals of various typefaces. Also, it may be a number other than the Arabic number. In addition, each reel 711L. The main symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of 711M and 711R do not necessarily have to be numbers, and may be patterns corresponding to the respective numbers.

Since the sub-symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the left and right reels 711L and 711R are arranged substantially in the center in the width direction of the symbol row, the width of the symbol rows on the left and right is narrowed as shown in FIG. 42(d). In this case, it is hidden behind the first reel body 1701 and invisible. Therefore, when the width of the left and right symbol rows is narrowed, the sub symbols apparently disappear, so that the presence of the main symbols on the left and right reels 711L and 711R can be emphasized.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the left and right reels 711L and 711R can be moved rightward or leftward, and the middle reel 711M can be moved backward, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 of the tenth embodiment described above. Since it is configured to be possible, it is possible to reduce the display area of each symbol row also by moving each reel 711L, 711M, 711R.

As shown in FIG. 43, the rotation speeds of the reel drive motors 721L, 721M, and 721R are accelerated until the rotation of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R reaches a predetermined speed (time t4), and then the reels are driven. The 711L, 711M, and 711R are maintained to rotate at the predetermined speed. As a result, after time t4, the decorative symbol rapidly changes at a predetermined speed during the period until the rotation speed of the reel drive motors 721L, 721M, 721R is reduced.

During the high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern, a gear 781 (see FIG. 34(c)) is controlled by a drive mechanism (not shown) at time t5, which is a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds after) from time t4. ) Is started, whereby the middle reel 711M gradually moves rearward. Thereafter, the operation of the gear 781 is stopped at time t6, whereby the middle reel 711M stops at a predetermined position behind the left and right reels 711L and 711R.

The operation of the gears 782 and 783 (see FIG. 34(c)) is started by the control of the drive mechanism (not shown) at a timing of time t7 which is a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds after) from time t6. It As a result, the left and right reels 711L, 711R gradually move toward each other (that is, the center side in the arrangement direction of the three rows of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R). That is, as shown in FIG. 42(e), the left reel 711L gradually moves in the right direction (arrow M12 direction), and the right reel 711R gradually moves in the left direction (arrow M13 direction).

The operation of the gears 782 and 783 started at time t7 is stopped at time t8, whereby the left and right reels 711L and 711R stop at a predetermined position where a part of them overlaps the front of the middle reel 711M.

By moving the reels 711L, 711M, 711R of the three rows as described above, the width of the display area of each symbol row by these reels 711L, 711M, 711R narrows the width of the left and right reels 711L, 711. As a result, the length W22 (see FIG. 42(d)) that can be achieved changes to a length W23 shorter than the length W22, as shown in FIG. 42(e).

When the width of the display area of each symbol row is shortened to the length W23 by the movement of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R, the left and right reels 711L, 711R are closer to each other, so that the player It is possible to visually recognize the stop symbol by the reels 711L and 711R at a glance.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the width of the display area of each symbol row by the three rows of reels 711L, 711M, 711R is narrowed as described above, the width of the display area is special. After the variable display of the symbol in the unit game related to the symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started, in a situation where the right of the unit game related to the special symbol is not reserved, after high-speed fluctuation in the variable symbol Therefore, the variable display is returned to the basic state (see FIG. 42A) before it stops. That is, when the width of the display area of each symbol row by the three columns of reels 711L, 711M, 711R is narrowed, the width of the narrowed display area is maintained while the unit game right related to the special symbol is reserved. To be done.

The procedure for returning the width of the display area of each symbol row to the basic state is, for example, by shifting the drive solenoid 1711 to the projecting posture during the deceleration period from the high-speed variation to the variation display of the decorative symbol, The width of the symbol row (that is, the width of the left and right reels 711L and 711R) is expanded to the width (length W11) in the basic state, and after that the variable display is stopped, the reels 711L, 711M and 711R The arrangement may be returned to the arrangement in the basic state (the arrangement shown in FIG. 42A), and the arrangement of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R while the variable display of the decorative pattern is the high speed change. After returning to, the width of the left and right symbol rows may be returned during the deceleration period of the variable display. Alternatively, both the width of the left and right symbol rows and the arrangement of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R may be returned to the deceleration period of the variable display of the decorative symbols.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the left and right reels 711L and 711 are configured so that their widths can be changed. Therefore, by narrowing the widths of the left and right reels 711L and 711, the three rows of reels 711L, It is possible to reduce the display area of each symbol row by 711M and 711R (more specifically, narrow the width of the display area of each symbol row). Therefore, the entire display area of the variable display of the decorative pattern can be easily brought into the player's field of view, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the variable display of the decorative pattern difficult to see.

Further, by narrowing the width of each of the left and right reels 711L, 711 and then moving each reel 711L, 711M, 711R, it is possible to further reduce the display area of each symbol row. It is possible to make it easier to fit the entire display area into the player's visual field.

The reduction of the display area of each symbol row by reducing the width of each of the left and right reels 711L, 711, and the reduction of the display area of each symbol row by the movement of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R are variable display of decorative symbols. In the configuration in which the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stopped and displayed before the middle reel 711M, the player plays one reel after the other reel 711L and 711R is stopped. While visually recognizing the symbol (the number which is the main symbol), it is possible to visually recognize the movement of the other reel while expecting that the reach display is constituted by the symbol of the other reel. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the expectation for the formation of the reach display without greatly moving the line of sight during the period until the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stopped, and the variable display of the decorative symbol during the period can be saved. You can enjoy for a minute.

As shown in FIG. 42(e), when the left and right reels 711L and 711R overlap in front of the middle reel 711M, some of the numbers of the main symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M are left and right. It is hidden by the reels 711L and 711R. Therefore, since it becomes difficult to determine the content of the stop symbol by the middle reel 711M, although the player has difficulty in determining the lottery result of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), the special symbol display device 471 or The lottery result can be grasped by looking at the confirmation display displayed on the special symbol display device 472.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the width of the display area of each symbol row by the three rows of reels 711L, 711M, 711R is narrowed, the width of the narrowed display area is the special symbol ( 1 special symbol, the second special symbol) is maintained while the unit game right relating to it is reserved. Therefore, since the unit game right of the special symbol is reserved, while the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously executed, the player can enjoy the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol without greatly moving the line of sight. it can.

<Fourteenth Embodiment>
Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45. The pachinko machine 100 according to the fourteenth embodiment is characterized by how the light guide plate 715B shines, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to thirteenth embodiments will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.
First, the structural configuration of the light guide plate 715B included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44(a) and 44(b). FIG. 44(a) is a perspective view of the light guide plate 715B of the present embodiment seen from the rear side, and FIG. 44(b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide plate 715B obtained by cutting the substantially center in the left/right direction in the vertical direction. is there. Note that in FIG. 44B, the drive solenoid 1731 attached to the protrusion 1721 of the light guide plate 715B is also shown. In addition, in FIG. 44B, the hatching of the cross section is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 44(a), on the back surface side (rear surface) of the upper and lower flat surface portions 715B2, 715B3 in the light guide plate 715B, a projection portion 1721 is provided substantially at the center in the left-right direction of each flat surface portion 715B2, 715B3. It is projected. The protrusion 1721 is arranged above the light guide plate 715B and below the light source unit 812 (see FIG. 40), and above the light source unit 813 (see FIG. 40) arranged below the light guide plate 715B. To position. The protrusion 1721 has an engagement hole extending forward from the rear end face, and the plunger 1731B of the drive solenoid 1731 is engaged with the engagement hole, as shown in FIG. 44(b).

The drive solenoid 1731 includes a solenoid main body 1731A fixed to a base (not shown) provided on the base body 401, and a plunger 1731B that can be retracted from the solenoid main body 1731A. As shown in FIG. 44B, the drive solenoid 1731 attached to the upper protrusion 1721 is attached so that the plunger 1731B faces downward, and the drive solenoid 1731 attached to the lower protrusion 1721 is the plunger 1731B. Are mounted so that they face upward.

The plunger 1731B has a shape in which the tip end on the side away from the solenoid body 1731A is bent in a substantially L shape. In the following, the tip of the plunger 1731B on the side away from the solenoid body 1731A will be simply referred to as the "tip of the plunger 1731B". The plunger 1731B is engaged by inserting its tip into the engagement hole of the protrusion 1721.

The drive solenoid 1731 is connected to the main control board 920, and under the control of the main control board 920, the projecting attitude in which the plunger 1731B projects from the solenoid main body 1731A side and the retractable attitude in which the plunger 1731B retracts into the solenoid main body 1731A side are switched. Configured to be possible.

The drive solenoid 1731 is maintained in the protruding posture in a basic state, and shifts to the retracted posture when a predetermined timing comes. The "predetermined timing for shifting the drive solenoid 1731 to the immersive posture" is, for example, the start timing of a predetermined effect such as a specific suggestion effect among various effects using the light emission display by the light guide plate 715B. Alternatively, it may be the start timing of the effect selected with a predetermined probability, or the timing when the player operates a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261).

When the drive solenoid 1731 moves to the retracted posture, the plunger 1731B engaged with the engagement hole of the protrusion 1721 causes the upper side of the light guide plate 715B to move upward (in the direction of arrow M31) as shown in FIG. 44(b). The lower side of the light guide plate 715B is pulled downward (in the direction of the arrow M32). As a result, the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B is stretched in the vertical direction, so that the radius of curvature of the curved portion 715B1 becomes larger than that before the actuation of the drive solenoid 1731 (that is, when the drive solenoid 1731 is in the projecting posture). ..

Since the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the light source unit 812 is displaced upward together with the upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B even when the drive solenoid 1731 is moved to the retracted posture. Similarly, since the light source unit 813 is also fixed to the light guide plate 715B, it is displaced downward together with the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B even when the drive solenoid 1731 is moved to the retracted posture.

Therefore, the positional relationship between the light emitting unit 824 of the light source unit 812 and the upper end surface 715B5, and the positional relationship between the light emitting unit 834 of the light source unit 813 and the lower end surface 715B4 are both the attitude of the drive solenoid 1731 (protruding attitude or immersing attitude). It is almost constant regardless of posture. That is, the output of the light incident from the light emitting means 824 to the upper end surface 715B5 and the output of the light incident from the light emitting means 834 to the lower end surface 715B4 are substantially constant regardless of the attitude of the drive solenoid 1731. ..

Next, with reference to FIGS. 44(c), 44(d), and 45, the way in which the light guide plate 715B shines according to the attitude of the drive solenoid 1731 will be described. 44C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper portion of the light guide plate 715B when the drive solenoid 1731 is in the protruding state, and FIG. 44D is when the drive solenoid 1731 is in the retracted state. 7 is a schematic cross-sectional view of an upper portion of a light guide plate 715B.

The light incident on the upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B from the light source unit 812 utilizes the critical angle between the material (for example, acrylic resin) of the light guide plate 715B on the front and back of the light guide plate 715B and the air inside the light guide plate 715B. The light is guided downward while refracting.

When the fish pattern 743 is drawn on the back surface of the light guide plate 715B (the surface in the direction of the arrow B), the position where light guided inside the light guide plate 715B is refracted on the back side of the light guide plate 715B (hereinafter, this position) Is also referred to as “back side refraction position”), the portion of the design 743 drawn at that position is emitted more strongly than the portion of the design 743 drawn at a position different from that position. Therefore, when the drive solenoid 1731 is in the projecting posture, as shown in FIG. 44C, the pattern 743 is relatively strongly light-emitted and displayed at the position PA which is the back-side bending position in the light guide plate 715B.

When the drive solenoid 1731 shifts from the projecting posture to the retracted posture, the radius of curvature of the bending portion 715B1 changes (more specifically, the radius of curvature increases), which is shown in FIG. 44(d). As described above, the back side refraction position of the light guide plate 715B changes from the position PA when the drive solenoid 1731 is in the projecting posture to the position PB. As a result, the position at which the pattern 743 is relatively strongly luminescently displayed changes to a position different from that in the case where the drive solenoid 1731 is in the projecting posture.

FIG. 45 is a front view of the screen portion of the light guide plate 715B. When the screen portion (that is, the curved portion 715B1) of the light guide plate 715B is viewed from the front, it is the position PA1, the position PA2, and the position PA3 (see FIG. 45(a)) when the drive solenoid 1731 is in the protruding posture. The back refraction position changes to the position PB1, the position PB2, and the position PB3 (see FIG. 45(b)) as the drive solenoid 1731 shifts to the retracted posture.

The position where the light that is incident on the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B from the light source unit 813 and is guided downward in the light guide plate 715B is refracted on the back side of the light guide plate 715B (that is, the back refraction position). ) Changes in accordance with the posture of the drive solenoid 1731, like the light incident on the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B from the light source unit 813 below the top X of the curved portion 715B1.

Specifically, regarding the light incident on the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B, it is the position PC1, the position PC2, and the position PC3 (see FIG. 45A) when the drive solenoid 1731 is in the protruding posture. The refraction position changes to the position PD1, the position PD2, and the position PD3 (see FIG. 45(b)) by the drive solenoid 1731 moving to the retracted position.

In this way, by changing the radius of curvature of the bending portion 715B1 by operating the drive solenoid 1731, the position of strong light emission (that is, the position where the pattern 743 shines) of the fish pattern 743 that can be displayed on the light guide plate 715B is changed. Can be made

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, by changing the radius of curvature of the curved portion 715B1, it is possible to change the position where the fish pattern 743 illuminates. Therefore, how the fish pattern 743 illuminates and is displayed on the light guide plate 715B. It is possible to suppress uniform color development. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the light emission display of the pattern 743 from becoming monotonous, it is possible to realize the diversification of the display mode on the light guide plate 715B.

Further, since the change of the light emission display of the light guide plate 715B is realized by the change of the radius of curvature of the curved portion 715B1, it is possible to change the light emission display of the light guide plate 715B while using the installed light guide plate 715B as it is.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifteenth embodiment, two light guide plates 1751 and 1771 are used to diversify the effect of light emission display of the light guide plates. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to fourteenth embodiments will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 46 is a front view of two light guide plates 1751 and 1771 overlapping in the front-rear direction. In FIG. 46, the light guide plate support portion 1772 and the gear 1773 for moving one light guide plate 1771 are also shown. Further, in FIG. 46, in order to facilitate understanding of the drawing, a part of the configuration of the light guide plate 1771 and the like is shown by thick lines.

The light guide plate 1751 is a flat light guide plate having light transmittance. The light guide plate 1751 is arranged in front of a display device having a screen capable of displaying a decorative pattern, such as the decorative pattern display device 479, so as to overlap the display device.

As shown in FIG. 46(b), on one surface side (for example, the back surface side) of the resin plate having the light-transmitting property that constitutes the light guide plate 1751, a fish pattern 1761 forming a part of the school of fish facing left is formed. It is formed by fine irregularities.

Above and below the light guide plate 1751, light emitting means (not shown) such as LEDs that respectively enter light into the upper end surface and the lower end surface of the light guide plate 1751 are arranged along the upper end surface or the lower end surface. By controlling the light emission of the light emitting means by the sub control board 940, the fish pattern 1761 can be displayed on the light guide plate 1751 by light emission.

Specifically, by turning off the light emitting means, the fish pattern 1761 is not displayed as shown in FIG. 46(a), and by turning on the light emitting means, the fish pattern 1761 is displayed as shown in FIG. 46(b). The pattern 1761 can be displayed by light emission. Accordingly, for example, by controlling the timing of turning on and off the light emitting means arranged along the upper end surface and the lower end surface of the light guide plate 1751, the school of fish by the pattern 1761 moves from right to left on the light guide plate 1751. It is possible to perform an effect that looks as if

The light guide plate 1771 is a flat light guide plate having a light-transmitting property and having a width in the left-right direction narrower than that of the light guide plate 1751. The light guide plate 1771 overlaps the light guide plate 1751 behind the light guide plate 1751. Along with the display device such as the decorative pattern display device 479, the display device is arranged so as to overlap the display device.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), on one surface side (for example, the back surface side) of the resin plate having the light-transmitting property that constitutes the light guide plate 1771, there is a fish pattern 1781 that constitutes a part of the school of fish facing left. It is formed by fine irregularities.

Above and below the light guide plate 1771, light emitting means (not shown) such as LEDs that respectively enter light into the upper end surface and the lower end surface of the light guide plate 1771 are arranged along the upper end surface or the lower end surface. By controlling the light emission of the light emitting means by the sub-control board 940, it is possible to display the fish pattern 1781 on the light guide plate 1771 by light emission. Specifically, by turning on the light emitting means, as shown in FIGS. 46(a) and 46(b), the fish pattern 1781 can be displayed by light emission. By turning off the light emitting means, it is possible to prevent the fish pattern 1781 from being displayed in a light emitting state.

On the upper side of the light guide plate 1771, a light guide plate support portion 1772 extending in the left-right direction and supporting the light guide plate 1771 to which the light emitting means is attached is provided from the upper side. On the upper side surface of the light guide plate support portion 1772, a rack gear (not shown) in which the tooth portion of the gear 1773 is toothed is linearly formed in the left-right direction.

The gear 1773 is fixed to a base (not shown) provided on the base 401. The gear 1773 is connected to a drive mechanism (not shown) whose drive is controlled by the sub control board 940, and operates by drive control of the drive mechanism by the sub control board 940. The gear 1773 is provided so as to be meshed with a rack gear formed in the light guide plate support portion 1772, whereby the rack and pinion mechanism by the rack gear formed in the light guide plate support portion 1772 and the gear 1773 guides the gear. The light plate 1771 can be moved in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrow M41 and the opposite direction).

A groove-shaped rail portion (not shown) that extends in the left-right direction and slidably supports the light guide plate 1771 to which the light emitting means is attached is slidably provided below the light guide plate 1771. It is provided, and the lower end side of the light guide plate 1771 is guided by the rail portion when moving in the left-right direction.

In the example shown in FIG. 46, the light guide plate 1771 is moved to a position where the right end of the light guide plate 1771 and the right end of the light guide plate 1751 overlap with each other and the left end of the light guide plate 1771 and the left end of the light guide plate 1751 overlap with each other. Configured to be possible. Note that the initial position of the light guide plate 1771 is not necessarily a position where the right end of the light guide plate 1771 and the right end of the light guide plate 1751 overlap, and the right end of the light guide plate 1771 is on the right side of the right end of the light guide plate 1751. It may be a position or a position on the left side. Similarly, the end point of the movement range of the light guide plate 1771 is not necessarily the position where the left end of the light guide plate 1771 and the left end of the light guide plate 1751 overlap, and the left end of the light guide plate 1771 is more than the left end of the light guide plate 1751. The position may be on the left side or the position on the right side.

In this way, the light guide plate 1771 is provided so as to be movable in the left and right direction by the operation of the gear 1773. Therefore, by moving the light guide plate 1771 on which the fish pattern 1781 is luminescently displayed to the left direction, the fish group by the pattern 1761 is moved. It is possible to perform an effect that looks as if a school of fish is moving from right to left. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 46( a ), by moving the light guide plate 1771 on which the fish pattern 1781 is light-emitted and displayed while the fish pattern 1761 is not light-emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 1751. It is possible to show the player an effect of moving a school of fish that is smaller than the size of the school of fish (that is, has a narrow width in the traveling direction).

Further, since the light guide plate 1771 is movable relative to the light guide plate 1751, as shown in FIG. 46(b), the fish pattern 1781 is displayed with the fish pattern 1761 displayed on the light guide plate 1751. When the light guide plate 1771 in which is displayed is moved, the school of fish by the design 1781 (the school of fish displayed by the light guide plate 1771) is different from the group of fish by the design 1761 (the group of fish displayed by the light guide plate 1751). It can appear as if moving at a relative speed. As a result, the behavior of the school of fish within the range of the light guide plate 1751 can be improved compared to the case where the group of fish due to the pattern 1761 is displayed as if moving from right to left in the light guide plate 1751 using only one light guide plate 1751. Can be complicated.

In addition, after the light guide plate 1771 is moved to the left (M41 direction), after the effect using the light emission display of the light guide plate 1771 is finished, the light emitting means is turned off (that is, the fish pattern 1781 is not emitted and displayed). Then, the gear 1773 is operated to move it rightward to the initial position.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in addition to the light guide plate 1751, the light guide plate 1771 that is movable relative to the light guide plate 1751 is provided, so that only one light guide plate 1751 emits light from the fish school. The behavior of the school of fish within the range of the light guide plate 1751 can be made more complicated than when displaying is performed. In addition, even if the two light guide plates 1751 and 1771 are fixedly provided (that is, one does not move relative to the other), the behavior of the school of fish within the range of the light guide plate 1751. Can be complicated. Therefore, since variations in the display mode of the fish school that the player can visually recognize from the front are increased, the display modes of the image by the light guide plate can be diversified.

Further, since the light guide plate 1751 and the light guide plate 1771 are provided so as to be overlapped with each other in the front-rear direction, a sense of depth can be expressed by the design 1761 displayed on the light guide plate 1751 and the design 1781 displayed on the light guide plate 1771. Therefore, also in this respect, it becomes possible for the player to increase the variation of the display mode of the school of fish visually recognizable from the front, and thus the display mode of the image by the light guide plate can be diversified.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixteenth embodiment, a device is added so that the player can easily grasp the information on the start winning interval. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to fifteenth embodiments will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 47A is a screen diagram for explaining the display area of the decorative symbol display device 479 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 47A, a hold count display area 1810 is provided below the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. The hold count display area 1810 is an area in which a hold icon 1812 (see FIG. 47(b)) indicating that the right of the unit game relating to the special symbol is held is displayed.

In the number-of-holds display area 1810, a number (8 in the present embodiment) of icons corresponding to the total upper limit of the number of times of holding the right of the unit game related to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) Display areas A1 to A8 are provided. Each time the number of holdings for the special symbol (the number of holdings of the right to play the unit game relating to the special symbol) increases, one icon to the right from the leftmost icon display area A1 (that is, toward the icon display area A8), icon A hold icon 1812 is displayed in the display area. Therefore, the player, from the number of hold icons 1812 displayed in the number-of-holds display area 1810, the number of unit game rights relating to the special symbol that is being held (that is, the number of variable display of the special symbol that is being held). ) Can be grasped. For each special symbol type, that is, the number of times the first special symbol is reserved is displayed in the four icon display areas A1 to A4 on the left side, and the number of times the second special symbol is reserved is four right icon display areas A5. It may be displayed in A8.

On the upper right side of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479, a platform state icon display area 1820 is provided. The platform status icon display area 1820 is an area in which a platform status icon 1821 described later is displayed. Although details will be described later, the player can determine the state of the pachinko machine 100 in which the platform state icon 1821 is displayed, by the number of platform state icons 1821 displayed in the platform state icon display area 1820.

FIG. 47B is a schematic diagram showing a screen transition of the decorative symbol display device 479 with an increase in the number of holdings. Variable display of the special symbol is not executed, the right of the unit game is not reserved, is not in the special game state (hereinafter, this state is also referred to as "non-fluctuation state") special symbol (first special symbol) , 2nd special symbol) when the start winning occurs, the right of the unit game relating to the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning is temporarily suspended, but the variable display of the special symbol is started immediately. Therefore, with the start of the variable display, the number of holdings for the special symbol becomes 0 (zero). In the following, for the sake of convenience, the starting winning of the special symbol generated in the non-variable state is also referred to as "first starting winning".

When the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first start winning is started, the pending schedule icon 1811 is displayed in the icon display area until the number of holdings for the special symbol becomes 1 as shown in FIG. 47(b). It is displayed on A1. The hold scheduled icon 1811 is displayed in the icon display area corresponding to the "current hold count+1" hold count among the icon display areas A1 to A8 until the next scheduled special symbol start winning occurs. The icon has a predetermined shape (a circular shape in the example shown in FIG. 47B).

The hold schedule icon 1811 is configured such that its display mode changes according to the elapsed time from the last (that is, the last time) occurrence of the start winning. In the example shown in FIG. 47(b), the numerical value displayed in the hold schedule icon 1811 is configured to change as time passes as a numerical value indicating the number of seconds of the elapsed time.

The start winning interval (that is, the elapsed time since the last start winning) is measured using a predetermined timer or counter provided on the sub-control board 940. Specifically, the sub-control board 940 uses a predetermined timer or counter provided on the sub-control board 940, and a predetermined command transmitted from the main control board 920 based on the occurrence of a start winning of each special symbol. The interval of the reception timing of (for example, the hold command) is measured as the interval of occurrence of the start winning. Alternatively, a configuration may be used in which a predetermined timer or counter provided on the main control board 920 is used to measure the elapsed time from the last generated start winning and the measurement result is transmitted to the sub control board 940.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 47B, the size of the hold schedule icon 1811 is configured to change according to the elapsed time. Specifically, the size of the hold scheduled icon 1811 is displayed at a predetermined minimum size at the time of the last occurrence of the start winning, and is dependent on the elapsed time from the start winning (starting winning last occurred). And gradually changes greatly, and reaches the maximum size that can be displayed in the icon display areas A1 to A8 after a predetermined time (10.0 seconds in the example shown in FIG. 47B) from the minimum size.

When the next scheduled winning is not generated even when the hold scheduled icon 1811 reaches the maximum size, the hold scheduled icon 1811 returns to the minimum size and gradually changes from the minimum size again. The hold schedule icon 1811 repeats changing from the minimum size to the maximum size and returning to the initial size when the maximum size is reached until the next start winning.

Within the period from the start of the variable display corresponding to the first starting prize to the return to the non-changing state, the starting prize of a new special symbol following the first starting prize (hereinafter, the starting prize is convenient. (Also referred to as "second starting prize"), the number of times of holding for the special symbol becomes 1, and in the icon display area A1, as shown in FIG. 47(b), instead of the holding scheduled icon 1811, A hold icon 1812 is displayed.

The hold icon 1812 displayed in the icon display area A1 due to the occurrence of the second start prize has the same size as the size of the hold scheduled icon 1811 at the time of occurrence of the second start prize, and the first start prize is Includes a numerical value that indicates the elapsed time since the occurrence.

Therefore, the hold icon 1812 is an icon indicating that the right to the unit game relating to the special symbol is held, and the display mode has changed according to the time elapsed since the last start winning. This is also a confirmation display of the hold scheduled icon 1811 accompanying the occurrence of the next new start winning. Therefore, each hold icon 1812 displayed in each icon display area A1 to A8 is the time when the start winning of the special symbol corresponding to each hold icon 1812 occurs, and the previous time (that is, the occurrence of the start winning) for the start winning. It is displayed in a display mode that reflects the time interval between the start timing of the special symbol (which has occurred last before) and the start winning.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon 1812 is displayed in a display color different from that of the hold schedule icon 1811. For example, the hold schedule icon 1811 is displayed in blue and the hold icon 1812 is displayed in red, or the hold schedule is set. The icon 1811 is displayed in a light transparent background color, and the hold icon 1812 is displayed in a dark color in which the background is not transparent. Therefore, the player can easily distinguish whether the icon displayed in the hold count display area 1810 is the hold scheduled icon 1811 or the hold icon 1812 by the difference in display color. The hold schedule icon 1811 and the hold icon 1812 may have the same display color, or the hold schedule icon 1811 and the hold icon 1812 may have different shapes.

When the hold icon 1812 displayed in the icon display area A1 is displayed, that is, in the period from the start of the variable display corresponding to the first start prize to the return to the non-variable state, the second start prize is given. When it occurs, the hold icon 1812 is displayed in the icon display area A2 corresponding to the hold count of “2” which is “current hold count+1”, and the hold icon 1812 is displayed in the icon display area A1. Similarly, the display mode changes according to the elapsed time from the last-generated start winning.

In addition, when the second start winning is not generated within the period from the start of the variable display corresponding to the first start winning to the return to the non-changing state, the hold schedule displayed in the icon display area A1 is held. The icon 1811 is erased without fail or under certain conditions. An example of this certain condition is that the player has not touched the firing operation device 250 and finished the firing operation, or that the player has won the big hit lottery and moved to the special gaming state. ..

Further, when the hold for the special symbol is exhausted, that is, when the variable display being executed is completed, the hold icon 1812 displayed in the icon display area A1 is erased and displayed in the icon display areas A2 to A8. The held icon 1812 moves from the currently displayed icon display area to the icon display area adjacent to the left thereof while maintaining its display mode.

The hold-scheduled icon 1811 also moves from the icon display area being displayed to the icon display area on the left of the icon display areas A2 to A8 as the hold for the special symbol is exhausted, Continue to change. Then, in the state in which the hold scheduled icon 1811 is displayed in the icon display area A1, the next starting winning does not occur, and the variable display corresponding to the first starting winning is started until it returns to the non-changing state. When the period ends, the hold scheduled icon 1811 displayed in the icon display area A1 is deleted.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 47( b ), when the number of holding times is 1, the start winning award of a new special symbol following the second starting winning a prize (hereinafter, the starting winning award is referred to as “convenient for convenience”). (Also referred to as "third starting prize"), the number of holdings for the special symbol is 2, and the holding icon 1812 is displayed in the icon display area A2 as the confirmation display of the holding planned icon 1811 and the held planned icon. 1811 is displayed in the icon display area A3.

Next, the platform status icon display area 1820 will be described. In the platform status icon display area 1820, a predetermined maximum number (10 in this embodiment) of platform status icons 1821 are displayed in the initial state when the pachinko machine 100 is activated by operating the power switch 909. Has been done.

During a predetermined game period (in the present embodiment, during a shooting operation in which a game ball is being shot from the launching device 330 in the normal game state), a start prize of 1 is generated, and then a start prize of a special symbol If a new start winning does not occur even after a predetermined first period (for example, 60 seconds) provided in advance as a period sufficient to suspect the possibility of an abnormality relating to the occurrence of Of the platform status icons 1821 displayed in the icon display area 1820, one platform status icon 1821 is deleted.

That is, during the period in which the game balls are being fired from the launching device 330 in the normal game state, the interval for the starting prize of the special symbol is a period in which it is suspected that there is a possibility of an abnormality relating to the occurrence of the starting prize of the special symbol (ie, , 1st period), the platform state icons 1821 displayed in the platform state icon display area 1820 are decreased by one until the number becomes zero. Therefore, the smaller the number of the platform state icons 1821 displayed in the platform state icon display area 1820, the higher the possibility of an abnormality relating to the occurrence of the starting winning of the special symbol.

The determination as to whether or not the game ball is being emitted from the launching device 330 may be made based on the detection of contact between the launch handle 252 and the player by the contact sensor 254, or the launch path. A sensor capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the game area via 401B may be provided, and the detection may be performed based on the detection of the game ball (the game ball that has entered the game area) by the sensor, or the game ball may be discharged from the game area. A sensor may be provided in the collecting and discharging passage through which the game balls pass, and the detection may be performed based on the detection of the game balls (the game balls discharged from the game area) by the sensor.

On the other hand, during the period in which the game balls are being fired from the launching device 330, since a start winning a prize of 1 has occurred, it is provided in advance as a period with a low possibility of an abnormality relating to the occurrence of a starting winning of a special symbol. , When a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) that a new starting winning occurs occurs continuously before a predetermined second period (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the first period elapses. Indicates that there is a low possibility of an abnormality relating to the occurrence of the start-up winning of the special symbol, and therefore, the one platform state icon 1821 is added to the platform state icon display area 1820. When the number of platform status icons 1821 displayed in the platform status icon display area 1820 reaches the maximum number, the display of the maximum number of platform status icons 1821 is maintained.

In the case where the starting winnings of the special symbols that occur at an occurrence interval shorter than the second period continue over the reference number of times, each time the starting winnings of the special symbols occur over the reference number of times, the platform state icon 1821 is 1 Are added one by one. After the starting winnings of special symbols that occur at an interval shorter than the second period continue for the reference number of times, the number of starting winnings of special symbols that occur at an interval shorter than the second period is configured to start counting from zero again. Each time a starting winning of a special symbol that occurs at an occurrence interval shorter than two periods occurs a reference number of times in succession, one platform state icon 1821 may be added.

The number of platform status icons 1821 displayed in the platform status icon display area 1820 is returned to the initial value (maximum number) until the power switch 909 is turned off (that is, while the pachinko machine 100 is activated). Instead, the updated value is maintained as described above. Therefore, the player refers to the number of the platform status icons 1821 displayed in the platform status icon display area 1820 of each pachinko machine 100, and refers to the pachinko machine for playing from among the pachinko machines 100 that are not playing the game. You can choose the machine 100. An operating device for returning the number of platform status icons 1821 to an initial value may be provided, and when the operating device is operated, the number of platform status icons 1821 may be returned to the initial value. It may be provided, for example, on the back side of the pachinko machine 100, as a position that can be operated by a store clerk and inoperable by the player.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, each hold icon 1812 displayed in each icon display area A1 to A8 of the hold count display area 1810 is the start timing of the special winning symbol corresponding to each hold icon 1812, and It is displayed in a display mode that reflects the time interval between the time when the special winning symbol of the last time (that is, the last occurrence before the occurrence of the starting winning symbol) and the occurrence of the starting winning symbol for the starting winning symbol.

Therefore, since the start winning interval of the special symbol is reflected in the display mode of the hold icon 1812, the player is based on each display mode of the one or more hold icons 1812 displayed in the number-of-holds display area 1810. , In the non-fluctuation state, the start winning of the special symbol is started, and the variation display corresponding to the starting winning is started, and then the start of the special symbol is generated within the period until the non-fluctuation state is returned to again. It is possible to grasp the degree of easiness (that is, whether or not the starting winning of the special symbol is likely to occur during the period).

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, before the occurrence of the next winning start prize of the special symbol, the hold schedule icon 1811 whose display mode is changed according to the elapsed time from the last winning start prize. Is displayed in the number-of-holds display area 1810, the player can intuitively grasp the elapsed time since the last start condition was satisfied from the state of the change in the display mode.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the occurrence interval of the special symbol start prize during the predetermined game period is provided in advance as a period sufficient to doubt the possibility of an abnormality relating to the occurrence of the special symbol start prize. The number of the platform status icons 1821 is updated based on whether the predetermined first period is exceeded or the period is shorter than a predetermined second period which is previously set as a period in which there is a low possibility of an abnormality relating to the occurrence of a special symbol starting winning. To be done.

Therefore, the state of the pachinko machine 100, more specifically, the state related to the start winning of the special symbol (for example, the state of the nail 411) is the number of platform state icons 1821 displayed in the platform state icon display area 1820. Therefore, the player can determine the state of the pachinko machine 100 in which the platform state icon 1821 is displayed, based on the number of platform state icons 1821 displayed in the platform state icon display area 1820.

In particular, the number of the platform state icons 1821 is updated, during the predetermined game period (in the present embodiment, during the period when the game ball is being launched from the launching device 330 in the normal game state), the special symbol start winning a prize. Since it is updated based on the interval of, it is possible to exclude the event that the occurrence interval of the start winning of the special symbol becomes long because the game is not being played. Therefore, the reliability of the relationship between the number of platform status icons 1821 and the status of the pachinko machine 100 can be increased.

<17th Embodiment>
Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventeenth embodiment, a configuration capable of suitably executing the probability variation game state that can be shifted after the special game state and the time saving game state is added. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to sixteenth embodiments will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 48 is a description showing the types of lottery results based on the starting winnings in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and specifications such as the variation time, the display effect, the number of big winning opening rounds, the game state transition destination, and the presence/absence of a time saving state. It is a figure. The fixed value data corresponding to this specification is stored in the ROM of the main control board 920, and is controlled by the main control board 920 by the same program as the above embodiment. Note that in FIG. 48, items that are deeply related to other types are displayed surrounded by thick frame lines.

The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the winning probability of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, low probability state, high probability state is set, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol When the lottery is won, one of the big hits 1 and the big hit 2 is selected. The winning probability of the big hit is set to about 1/320 in the low probability state and about 1/137 in the high probability state, and the selection probability of the big hit type is, for example, 65% for the big hit and 35 for the big hit. It is set to %. In addition, the variable time, the display effect, etc. exemplify a configuration in which the probability variation game state and the time saving game state can be suitably executed, and relates to the second special symbol in the time saving state in which the start winning is generated by the right-handed game technique. Only the configuration will be described, and a part of the description regarding the configuration related to the first special symbol and the configuration such as the variable display in the normal gaming state will be omitted.

Here, as a specification regarding the first special symbol, as a big hit in the normal game state (low probability state), the probability variation game state shifts to the probability variation game state after the special game state, and the probability variation game state is unlimited until the next big hit. A big hit including at least a big hit that shifts to the state is set. As a specification regarding the first special symbol, as a big hit in the normal game state (low probability state), other big hits may be included, for example, as a big hit that shifts to the probability variation game state after the special game state, a unit of a certain number of times. Even if you execute a game, if you do not win the big hit, you may set it to include a big change that goes to the normal change game state and a certain number of times limit changes to the game state. It may be set to include a big hit that takes a short time game state in which the number of times of returning to the normal game state is limited when not winning.

The probability variation gaming state and the time saving game state are both time saving states, and the variable display time of the normal symbols is shorter than the non-time saving state. The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the variable display is set by the same selection condition in the probability variation game state and the time saving game state. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is configured so that it can be recognized in detail later so that it is difficult for the player to recognize the transition from the probability variation gaming state to the time saving gaming state. Specifically, the transition to the time saving game state is performed by the player after a lapse of a certain time or more after it is confirmed that the game is transferred to the normal game state unless the jackpot is won in the unit game in the time saving game state of 100 times. It is controlled to be recognizable, and the display control of the variable display and the effect at the timing when the remaining number of the unit games in the time saving game state corresponding to the 80th unit game is 20 times, and the variable display at the timing different from the timing and The display display control is different from the control.

First, with reference to FIG. 48(a), a description will be given of basic specifications that are specifications relating to the second special symbol in the time saving state, in which the remaining number of unit games in the time saving game state is not 20 times.

When the big hit 1 is won, a long-time variable display in which the variable time is set from 60 seconds to 120 seconds is displayed, and the decorative design display device 479 is used to perform a battle effect such as a warlord in the Warring States period. As a result, after a player selects or a character set as a main character in advance wins, a plurality of symbols stop at the symbol corresponding to the big hit. Then, a special game state of 15 rounds occurs, and after the special game state, it shifts to a probability variation game state accompanied by a time saving state, and the probability variation game state continues until the execution of the next unit game of the big hit.

When the big hit 2 is won, the result is displayed from the fluctuation display with the fluctuation time set to a short time of about 0.5 seconds, and then the big winning device (for example, the lower big winning device 433) is about 0.2 seconds. The special game state of two rounds in which the special winning opening is taken twice and the special winning opening is opened is generated. The interval time between the entry permission postures is set to about 0.6 seconds, and a special game state of about 1.0 seconds in total occurs. It is preferable that the entry allowable attitude in this special game state is set to a time length that is half or less of the firing time interval (approximately 0.6 seconds) of the game ball so that the game ball hardly enters the big winning device. As a result, it is possible for the player to have difficulty in recognizing the timing of occurrence of the big hit 2.

After winning the big jackpot 2 and ending the special game state, it shifts to a time saving game state with a limited number of times, and when it is a non-winning jackpot in the unit game relating to 100 special symbols, it shifts to the normal game state. .. Within 100 times as the limit on the number of times, if you win the big jackpot 1, move to the probability variation game state, and if you win the big jackpot 2, it is composed of 100 unit games related to the special symbol again after the winning The time saving game state is started.

Here, for the player, the winning of the big hit 2 in the probability variation gaming state is an opportunity to shift the gaming state from the probability variation gaming state to the time saving gaming state, and the time saving gaming state is limited to the number of the jackpots 2. If the player is made to immediately recognize the winning, there is a possibility that the player may feel unfortunate, such as the player's willingness to continue playing. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the winning of the big hit 2 is not immediately recognized by the player, but it is possible to recognize that the big hit 2 was previously won at a timing close to the end of the time saving game state. And the configuration. Therefore, if the jackpot 1 corresponding to the transition to the probability variation gaming state in the time saving game state is won, the player does not have to recognize the winning of the jackpot 2 and the probability that the probability variation gaming state continues is higher than the set probability. Like a thing, it can be recognized by the player through the production.

When the big hit 2 is won, the same display effect as the loss that is not won in the special symbol lottery is executed. The variation time of the loss is set to approximately 1.5 seconds, and is approximately the same as the variation time of the big hit 2 and the time of the special game state in which the special winning opening, which is the time of occurrence of the special game state, is added. Has become. On the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479, the character previously selected by the player is displayed, and the character “waiting for battle” continues to be displayed. Then, at the edge of the display screen, the variable display and the stop display are repeatedly displayed with a symbol such as a number displayed extremely small such as 3 mm, and the player almost visually recognizes the variable display and the stop display of the symbol. You can't, and visually check the situation where the "waiting for battle" status continues. Note that when the big hit 2 is won, the stop timing of the variable display on the decorative symbol display device 479 is about 1.5 seconds from the start of the same change as the timing of ending the special game state, and the stop result is the same as the loss. It is preferable to use a symbol display that is different from the symbol corresponding to the big hit, and to display the variation of the loss and the variation display that is substantially the same in appearance and time, which also makes it difficult for the player to recognize the timing of occurrence of the big hit 2. be able to.

As a special symbol lottery, when the big hits 1 and 2 are not won, the big hit device is activated to open the big winning opening, and the small hit is set. The small hit is a hit that maintains the previous state without changing the game state to another game state, and is set to generate a small hit game state in which a game ball can enter the big winning device. .. For example, a small win is won with a probability of approximately 1/234, and the big winning device operates in the same manner as the big win 2. The display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 is controlled to have the same (same) display content as when the big hit 2 is won. As a variation display of the special symbol, a variation display of a short time is executed in about 0.5 seconds, and after that, the special winning device takes the entry allowable posture of about 0.2 seconds twice to open the special winning opening 2 The small hit game state of the round is generated. As a result, the player cannot distinguish between the big hit 2 and the small hit even if he/she is paying attention to the big winning device, and it is difficult to recognize when the big hit 2 occurs.

When the special symbol lottery is not won, the result is lost, and a short-time variable display of approximately 1.5 seconds, which is longer than the big hit 2 and the small hit, is executed and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. The content of "Waiting for battle" continues to be displayed. Depending on the result of the loss, the game state does not shift, and the previous state of the time saving state is continued.

Here, the variable display of the special symbol, in the special symbol display device 471, 472, the variation stop at the timing of about 0.5 seconds, big hit 1, big hit 2, small hit, the stop symbol corresponding to each of the loss Is displayed. Therefore, in the inspection of the gaming machine, by managing the display contents of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, it is possible to recognize the accurate transition status of the gaming state. It should be noted that the management device for managing the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a device having an external terminal for externally outputting information corresponding to the situation of the pachinko machine 100, whereby each of the big hit 1, the big hit 2, the small hit, and the loss. Corresponding information may be output so that the accurate transition status of the game state can be managed even at the game hall.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48(B), which is a specification regarding the second special symbol in the time saving state, the remaining number of unit games in the time saving game state is 20 times (hereinafter, also referred to as “special effect time”). The specifications set for will be described. Note that the specifications set for the special effect times are different from those set for other times in the setting of the fluctuation time and the display effect, the number of rounds to open the special winning opening, the destination of the game state, and Whether or not the time saving state is set is the same.

When the big hit 1 is won in the special effect times, the same variable display and effect control as in the timing other than the special effect times are performed, and finally the battle effect is won and the special game state of 15 rounds is entered. From, the probability variation game state is started.

When the big hit 2 is won in the special effect time, the variable time is set to the same time length as the big hit 1, and until the middle of the variable display, like the big hit 1, the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 479 is different. Character appears and the battle effect to perform the battle is displayed. Then, in the latter half of the variable display, it is expressed that another character has appeared and the character selected by the player has been defeated, and a regrettable situation for the player has occurred. However, when the big hit 2 is won, the remaining number of unit games in the time saving game state, which is reduced to the remaining 20 times, is increased to 100 times, which is advantageous to the player as compared to a loss or a small hit. Becomes

When the small hit is won in the special effect times, the display control is performed in exactly the same manner as the winning of the big hit 2 except for the result display of the special symbol display device 472. Therefore, the player recognizes whether the small hit or the big hit 2 is won in the special effect time, even if the decoration symbol display device 479 is visually recognized or the operation of the big winning device is confirmed. Can not. Thereby, it is possible to let the player recognize which winning was won through the production in the time saving game state of 19 times after the next time.

For example, after winning the big hit 2 and the small hit, the display corresponding to the remaining number of the time saving state in the case of the small hit is displayed on the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 479, and, for example, “19 hours remaining remaining” is displayed. Then, the remaining number is subtracted and displayed in synchronization with the execution of the variable display. Then, in the case of a small hit, "0 time reduction remaining" is entered and the game state shifts to the normal game state, and in the case of a big hit 2, instead of displaying "0 time reduction remaining", "restart battle" is displayed. The player may be suggested that the time saving game state continues. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the condition for shifting to the normal gaming state has already been established and if the jackpot lottery is won in the remaining 19 unit games, the player will shift to the normal gaming state. it can.

In the special production times, if the lottery related to the special symbol is not won and loses, the display control is exactly the same as the winning of the small hit and the big hit 2 except for the result display of the special symbol display device 472. Done. In the case of the small hit and the big hit 2, the big winning device operates for about 1.0 second. Therefore, in the case of a loss, the variation time is set shorter by that amount. It is not possible to recognize whether or not the small hit, the big 2 win, or the loss is generated in the special performance time even when visually observing the decorative pattern display device 479. However, by confirming the operation of the special winning device, it is possible to recognize whether the game is lost or not. Further, even after the loss, a display corresponding to the remaining number of time saving states may be displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

It should be noted that the variation time between the big hit 2 and the small hit and the variation time of the loss are different from each other in the time corresponding to the time of the special game state and the small hit game state in which the special winning opening is opened (approximately 1.0 seconds). There is no need to set it, and the same variation time may be set. Further, since the ratio of the difference in the fluctuation time becomes large in a short-time fluctuation, for example, a time difference is set for the fluctuation time of about 2 seconds or less, and the time difference is set for the fluctuation time exceeding 2 seconds. The variable time may be set such that a time difference is provided only partially, such as setting without providing.

Next, the invincible time effect will be described with reference to FIG. 49. The invincible time effect displays a character indicating “invincible time” as a predetermined effect display during variable display and a timer indicating a period of “invincible time” (hereinafter, also referred to as invincible time) on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. By doing so, a display condition (so-called mission) for instructing the execution of the battle effect within a certain period of time is issued, and the effect is a big hit in the variable display satisfying the display condition. This invincible time effect refers to the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state, and when the battle effect that is to be executed in the special effect time is displayed during the invincible period that ends before the special effect time, it is a big hit. It is set as an effect to generate.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a display effect setting process S2000 which is a part of a flowchart in the main process of the sub control board 940. The display effect setting process S2000 is stored as a control program that is a part of the fixed value data in the ROM of the sub control board 940, and as a part of the main processing after the initial processing of the sub control board 940 is completed (at regular time intervals). For example, it is a process executed every 10 ms.

In the display effect setting process S2000, first, it is confirmed whether or not the time saving state is in progress (S2001). There are both a time saving game state and a probability variation game state as the time saving state, and if it is not in the time saving state (S2001:N), the processing of S2002 to S2015 for setting the execution of the invincible time effect is skipped, and the invincible time effect is produced. Other processing S2016 for performing display control other than is executed, and then the display effect setting processing S2000 is ended. In the process of S2016, the display control of the effect including the update of the display content of the invincible time effect is performed.

When it is determined in the processing of S2001 that the time saving state is in progress (S2001: Y), it is determined whether or not the invincible time is during the already set invincible period (S2002). Whether or not the invincible time is set is determined by referring to a flag (a partial area of the RAM of the sub control board 940) that is turned on during the invincible period. If it is determined in the process of S2002 that the invincible time is in the invincible period (S2002: Y), the processes of S2003 to S2015 for setting execution of the invincible time are skipped, and the process of S2016 is performed. Transition.

When it is determined in the process of S2002 that it is not during the invincible period (S2002: N), the lottery counter value that is generating a random number value (for example, 0 to 65535) generated within a certain range for effect setting. After obtaining (a partial area of the RAM of the sub-control board 940) (S2003) and preparing to determine the presence or absence of execution of the invincible time effect and the period length by lottery using the lottery counter value, the process of S2004 is performed. Move to processing.

In the process of S2004, it is determined whether or not the invincible time is set (S2004). This determination is performed, for example, by determining whether or not the lottery counter value is within the range of “0 to 655”, and if it is determined that the invincible time is not set, such as when it is outside the range (S2004: N), the process proceeds to S2016.

In the process of S2004, when it is determined that the time is within the range of setting the invincible time (S2004: Y), the remaining number of times (remaining number) in the time saving state is acquired (S2005). The remaining number of time saving states is confirmed by monitoring the progress of the unit game 100 times in the time saving game state by the sub control board 940, and during the probability variation game state, 100 or more unit games in the time saving state. Since the remaining number of 1 is present, the subsequent determination is made with 100 times.

In the process of S2006, it is determined whether the remaining number is 70 or more (S2006). Since the fluctuation display in the time saving state is a short time fluctuation of about 1.5 seconds each time, if the remaining number is 70 or more (S2006: Y), the remaining number in the time saving state is 20 times. The variable display is executed 50 times or more by the special effect time. Therefore, about 75 seconds obtained by multiplying the remaining number "50" by the variation time "about 1.5 seconds" requires a time until the special performance time. In this case, whether or not the lottery counter value is a multiple of "7" in order to perform a lottery whether or not to set "60 seconds", which is an invincible period shorter than the time required for the special effect times, If it is a multiple of "7" (S2007:Y), it is set to start the invincible time (S2008), and the process proceeds to S2016. As a result, when it is determined that the invincible time is set and it takes approximately 75 seconds or more before the special performance time, the invincible period with the invincible period of “60 seconds” has a certain probability (approximately 1/7). The time is set.

When it is determined in the process of S2006 that the remaining number of time saving states is less than 70 (S2006: N), and when it is determined that the lottery counter value is not a multiple of "7" in the process of S2007 (S2007: N), it is determined whether or not the remaining number is 50 or more (S2009). If the remaining number of times is 50 or more, it takes about 45 seconds obtained by multiplying "30" by "approximately 1.5 seconds" until the special performance time. In this case, whether or not the lottery counter value is a multiple of "5" in order to perform a lottery whether or not to set "40 seconds" which is an invincible period shorter than the time required for the special effect time If it is a multiple of "5" (S2010:Y), it is set to start the invincible time of "40 seconds" (S2011), and the process proceeds to S2016.

When it is determined in the process of S2009 that the remaining number of time saving states is less than 50 times (S2009: N), and when it is determined that the lottery counter value is not a multiple of "5" in the process of S2010 (S2010: N), it is determined whether the remaining number is 40 or more (S2012). If the remaining number of times is 40 or more, it takes about 30 seconds obtained by multiplying "20" by "approximately 1.5 seconds" until the special performance time. In this case, whether or not the lottery counter value is a multiple of "3" in order to perform a lottery whether or not to set "20 seconds", which is an invincible period shorter than the time required for the special effect times, If it is a multiple of "3" (S2013:Y), it is set to start the invincible time of "20 seconds" (S2013), and the process proceeds to S2016.

When it is determined in the process of S2013 that it is not a multiple of "3", a setting to start an invincible time of "10 seconds" which is an invincible period shorter than the minimum time of about 30 seconds required for the special effect times Is performed (S2013), and the process proceeds to S2016.

Here, the length of the invincible period is drawn so that the shorter the probability is set, the higher the probability is set, and the longer the period is selected so that the probability is set with the low probability. On the other hand, a long invincible period rarely occurs, and due to that, the production that strongly expects the start of battle production from time to time is realized.

The invincible period is not limited to four types of “10 seconds”, “20 seconds”, “40 seconds”, and “60 seconds”, and may be further increased or decreased, and the time may be reduced. Settings with different lengths may also be included. In addition, in the processing of S2004, when the winning a prize has already been generated and the winning of the big hit 1 has been determined, the invincible period may be set with a higher probability than when the winning is not determined. As a result, the jackpot 1 is likely to occur after the invincible period has occurred, so that the invincible time effect can be made desirable for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, an operation including a game state transition and display contents in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 is a time chart showing the relationship between the game state transition and the display contents, and illustrates the case where the state progresses to the right according to the elapsed time. In addition, FIG. 50(a) shows an example of shifting to the normal game state without a big hit 1 in the time saving game state after the big hit 2, and FIG. 50(b) shows a time saving game state after winning the big hit 2. In the example shown in FIG. 50(c), in which the probability variation game state is executed by winning the jackpot 1 and the probability variation game state is achieved by winning the jackpot 1 without winning the jackpot 2 as compared to FIG. 50(b). It shows an example that is executed.

As shown in FIG. 50(a), first, in the normal game state (displayed as “normal” in FIG. 50), as a normal effect, in the decorative symbol display device 479, a variation based on the start winning relating to the special symbol 1 The presentation is performed. When the big hit that shifts to the probability variation game state in this normal game state is won, a big hit game of, for example, 15 rounds is performed as a special game state, and the effect during the big hit is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. After the special game state, it becomes a probability variation game state, and the variation display based on the starting prize relating to the special symbol 2 is mainly executed by the right-handed game technique, and if the jackpot 1 and the jackpot 2 are not won in the variation display, The display of “waiting for battle” is continuously displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

If a big hit 2 is won during the probability variation game state, a time saving game is performed through a special game state (not shown) of approximately 1.0 seconds in which a game ball cannot enter the big winning device. Transition to the state. The display of "waiting for battle" is continuously displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 including the special game state for the short time, and the player is hard to notice that the state has shifted to the time saving game state. .. Since the big hit probability becomes a low probability by shifting to the time saving game state, it is easy to set the big hit probability low while expecting the player that the probability variation game state continues for a long time, and the shooting ability It is possible to provide the player with a playability that is less playable and easy to play.

After transitioning to the time saving game state, 80 times of unit games are executed in a non-winning big hit, and when the remaining number of time saving state is 20 remaining, a long time battle effect variation display is executed and the battle is lost. The effect display to be performed is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. With this display, the player recognizes that the jackpot 2 has already been won and the time saving game state ends with the remaining 20 unit games, and the display screen of the end of the battle and the display of the battle end with the 20 unit games thereafter. , A result result indicating how many times the battle has been won after the start of the probability variation game state is displayed, the game state advantageous for the player including the time saving game state is ended, and the game state is returned to the normal game state.

Here, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 50(a), when the jackpot 1 is won during the battle waiting period before the remaining 20 hour-shortening, the battle effect is executed and the battle is won at that timing. The effect is displayed, and a 15-round jackpot game is started as a special game state. For this reason, the battle effect that occurs during the battle standby period before the remaining 20 hours reduction is always a battle victory effect. During this period, the start of the battle effect corresponds to the occurrence of 1 jackpot. Is becoming For this reason, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 50(a), during the battle waiting before the remaining time reduction of 20 times, "invincible time" is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479, and the remaining time as the invincible period is displayed. Even if the invincible time effect in which is subtracted is set, if the battle effect occurs during this period, it means that the jackpot 1 is won during this invincible period. That is, the invincible time effect can be set because it is an invincible period in which the battle is not lost.

The “invincible time” is set by the above-described display effect setting process S2000 (see FIG. 49) at a timing that is always ended before the battle defeat effect is executed, as shown in FIG. After the time ends, the result of losing the battle after the battle effect is started is displayed, and after the display, the advantageous game state including the time saving game state ends. Since the player can visually recognize the battle effect itself after visually confirming the execution of the battle effect as an invincible time, the player can experience the content of the battle effect and compare it with the next game. You can motivate you to play by being able to imagine specific contents.

FIG. 50(b) shows a case where the jackpot 2 is won and the jackpot is in the hour-short game state, and the jackpot 1 is won and the probability variation game state is again in the battle waiting state before the remaining 20 hours-shortening. There is. Further, FIG. 50(c) shows a case where the probability variation game state occurs (continues) by winning the big hit 1 without winning the big hit 2 as compared with FIG. 50(b). Comparing FIG. 50(b) and FIG. 50(c), although the transition of the game state is different, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 479 after the variation of the special symbol 2 is started is a big hit in the battle standby state. It continues until the winning of 1, and the display content is the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing by continuing the winning of the big hit 2 which is an opportunity to shift to the normal game state even in the unit game in which the winning of the big hit 2 is won. Therefore, it is easy to give the impression that the probability variation gaming state has continued, transitioning from the probability variation gaming state to the time saving gaming state, or the remaining number of time saving gaming states is subtracted, and the transition to the normal gaming state is approaching. You can suppress the opportunity to know the situation.

In this way, in the normal game state, the special game state and the probability variation game state of unlimited number of times (the upper limit number of times is not set) are generated by winning the big hit that shifts to the probability variation game state after the special game state, and the probability variation game state. When the big hit 2 is won in, a special game state and a time saving game state occur. At this time, the short game state is a number limit (upper limit number setting) that continues at least until the unit game is executed 100 times based on the establishment of the start condition or the big hit is won during the execution of the 100 unit games. It is a short time game state. Then, when the big hit 2 is won in the probability variation game state, the display of the battle standby, which is the display content displayed when the big hit 2 is not won in the probability variation game state, is continuously displayed. Therefore, even if the player visually recognizes the display content of the decorative symbol display device 479, he/she cannot recognize that the probability variation game state has transitioned to the time saving game state, and thereafter 79 big hit non-winning unit games are performed. After being executed, visually confirm the battle defeat as a predetermined effect display in the 80th unit game, win the jackpot 2 and return to the normal game state after 100 times of the jackpot non-winning unit game. Can be recognized with a delay.

On the other hand, even if the jackpot 2 is won in the probability variation gaming state and the game is transferred to the time saving game state, if the jackpot 1 is won before the production of the battle defeat is displayed, the probability variation gaming state is passed through the special gaming state. Then, the probability variation game state is started again, and in this case, the production display of the battle defeat at the timing when the planned 100 times of the jackpot non-winning unit games are finished is not displayed. Therefore, for the player, by visually recognizing the effect display of the battle defeat, it is possible to reduce the chances of recognizing the situation in which the jackpot 2 is won and the possibility of returning to the normal game state is increased by the displayed content. You can Therefore, compared to the probability of winning the jackpot 2 which returns to the normal playing state among the jackpots, the probability of visually recognizing the effect display of the battle defeat can be kept low, and the player can win the jackpot as if the jackpot was 2. Is set to be low, and it is possible to easily give the impression that the gaming machine has a high probability that the probability variation gaming state continues. Accordingly, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the effect display suitable for the player while suppressing the probability of transition to the advantageous game state and the probability of continuing the advantageous game state.

Further, in the time saving game state in which the upper limit number of times is limited to 100 times, the period of invincible time is set according to the remaining number of times in the time saving game state. Then, after the period of invincible time has passed, if the jackpot is not won until the 80th unit game is executed, the display of the battle effect in which the character battles and the display of the battle defeat corresponding to the non-winning of the jackpot are displayed. The effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, and the effect display in which the character operates is executed. The period display showing the period of invincible time is performed when the remaining number of unit games in the time-saving game state remains above a certain amount, so the display of battle defeat is set to be always executed after the period of invincible time has ended. can do.

On the other hand, when the jackpot 1 is won within the invincible time, the effect display for winning the battle in which the character battles is executed. That is, by displaying the invincible time, when the battle effect is started, the display condition is presented in which the character that transitions to the advantageous game state when winning is sure to win. It is possible to provide the player with game playability in which a special game state occurs when the game is satisfied. Therefore, after the display of the invincible time and the invincible period is displayed, it is possible to generate an opportunity for the player to visually confirm the effect display in which the predetermined character operates, and the player can be careful about the effect content. It is possible to reduce the number of dissatisfied situations and make it easier to continue the game.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 57. The pachinko machine 100 of the eighteenth embodiment has a setting changing function for setting the rate of play of the game balls (machine rate, payout rate). In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first embodiment will be designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 51 is a front view of the game board 400X in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighteenth embodiment. In the game board 400X, the flow-down changing members such as the nails 411 and the wind turbines 412, and the central structure body 420 arranged substantially in the center of the base body 401 are provided in the same manner as the game board 400, and with respect to the central structure body 420. Placed on the lower side, the middle starting winning device 2431 is a starting device according to the first special symbol, and the right is a starting winning device according to the second special symbol, which is arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420. Starting prize winning device 2432, lower big winning device 2434 arranged below medium starting winning device 2431, upper big winning device 2433 arranged below right starting winning device 2432, lower big General prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B arranged on both right and left sides of the prize winning device 2434 are provided.

The game board 400X is provided with a plurality of switches as detection means for detecting passage of a game ball corresponding to the above-mentioned middle start winning device 2431 (see FIG. 53), and to a predetermined area corresponding to each switch. The entry of the game ball can be detected. For example, a middle-start prize switch 2441 that detects a game ball that has entered the middle-start prize device 2431, a right-start prize switch 2442 that detects a game ball that has entered the right-start prize device 2432, and a game ball that has entered the upper-large prize device 2433. The upper prize winning switch 2443 for detecting the above, the lower prize winning switch 2444 for detecting the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 2434, the winning combination operation switch 445, the start switch 446, and the non-matrix formed inside the upper prize winning device 2433. Non-specific passage switch 2447 that detects a game ball that has entered a specific passage (not shown), and a specific passage switch that detects a game ball that has entered a specific passage (not shown) formed inside the upper prize winning device 2433 2448, general winning switches 2449A, 2449B and the like for detecting the game balls that have entered the general winning devices 2439A, 2439B are installed on the game board 400X.

Each winning device, specifically, the middle starting winning device 2431, the right starting winning device 2432, the upper big winning device 2433, the lower big winning device 2434 and the general ball winning devices 2439A, the entrance portion of the game ball constitutes a winning opening. Then, the game balls that have entered the respective winning openings are guided to a collection and discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the base 401 through the through holes formed in the base 401. In addition, the game balls that have not entered each winning device are guided to the collection and discharge passage through the discharge port 401A provided at the most downstream side portion of the game area.

A launch ball detection switch 451 (see FIG. 53) is provided in the collection and discharge passage. The launch ball detection switch 451 is composed of, for example, a passage type sensor having a detection hole through which a game ball passes. The number of game balls detected by the launch ball detection switch 451 corresponds to the number of game balls shot in the game area, and a signal corresponding to the number of game balls is an external terminal board provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 100. It is output via 580 (see FIG. 52). The detection of the game ball by the launch ball detection switch 451 is performed based on the signal state from the launch ball detection switch 451 in the switch reading process S1209 (see FIG. 55).

The game ball whose passage is detected by the launch ball detection switch 451 in the collecting and discharging passage passes through the discharge port provided at the lower part of the back side of the pachinko machine 100, and the game ball circulating device provided in the game hall from the pachinko machine 100. (Not shown). When a game ball enters one of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 52).

The right start winning a prize device 2432 related to the second special symbol is a right entry regulation mechanism 2452 that changes the entry probability of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry permission posture and the entry prohibition posture, and the right entry regulation mechanism. And a right entry restriction solenoid 2462 (see FIG. 53) for driving the 2452. The right entry regulation mechanism 2452 includes a movable piece driven by the right entry regulation solenoid 2462, and when the right entry regulation mechanism 2452 is in the entry prohibited posture, the movable piece closes the entrance (winning hole). Due to the arrangement, the game ball cannot enter the right start winning device 2432, but when the right entry regulation mechanism 2452 is in the entry allowable posture, the movable piece is arranged to guide the game ball into the entrance. The ball can enter the right start winning device 2432. The right approach regulation mechanism 2452 is the right approach when the player wins the lottery based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 relating to the normal symbol is detected by the start switch 446 (hereinafter also referred to as the "ordinary symbol lottery"). In response to the drive by the restriction solenoid 2462, the approaching attitude is changed a predetermined number of times and a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 51, the upper-class prize winning device 2433 has an upper-entry restricting mechanism 2453 that restricts the entry of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the allowable-entry position and the prohibited-entry position, and the upper-entry restriction. The upper entry restriction solenoid 2463 (see FIG. 53) that changes the attitude of the mechanism 2453 and the transition between the non-guided attitude and the guided attitude allows the game ball that has entered the upper prize winning device 2433 to be a non-specific path or a specific path. A distribution mechanism (not shown) for distribution and a switching solenoid 2465 (see FIG. 53) for changing the attitude of the distribution mechanism to switch the guidance destination of the game ball are provided. When the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 of the upper prize winning apparatus 2433 is in the entry prohibition posture, the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 closes the entrance (winning hole), so that the game ball cannot enter the upper prize winning apparatus 2433. When the upper entry regulation mechanism 2453 is in the entry permitted posture, the upper entry regulation mechanism 2453 opens the entrance to allow the game ball to enter the upper prize winning device 2433. In addition, when the game ball that has entered the special winning device 2433 is guided to a non-specific path when the distribution mechanism is in the non-guided posture in which it projects forward, and when the distribution mechanism is in the guided posture in which it is retracted rearward Will be guided to a specific passage. The specific passage, the non-specific passage, and the distribution mechanism are provided for diversifying the transition of the game state, and when the game ball enters the specific passage, a game state advantageous to the player as a privilege (for example, the probability change A game state) is given.

As shown in FIG. 51, the lower major winning device 2434 has a lower entry regulation mechanism 2454 that regulates entry of a game ball into the inside by a transition between an entry permission posture and an entry prohibition posture, and a bottom entry regulation. A lower entry restriction solenoid 2464 (see FIG. 53) that changes the posture of the mechanism 2454 is provided. When the lower entry regulation mechanism 2454 is in the entry prohibited posture, the lower entry regulation mechanism 2454 closes the entrance (winning hole), so that the game ball cannot enter the lower big winning device 2434, but the lower entry regulation mechanism 2454. Is in the entry permitting posture, the lower entry regulation mechanism 2454 opens the entrance to allow the game ball to enter the lower prize winning apparatus 2434.

The game balls can enter the upper prize winning device 2433 and the lower prize winning device 2434 when a lottery for a big hit is won. Specifically, the lottery based on the game ball that has entered the middle-start prize device 2431 related to the first special symbol being detected by the middle-start prize switch 2441 (hereinafter also referred to as "first special symbol lottery") is won. Or, if the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 2432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right start prize switch 2442 (hereinafter also referred to as "second special symbol lottery") In this case, at least one of the upper approach restricting solenoid 2463 and the lower approach restricting solenoid 2464 operates. By this operation, at least one of the upper entry regulation mechanism 2453 and the lower entry regulation mechanism 2454 takes the entry permission posture for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined number of times. In addition, the distribution mechanism shifts to a guiding posture in response to the operation of the switching solenoid 2465 after a predetermined time has passed from the shift of the upper approach restricting mechanism 2453 to the approaching allowable posture, and further switches a predetermined time after shifting to the guiding posture. When the solenoid 2465 is stopped, it returns to the non-guided posture.

Further, on the game board 400X, a position where the nail state level display device 474 (see FIG. 53) configured by a 7-segment display is visible when the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 ( For example, it is provided in the upper left corner portion of the game board 400). The nail state level display device 474 is invisible or difficult to see by the player, and is invisible to the player when the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (for example, a position where the player cannot see). It is located at a position overlapping the back side of the front block 102 and outside the visible portion of the central panel 220 that has a light-transmitting property.

Here, various game states and transitions between the game states will be described. When you win the big hit in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game ball enters the specific passage (internal passage of the upper prize winning device 2433) during the special game state that shifts based on the winning. Depending on whether or not the game state to be transferred after the special game state is different. When the game ball does not enter the specific passage during the special game state, the game state shifts to the time saving game state (that is, the game state which is the time saving state and the low probability state). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the specific passage during the special game state, it shifts to the probability variation game state (that is, the game state which is the time saving state and the high probability state).

The game state and the transition between the game states do not necessarily have to have the above-described configuration, and for example, the high-probability state may be configured to continue until the next big hit, or the above-mentioned game state may be changed depending on other contents. At least one may be configured, a game state different from each of the above-mentioned game states may be further included, and a configuration in which the game states are transitioned by a condition different from the above condition may be adopted.

Next, the operation of the main devices of the game board 400X will be described generally in chronological order. In a variety of game states, when the game ball that has entered the medium starting prize winning device 2431 related to the first special symbol is detected by the medium starting prize winning switch 2441 (see FIG. 53), the starting prize of the first special symbol is obtained. At the time of starting winning of the first special symbol, if the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number, the winning random number, the big hit symbol random number and the stop pattern random number relating to the special symbol are acquired, It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

The unit game by the random number acquired based on the starting prize of the first special symbol is started in the same manner as the unit game by the random number acquired based on the starting prize of the first special symbol on the game board 400.

When the big hit in the first special symbol lottery based on the starting prize of the first special symbol, when the big hit in the first special symbol lottery based on the starting prize of the first special symbol in the game board 400 Similarly, the type of stop symbol (big hit symbol) corresponding to the big hit prize of the first special symbol lottery is determined based on the obtained big hit symbol random number.

After the first special symbol lottery, the variation display time of the first special symbol is determined and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is selected as in the case of the game board 400. Thereafter, the variable display of the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the variable display (variable effect) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 479 are started in the same manner as the game board 400, It is continued, and as the variable display time elapses, the stop symbols associated with the first special symbol and the decorative symbol are fixedly displayed.

If the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, after the fixed display of the first special symbol, the game state shifts to the special game state. In the special game state, the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 of the upper prize winning device 2433 and the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454 of the lower prize winning device 2434 are allowed to enter a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of jackpot. .. When a predetermined number (for example, 8) of game balls are detected by the special winning switches 2443 and 2444 in each of the entry allowable postures of the upper entry regulation mechanism 2453 and the lower entry regulation mechanism 2454, or a predetermined maximum. When the entry permission time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, the upper entry regulation mechanism 2453 or the lower entry regulation mechanism 2454 shifts to the entry prohibited posture. After that, after the passage of the predetermined entry prohibition time, either the upper entry regulation mechanism 2453 or the lower entry regulation mechanism 2454 returns to the entry permitted posture again. This approach restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of jackpot.

The upper approach regulation mechanism 2453 or the lower approach regulation mechanism 2454 is configured such that only one of the upper entry regulation mechanism 2453 and the lower entry regulation mechanism 2454 takes an entry allowable posture during the special game state, and after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed from the start of the special game state (after the opening period). One shifts to the first approach permission posture. In addition, the special game state ends after a predetermined entry prohibition time has elapsed since the last return to the entry prohibition posture and a predetermined standby time has elapsed after that (after the ending period). After the end of the special gaming state, as described above, the state shifts to the time saving gaming state or the probability variation gaming state.

In various game states, when the game ball that has entered the right starting prize winning device 2432 relating to the second special symbol is detected by the right starting prize winning switch 2442, the starting prize of the second special symbol is obtained. The control of the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control relating to the above-mentioned first special symbol. That is, if the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number at the time of starting winning of the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is acquired, and the unit game based on this starting prize is executed. To be done. Further, the determination of the stop symbol according to the second special symbol lottery, the selection of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol, the execution of the variable display, and the transition control of the gaming state, etc., is executed in the same manner as the control relating to the first special symbol To be done.

In various game states, when the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446, if the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not retained up to the maximum number of times, the winning random number related to the normal symbol is acquired. Then, it is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

The unit game related to the normal symbol is performed in the same manner as the game board 400, and when the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is a winning symbol, after the normal symbol is confirmed and displayed, the right entry restriction of the right starting winning device 2432 is performed. The mechanism 2452 shifts to the entry permission posture at least once. Specifically, when the player wins in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state and special gaming state), the right start winning device 2432 allows entry for a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, about 0.1 seconds). In the case of winning in the time saving state (time saving game state and probability variation game state), a predetermined maximum allowable entry time (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds) longer than that in the case where the right start winning device 2432 is in the non-time saving state. ) Intermittently (for example, divided into three times) to shift to the entry permission posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right start prize switch 2442, the right entry regulation mechanism 2452 shifts to the entry prohibited posture without waiting for the maximum entry allowable time to elapse. In addition, the operation of the right start winning device 2432 in the unit game related to the present normal symbol is completed even if the number of times of transition to the entry allowable posture has not reached the predetermined number.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to receive the second special symbol lottery, first, you must win in the normal symbol lottery, further, the game ball enters the right start prize winning device 2432 in the entry permitted state of the right starting prize winning device 2432 based on the winning. Must. The winning probability for a normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the time saving gaming state, but the stay time in the entry-permitted state of the right starting winning device 2432 based on the winning in the normal gaming state (for example, approximately Since 0.1 seconds) is set to be extremely short compared to the staying time in the time saving state (for example, about 4.8 seconds), in the normal gaming state, an opportunity per unit time for receiving the second special symbol lottery. Is significantly smaller than the opportunity per unit time to receive the first special symbol lottery. On the contrary, in the time saving state such as the time saving game state or the probability variation game state, the opportunity per unit time that the second special symbol lottery can be received is significantly larger than the opportunity per unit time that the first special symbol lottery can be received. ..

Therefore, the player wins the big hit in the first special symbol lottery, and in the subsequent special game state, aims to shift to the probability variation game state by entering the game ball into the specific passage. On the other hand, in the time saving game state and the probability variation game state, the game is aimed at winning the big hit in the second special symbol lottery before each game state ends. Therefore, the player plays a game by the left-handed gaming method in the normal gaming state, and plays a game by the right-handed gaming method in the time saving gaming state and the probability variation gaming state. Further, since the upper prize winning device 2433 and the lower prize winning device 434 are arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, the game is performed by the right-handed gaming method even in the special game state.

FIG. 52 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of the eighteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 52, a back surface setting switch 905 is provided on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The back setting switch 905 is a setting valid for validating a setting operation for setting the exit rate of the pachinko machine 100 to any one of a plurality of predetermined levels (for example, 6 levels or 9 levels). It is a chemical device.

A predetermined key (not shown) is inserted into the back surface setting switch 905 and rotated to a predetermined position (in the present embodiment, a position rotated approximately 90° clockwise from the initial position) to change the setting of the ball-out rate. Can be enabled (accepted). By performing a predetermined setting operation (depressing the initialization switch 907 in this embodiment) in a state in which the setting change of the discharge rate is thus validated, the setting change of the discharge rate is effectively performed.

When the setting change of the rate of exit is effectively performed, a predetermined game mode is changed according to each set stage. That is, it can be said that the change of the setting of the ball-out rate by operating the back surface setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 is the change of the setting of the game mode.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the initial winning probability (in the present embodiment, the first special symbol lottery, according to each stage set by changing the setting of the exit rate (that is, changing the setting of the game mode) Winning probability) and the probability variation continuation rate (in the present embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, if the rate shifts to the special gaming state via the second special symbol lottery, the probability of shifting to the probability variation gaming state after the special gaming state) It is possible to select any of nine types of game modes having different combinations with. Therefore, when the setting change of the ball-out rate (change of the setting of the game mode) is effectively performed, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery and the second special so that the initial winning probability and the continuation probability according to the set stage The winning rate is adjusted by changing each winning probability of the symbol lottery (that is, using the probability lottery data corresponding to each winning probability).

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a top type having a significantly low probability of first hit but a significantly high probability of continuous probability variation, and a middle type having a medium probability of first hit and a medium probability of continuous probability variation. You can choose between the type and the bottom type, which has a significantly lower probability of first hit but a significantly higher probability of continuous probability change. Furthermore, in each of these types, the initial hit probability of each type is subdivided into three steps of probability states (hereinafter, also referred to as probability setting states), which is smaller than the range of the initial hit probability between each type, that is, It is possible to select the first round probability having the lowest initial hit probability among the three stages, the second round probability having the second lowest initial hit probability, and the third round probability having the highest initial hit probability.

In the top type, the number of prize balls associated with winning in the middle start prize winning device 2431 and the right start prize winning device 2432 is smaller than that in the other types, but the prize balls associated with winning in the upper prize winning device 2433 and the lower prize winning device 2434. The number is higher than other types. On the other hand, in the bottom type, the number of prize balls associated with winning in the middle starting prize winning device 2431 and the right starting winning prize device 2432 is larger than that of the other types, but is associated with winning in the upper big winning device 2433 and the lower big winning device 2434. The number of prize balls is lower than other types.

Here, the number of prize balls may be set to the same number in any of the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type. This makes it impossible for the player to determine from the number of prize balls whether the setting is the top type, the middle type, or the bottom type, and for a long period of time, it is possible to predict the setting as to which type it is. Can be added.

In addition, the profit rate for the player of each of the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type changes depending on the stage of the probability setting state, but regardless of the type, if the stage of the probability setting state is the same. The profit rate for the player is set to be substantially the same. Therefore, even if the setting of the probability is changed by changing the type, it is possible to easily predict the profit per fixed period (for example, one day) acquired by the game arcade side and to easily manage the game arcade.

Note that the game mode that is changed by changing the setting of the exit rate does not necessarily have to be limited to the combination of the first hit probability and the probability variation plunge rate as described above. It may be any of the inrush rates. In addition, the probability of initial hits and lottery other than the probability variation plunge rate, for example, the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery In the probability that a small hit is selected, a probability variation plunge rate (in the present embodiment, a plunge rate to the probability variation gaming state via winning in the second special symbol lottery), and the probability variation gaming state after the special gaming state May be the probability of ending (for example, the probability that the end of the probability variation gaming state is selected in the falling lottery that is performed each time the variable display of the symbols is executed during the probability variation gaming state). It may be a combination of two or more.

A setting display device 906 is provided above the back surface setting switch 905. When the setting of the exit rate (the setting of the game mode) is effectively performed by operating the back surface setting switch 905, the setting display information corresponding to the currently set game mode is displayed on the setting display device 906. .. The setting display information is composed of a combination of an alphabetic character indicating the type and a number indicating the probability setting state. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type are represented by the letters “T”, “M”, and “B”, respectively. In addition, in each type of probability setting state, the first round probability is represented by “1”, the second round probability is represented by “2”, and the third round probability is represented by “3”.

Therefore, for example, in the case of the top type first stage probability game mode, the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is “T1”, and in the case of the middle type third stage probability game mode. The setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is "M3", and the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is "B2" in the case of the bottom-type second stage probability game mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52, an external terminal board 580 is provided at the upper right end of the rear block 104 when viewed from the rear. The external terminal board 580 is provided with an output terminal for outputting a signal during the special game state, an output terminal for outputting a signal corresponding to the number of game balls detected by the launch ball detection switch 451, and the like.

FIG. 53 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the eighteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the back surface setting switch 905 and the setting display device 906 are connected to the signal relay unit 903.

The signal relay unit 903 relays the ON-state setting signal output to the main control board 920 when the rear surface setting switch 905 is rotated by approximately 90° clockwise by a predetermined key (not shown). In the main control board 920, the change of the game mode is allowed in response to the reception of the setting signal of the ON state from the back surface setting switch 905. Further, the signal relay unit 903 relays the setting display signal output from the main control board 920 to the setting display device 906. The setting display device 906 displays the setting display information corresponding to the received setting display signal.

Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a main process (abbreviated as “main control main process” in FIG. 54) of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighteenth embodiment.

The main process of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is a process that is started along with the recovery from the power failure state, like the main process of the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment.

Hereinafter, a part different from the main processing of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment will be described. In the main processing of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, after the startup standby processing S1003, the output state of the setting signal from the rear surface setting switch 905 of the power/launch control board 900 is output. The determination process S2001 is performed.

Specifically, when the setting signal from the back surface setting switch 905 is in the ON state indicating that the back surface setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key (S1005:Y), information of substantially all areas of the RAM is displayed. A RAM clearing process S2002 for erasing is executed. Specifically, in the RAM clearing process S2002, information in substantially all areas except the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is erased.

The setting correspondence information is information corresponding to each of a plurality of predetermined (9 types in the present embodiment) game modes, and the setting mode information corresponding to the game mode being set is stored in the RAM. ing. Therefore, by the RAM clearing process S2002, the information in substantially all areas in the RAM of the main control board 920 except the storage area of the setting correspondence information is erased, and the setting change is permitted.

When the setting change is permitted, a setting display signal for identifying the game mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is output to the setting display device 906. The setting display device 906 displays setting display information corresponding to the setting display signal received from the main control board 920. That is, the setting display device 906 displays the setting display information corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM.

Next, a setting change process S2003 for changing the setting of the game mode is executed until the setting signal from the back face setting switch 905 is turned off. The setting signal from the rear face setting switch 905 is turned off when the rear face setting switch 905 is not operated by a predetermined key.

The game mode setting is changed by pressing the initialization switch 907 while the back surface setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key. Specifically, in this state, every time the main control board 920 receives an initialization signal based on the depression of the initialization switch 907, the setting correspondence information is sequentially changed. Specifically, the order of cyclically selecting nine predetermined game modes (for example,... →T1 →T2 →T3 →M1 →M2 →M3 →B1 →B2 →B3 →T1 →T2 → ...) is predetermined and the selected game mode is sequentially changed every time the initialization switch 907 is pressed.

Each time the change is performed, the value corresponding to the selected game mode is stored in the RAM as the setting correspondence information. Each time the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is changed, a setting display signal corresponding to the setting correspondence information is output to the setting display device 906, and the setting display information corresponding to the changed setting correspondence information is set to the setting display device. 906 is displayed.

Therefore, the setting changer such as the manager of the game hall operates the initialization switch 907 until the player selects a game mode desired to be set for the pachinko machine 100 in the state where the back surface setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key. After repeatedly pressing the button, the player can select the game mode by winning the game ball in the middle start winning device 2431. Therefore, the setting change process S2003 ends when the game ball is won in the middle start winning device 2431 after the game mode is selected by pressing the initialization switch 907.

When the setting signal from the back surface setting switch 905 is turned off (S2004: Y), various kinds of information except the information related to the setting of the game mode (that is, the setting correspondence information) is newly initialized in the RAM. The setting process S2005 is executed. As a result, the startup of the main control board 920 is substantially completed, and it is determined that the game progresses in the game mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM.

After the RAM change setting process S2005, a set command output process S2006 for outputting a set command indicating completion of the RAM setting to the payout control board 930 is executed. The payout control board 930 can recognize that the main control board 920 shifts to a normal game process by receiving the set command output from the main control board 920, and recognizes in which game mode it operates. it can.

After the set command output processing S2006, the processing after the special game state return preparation processing S1015 is executed. After the start-up standby process S1003, if the setting signal from the rear face setting switch 905 is in the off state (S1005:N), the processes after the determination process S1004 are executed.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process (abbreviated as “main control interrupt process” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the eighteenth embodiment. The timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is performed periodically (this embodiment is similar to the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment. Then, it is a process executed by interrupting the main process at a cycle of 2 ms (milliseconds).

Hereinafter, parts different from the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment will be described. In the timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, as a part of the process executed when the game progress is not stopped (S1207:N). , A nail state related process S2020 described later with reference to FIG. 56 and a setting suggestion information related process S2021 described below with reference to FIG. 57 are executed before the interrupt permission process S1222.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the nail state related processing S2020. The nail state-related process S2020 is a process of detecting the state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning holes of the general winning apparatuses 2439A and 2439B, and displaying and outputting the result based on the detection. Specifically, the nail state-related process S2020 is composed of the first half processes S1401 to S1405 relating to the detection of the state of the nail 411 and the latter half processes S1501 to S1504 relating to the display of the results based on the detection.

In the nail state-related processing S2020, as shown in FIG. 56, first, the number of game balls that have entered the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B (hereinafter referred to as "general prize number"), and the game balls that have been launched into the game area. It is determined whether or not it is during a period (hereinafter, referred to as “counting period”) for counting the number (hereinafter, referred to as “fired ball number”) (S1401). In this way, by counting the number of general prizes and the number of shot balls only during the counting period, the ratio of the number of general prizes to the number of shot balls (that is, the game to the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B with respect to the number of shot balls) When the sphere entry ratio) is calculated, it is difficult for the calculation result to be adversely affected by fraud and averaging numerical values.

Note that the “counting period” that is the determination criterion in S1401 may be, for example, a predetermined counting valid period in the entire period in which power is being supplied from the power supply unit 901, and power is supplied from the power supply unit 901. It may be a period excluding a predetermined counting invalid period in the entire period.

The “count valid period” may be, for example, a period during which the game balls are launched from the launch device 330. Whether or not the game ball is launched from the launching device 330 is, for example, a variable resistor 253 that detects the rotational operation amount of the launch handle 252, or a contact that detects that the player is in contact with the launch handle 252. The determination may be made based on the presence/absence of a predetermined firing operation based on the detection state of the sensor 254. For example, when it is detected by the variable resistor 253 that the rotating operation is applied to the firing handle 252, it may be determined that the game ball is being fired from the firing device 330, or the contact sensor 254. When the contact with the firing handle 252 is detected by, the game ball may be determined to be fired from the firing device 330.

Further, the “count valid period” may be a case where a predetermined shooting operation is being executed or a game ball is detected by the shooting ball detection switch 451 within the elapsed flow time after the end of execution. As the flow-down elapsed time after the completion of execution of the predetermined firing operation, the maximum time (for example, 15 seconds) that passes through the route that takes the longest time out of the time detected by the firing ball detection switch 451 after the game ball is fired. ) Is preferably included, and the elapsed flow-down time is preferably set to a maximum time actually measured and a sufficient time in consideration of design variations. In addition, a certain time after the start of a predetermined firing operation is not set to be the counting effective period, for example, the path with the shortest time among the times detected by the firing ball detection switch 451 after the game ball is fired. The counting effective period may be set to a time excluding the shortest time (for example, 5 seconds) via

The "count invalid period" may be, for example, during the special gaming state. Whether or not it is in the special game state can be determined, for example, based on the output state of the signal from the external terminal board 580. Specifically, for example, the period from when the signal indicating that the special game state is started to be output from the external terminal board 580 to when the output of the signal is finished can be determined to be during the special game state.

In addition, the “count invalid period” may be, for example, a period in which the front block 102 is in an open state (that is, the front block 102 is open to the intermediate block 103). Whether or not the front block 102 is in the open state can be determined based on the output state of the signal from the opening/closing detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 53).

The game ball that has entered the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B when the front block 102 is in an open state is not the game ball that has properly flowed down the game area, but is a factory inspector, and cheats while playing. There is a possibility that it is a game ball thrown into the general prize-winning devices 2439A and 2439B by a person who performs the above (hereinafter referred to as a cheating person) or a person concerned on the game hall side (for example, an employee of the game hall). By excluding the period in which the front block 102 is in the open state from the counting period, the game balls thrown into the general winning apparatuses 2439A and 2439B can be excluded from the counting target.

Alternatively, for example, when it is detected that game balls are continuously inserted into the general winning apparatuses 2439A and 2439B, the subsequent predetermined period may be set as the counting invalid period. This makes it possible to remove the game balls that have entered the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B from the counting target by the continuous throwing performed further after the continuous throwing of the game balls into the general winning award devices 2439A and 2439B is detected.

Whether or not the game balls have been continuously thrown into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B is determined by, for example, the number of game balls that have entered each of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B within a predetermined time, and the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B. It may be detected from the approach interval of the game balls that enter.

For example, when the game balls enter the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B at a predetermined number (for example, 10) within a predetermined time period (for example, 3 seconds), the game balls continuously enter the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B. It may be detected that it has been input. Further, when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls or more enter at a predetermined interval (for example, an interval of 0.5 seconds) into each of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B, the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B are played. It may be detected that the balls have been continuously thrown.

On the other hand, the “predetermined period”, which is the counting invalid period after the continuous throwing of game balls into the general winning apparatuses 2439A and 2439B is detected, may be, for example, a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes), or thereafter. It may be a period in which game balls are continuously thrown into the general winning apparatuses 2439A and 2439B. "The period during which the game balls are continuously thrown into the general winning apparatuses 2439A and 2439B after that" is, for example, after the continuous throw is detected, the continuous throw is detected under the same conditions as the detection subsequent to the continuous throw. It may be a period. Alternatively, in consideration of the fact that the continuous charging is performed intermittently, the continuous charging is performed under the same conditions as the detection of the continuous charging for several tens of seconds to several minutes (for example, about 30 seconds or 1 minute). The detected period may be set to “the period during which the game balls are continuously thrown into the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B thereafter”.

In addition, the invalid period (for example, 3 seconds) after the game ball is detected for each of the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B is a count invalid period in which the count for the entry of the game ball is invalid, and the game ball is short in time. Even if it is continuously thrown in, only the first predetermined invalid number (for example, 1 ball or 2 balls) may be counted and the entry of a certain number of subsequent game balls may be invalidated. It is also possible to exclude the entry of all game balls that have been continuously thrown in, including a predetermined invalid number, from the count targets and invalidate them. This invalid period may be set in consideration of the probability that a game ball will enter the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B. For example, a launch operation with the highest probability of entering a game ball (for example, a left-handed game technique or Corresponding to the probability that game balls continuously enter in any of the right-handed game techniques, the higher the probability, the shorter the invalid period may be set, and when the probability is low, the invalid period may be set longer. Further, the time may be set to correspond to the number of payouts (the number of payouts) when the game balls enter the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B, for example, the number of payout devices with a small number of payouts (for example, 3 balls). A short ineffective period (for example, about 1.2 seconds) is set for the above, and a long ineffective period (for example, about 2.4) is set for a winning device having a large number of payouts (for example, 15 balls). Seconds) may be set. As the counting invalid period, a time corresponding to the firing time interval of the game ball (for example, 0.6 seconds) may be set. For example, the invalid period of the game ball firing time interval of 2 times or more (approximately 1.2 seconds or more) may be set, and an invalid period of four times or more (approximately 2.4 seconds or more) may be set. Further, it is preferable that the predetermined invalid number is also set to be larger as the probability of entering the game ball is higher, and is set to be smaller when the probability of entering is low. A general winning number counter and a firing ball number counter are provided for each of the plurality of winning devices (for example, the general winning device 2439A and the general winning device 2439B), and the nail state level can be output separately. Well, in this case, in each winning device to be counted, at least one of the high and low of the probability of entering the game ball or at least one of the number of payouts is set to be different, and the length of the invalid period or the predetermined invalid number is set according to the setting. It is preferable that at least one of the two is set differently.

In addition, when the front block 102 is in an open state and the continuous throwing of game balls into the general winning apparatuses 2439A and 2439B is detected, a predetermined period after that is set as a counting invalid period, and a combination of a plurality of conditions is set. The invalid period may be generated when is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to suitably exclude the game balls continuously thrown into the general winning award devices 2439A and 2439B from the counting targets by the players on the game hall side.

Alternatively, the “counting period” serving as the determination criterion in S1401 may be, for example, a predetermined period after a predetermined counting start condition is satisfied, during the entire period in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901. The “predetermined counting start condition” may be, for example, a predetermined counting start time (for example, 11:00 am or 3:00 pm), or for each predetermined period (for example, every two hours). May be started as the counting start time. Further, the "predetermined counting start condition" is, for example, a predetermined timing (for example, a timing when the winning random number counter related to the first or second special symbol becomes a predetermined value preset as the counting start condition). Alternatively, a timing at which a predetermined operation is performed as the counting start condition) may be performed. The counting start time, the counting start time interval, and the predetermined timing do not necessarily have to be the same every day or every time, and any one of a plurality of different preset settings can be selected. The selection order may be selected in a predetermined order (for example, a different setting for each day of the week), or which one is selected may be determined by lottery each time. You may make it change at random. Further, the counting start condition may be satisfied a plurality of times a day.

Further, the “predetermined period” that is the counting period after the predetermined counting start condition is satisfied may be, for example, the period until the predetermined counting end condition is satisfied. The “predetermined counting end condition” may be, for example, a predetermined counting end time (for example, 1:00 pm or 6:00 pm) or may be a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing as the counting end condition may be, for example, the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes) as the counting period has elapsed, or the winning random number counter related to the first special symbol may be the counting end condition. The timing may be a predetermined timing or a timing at which a predetermined operation is performed as the counting end condition.

The counting start condition and the counting end condition may be a combination of the above-exemplified conditions. For example, the predetermined counting start time may be the counting start condition, and the predetermined counting end time may be the counting end condition, and the winning random number counter related to the first special symbol is predetermined as the counting start condition. The timing may be used as the counting start condition, and the timing when a predetermined period as the counting period has passed (for example, 30 minutes) may be set as the counting end condition.

Alternatively, after the supply of electric power from the power supply unit 901 to the pachinko machine 100 is started, the winning random number counter relating to the special symbol (the winning random number counter relating to the first special symbol or the winning random number counter relating to the second special symbol) The counting start condition may be the timing at which the value is acquired at the Nth predetermined time (N is an integer of 1 or more). Further, in that case, the period as the counting end condition may be determined based on the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol acquired in the Nth time. That is, the counting period may be different based on the value of the winning random number counter acquired in the Nth predetermined time. At this time, the counting start condition may be established each time the value of the winning random number counter acquired in the Nth predetermined time is acquired.

In addition, as the “counting period” that serves as the determination criterion in S1401, the predetermined counting valid period or the predetermined counting invalid period in the above-described entire period in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901 is used. It does not need to be either the period except the period or the predetermined period after the predetermined counting start condition is satisfied in the entire period in which the power is supplied from the power source unit 901, and these periods are May be adopted.

In addition, when the predetermined period after the predetermined counting start condition is satisfied among all the periods in which the power is supplied from the power supply unit 901 is adopted as the “counting period” serving as the determination criterion in S1401, Does not need to be the "predetermined period" of the predetermined period after the single type of counting start condition is satisfied, but different types of counting start conditions (for example, a predetermined counting start time and a predetermined counting start time). The predetermined period after each of the counting start timings) is satisfied may be the “counting period”, or the predetermined period after the counting start condition that is a combination of different types of counting start conditions is satisfied is the “counting period”. It may be configured to be "counting period".

When it is determined in S2020 that the counting period is not in progress (S1401:N), the processes of S1401 to S1405 and S1501 to S1504, which will be described later, are not executed, and the process returns to the main control interrupt process. When it is determined that the counting period is not in progress (S1401:N), the control may be started from the process of S1501, the processes of S1501 to S1504 may be executed, and then the process may return to the main control interrupt process.

On the other hand, in S2020, when it is determined that the counting period is in progress (S1401: Y), it is determined whether or not the entry of the game ball into the general winning apparatuses 2439A and 2439B is detected (S1402). Specifically, based on the detection of the game ball by the general winning switch 2449A, 2449B (see FIG. 53), a general winning switch detection flag corresponding to each switch 449A, 449B (a predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920). If is set, it is determined that the entry of the game ball into the general winning apparatus 2439A, 2439B is detected.

When it is determined that the entry of the game ball into the general winning apparatuses 2439A and 2439B is detected (S1402: Y), the general winning number counter (a predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920) is updated (S1403), and the determination processing S1404. To execute. On the other hand, when it is determined that the entry of the game ball into the general winning apparatuses 2439A and 2439B is not detected (S1402: N), the determination processing S1404 is executed without executing the processing of S1403.

Specifically, in S1403, if either the general prize switch detection flag corresponding to the general prize switch 2449A or the general prize switch detection flag corresponding to the general prize switch 2449B is set, the general prize number is calculated. Add "1" to the counter. On the other hand, when both the general prize switch detection flag corresponding to the general prize switch 2449A and the general prize switch detection flag corresponding to the general prize switch 2449B are set, "2" is added to the general prize number counter. To do.

Since the RAM provided with the general winning number counter is supplied with the backup voltage from the power supply unit 901, even if the power supply of the driving voltage and the control voltage from the power supply unit 901 is stopped, The stored contents of the winning number counter are retained. That is, unless the stored information in the RAM is erased by operating a predetermined switch (not shown), the stored content of the general winning number counter is retained even when the pachinko machine 100 is in the power failure state.

In S1404, it is determined whether or not a launch ball has been detected. Specifically, based on the detection of the game ball by the launch ball detection switch 451 (see FIG. 53), the launch ball detection switch detection flag (a predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920) corresponding to the launch ball detection switch 451 is set. If set, it is determined that a launch ball has been detected.

When it is determined that a shot ball has been detected (S1404: Y), the shot ball number counter (a predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920) is updated (S1405), and the determination process S1501 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the shot ball is not detected (S1404: N), the determination process S1501 is executed without executing the process of S1405.

Specifically, in S1405, if the launch ball detection switch detection flag is set, "1" is added to the launch ball number counter. Since the shot ball number counter is provided in the RAM to which the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 901, the RAM of the RAM can be operated by operating a predetermined switch (not shown) like the general prize number counter described above. As long as the stored information is not deleted, the stored content of the number-of-launched-ball counter is retained even when the pachinko machine 100 is in the power failure state.

In S1501, it is determined whether the previous block 102 is in the open state. Specifically, when the output state of the signal from the opening/closing detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 53) indicates that the front block 102 is not closed with respect to the intermediate block 103, the front block It is determined that 102 is in the open state.

When it is determined that the previous block 102 is in the open state (S1501: Y), a value obtained by dividing the value of the general winning number counter by the value of the firing ball number counter (that is, the value of the general winning number counter/the firing ball number counter). The value) is calculated (S1502). The value calculated in S1502 reflects the state of the nails 411 provided at the entrances of the winning openings of the general winning apparatuses 2439A and 2439B and in the vicinity thereof.

That is, the closer the value calculated in S1502 is to the reference value that is predetermined as the value when the winning of the game ball to the general winning apparatuses 2439A and 2439B is the designed value, the more the nail 411 (more In detail, it is highly possible that the entrances of the winning openings of the general winning apparatuses 2439A and 2439B and the nails 411 provided in the vicinity thereof are in an appropriate state in accordance with the setting at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 100. In the following description of the present embodiment, the "reference value" is the above-mentioned "reference value that is predetermined as a value when the winning of the game ball to the general winning apparatuses 2439A and 2439B becomes the designed value". Suppose there is.

On the other hand, the farther the value calculated in S1502 is from the reference value, the more the nails 411 provided at the entrances of the winning holes of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B and in the vicinity thereof are set according to the setting at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 100. There is a high possibility that it has deviated. That is, the larger the difference is, the higher the possibility that the nail 411 is greatly deviated from the appropriate state.

In this embodiment, in S1502, a value obtained by dividing the value of the general prize number counter by the value of the number of shot balls counter (that is, the value of the general prize number counter/the value of the number of shot ball counters) is calculated. However, if the value to be the divisor (divided) is a value that increases in accordance with the increase in the number of game balls that are launched from the launching device 330 into the game area, the number of shot balls (that is, the number of shot balls) Value counted by the counter).

For example, during the counting period or during the entire period in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901, the number of times the variable display of the first special symbol and/or the second special symbol is changed, or the number of times the normal symbol is displayed, or the like The number of occurrences of the special game state may be adopted as a divisor for the value (dividend) of the general winning number counter. Alternatively, the number of game balls emitted from the launch device 330 is counted, and the number of game balls thus counted, or the number of game balls that have been launched from the launch device 330 but cannot reach the game area is calculated in advance from the number of game balls. A value obtained by subtracting the predetermined value may be adopted as a divisor for the value (dividend) of the general winning number counter.

A nail state level is calculated based on the value calculated in S1502 (S1503). The “nail state level” refers to a state in which the state of the nail 411 (more specifically, the state of the winning holes of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B and the nails 411 provided in the vicinity thereof) is set when the pachinko machine 100 is manufactured. It is information that represents whether it is appropriate or inappropriate at a gradual level. For example, when the value calculated in S1502 is a value within the first range including the reference value (for example, the range having the reference value×±5% at both ends), the state of the nail 411 is appropriate as the nail state level. Is set to “1” indicating that

On the other hand, when the value calculated in S1502 is outside the first range (that is, on the side away from the reference value), the nail state level is set to a value larger than “1”, whereby the nail 411 is appropriate. Indicates that it may be out of state. For example, when the value calculated in S1502 is a value within the second range set outside the first range (for example, the range on the side farther from the reference value is the reference value x ±10%), The nail state level is set to "2", and when it is outside the second range (that is, the side away from the reference value), the nail state level is set to "3". That is, the more the nail 411 is deviated from the appropriate state, the larger the nail state level is.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the case where the nail state level is divided into three stages has been described as an example, but the nail state level is not necessarily divided into three stages. For example, the nail state level is divided into at least two stages: a segment showing that the state of the nail 411 is appropriate and a segment showing that the nail 411 may be out of the appropriate state. Good. Further, the nail state level may be divided into four or more stages.

Further, in the present embodiment, the nail state level is calculated from the value calculated in S1502 (that is, the value of the general prize number counter/the value of the shot ball number counter). However, the value of the general prize number counter is calculated. The nail state level may be calculated from the above. That is, the nail state level may be calculated without using the value of the firing ball number counter.

Next, a process of outputting the nail state level calculated in S1503 is executed (S1504), and the process returns to the main control interrupt process. In the present embodiment, in S1505, the numerical value indicating the nail state level is displayed on the nail state level display device 474 (see FIG. 53) configured by the 7-segment display. For example, when the nail state level is “1”, “1” is displayed on the nail state level display device 474.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1501 that the previous block 102 is in the open state (S1501:N), the processes of S1502 to S1504 are not executed and the process returns to the main control interrupt process. In the present embodiment, the processing of S1502 and S1503 is performed on condition that the previous block 102 is in the open state. However, the processing of S1502 or the processing of S1502 and S1503 is performed in the previous block 102. The configuration may be performed regardless of the state.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the setting suggestion information related processing S2021. The setting suggestion information related process S2021 is a process of outputting the setting suggestion information when the condition set as the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied.

Here, the "setting suggestion information" is a plurality of stages (i.e., setting correspondence information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 at that time) which is currently set and which can be set. In the present embodiment, it is information that suggests which of the 9 types of game modes, and may be information that can completely identify which of the 9 types the setting correspondence information is, or the setting. Only a part of the correspondence information (for example, only the type) may be identifiable information, and the selection rate should be set differently depending on which of the 9 kinds of setting correspondence information. The information may be information that the player can infer the setting, and for example, different information is set according to the type of the setting correspondence information. Is selected with a high probability, if it is a middle type, the value of the middle "5" is most selected, and if it is larger or smaller than the middle "5", it is hard to be selected, and if it is the bottom type The smaller the value, the higher the probability that the setting is selected, and although it is not clearly known which type it is, the number as the setting suggestion information may correspond to the setting correspondence information.

In the setting suggestion information-related process S2021, a determination process of determining whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied for the nail state level calculated in the process of S1503 of the nail state-related process S2020 (see FIG. 56) described above. S1601 is performed. Specifically, in determination processing S1601, it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied when the nail state level is “2” or more. When it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information for the nail state level is satisfied (S1601:Y), the setting suggestion information is output (S1606), and the process returns to the main control interrupt process. In the process of S1606, specifically, the control data for displaying the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode on the predetermined display unit is set. The predetermined display unit may be a symbol display device such as the decorative symbol display device 479 or a dedicated display unit for displaying setting suggestion information.

For example, when the setting suggestion information is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, control data (command) for displaying the setting suggestion information on the decorative pattern display device 479 is set in the process of S1606. The command set here is output to the sub control board 940 in the control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt. In response to the reception of the command, the sub control board 940 displays the setting suggestion information corresponding to the received command at a predetermined position (for example, the right corner) of the decorative pattern display device 479.

The setting suggestion information displayed and output by the processing in S1606 may be a combination of an alphabet letter indicating the type and a numeral indicating the probability setting state, similar to the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906, It may be a character indicating each game mode, may be a numerical value, a symbol, a figure, a color, a text, or the like indicating each game mode, and may have a sensuous expression such as "a high probability setting!" The text may be shown, or a graphic or the like that allows each game mode to be identified in a bar graph shape or the like may be used.

Further, the setting suggestion information displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 is not limited to information that can completely identify which of the nine types of setting correspondence information, but also which of the nine types of setting correspondence information. Information that can be guessed by the player, for example, information that allows the player to guess the setting by setting at least some of the selection rates to be different depending on which of the nine types of setting correspondence information is set. It may be. For example, in the case of a top type, a darker color is selected with a higher probability with a color set in 10 shades, and in the case of a middle type, an intermediate color is most selected, which is darker or lighter than the intermediate color. Colors are less likely to be selected, and if it is a bottom type, it is set so that lighter colors are selected with higher probability, and although it is not clear which type it is, it is possible to infer by checking the color as setting suggestion information Such as information suggesting at least one of the type and probability setting state, in this case, not only the color, it may be a plurality of types of characters with different selection rates for each type or character, the predetermined The type of character may correspond to the type, and the size of the character may be changed according to the probability setting state.

Further, the setting suggestion information displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 may be configured by a part of the variable display executed by the special symbol lottery, or the setting suggestion information may be displayed depending on the type of the symbol in the variable display. Well, for example, as the probability setting that is more advantageous to the player as the probability setting state, a specific symbol (for example, a symbol including the number “7”) is more easily selected, or the numbers “1” to “9” are included. A design including a large number may be easily selected from the designs. Here, the number of times the setting suggestion information is output is not limited to once, and the process of S1606 is repeated a plurality of times according to the establishment of the output condition of the setting suggestion information once so that a plurality of setting suggestion information is output. Alternatively, for example, the information may be output a plurality of times (for example, twice), which is determined each time when the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied once, or the number of times of outputting by the lottery may be different. Alternatively, the number of times may be changed according to the game situation at the stage when the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that the number of times the setting suggestion information is displayed becomes larger as the player continues firing without stopping the firing. For example, execution of variable display is suspended. The higher the number of times, the greater the number of times the setting suggestion information is output may be increased, or the number of times the starting prize is generated is counted when the execution of variable display is suspended up to the upper limit, and the number of times corresponds The number of times the setting suggestion information is displayed may increase as the number of times increases.

It should be noted that the output of the setting suggestion information executed by the processing of S1606 does not necessarily have to be the display output to a predetermined display unit, and a specific audio output from the audio devices 281 and 282 (for example, output in other situations). Not emitted, a high-pitched sound, a specific light emission by the surface emitting device 490 or the frame light emitting devices 271-275 (for example, a rainbow emission that does not emit in other situations), or at least a portion in other situations. The light emitting portion that emits light constantly may be turned off for a certain time or longer. In such a case, by utilizing the light emission or extinction of light by the board surface light emitting device 490, the board surface of the game board 400X is extinguished for about several seconds (for example, about 1 second) at the timing when the game ball is emitted by the emitting device 330, and then the light is emitted again. By doing so, a so-called "delay effect" may be performed.

The output of the setting suggestion information executed by the process of S1606 does not necessarily have to be a display output to a predetermined display unit, and audio output from the acoustic devices 281 and 282, the board surface light emitting device 490, and the frame light emitting device. It may be light emission by 271-275. Further, in the process of S1606, the condition of outputting the setting suggestion information may be the satisfaction of other conditions, such as determining whether or not to output the setting suggestion information by a lottery, and the predetermined probability when the process of S1606 is executed. The setting suggestion information may be output (for example, with a probability of about 1/10).

In the setting suggestion information-related process S2021, a determination process S1602 is performed to determine whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied with respect to the entry of the game ball into the general winning apparatuses 2439A and 2439B. Specifically, in the determination processing S1602, the setting suggestion is made when the game ball enters a predetermined one general winning device (for example, the general winning device 2439B) of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B. It is determined that the information output condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied with respect to the entry of the game ball into the general winning apparatuses 2439A and 2439B (S1602:Y), the setting suggestion information is output (S1606).

Further, in the setting suggestion information-related process S2021, a determination process S1603 for determining whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information with respect to the generation interval of the start winning (starting condition) is satisfied is performed. Specifically, in the determination process S1603, during a predetermined game period (for example, during a shooting operation in which a game ball is being shot from the shooting device 330 in the normal gaming state), the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Even if a predetermined predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed after the start winning (that is, the winning of the game ball to the middle starting winning device 2431 or the right starting winning device 2432) has occurred, When a situation occurs where the starting conditions of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) do not hold, it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information holds. If it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied with respect to the start winning interval (S1603: Y), the setting suggestion information is output (S1606).

The start winning interval (that is, the elapsed time since the last start winning) is measured using a predetermined timer or counter provided on the sub-control board 940. Specifically, the sub-control board 940 uses a predetermined timer or counter provided on the sub-control board 940, and a predetermined command transmitted from the main control board 920 based on the occurrence of a start winning of each special symbol. The interval of the reception timing of (for example, the hold command) is measured as the interval of occurrence of the start winning. Alternatively, a configuration may be used in which a predetermined timer or counter provided on the main control board 920 is used to measure the elapsed time from the last generated start winning and the measurement result is transmitted to the sub control board 940.

In the determination process S1603, during the predetermined game period, after the start condition of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is satisfied, a new special symbol even if the predetermined period has elapsed Output condition of setting suggestion information when a condition where the start condition is not satisfied occurs a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined monitoring period (for example, within 1 hour after the condition first occurs). May be determined to hold. Further, for example, like the pachinko machine 100 of the sixteenth embodiment described above, during a predetermined game period, after a start condition of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is satisfied, a predetermined period Every time a situation occurs where the start condition of the new special symbol is not satisfied even after (the "first period" in the sixteenth embodiment), the platform state icon 1821 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 (see FIG. 47). ) Are deleted one by one, it may be determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied when the number of the platform state icons 1821 is less than a predetermined number (for example, 5).

Alternatively, during a predetermined game period, after the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, the start condition of the new special symbol is not satisfied even if the predetermined period elapses, at least once within the predetermined monitoring period. Occurrence occurs, and when the cumulative total of the period when the starting condition of the new special symbol is not satisfied after the starting condition of the special symbol reaches the predetermined value (for example, 10 minutes) within the monitoring period, the setting suggestion It may be determined that the information output condition is satisfied. In addition, the number of times the start condition of the new special symbol is satisfied before the predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the start condition of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is satisfied. When a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) occurs, it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied, and the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied when the starting condition of the special symbol is satisfied many times in a short period of time. Then, it may be determined.

As described above, in the determination processing S1601 to S1603 of the setting suggestion information-related processing S2021, as the output condition of the setting suggestion information, a predetermined prize winning device (for example, general prize winning devices 2439A, 2439B, middle) provided on the game board 400X is used. With respect to various predetermined conditions relating to the entry of the game ball into the starting winning device 2431 and the right starting winning device 2432, it is determined whether or not the conditions are satisfied. Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion information is output by the process of S1606.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57, in setting suggestion information-related processing S2021, in the special game state (S1604: Y), it is determined whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information in the special game state is satisfied. Processing S1605 is performed. Specifically, in the determination processing S1605, when a ball overflow signal indicating that the game balls are excessively stored in the storage unit 241 is received from the ball overflow switch 249 during the special game state, the setting suggestion information is set. It is determined that the output condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information in the special game state is satisfied (S1602: Y), the output of the setting suggestion information is executed (S1606).

Here, in the special game state, in order to excessively store the game balls from the ball overflow switch 249 to the storage portion 241, the ball removing operation (for example, pressing operation) on the ball removing operation member 242 is not performed, and the discharge port 241B. The situation in which is closed must be continued for a certain time or longer, and it is possible to select whether or not to execute this ball removal operation depending on the intention of the player. Therefore, in a situation in which the outlet 241B is always open, the output condition of the setting suggestion information is not satisfied, and the output of the ball overflow signal is the output condition of the setting suggestion information. It is possible to easily set the output condition of the setting suggestion information to be limited to only those persons. With this, it is possible to add a new game property such as giving an indirect privilege that cannot directly obtain value to some players, and an operation different from the launch operation. It is possible to add a new game property in which the player acquires setting suggestion information by using the section.

In the determination processing S1605, during the special game state, the speed at which the game ball enters the upper special prize device 2433 or the lower special prize device 2434 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 8 seconds in 8 seconds in at least one predetermined round). Output of setting suggestion information when individual game balls enter the special winning device 2433, 2434) or when the number of continuation of the probability variation game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times) during the special game state. The configuration may be such that it is determined that the condition is satisfied. In addition, as an operation that can be selected whether to execute or not depending on the intention of the player, in a predetermined round, the shooting operation is stopped so that the game ball does not enter the special winning devices 2433 and 2434 at all, a special game state. A new game in which the player obtains setting suggestion information by performing a shooting operation that loses some opportunity to win a prize ball, such as performing a left-handed game technique to generate a start winning of the middle-start winning device 2431. Sex may be added.

Therefore, in the setting suggestion information-related process S2021 described above, the output of the setting suggestion information is executed by the process of S1606 when the predetermined output conditions of various setting suggestion information are satisfied.

The nail state level is information that indicates whether the state of the nail 411 is appropriate or unsuitable for the setting at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 100, in a stepwise level, and therefore the value thereof is “2”. "And above, the nail 411 may come out of its proper condition, which may result in a disadvantage to the player.

Similarly, after the start winning of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) occurs, the starting condition of the new special symbol even if a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) determined in advance has elapsed If the situation does not hold occurs, there is an abnormality related to the occurrence of a special symbol start prize (that is, a game ball prize to the middle start prize device 2431 or the right start prize device 2432), such as the state of the nail 411. As a result, a player may be disadvantaged.

On the other hand, in the determination process S1601 or the determination process S1603, it is determined whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied with respect to the nail state level or the generation interval of the start winning, and the setting suggestion information is provided on the condition that it is determined to be established. By outputting, it is possible to suggest to the player that the rate of playing balls (machine ratio, payout rate) of the game balls in the pachinko machine 100 is low, whereby the game of the pachinko machine 100 It is possible to increase the number of materials for determining whether or not to continue and allow the player to make a suitable determination.

In addition, in the general winning device 2439B, when a game is played by a right-handed gaming method in a special game state, a time saving game state, or a probability variation game state, a game that has not entered the right start winning device 2432 or the upper prize winning device 2433. The ball enters. Therefore, when a game ball enters the general winning device 2439B, it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied in the determination process S1602, and the setting suggestion information is output on the condition that the condition is satisfied, so that the game is performed by the right-handed game technique. In the case of carrying out, even if the game ball does not enter the target right-start prize device 2432 or the upper prize winning device 2433, the player can enjoy the game ball entering the general prize device 2439B.

Further, receiving the ball overflow signal during the special game state indicates that a large number of game balls above a certain level can be acquired during the special game state. Therefore, when the ball overflow signal is received during the special game state, it is determined in the determination process S1605 that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied, and the setting suggestion information is output on the condition that the condition is satisfied. The setting suggestion information can be given to the player as a privilege when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the variable display time (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol performed in the unit game related to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special) in the special symbol related process S1217. ) Is selectable according to the currently set game mode.

Specifically, for a plurality of types of variable display time that can be selected, a preset game mode that can be set is pre-assigned, and a lottery is drawn to determine whether to change the variable display time according to the game mode. In this case, the variation pattern of the variation display time assigned to the currently set game mode is selected. Variation patterns of various variable display times that can be selected for a preset game mode that can be set are stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 920 as a table.

In addition, the variable display time may be assigned to the preset game mode so that the same variable display time may be assigned to two or more game modes such as each type of the game mode. A different variable display time may be assigned to each of the possible game modes at each stage.

Further, the selection of the variation pattern based on the currently set gaming mode is performed only when the corresponding lottery result of each special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is a win. Alternatively, the configuration may be performed only when the lottery result of each corresponding special symbol lottery is not winning.

In the special symbol related process S1217, by selecting the variation pattern of the variable display time assigned to the currently set game mode, the variable display of the variable display time according to the currently set game mode is displayed. Executed. Thereby, the player can infer (recognize) the type of the game mode that is set according to the length of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Note that the variable display time is assigned to the preset preset play mode, and the most advantageous game form among the preset play modes of each set stage (for example, the third stage probability of each type). The game mode) may facilitate the selection of a long variable display time from among various variable display times selectable with respect to a preset preset game mode. By lengthening the variable display time for the advantageous game mode, the player plays the game paying attention to the length of the variable display time of the decorative symbol, and the most advantageous game mode is set. Can be expected.

Further, a configuration may be such that the longer the variable display time is assigned, the higher the advantage of the preset game mode that can be set. Thereby, the player can infer the degree of advantage of the set game mode according to the length of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is displayed and output, so that the player visually confirms the setting information. It is possible to preferably recognize the type of the current game mode in the pachinko machine 100, that is, the exit rate of the game ball (machine rate, payout rate).

In addition, since the variation pattern of the variation display time according to the currently set gaming mode is selected, the player preferably selects the type of gaming mode that is set according to the length of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Can be recognized.

<19th Embodiment>
Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 100 of the nineteenth embodiment, like the pachinko machine 100 of the eighteenth embodiment, is provided with a setting change function for setting the rate of play of the game balls (machine rate, payout rate). In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first to eighteenth embodiments will be designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted. Moreover, you may add the structure demonstrated below in 19th Embodiment to the structure with which the pachinko machine 100 of 1st-18th embodiment mentioned above is equipped, or 1st-18th embodiment mentioned above. The pachinko machine 100 may be provided in place of part of the configuration.

The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, like the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, the total number of times of holding the right of the unit game for each special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) reaches 8 in total. In this case, the pending full tank effect is configured to appear on the decorative pattern display device 479 under a predetermined condition, and the lottery result by the pending full tank effect lottery (that is, the lottery whether to execute the pending full tank effect) The result) is displayed on the lottery result display portion 2730.

FIG. 58A is a front view for explaining the lottery result display portion 2730. As shown in FIG. 58(a), the lottery result display unit 2730 is composed of four display units 2730A to 2730D having different sizes, and is displayed on the lower right side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. In addition, as a part for displaying the lottery result by the holding full production effect lottery, as in the lottery result display device 730 in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, a configuration is provided as another display device different from the decorative symbol display device 479. May be

The lottery result display unit 2730, like the lamp fluctuation display performed in the lottery result display device 730 (see FIG. 24), has the number of times of holding the right of the unit game relating to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol). When the upper limit is reached, one of the display units 2730A to 2730D is lit so as to sequentially move from the display unit 2730A located on the leftmost side to the right one by one like a roulette wheel, and then on the rightmost side. After the positioned display unit 2730D is turned on, the display returns to the display unit 2730A again, and the variable display in which the pattern of sequentially moving rightward from the display unit 2730A and turning on is repeated is executed.

In the variation display by the lottery result display unit 2730, the moving speed of the lighting position in the display units 2730A to 2730D (moving interval of the lighting position) is fast, and after the high speed fluctuation, the moving speed becomes gradually slower and the fluctuation. When a predetermined variable display time elapses from the start of the display, one of the display units 2730A to 2730D that corresponds to the lottery result of the reserved full production is turned on and finally stopped (stopped display).

More specifically, when execution of the reserved full tank effect (appearance of the reserved full tank effect) is selected in the reserved full tank effect lottery, after the variable display is executed on each of the display units 2730A to 2730D, the 4 The display is stopped by turning on the display 2730D. On the other hand, when the appearance of the pending full tank effect is not selected in the pending full tank effect lottery, after the variable display is executed on each of the display sections 2730A to 2730D, a display section other than the fourth display section 2730D, that is, , The first display portion 2730A, the second display portion 2730B, or the third display portion 2730C is stopped and displayed.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 of the eighteenth embodiment, any of nine types of game modes in which the combination of the initial hit probability and the probability variation continuation rate is different can be selected. In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, for each of the three types (top type, middle type, bottom type) that roughly divides these nine types of game modes, the highest initial hit probability in each type (that is, the first type) If the game mode of the three-stage probability) is set, the number of times of holding the right of the unit game relating to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) (the number of times of holding the special symbol) has reached the upper limit. In this case, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode (in this case, the game mode with the highest initial hit probability in each type) is output with a predetermined probability (for example, approximately 10%). Composed.

More specifically, when the game mode with the highest first win probability in each type (top type, middle type, bottom type) is set, a lottery result display section that displays the lottery result by the held full production lottery 2730 (display units 2730A to 2730D), with a predetermined probability, the fourth display unit 2730D emits a predetermined color (for example, gold) as setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode having the highest initial hit probability in each type. To be done.

FIG. 58B is an explanatory diagram related to an example of the display mode of the lottery result display unit 2730 when the game mode of each type of third stage probability is set. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(b), like the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, when the number of holdings of special symbols reaches the upper limit, all of these holdings are held. In, it is configured such that the appearance probability of the reserved full tank production is different depending on whether or not the reserved winning in the special symbol lottery is included.

In the example shown in FIG. 58(b), specifically, in the case where the number of holdings of special symbols reaches the upper limit, when the holdings of the special symbol lottery are included in the holdings of the maximum number of times. Is configured such that the holding full tank production lottery is selected with 80% probability and the holding full tank production is not displayed with 20% probability. ..

On the other hand, when the number of holdings of special symbols reaches the upper limit, if the holdings that have won the special symbol lottery are not included in the holdings for the maximum number of times, 20% by the holding full tank production lottery It is configured such that the reserved full tank effect is displayed with a probability of, and the reserved full tank effect is not displayed with a probability of 80%.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the game mode of the third stage probability in each type (that is, the game mode of the highest first hit probability in each type) is set, the pending full tank production lottery When it is selected to display the hold full production by, a lottery of whether to output the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode (hereinafter also referred to as “setting suggestion information output lottery”) Is called).

For example, as shown in FIG. 58(b), in the pachinko machine 100 in which the game mode of the third stage probability in each type is set, the number of special symbols held reaches the upper limit, and the maximum number of times In the case where the hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery is included in the hold, if it is selected to bring out the hold full tank production by the hold full tank production lottery, by the setting suggestion information output lottery, 12.5% of the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is selected to be output, and 87.5% of the setting suggestion information is not output.

On the other hand, if the number of times the special symbol is held reaches the upper limit, and if the number of holdings for the maximum number of times does not include the hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery, the held full tank production lottery When it is selected that the effect is displayed, the setting suggestion information output lottery is selected to output the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently-played game mode for 50% of the selected suggestion information. It is configured to select not to output the setting suggestion information.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when it is selected not to show the reserved full tank production by the reserved full tank production lottery when the number of times of holding the special symbol reaches the upper limit, each type The setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode (in this case, the third-stage probability game mode in each type) is output regardless of whether or not the third-stage probability game mode in is set. Configured not to be.

When it is selected to output the setting suggestion information by the setting suggestion information output lottery, after the variation display by the lottery result display unit 2730, the fourth display unit 2730D corresponds to the game mode of the third stage probability in each type. Light is emitted in a predetermined color (gold in the example shown in FIG. 58B) as the setting suggestion information. On the other hand, when it is selected to output the setting suggestion information by the setting suggestion information output lottery, after the variable display by the lottery result display unit 2730, the fourth display unit 2730D displays a color different from the predetermined color (FIG. 58). Light is emitted in red in the example shown in FIG.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the example shown in FIG. 58(b), when the game mode of the third stage probability in each type is set, the lottery executed when the number of times of holding the special symbol reaches the upper limit The probability that the variable display by the result display unit 2730 is stopped and displayed on the fourth display unit 2730D that emits gold color is 10% when the maximum number of holdings includes the holding that is won in the special symbol lottery (= It is 0.8×0.125×100), and 10% (=0.2×0.5×100) also when the holding held for the special symbol lottery is not included in the holdings for the maximum number of times. ).

In other words, in the example, when the number of times of holding the special symbol reaches the upper limit, if the game mode of the third stage probability in each type is set, the special symbol lottery is held in the holding of the maximum number of times. Irrespective of whether or not the winning held is included in the variation display by the lottery result display unit 2730, the emission color of the fourth display unit 2730D has a probability of 10%, and the currently-set game mode ( In other words, it is a gold color as setting suggestion information corresponding to the third stage probability of each type).

The setting suggestion information output lottery is performed under the control of the sub control board 940. Specifically, the setting suggestion information output lottery is a setting provided on the sub-control board 940 when the sub-control board 940 has reached the maximum number for each of the numbers of holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The value of the suggestion information output selection counter (a part of the RAM) is acquired, and the setting suggestion information output selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940 is referred to for the value of the suggestion information output selection counter. Done by.

Setting suggestion information output selection table, the first setting suggestion information output selection table used when the hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery is included in the maximum number of holds, and the maximum number of holds The second setting suggestion information output selection table to be used when the hold that is won in the special symbol lottery is not included, and the sub-control board 940 is used for the special symbol lottery during the maximum number of holds. The setting suggestion information output lottery is executed by using a table according to whether or not the selected hold is included.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the number of times of holding the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) reaches the upper limit, it is currently set with a predetermined probability (for example, 10% probability). Since the setting suggestion information corresponding to the playing mode (in this embodiment, the playing mode of the third stage probability in each type) is output, the player visually recognizes the setting suggesting information, and the current state of the pachinko machine 100. It is possible to preferably recognize the type of game mode, that is, the exit rate of the game ball (machine rate, payout rate).

Therefore, by increasing the number of times of holding the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) until the upper limit is reached, it is possible to add the game playability of inferring the game mode currently set in the pachinko machine in the game. it can. For example, considering whether it is a pachinko machine suitable for one's taste or a different pachinko machine, one of the selection factors such as whether to continue the game or to move to another game machine, the estimated game mode Since it is possible to use, it is possible to improve the playability of the pachinko machine in which the game mode can be set in a plurality of stages.

In particular, when the game mode having the highest initial hit probability (that is, the third round probability) in each type is set, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is output. , If the player can infer that the game mode currently set in the pachinko machine in play is the game mode with the highest initial winning probability of each type, the player has the desire to continue the game in the pachinko machine in play. It is possible to increase the game playability of the pachinko machine in which the game mode can be set in a plurality of stages.

<Twentieth Embodiment>
Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59. In the pachinko machine 100 of the twentieth embodiment, similar to the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, the number of times of holding special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is the upper limit (in the present embodiment, 8 in total). In the configuration in which the reserved full tank effect can be displayed when the number of the held full tank effects is reached, when the predetermined condition for the period extension is satisfied, the special period related to the reserved full tank effect (that is, the reserved full tank effect is displayed). It has a production extension function that can extend the period during which it can be played.

In the following description, the same components as those in the first to nineteenth embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below in the twentieth embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 of the above-described first to nineteenth embodiments, or the above-described first to nineteenth embodiments. The pachinko machine 100 may be provided in place of part of the configuration.

FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram related to an example of the effect extension function. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 59, the reserved full tank effect appears when the number of times of holding each special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) reaches the upper limit. In this case, the special period during which the reserved full tank effect is executed (hereinafter, this length is also referred to as “special period related to reserved full tank effect”) is 5 minutes which is an initial value at the start of the special period. Is set to. In addition, in the present embodiment, the reserved full tank effect may appear at 100% when the number of times of holding the special symbol reaches the upper limit, or like the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment. It may be configured so that it appears when a lot is drawn in the holding full production effect lottery.

In the example shown in FIG. 59, during the extended waiting period (3 minutes in the example) that ends after the special period for the reserved full tank production ends earlier than the end of the special period, Whenever the number of times a special symbol is held increases by 1, a lottery (hereinafter also referred to as "production extension lottery") as to whether or not to extend the special period relating to the reserved full tank production is performed, and in the production extension lottery Then, it is determined that the predetermined condition for the period extension is satisfied, and the effect extension function is activated. The winning probability in the production extension lottery (the probability that the extension of the special period relating to the reserved full tank production is selected) may be an appropriate probability such as 50%. In the example shown in FIG. 59, the special period related to the reserved full tank production is extended by 1 minute by the operation of the production extension function.

The production extension lottery is performed under the control of the sub control board 940. Specifically, the production extension lottery is performed by the sub-control board 940 at a predetermined lottery time (in the example shown in FIG. 59, when the number of holding of special symbols is increased by 1), provided on the sub-control board 940. It is performed by acquiring the value of the lottery counter (a part of the RAM) and referring to the effect extension lottery table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940 for the value of the effect extension lottery counter.

The production extension lottery table is a table that defines winning or non-winning (miss) for each value of the production extension lottery counter so that the winning probability in the production extension lottery becomes a predetermined value. The winning probability in the production extension lottery may be set to an appropriate value larger than zero, such as 50%, or may be 100%.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

A game ball is fired and the game ball enters one of the starting prize winning devices 431A, 431B, 432 and the starting prize is given, and the variable display is started, and while the variable display is being executed, the game ball is further started winning device 431A. , 431B, 432, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is suspended. A lottery result of this special symbol is held with a fixed number (8 pieces) as an upper limit, and when the number of times of holding reaches the upper limit, whether or not to bring out the reserved full tank effect is drawn. When this lottery results in the production of the full reserve tank effect, a special period is started. During the special period, before the start of the special period, the player is informed that the state has changed. For example, by changing the background color of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 479 from blue to red, the special period is changed. Is shown to the player.

During the special period, as a special effect, an effect that a specific character appears (for example, an effect that displays a school of gold fish) can be executed during the variable display of the symbols that display the lottery results won in the jackpot lottery. With this configuration, the player can play a game during the special period with the expectation of performing an effect (special effect) different from the special period.

Then, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the predetermined condition for the period extension is satisfied, the production extension function is activated and the special period for the reserved full tank production is extended, so the production extension When the special period related to the reserved full tank effect is extended by the function, it is possible to increase the number of reserved objects subject to the reserved full tank effect by the extension. For example, the hold full tank effect, during the special period related to the hold full effect, for each hold of the color of the hold display 1 in the special symbol lottery for the hold (part of the unit game related to the special symbol) lottery result In the case of an effect that is displayed in a color that indicates the degree of expectation, the hold that is the target of hold display in the color that indicates the degree of expectation can be increased by the extension of the special period.

As a result, in a configuration in which the reserved full tank effect can appear when the number of times the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are reserved has reached the upper limit, a special period related to the reserved full tank effect is provided by the player. It is possible to add an extendable game property by firing a game ball aiming at the starting prize of the special symbol in order to increase the holding of the special symbol.

In addition, as the number of holdings subject to the holding full production increases, the probability that the holdings that are selected for the special symbol lottery will be included in the holdings subject to the holding full production will increase. It is possible to increase the possibility of appearance of an effect indicating a high degree of expectation for winning in the special symbol lottery.

Therefore, in the configuration in which the reserved full tank effect can appear when the number of times of holding the special symbol reaches the upper limit, the game playability in which the player infers the lottery result of the special symbol lottery held by the reserved full tank effect Can be added. In addition, since it is possible to reduce the possibility that only the effects that cannot be expected to win in the special symbol lottery will appear, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction with respect to the player not being able to see the effects that show the high degree of expectation for winning in the special symbol lottery. ..

Here, as described above, whether or not it is during the special period is changed by changing the background color of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 479 or displaying a specific color on the peripheral portion of the display screen. Although it is good, it is preferable to display the remaining period so that the player can recognize it. For example, a display section of the number of times of holding in the decorative pattern display device 479 corresponding to the number of times of holding (for example, a circular display section corresponding to the number of times of holding). ) Mode may be different depending on whether or not it corresponds to the special period, it may be a blinking display during the special period, and may be a lit display other than the special period, and the remaining time is counted down and displayed. You may.

In addition, the special effect may be an effect that does not appear outside the special period, or it may appear during both the special period and during the special period, and then the jackpot after the special period and during the non-special period. The probability that the lottery result is displayed may be different. For example, the lottery result of the big hit is displayed with a probability of about 30% except the special period, and the lottery result of the big hit is displayed with a probability of 100% during the special period. It may be displayed.

<Twenty-first embodiment>
Next, a twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 65. In the pachinko machine 100 of the twenty-first embodiment, the light guide plate 715C travels in the light guide plate 715C from the bottom to the upper side, and in the light guide plate 715C to the left and right sides. The different effect images can be displayed (luminous display).

In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first to twentieth embodiments will be designated by the same reference numerals and will not be described. Moreover, you may add the structure demonstrated below in 21st Embodiment to the structure with which the pachinko machine 100 of 1st Embodiment mentioned above to 20th Embodiment is equipped, or 1st Embodiment mentioned above to 20th Embodiment. The pachinko machine 100 may be provided in place of part of the configuration.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, a light guide plate 715B configured similarly to the light guide plate 715B (see FIG. 38) adopted in the eleventh embodiment, and a light guide plate 715C having a curved portion similar to the light guide plate 715B. (See FIG. 61) is overlapped and arranged on the front side of the reel device 710, thereby diversifying the effect by the light emission display of the light guide plate performed on the front side of the reel device 710. The light guide plate 715C is configured to be capable of displaying a predetermined image (luminous display) not only on the front side of the reel device 710 but also on a region below the reel device 710, as described later.

FIG. 60 is an enlarged front view around the reel device 710. More specifically, FIG. 60A is a diagram showing a case where the first effect image 3001 is displayed (light emission display) on the light guide plate 715C, and FIG. 60B is the second effect image 3002 and the second effect image 3002. It is a figure which shows the case where the 3rd production image 3003 is displayed on the light-guide plate 715C (light emission display). Further, FIG. 60C is a diagram showing a case where the third effect image 3003 is displayed (luminous display) on the light guide plate 715C.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the base body 401 and the base body 701 are configured as a light-transmissive flat plate-like member, like the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment, and the base body 701 is an outer cover of the resin cover 715. It is integrated with 715A. As shown in FIG. 60, on each of the base 401 and the base 701, fish patterns 741 and 742 forming a part of a school of fish (a school of fish) continuous facing leftward are formed of a light-transmitting colored paint. It is drawn by printing. By turning on (emits) the light emitting means E1 and E2 (see FIG. 30B) arranged on the back side (rear side) of the patterns 741 and 742, the patterns 741 and 742 emit light as a pattern that emerges in the light. Can be displayed.

Incidentally, in FIG. 60, the illustration of the central structure 420 is omitted. The central structure 420 is attached by being fitted into the opening 401D from the front side. In the present embodiment, the central structure 420 is made of a resin material having a light-transmitting property such that a part of the school of fish displayed on the back side, such as the picture 741 drawn on the base 401, can be visually recognized.

The light guide plate 715B of the present embodiment has a fish pattern 743 (FIG. 31) that forms a part of a school of fish facing leftward on one surface side (for example, the back surface side) of a portion (curved portion) that overlaps the front side of the reel device 710. (Refer to (b)) is formed by fine unevenness, and when the light is incident on the lower end surface of the light guide plate 715B, the fish pattern 743 can be displayed (luminous display) on that portion. As a result, when the pattern 743 is displayed (luminous display) on the light guide plate 715B, the reel device 710 including the pattern 743 and the patterns 741 and 742 displayed on the light guide plate 715B as shown in FIG. A group of fish that exceeds the range and continues in the left-right direction is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 60A, the light guide plate 715C has a plurality of bubbles formed by light traveling inside the light guide plate 715C (guided inside the light guide plate 715C) to a portion below the reel device 710. A first effect image 3001 showing a (bubble) pattern can be displayed (luminous display). Since the first effect image 3001 is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the hold lamp 720 and the lottery result display device 730, the hold lamp 720 and the lottery result display device are displayed to the player during the display of the first effect image 3001. It is possible to make the 730 difficult to see or to make it invisible.

In addition, when the first effect image 3001 is displayed on the light guide plate 715C, the patterns 741 and 742 are not displayed by the light emitting means E1 and E2. Therefore, the patterns 741 and 742 are displayed on the base 401 and the base 701. The pattern is merely a printed pattern, and is more inconspicuous than the first effect image 3001 displayed on the light guide plate 715C.

As shown in FIG. 60B, the light guide plate 715C has a second effect image 3002 showing a large fish pattern such as a sunfish, and a star-like part in a portion (curved portion) overlapping the front side of the reel device 710. The third effect image 3003 in which a picture and a flower-like picture are mixed can be displayed (luminous display). Although details will be described later, the light guide plate 715C of the present embodiment is configured to be able to display the second effect image 3002 and the third effect image 3003 without displaying the first effect image 3001.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 60B, the light guide plate 715C displays the second effect image 3002 on the center side of the portion overlapping the front side of the reel device 710 by the light traveling in the light guide plate 715C. The third effect image 3003 is displayed on each of the left and right sides of the second effect image 3002. Although details will be described later, the light guide plate 715C of the present embodiment does not display the second effect image 3002 as shown in FIG. 60C, and the third effect image 3003 (more specifically, the third effect) is displayed. Only part of the image 3003) can be displayed.

When the second effect image 3002 and the third effect image 3003 are displayed on the light guide plate 715C, or when only the third effect image 3003 is displayed, the patterns 741 and 742 by the light emitting means E1 and E2 are displayed. Since the light emission display is not performed, the patterns 741 and 742 are merely the patterns printed on the base 401 and the base 701, and are less conspicuous than the effect images 3002 and 3003 displayed on the light guide plate 715C. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 60(b) and FIG. 60(c), the second effect image 3002 is overlapped on the front side of the design (main design, sub design) drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R. Since it is displayed at the position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M and 711R, or to make them invisible while the second effect image 3002 is being displayed. You can

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the fish group including the first effect image 3001, the second effect image 3002, the third effect image 3003, and the fish pattern 743 is expected to move to the special game state after the display (or , Probability). These effect images are determined in advance, for example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern performed on the reel device 710 (each reel 711L, 711M, 711R) includes a predetermined reach display (for example, super reach). It can be displayed by the player pressing the pressing operation device 261 within the predetermined period.

The degree of expectation of shifting to the special game state is set high in the order of the display of the first effect image 3001, the display of the school of fish including the fish pattern 743, and the display of the second effect image 3002 and the third effect image 3003. .. For example, when the first effect image 3001 is displayed, the probability of shifting to the special game state after that is 5%, and when the school of fish including the fish pattern 743 is displayed, the special game state is set thereafter. The probability of transition is 40%, and when the second effect image 3002 and the third effect image 3003 are displayed, the probability of subsequent transition to the special game state is set to 60%.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, after the second effect image 3002 and the third effect image 3003 are displayed, the second effect image 3002 is hidden and the third effect image 3003 (at least a part thereof) is displayed. When the display is continued, the degree of expectation of shifting to the special game state is higher than that when the display is not continued. For example, the probability of shifting to the special game state thereafter is set to 75%, which is higher than 60%.

It should be noted that a configuration may be used in which the degree of expectation (probability) of transitioning to the special game state after the display is suggested by the difference in light intensity and color when displaying the effect image such as the first effect image 3001.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60, in the upper and lower ends of the variable display area of the symbols by the reel device 710 (reels 711L, 711M, 711R), an area 3011 in which grooves extending in the vertical direction in the front view are arranged in the left and right direction is provided. It is provided. The region 3011 is formed on the back surface side (the reel device 710 side) of the outer cover 715A.

The area 3011 diffuses the light emitted by the reel device 710 (reels 711L, 711M, 711R) and the light emitted by the light guide plates 715B, 715C, and thereby shines in a band extending in the left-right direction. Thereby, the player can easily visually recognize the vertical range in the variable display area of the symbol.

FIG. 61 is a perspective view of the light guide plate 715C viewed from the front side. Note that, in FIG. 61, for reference, the direction of light that can be applied to the light guide plate 715C is illustrated by arrows.

As shown in FIG. 61, the light guide plate 715C has a curved portion 715C1 that curves along the curved surface of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R of the reel device 710, similar to the light guide plate 715B adopted in the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 38). And a flat surface portion 715C2 located above the curved portion 715C1 and a flat surface portion 715C3 located below the curved portion 715C1.

The light guide plate 715C constitutes a light guide plate unit (not shown) similar to the light guide plate unit 810 (see FIG. 38) together with the light guide plate 715B and the outer cover 715A integrated with the base body 701. In the light guide plate unit, the rear light guide plate of the two light guide plates 715B and 715C arranged to overlap the rear side of the outer cover 715A is the pressing member 811 that presses the front light guide plate from the rear side. It is held by being fitted into a groove formed on the side surface of a pressing member (not shown) similar to. In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the light guide plate 715C is arranged on the rear side of the light guide plate 715B, but the light guide plate 715C is arranged on the front side of the light guide plate 715B. May be

On the lower end side of the light guide plate 715C, a light source unit (not shown) capable of irradiating (incident, enterable) light to the lower end surface side of the light guide plate 715C is provided. The light source unit (hereinafter, the light source unit is also referred to as a “lower light source unit” for convenience) constitutes a part of the light guide plate unit including the light guide plate 715C.

The lower light source unit is configured similarly to the light source unit 813 (see FIG. 40) and includes a plurality of light emitting means (light emitters) capable of irradiating the lower end surface side of the light guide plate 715C with light. The light emitting means (hereinafter, the light emitting means is also referred to as “lower light emitting means” for convenience) is composed of a light emitting body (for example, an LED) having directivity in a light irradiation direction (output direction). ..

The plurality of lower side light emitting means are arranged in rows along the longitudinal direction of the lower end surface of the light guide plate 715C so that the lower end surface of the light guide plate 715C can be irradiated with light. Light emission control of the plurality of lower light emitting means is independently performed by the sub control board 940 for each lower light emitting means.

The light emitted (output) from the lower light emitting means enters substantially vertically to the lower end surface of the light guide plate 715C and travels (guides) from the lower side to the upper side in the light guide plate 715C. ..

The lower light source unit is also provided with a plurality of light emitting means (light emitters) similar to the light emitting means 834 (see FIG. 38) capable of irradiating the lower end surface side of the light guide plate 715B with light. The light emission control of the light emitting means is also independently performed by the sub control board 940 for each light emitting means. The light emitted (output) from the light emitting means enters substantially perpendicularly to the lower end surface of the light guide plate 715B and travels (guided) from the bottom to the upper side from inside the light guide plate 715B. ..

A light source unit (not shown) capable of irradiating (incident, inputtable) light to the left end surface side of the light guide plate 715C and the right end of the light guide plate 715C are respectively provided on the left end side and the right end side of the light guide plate 715C. A light source unit (not shown) capable of irradiating light (incident, inputtable) is provided on the surface side.

More specifically, a light source unit capable of irradiating light to the left end surface side of the light guide plate 715C (hereinafter, the light source unit is also referred to as a “left light source unit” for convenience) is provided with an intersection region 3021 (in the light guide plate 715C). (See FIG. 62 ), which is a unit for irradiating the left end face side with light, and is provided on the left side of the intersection region 3021. On the other hand, the light source unit capable of irradiating light to the right end surface side of the light guide plate 715C (hereinafter, the light source unit is also referred to as “right light source unit” for convenience) irradiates light to the right end surface side of the intersection region 3021. And is provided on the right side of the intersection area 3021. The left light source unit and the right light source unit form part of a light guide plate unit including the light guide plate 715C.

The left light source unit includes a plurality of light emitting means (light emitters) capable of irradiating light on the left end surface side of the light guide plate 715C. The light emitting means (hereinafter, the light emitting means is also referred to as a “left side light emitting means” for convenience) is composed of a light emitting body (for example, an LED) having directivity in a light irradiation direction (output direction).

The plurality of left-side light emitting means are capable of irradiating light to the left end face of the light guide plate 715C (more specifically, the left end face of the intersection region 3021), and the length of the left end face of the light guide plate 715C (the left end face of the intersection region 3021). They are arranged in rows along the direction. The light emission control of the plurality of left side light emitting means is independently performed by the sub control board 940 for each of the left side light emitting means.

The light emitted (output) from the left-side light emitting means is incident substantially perpendicular to the left end surface of the light guide plate 715C and travels (guided) from the left to the right side in the light guide plate 715C. ..

On the other hand, the right light source unit includes a plurality of light emitting means (light emitters) capable of irradiating light on the right end surface side of the light guide plate 715C. The light emitting means (hereinafter, the light emitting means is also referred to as “right side light emitting means” for convenience) is composed of a light emitting body (for example, an LED) having directivity in a light irradiation direction (output direction).

The plurality of right-side light emitting units are capable of irradiating the right end surface of the light guide plate 715C (more specifically, the right end surface of the intersection region 3021) with light, and the right end surface of the light guide plate 715C (the right end surface of the intersection region 3021) is long. They are arranged in rows along the direction. The emission control of the plurality of right side light emitting means is independently performed by the sub control board 940 for each right side light emitting means.

The light emitted (outputted) from the right light emitting means is incident substantially perpendicularly to the right end surface of the light guide plate 715C and travels (guided) from the right to the left side in the light guide plate 715C. ..

62 to 65 are front views of the light guide plate 715C of the present embodiment. Note that, in FIGS. 62 to 65, for reference, the boundary of the intersection region 3021 is illustrated by a thick line, and the direction of light that can be irradiated on the light guide plate 715C is illustrated by an arrow.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the light guide plate 715C, a path in which the light incident from the lower end surface of the light guide plate 715C travels (a path in which the light travels from the bottom to the upper side), and the left end surface and the right end of the light guide plate 715C. An intersection region 3021 is formed so as to intersect with a path (a path in which light travels in the left-right direction) in which light incident from the surface travels. In the intersection area 3021, there are both light that travels from the bottom to the top and light that travels in the left-right direction.

Further, in the light guide plate 715C, a non-intersecting region 3022 that does not include a path through which the light incident from the left end face and the right end face of the light guide plate 715C travels, is incident on the intersection region 3021 from the lower end face of the light guide plate 715C. Are formed on both sides along the path of travel. That is, the non-intersecting region 3022 includes only the path through which the light incident from the lower end surface of the light guide plate 715C travels. Thereby, the light traveling in the non-intersecting region 3022 is composed of the light traveling from the lower side to the upper side.

As shown in FIG. 62 and FIG. 63, on one surface side (for example, the back surface side) of the intersection region 3021 in the light guide plate 715C, it is possible to reflect (diffuse) light traveling in the light guide plate 715C in the left-right direction to the front side. Thus, fine irregularities capable of displaying the first effect image 3001 by light emission are formed. As a result, the first effect image 3001 is basically not displayed (light emission display) by the light incident from the lower light emitting means (that is, the light traveling from the lower side to the upper side), and the left and right light emission is performed. Display is performed by the light incident from the means (left-side light emitting means, right-side light emitting means).

The first effect image 3001 includes specifications of a light emitting body used as the lower light emitting means, a structure for allowing light to enter the light guide plate 715C from the lower light emitting means, fine irregular shapes provided on the light guide plate 715C, and lower light emitting means. There is a possibility that it will be displayed only a little (lightly and faintly) due to diffuse reflection of light incident from. Regarding this point, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, even if the first effect image 3001 is displayed in such a manner, it is configured such that the trouble or problem in the game is unlikely to occur, and the specific content Will be described later.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the left light source is arranged so that the display area (display unit) of the first effect image 3001 provided in the intersecting area 3021 is located below the reel device 710. Since the unit and the right light source unit are provided, the first effect image 3001 is displayed (light emission display) at a position lower than the reel device 710 as described above (see FIG. 60A).

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the intersecting area 3021 is divided into a plurality of intersecting area components arranged in a direction intersecting the traveling direction (left-right direction) of the light for displaying the first effect image 3001. In the example shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the intersection area 3021 is divided into four intersection area constituent parts AP1 to AP4 arranged in the vertical direction.

It is configured such that a predetermined number (for example, five) of light from the left-side light emitting means and the right-side light emitting means are incident (input) on each of the plurality of intersection area forming portions forming the intersection area 3021. It The sub-control board 940 controls the light emission means (the left-side light emission means and the right-side light emission means) for irradiating the left and right end faces of the intersection area 3021 independently, so that the emission of each intersection area constituent portion is controlled. It can be controlled independently.

More specifically, the sub-control board 940 independently controls the light emitting means for irradiating the left and right end surfaces of the intersection region 3021 to emit light independently, so that the intensity of the light incident on each intersection region constituent portion is increased. The sheath and the color can be controlled in units of the respective intersection area constituent parts (in the examples shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, respective units of the intersection area constituent parts AP1 to AP4).

As a result, for example, a portion of the first effect image 3001 showing a plurality of bubble patterns that emits a predetermined light emission (for example, light emission with a predetermined intensity or light emission with a predetermined color) is set as the sub-control board 940. Can be made to appear in units of each of the intersecting area constituent parts AP1 to AP4.

For example, a portion of the first effect image 3001 that emits a predetermined light emission (for example, a light emission with a predetermined intensity or a light emission with a predetermined color) approaches the reel device 710 (variable display area of the symbol). Can be moved upwards, or can be moved downwards so as to move away. As a result, it is possible to perform an expression as if the bubbles expressed by the first effect image 3001 are floating toward the reel device 710.

In the example shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the intersection area 3021 is divided into four intersection area constituent portions AP1 to AP4, but the number of intersection area constituent portions (that is, the intersection area 3021 is divided). The number is not necessarily four, and may be less than four or more than four as long as it is plural. It is preferable that the number of intersecting area components is large, because the expression of the first effect image 3001 can be varied. Further, the intersection area 3021 may not be divided into a plurality of intersection area components.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the case where the vertical widths of the intersection region forming portions AP1 to AP4 are substantially the same is illustrated, but the vertical widths of all the intersection region forming portions are substantially the same. Does not necessarily have to be, and may have a configuration including an intersection region configuration portion having a vertical width different from that of other intersection region configurations. Further, a configuration is illustrated in which a plurality of (for example, five) light emitting means (left side light emitting means, right side light emitting means) correspond to each intersection area forming part of the intersection area 3021. The light emitting means may correspond thereto.

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 64, on one surface side (for example, the back surface side) of the non-intersecting region 3022 in the light guide plate 715C, light that travels vertically in the light guide plate 715C (from the bottom in this embodiment). By reflecting (diffusing) the light that travels upward) to the front side, fine irregularities capable of emitting and displaying the second effect image 3002 and the third effect image 3003 are formed.

More specifically, the fine unevenness capable of displaying the second effect image 3002 and the third effect image 3003 by light emission is provided on one surface side of a portion (curved portion) that overlaps the front side of the reel device 710 in the non-intersecting region 3022. It is provided. As a result, the second effect image 3002 and the third effect image 3003 are displayed (luminous display) at a position overlapping the front side of the reel device 710, as described above (see FIG. 60(b)).

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the non-intersecting regions 3022 are arranged in a plurality of non-intersecting areas arranged in a direction intersecting with the traveling direction (vertical direction) of the light for displaying the second effect image 3002 or the third effect image 3003. It is divided into intersecting area components. In the examples shown in FIGS. 62 and 64, the non-crossing region 3022 is divided into 10 non-crossing region constituent parts AQ1 to AQ10 arranged in the left-right direction.

It is configured such that a predetermined number (for example, five) of light from the lower light emitting means is made incident (input) to each non-intersecting region constituting part in the plurality of non-intersecting region constituting parts constituting the non-intersecting region 3022. It The sub-control board 940 can independently control the light emission of each non-intersecting region constituent part by independently controlling the light emission of the lower light emitting means.

More specifically, the sub-control board 940 controls the light emission of each of the lower light emitting means independently, so that the intensity and color of the light incident on each non-crossing area constituent part can be controlled. 62 (in the example shown in FIGS. 62 and 64), each unit of the non-intersecting region constituent parts AQ1 to AQ10 can be controlled.

As a result, for example, a portion of each effect image 3002, 3003 that emits a predetermined light emission (for example, a light emission with a predetermined intensity, a light emission with a predetermined color, etc.) is controlled by the sub-control board 940 so as not to cross each other. It can be made to appear in units of the area configuration parts AQ1 to AQ10. For example, a portion of each effect image 3002, 3003 that emits predetermined light (e.g., light with a predetermined intensity or light with a predetermined color) can be moved from right to left. Accordingly, it is possible to express as if the fish represented by the second effect image 3002 is swimming toward the left side.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 62 and 64, the display area (display section) of the second effect image 3002 is within the range of the non-intersecting area configuration sections AQ3 to AQ8 in the left-right direction, and the second effect image 3002 is displayed. The display area (display unit) of the third effect image 3003 located on the right side of the third effect located on the left side of the second effect image 3002 has the left-right direction within the range of the non-intersecting area configuration parts AQ1 and AQ2. The display area (display section) of the image 3003 is within the range of the non-intersecting area constituent sections AQ9 and AQ10 in the left-right direction.

Therefore, in the configuration of the present embodiment in which the light emission of each non-intersecting area constituent portion can be independently controlled by the sub-control board 940, the second effect image 3002 and the third effect image located on the right side of the second effect image 3002. 3003 and the third effect image 3003 located on the left side of the second effect image 3002 can be independently light-emitted and turned off. For example, the left and right third effect images 3003 can be light-emitted and displayed without causing the second effect image 3002 to be emissively displayed (that is, in the state where the second effect image 3002 is turned off).

Further, as shown in FIG. 65, of the third effect image 3003 located on the right side of the second effect image 3002, only the image portion drawn in the non-intersecting region forming part AQ1 can be displayed in a light-emitting state. Similarly, of the third effect images 3003 located on the left side of the second effect image 3002, only the image portion drawn in the non-intersecting region forming part AQ10 can be displayed in a light emitting manner. Accordingly, the third effect image 3003 (more specifically, the third effect image 3003 of the third effect image 3003 does not overlap the front side of the symbol (main symbol, sub symbol) drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R. (A part of) can be displayed (light emission display) (see FIG. 60C).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 62, 64, and 65, the non-crossing region 3022 is divided into 10 non-crossing region constituent parts AQ1 to AQ10, but the number of non-crossing region constituent parts (that is, The number for dividing the non-intersecting region 3022 does not necessarily have to be 10, and may be less than 10 or more than 10 as long as it is plural. It is preferable that the number of non-intersecting region components is large, because the expressions of the second effect image 3002 and the third effect image 3003 can be varied. Further, the non-intersecting region 3022 may not be divided into a plurality of non-intersecting region constituent parts.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 62, 64, and 65, the case where the widths of the non-intersecting region constituent portions AQ1 to AQ10 in the left-right direction are substantially the same has been illustrated, but the left and right sides of all non-intersecting region constituent portions are illustrated. The widths in the directions do not necessarily have to be substantially the same, and may include a non-intersection region constituent portion having a width in the left-right direction different from that of other non-intersection region structures. Further, a configuration is illustrated in which a plurality of (for example, five) lower light emitting means correspond to each non-intersecting region constituent part of the non-intersecting region 3022, but one lower-side light emitting element corresponds to each non-intersecting region constituent part. The means may have a corresponding configuration.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the light guide plate 715C can display the first effect image 3001 by the light traveling in the light guide plate 715C toward the left-right direction side where the plate surface is continuous. The second effect image 3002 and the third effect image 3003 can be displayed by the light that travels in the light guide plate 715C from the bottom to the upper side where the plate surface is continuous. Therefore, by controlling the light emission of the lower light emitting means and the light emission of the left and right light emitting means, respectively, the first effect image 3001, the second effect image 3002, and the third effect image 3003 can be displayed at different timings. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to diversify the effect performed using the light guide plate 715C.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the effect performed using the light guide plate 715C. For example, as described above, when the first effect image 3001 is displayed and when the second effect image 3002 and the third effect image 3003 are displayed, the degree of expectation of shifting to the special game state after the display or In a configuration having different probabilities, it is possible to realize display of effect images having different expectation levels or probabilities with one light guide plate 715C.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the display area (display section) of the first effect image 3001 is provided in the intersecting area 3021 and the display area (display section of the second effect image 3002 and the third effect image 3003 (display section). ) Are provided in the non-intersecting region 3022. Therefore, when the second effect image 3002 and the third effect image 3003 are displayed, the first effect image 3001 emits light for displaying these effect images 3002 and 3003 (that is, from inside the light guide plate 715C from above to below). There is a possibility that only a small amount of light will be displayed (lightly appearing, lightly appearing) due to the light traveling to the side), while the first effect image 3001 is displayed when the first effect image 3001 is displayed. The second effect image 3002 and the third effect image 3003 are not displayed even by the light for displaying (the light traveling in the light guide plate 715C in the left-right direction).

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the second effect image 3002 and the third effect image 3003 are displayed together with the first effect image 3001 at the time when the first effect image 3001 should be displayed (prevention). )it can. Therefore, as described above, the degree of expectation or probability of shifting to the special game state after the display of the first effect image 3001 is the degree of expectation of shifting to the special game state after the display of the second effect image 3002 and the third effect image 3003, or In the configuration that is lower than the probability, the second effect image 3002 and the third effect image 3003 are displayed together with the first effect image 3001 at the time when the first effect image 3001 should be displayed. As a result of making unnecessary (or excessive) expectation for the occurrence (transition) of the special game state, it is possible to suppress the situation that disappoints rather, making it easier to display the effect image with the expected degree (probability) as set in advance. be able to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the display area of the first effect image 3001 provided in the intersection area 3021 is arranged at a position below the reel device 710, that is, the reels 711L, 711M, Since it is provided at a position that does not overlap with the front side of the region (variable display region) in which the variable display of the symbol (decorative symbol) is performed by 711R, the first effect image 3001 moves from the bottom to the upper side in the light guide plate 715C. Even if only a little is displayed by the advancing light, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the variable display of the decorative design from being impaired by the first effect image 3001 displayed as such, and the player can Since the display is at a position outside the display area of the variable display of the decorative pattern of particular interest, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will notice that the display has been made.

In the above embodiment, the case where the display area of the first effect image 3001 provided in the intersecting area 3021 is arranged below the reel device 710 is described. The entire intersection area 3021 including the display area may be arranged at a position below the reel device 710. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern from being impaired by the first effect image 3001 that is displayed only slightly due to the light traveling from the lower side to the upper side in the light guide plate 715C.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the non-intersecting region 3022 is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the reel device 710. Therefore, even if the second effect image 3002 and the third effect image 3003 are displayed at the position overlapping the front side of the reel device 710, these effect images 3002 and 3003 cause the first effect image 3001 to be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the display by the light, and it is possible to prevent the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern from being reduced at an inappropriate time.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the light guide plates 715C are arranged in a direction (left-right direction) that intersects the traveling direction of light incident from the lower light emitting means (direction from the bottom to the upper side). It is divided into a plurality of non-crossing region constituent parts, and each non-crossing region constituent part is configured to be able to independently emit light. As a result, as in the example shown in FIGS. 62 and 64, the second effect image 3002 can be displayed within the range of the non-intersection area constituent parts AQ3 to AQ8, and the non-intersection area constituent parts AQ1, AQ2, AQ9, AQ10 can be displayed. When the third effect image 3003 can be displayed within the range, the second effect image 3002 and the third effect image 3003 are controlled at different timings by individually controlling the light emission of the plurality of lower light emitting means. It becomes possible to display. Also in this respect, it is possible to further diversify the effect performed using the light guide plate 715C.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the traveling direction of light for displaying the second effect image 3002 and the third effect image 3003 (that is, the direction from the bottom to the top) is the reels 711L, 711M,. The light guide plate 715C is arranged so as to be on the same direction side as the moving direction of the pattern (decorative pattern) variably displayed by 711R. Thereby, for example, as shown in FIG. 65, the third effect image 3003 extending along the movement direction of the symbols by the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R. It can be displayed so that it does not overlap the front side of. That is, it is possible to display an effect image such as the third effect image 3003 extending along the moving direction of the variable display pattern (decorative pattern) while suppressing the visibility of the symbol from being impaired.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the intersection area 3022 provided in the light guide plate 715C is arranged in the traveling direction (left-right direction) of the light incident from the left and right light emitting means (the left light emitting means or the right light emitting means). It is divided into a plurality of intersecting region constituent parts arranged in the direction (vertical direction) intersecting with each other, and each of the intersecting region constituent parts is configured to be able to independently emit light. As a result, as in the examples shown in FIG. 62 and FIG. 63, the portion of the first effect image 3001 that emits a predetermined light emission (for example, light emission with a predetermined intensity or light emission with a predetermined color) is reeled. It is possible to move the device 710 upward so as to approach the device 710 or move it downwardly so as to move away from the device 710.

The display area of the first effect image 3001 is arranged at a position below the reel device 710, that is, at a position that does not overlap the front side of the reel device 710 (variable display area of the symbol), so the first effect image 3001. Is an effect image displayed at a position where it is hard to receive the player's attention as compared to the variable display area of the symbol which the player can easily pay attention to. In the first effect image 3001, the portion that emits a predetermined amount of light is moved toward or away from the reel device 710 (variable display area of the symbol) as described above. The player's attention can be easily directed to the first effect image 3001 which is relatively difficult to be noticed. As a result, the player can be prevented from missing the display of the first effect image 3001.

<Twenty-second Embodiment>
Next, a twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 66. The pachinko machine 100 of the twenty-second embodiment is characterized by how to make the light guide plate 1715 shine. In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first to twenty-first embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

The configuration described below in the twenty-second embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 of the first to twenty-first embodiments described above, or the first to twenty-first embodiments described above. The pachinko machine 100 may be provided in place of part of the configuration.

FIG. 66 is a schematic front view of the light guide plate 1715 showing an example of how to make the light shine. Note that, in FIG. 66, in order to facilitate understanding of the drawing, the first light guide plate 1715A and the second light guide plate 1715B forming the light guide plate 1715 are illustrated with a space therebetween. Further, in FIG. 66, the first effect image 3001 which is not basically displayed during the display of the fish pattern 743 is shown by a dotted line for reference.

Like the light guide plate 715B, the light guide plate 1715 is a resin plate having a light transmissive property capable of displaying (light emitting display) a predetermined image or a pattern by the light incident from the end face side, and as shown in FIG. One light guide plate 1715A and a second light guide plate 1715B located below the first light guide plate 1715A. More specifically, one light guide plate 1715 is configured by substantially contacting the lower end surface 1715A1 of the first light guide plate 1715A and the upper end surface 1715B1 of the second light guide plate 1715B.

Since the lower end surface 1715A1 of the first light guide plate 1715A and the upper end surface 1715B1 of the second light guide plate 1715B are substantially in contact with each other, the light is incident substantially perpendicularly to the lower end surface 1715B2 of the second light guide plate 1715B. The light that travels in the light guide plate 1715B from the lower side to the upper side passes through the upper end surface 1715B1 and enters the first light guide plate 1715A from the lower end surface 1715A1. The light that has entered the first light guide plate 1715A from the lower end surface 1715A1 travels in the light guide plate 1715A from the lower side to the upper side.

The first light guide plate 1715A is a light guide plate including a portion (curved portion) overlapped on the front side of the reel device 710. On one surface side (for example, the back surface side) of the portion of the first light guide plate 1715A that overlaps the front side of the reel device 710, light that travels in the vertical direction in the light guide plate 1715A (from the bottom in this embodiment). By reflecting (diffusing) the light traveling toward the upper side) to the front side, fine irregularities capable of emitting and displaying the fish pattern 743 forming a part of the school of fish facing the left direction are formed.

The second light guide plate 1715B is a light guide plate that includes a portion that is below the portion that is stacked on the front side of the reel device 710 (below the reel device 710). On one surface side (for example, the back surface side) of the second light guide plate 1715B that is below the reel device 710, the light traveling in the left-right direction inside the light guide plate 1715B is reflected (diffused) to the front side. As a result, fine unevenness capable of emitting and displaying the first effect image 3001 showing a plurality of bubbles is formed.

The lower end surface 1715A1 of the first light guide plate 1715A has a shape in which a plurality of recesses (not shown) similar to the recess Z (see FIG. 41(a)) formed in the light guide plate 715B of the twelfth embodiment are continuous. Composed.

Therefore, when light that travels from the bottom to the top in the second light guide plate 1715B enters the lower end surface 1715A1 of the first light guide plate 1715A from the upper end surface 1715B1, the traveling direction of the light is Similarly to the light guide plate 715B of the twelfth embodiment, the light guide plate 715B is divided into three directions according to each side of a recess (not shown) formed in the lower end surface 1715A1.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 66, the light emitted to the range K of the lower end surface 1715B2 of the second light guide plate 1715B corresponds to the range K of the lower end surface 1715A1 of the first light guide plate 1715A. Each of the recesses included in the range includes a strip-shaped region 1981A formed by light traveling in the upward direction, a strip-shaped region 1981B formed by light traveling in the upper left direction, and light traveling in the upper right direction. A strip-shaped region 1981C is formed.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the lower end surface 1715A1 of the first light guide plate 1715A is formed in a shape in which a plurality of trapezoidal recesses are continuous in a front view, so that the inside of the second light guide plate 1715B is lowered. The light traveling from the upper side to the upper side is separated into three strip-shaped regions 1981A to 1981C in the first light guide plate 1715A. This allows the first light guide plate 1715A to have the same randomness as the light guide plate 715B (see FIG. 41(b)) of the twelfth embodiment. It is possible to prevent the display (light emission display) of the pattern 743 from becoming monotonous.

In addition, since the lower end surface 1715A1 of the first light guide plate 1715A is provided with the concave portion, the light incident on the lower end surface 1715B2 of the second light guide plate 1715B moves from the lower side to the upper side in the second light guide plate 1715B. You can proceed to. As a result, it is possible to give randomness to the way the first light guide plate 1715A illuminates while suppressing the first effect image 3001 displayed (emitted display) from being emitted by light traveling in the left-right direction. ..

In addition, the recess formed in the lower end surface 1715A1 of the first light guide plate 1715A allows light to be separated into three directions at the lower end surface 1715A1. That is, since the light is separated into three directions at a position close to the display position of the design 743, the intensity of light in one direction is weakened by the separation of the light, so that the display of the design 743 becomes vaguely light (thin). Can be suppressed.

<Twenty-third embodiment>
Next, a twenty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 67. In the pachinko machine 100 of the twenty-third embodiment, in the case of shifting to a time saving game state in which variable display (unit game) relating to a certain number of special symbols can be executed after the end of the special game state, the last time in the time saving game state. It is configured so that the player can be suitably notified of the variable display. Specifically, it is a game state in which the time saving game state ends, without suggesting the visual or auditory sense by the direct output of information, to imply the time, and to the player in a modest notice mode. It is configured to be recognized.

In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first to twenty-second embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Moreover, you may add the structure demonstrated below in 23rd Embodiment to the structure with which the pachinko machine 100 of 1st above-mentioned 22nd Embodiment is equipped, or 1st above-mentioned 22nd Embodiment. The pachinko machine 100 may be provided in place of part of the configuration.

FIG. 67 is a time chart showing changes in the output level of the musical sound during the variable display of the special symbol executed during the time saving game state. More specifically, FIG. 67(a) is a time chart for the loss variation display (variation display in which the stop symbol is the loss symbol) executed before the final time in the time saving game state, and FIG. 67(a) is , Is a time chart for the final variation display of loss in the time saving game state.

The "time saving game state" is one of the game states to which the special game state ends, and in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a unit game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). Even if the big hit is not won, it is configured as a game state in which the game state returns to the normal game state.

Therefore, the "final time lost variation display in the time saving game state" in the present embodiment is the last when the lost variation display continues for the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the game state is transferred to the time saving game state. (For example, the 100th time when the predetermined number of times is 100 times). The “miss variation display” includes a complete loss variation display (miss variation variation display not including reach indication) and a loss variation reach (loss variation variation display including reach indication).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, if the loss variation display continues for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the game state has transitioned to the time saving game state, the ending condition of the time saving game state. However, the end condition for the time saving game state is not limited to the above end condition.

For example, instead of the above end condition (that is, when the loss variation display continues for a predetermined number of times after the game state transitions to the time saving game state), or in addition to the above end condition, the time saving game state is changed. In the case of winning the predetermined ending lottery after the game state transitions, or when the number of winnings in the predetermined lottery reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) after the game state transitions to the time saving game state, the time saving game state May be used as the end condition.

Instead of the above end condition (that is, when the loss variation display continues for a predetermined number of times after the game state shifts to the time saving game state), another end condition (for example, the game state shifts to the time saving game state) If you win a predetermined end lottery after that) is set as the end condition of the time saving game state, the variable display of the times when the other end conditions are satisfied is "the final loss variation display in the time saving game state. Will be

Further, when a plurality of end conditions are set as the end condition of the time saving game state, the variable display of the time when any one of the plurality of end conditions is satisfied is displayed as "the last time in the time saving game state. Loss variation display” is displayed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the fluctuation display of each time executed in the time saving game state, a series of musical sounds output as the BGM (background music) over the fluctuation display of each time is an acoustic device. 281 and 282 are output. The "series of musical tones output over the variable display of each time" is a musical tone in which at least a predetermined melody (same melody) is output in the variable display of each time.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), in the lost variation display executed before the final lost variation display in the time saving game state, the musical sound output from the audio devices 281 and 282 as the BGM of the variation display is From the time TA1 when the variable display is started to the time TB1 when the final stop symbol (for example, the medium symbol) is stopped and the variable display ends, the output is made at a constant output level VA.

The output level VA may be the maximum (highest) output level among the output levels (sound output levels) that can be set in the audio devices 281 and 282, or a predetermined output level smaller than the maximum output level. It may be. The output level of the sound (musical sound) such as the BGM of the variable display related to the special symbol output from the audio devices 281 and 280 is controlled by the sub control board 940.

On the other hand, in the loss variation display which is the final time in the time saving game state, as shown in FIG. 67(b), for the musical sound output from the audio devices 281 and 282 as the BGM of the variation display, the variation display is started. The output level VA is output from the time TA2 at which the variable display ends to the time TX set before the time TB2 at which the fluctuation display ends, and then the output level is lowered to the output level VB at the time TX. Up to the output level VB.

In other words, the sub-control board 940, when the final variable display in the time saving game state is the lost variable display, at time TX, the sound output from the audio devices 281 and 282 as the BGM of the variable display related to the special symbol. The output level of (tone) is changed from the output level VA to the output level VB.

The output level VB may be a level calculated with respect to the output level VA (current output level), and is a level calculated with respect to the maximum output level that can be set in the audio devices 281 and 282. Good.

For example, the output level VB may be a predetermined level smaller than 3/4 of the output level VA, may be a predetermined level smaller than 1/2 of the output level VA, and may be 1/5 of the output level VA. It is preferable that the level is smaller, and it is preferable that the level is smaller than 1/10 of the output level VA.

Alternatively, the output level VB may be a predetermined level smaller than 3/4 with respect to the maximum output level that can be set in the audio devices 281, 282, and a predetermined level smaller than 1/2 with respect to the maximum output level. It may be present, but it is preferably a level smaller than 1/5 of the maximum output level, and preferably smaller than 1/10 of the maximum output level.

Note that the output level VB may be zero (that is, the muted level) regardless of the output level VA (current output level).

The time TX may be a time that is set as a time that is a predetermined time before (for example, 3 seconds before) the time TB2 when the variable display ends, or may be a predetermined time after the time TA2 when the variable display starts ( For example, 5 seconds later) may be a time set as a time, or the time at which the first symbol stops or the time at which the second symbol stops is set as a reference time, and a predetermined time before or after the reference time. It may be a time set as the time.

The time TX may be set at a time when the melody sound that is the same as that of the fluctuation display before the final time is being played, or the time TX may be set at a time other than the time. Good. At this time, if the time TX is set at that time, the player can easily recognize the difference in the output levels by comparing the output levels of the sounds of the same melody. It is easy to recognize that the output level of the musical sound in the variable display has changed from the output level of the musical sound in the variable display before the final time.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the final loss variation display that is the end condition of the time-saving gaming state that has transitioned after the special gaming state has ended, the acoustic devices 281 and 282 output as BGM of the final variation display. The output level of the sound (musical sound) to be played is changed during the final variable display during a certain period before the end including the time TB2 at which the final variable display ends (that is, the period from time TX to time TB2). The output level is set to be smaller than the output level before the start or the output level in the variation display executed before the final variation display.

That is, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the final loss variation display that is the end condition of the time saving game state that has transitioned after the special game state has ended, the BGM is displayed before the start of the final variation display as BGM. A sound (musical sound) that is continuous across the final variation display, or a sound that contains the same melody as the variation display (intermediate variation display) that is executed before the final variation display. The output level of the musical sound) is before the end of the fluctuation display of the final time or before the end of the fluctuation display of the last time in a certain period before the end of the fluctuation display of the last time including the time TB2. It is made smaller than the output level in the variable display executed in.

Thereby, to the player, the fact that the final variable display in the time-saving game state (that is, the number of times when a predetermined ending condition is satisfied) is being executed is output as a sound (musical sound) that is the BGM of the variable display. It is possible to notify by a change in level, thereby making it possible for the player to be aware of the arrival of the end of the time saving game state, not directly but indirectly. As a result, the player can directly output information (for example, “end” or “end”) regarding the end of the time saving game state (that is, the transition from the time saving game state to the normal game state) by voice output or character display. Compared with the case of notifying, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the disappointment that the gaming state returns to the normal gaming state is amplified by the explicit notification from the gaming machine.

In addition, since the time saving game state ends after the output level of the sound (musical sound) that is the BGM of the last time variable display in the time saving game state is reduced, the player feels as if the time saving game state fades out. Can be given to. As a result, it is possible to indicate to the player that the time saving game state has ended.

Further, since it is possible to let the player recognize that it is the last variable display in the time saving game state without relying on the visual sense, information that can identify the last variable display is liquid crystal display device or the like. Need not be visually displayed on the image display device. As a result, even if a reel body such as a reel device 710 (see FIG. 24) is adopted as a display device for a decorative pattern, instead of an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device, , It is possible to recognize the final variation display in the time saving game state.

Alternatively, even when an image display device such as a decorative pattern display device 479 (see FIG. 7) is adopted as a display device for a decorative pattern, it is possible to identify that it is the last variable display in the time saving game state. Since the display of the information can be omitted, the display area of the information in the image display device can be effectively used by the amount of the display of the information omitted.

When a big hit is won in the unit game executed during the time saving game state, the sub-control board 940, in the fluctuation display of the unit game won in the big hit, BGM of the loss variation display which is the final time in the time saving game state. The sound (musical sound) that becomes almost the same as the musical sound is continuously output at least until after a certain period before the end including the time TB2 at which the last variable display ends, and the big hit symbol as a stop symbol. After displaying, the musical sound corresponding to the big hit symbol is output.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and may be modified and implemented as described below, for example. In this case, each configuration described below may be applied to each embodiment described above, or a plurality of configurations described below may be combined and applied to each embodiment described above.

(1) Modified example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment In the first embodiment, information such as a lottery result of each special effect lottery is stored with respect to the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed. However, the variation of a plurality of (for example, four) decorative patterns, including the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed and the variable display of the decorative pattern executed before the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed. For each display, information such as a lottery result of each special effect lottery may be stored every time the variable display of each decorative symbol is executed. In this configuration, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) corresponding to the variable display of each decorative symbol is not a big hit, lottery of each special effect lottery Information such as results shall be stored.

In this way, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is a big hit, in the special game state transitioned to after that, the player has the fixed symbols of the big hit symbol. Not only the suggestive effect that can appear in the variable display, but by restoring the suggestive effect that can appear in the variable display of the decorative pattern that was performed before the variable display of the decorative pattern, until the transition to the special game state You can know the history of suggestive production of.

Further, in the first embodiment, the suggestion effect can be restored in the special game state, but the time when the suggestion effect can be restored does not have to be limited to the special game state. The display may be configured to restore the suggestive effect that was able to appear in the variable display of the decorative pattern that was executed before the variable display, so-called “customer waiting effect” (that is, the pachinko machine 100 is A configuration may be used during the period of effect display irrelevant to the game state, such as a title display and a demo display, which is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when a predetermined time has not been played by the player. ..

In addition, in such a configuration, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) corresponding to the variable display of each decorative symbol is not a big hit, lottery of each special effect lottery Information such as the result may be stored.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the suggestive effect that can be displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol can be restored, but it is performed using the image showing the hold status displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. The suggestion effect suggesting the occurrence probability of the special game state with respect to each hold (that is, each held right of each unit game) may be restored. That is, the variable display of the decorative pattern may be restored including the suggestive effect that can appear before the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, whereby the winning prize before the variable display is started and before the variable display is started. The variable display can be restored over a long period of time after the occurrence of. In this case, as the information to be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM regarding the variable display of the decorative pattern performed before the transition to the special game state in execution, a color indicating the degree of expectation is displayed as the color of the hold display. The information corresponding to the color for each hold display in, the number of holds at the timing when the start winning corresponding to the jackpot win, and the information about the variable display executed every time the hold is exhausted, It is preferable that the control board 940 stores the data because the process until the big hit can be reproduced more accurately.

Further, in the first embodiment, the suggestion effect selected from a plurality of types is displayed by operating the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period, but in the operable period of 1 A plurality of operable operation modes may be set, and a plurality of types of suggestive effects may be associated with each operation mode.

In this case, when the pressing operation device 261 or the selection operation device 263 is operated in any one of the plurality of operation modes during the operable period, a plurality of suggestive effects associated with the operated operation mode are displayed. The suggestive effect selected from the inside may be displayed. For example, when a right operation is performed on the selection operation device 263 during a predetermined operable period, one of the patterns selected from among a plurality of types of patterns forming the suggestive effect associated with the operation is selected. When the pattern appears and the leftward operation is performed on the selection operation device 263 during the same operable period, the pattern is selected from a plurality of types of patterns that form the suggestive effect associated with the operation. The pattern of 2 may appear.

In this way, when operations in a plurality of different operation modes can be performed in the same operable period, one operation mode (for example, the selection operation device 263 with respect to the selection operation device 263) is selected from the plurality of operation modes during the operable period. By performing the operation in the rightward direction, it is inevitable that the suggestive effect that is seen by the operation in another operation mode (for example, the leftward operation on the selection operation device 263) cannot be seen. On the other hand, by making it possible to restore the suggestive effect that can appear in the operable period later, the player can also see the suggestive effect in which the appearing is exclusive, so that the player is satisfied. Therefore, the interest in the game can be appropriately improved.

Further, in the first embodiment, the image effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 is illustrated as the suggestive effect, but the suggestive effect is not limited to the image effect. For example, effects by sounds (voices, music) output from the audio devices 281 and 282, effects by lights output from the various light-emitting devices 490 and 271 to 275, effects by operation of a structure that is operably provided, and the like. May be an element of suggestive production.

Different suggestion effects may be configured depending on a combination of elements such as an image effect, an effect by sound, an effect by light, and an effect by operation of a structure. In this case, depending on the operation mode during the operable period, the suggestive effect in which the included elements are different may be displayed. For example, when the right operation is performed on the selection operation device 263, a suggestion effect composed of an image effect, an effect by sound, an effect by light, and an effect by the operation of a structure is displayed, and the selection operation is performed. When a leftward operation is performed on the device 263, a suggestive effect including an image effect and a sound effect is displayed, and when an upward operation is performed on the selection operation device 263, an image effect is generated. You may make it show the suggestive production comprised only.

(2) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Second Embodiment In the second embodiment described above, the next operable period from after the end of the special effect (first special effect, second special effect) that is the suggested effect. Although the cancelable period (the first cancelable period, the second cancelable period) is provided before the start of the (second operable period, the third operable period), but after the completion of the suggestive effect It may be configured such that a cancelable period is provided between the time and the start of the next suggestive effect.

Alternatively, the operation device that instructs execution of the suggested effect and the operation device that instructs cancellation of execution of the suggested effect may be different operation devices, and the operable period may also serve as the cancelable period. In the configuration in which the operable period also serves as the cancelable period, the process corresponding to the operating device operated first in the period (that is, execution of suggestive effect or cancellation of execution of suggestive effect) is performed. Alternatively, the process corresponding to the operating device operated last in the period may be performed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the player can cancel the second or later suggestive effect from among the plurality of suggestive effects that can appear during one variable display by the suggestive effect canceling function. Although the configuration has been described, a cancelable period may be provided before or immediately after the start of the variable display, and the execution of all suggestive effects that can appear while the variable display is performed may be canceled.

In the second embodiment, the suggestive effect that can appear in the variable display with the operable period (that is, the suggestive effect that appears when the player operates) is canceled by the suggestive effect cancel function. Although the configuration is possible, the player may cancel the suggestive effect that automatically appears during the variable display of the decorative pattern regardless of the operation of the player by the suggestive effect canceling function.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the player operates the press operation device 261 during the cancelable period, the subsequent operable period is not generated, so that the subsequent suggestive effect is not displayed. Although the subsequent operable period is generated, the player's operation during the operable period may be invalidated so that the subsequent suggestive effect is not displayed.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the player operates the press operation device 261 during the cancelable period, the subsequent suggestive effect is not displayed, but the player operates the press operation device 261 during the cancelable period. When is operated, a suggestion effect having a lower probability of occurrence of a special game state than the suggestion effect that appears before the cancelable period may be displayed.

(3) Modified Example of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to Third and Fourth Embodiments In the third and fourth embodiments, when the push operation device 261 is operated during a predetermined operable period, the operable period. Although the suggestion effect according to is displayed on another area of the decorative pattern display device 479 of the other pachinko machine 100 or the decorative pattern display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100 which is the own machine, the press operation device 261. All of the variable display of the decorative pattern after the is operated are displayed in another region in the decorative pattern display device 479 of another pachinko machine 100 or the decorative pattern display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100 which is the own machine. May be In the configuration in which all the variable displays of the decorative symbols after the press operation device 261 has been operated are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the other pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 100 of the other pachinko machine 100 is operated during the subsequent operable period. It may be configured to be operable using an operation device (press operation device 261 or the like).

(4) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Fifth Embodiment In the fifth embodiment, as the reserved full tank production selection table, each of the numbers of holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the maximum number. The first table referred to when it is the first time in the hold count monitoring period, the second table referred to when the second time is reached, the third table referred to when the third time is reached, and 4 The fourth table to be referred to in the case of the first time and thereafter is prepared, but each of these tables (first table, second table, third table) is in a special symbol lottery while it is on hold. Even if it is divided into a hit time table that is referred to when the winning hold is included and a miss time table that is referred to when the held special prize lottery is not included in the hold Good.

By having a table at the time of hitting and a table at the time of disengagement, in the case where the hold held in the special symbol lottery is included in the hold, compared to the case where the hold held in the special symbol lottery is not included As a result, the holding full tank effect is more likely to appear, so that it is possible to create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state by the appearance of the holding full tank effect. Therefore, the progress of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved more suitably.

(5) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Sixth Embodiment In the sixth embodiment described above, by performing complete loss variation display (variation display not including reach display) multiple times, variation display including reach display is performed. Although the variable display of the corresponding variable display time is performed, the complete lost variable display of the variable display time corresponding to the variable display including the reach display may be exclusively prepared.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the variable display including the reach display is selected as the variable display of the decorative symbol, the special symbol is held in the suspension for the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol). If there is a pending lottery in the lottery, it is configured to execute a variable display that includes multiple variable displays that do not include the reach display for the same variable display time as the selected variable display. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the variable display, which does not include the reach display, is performed with the variable display time shorter than the display.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the variable display including the reach display is selected as the variable display of the decorative symbol, when the special symbol lottery is held in the pending for the special symbol, Is configured to make it easier to store the hold by executing the variable display that includes the variable display that does not include the reach display for multiple times with the predetermined probability for the same variable display time as the selected variable display. The configuration for facilitating is not limited to this.

For example, when the entrance portion of the starting device according to the special symbol is provided with an entry restricting mechanism that changes the probability of the game ball entering the inside of the starting device, the posture of the entrance restricting mechanism is set to the inside of the starting device. It may be possible to make it easier to store the hold by changing the posture so that the game ball easily enters (or allows the game ball to enter the inside). Alternatively, by shortening the period from when the reach display is performed until the middle symbol is finally stopped, the period during which the player can stop the firing of the game ball is shortened, thereby making it easier to accumulate the hold. You can

Further, in the sixth embodiment, if there is a hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery among the holds for the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), if there is no winning hold Compared with the above, the variable display time may be selected based on the condition that the variable display for a long time is easily selected as the variable display of the decorative pattern.

(6) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Seventh Embodiment In the seventh embodiment described above, each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is a drum formed in a cylindrical shape, but each reel 711L, 711M. , 711R may be a revolving belt that has a decorative pattern drawn on its outer peripheral surface and is rotated by the driving of rollers.

In the seventh embodiment, the second sub-symbol predictor notice or countdown notice is provided by using the variable display (that is, the variable display of the decorative symbol due to the variation of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R) performed in the reel device 710. However, the pre-reading effect such as the second sub-symbol warning notice or the countdown notice may be configured to be performed by using the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

In the seventh embodiment, when it is determined that the timing of stop display on the lottery result display device 730 arrives during the reach effect period in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is being executed, the variable display time of the lamp variable display. By extending, the timing at which the stop display is performed on the lottery result display device 730 is removed from the reach production period. The configuration for removing the timing of the stop display on the lottery result display device 730 from the reach production period is not limited to the above method, and for example, the timing of the stop display on the lottery result display device 730 comes before the reach production period. As described above, the fluctuation display time of the lamp fluctuation display may be shortened.

Alternatively, the timing at which the stop display is performed in the lottery result display device 730 is changed from the reach production period by shortening the variable display time in the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed without changing the variable display time of the lamp variable display. It may be removed. In such a modified example, since the variable display time in the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed is shortened, the lottery result of the pending full tank production lottery can be promptly shown while showing the suggestive production executed in the reach production period to the player. I can show you.

Further, when the timing at which the lottery result display device 730 is stopped and displayed comes during the execution of the prefetching effect using a plurality of variable displays, the timing at which the lottery result display device 730 is stopped and displayed is the prefetching effect. The variable display time of the lamp variable display may be extended so that the variable display time comes after the variable display of the prefetch target in FIG.

In addition, when the execution of the pre-reading effect has been determined or during the execution of the pre-reading effect, it is confirmed that the predetermined special effect display is being executed or that the special effect display is being executed. If so, the sub-control board 940 may be provided with control for selecting not to execute the reserved full tank effect.

In addition, the lottery result display device is performed at the time when the effect performed by the light emission of the frame light emitting devices 271-275 and the effect performed by displaying the image on the resin cover configured as the light guide plate in the reel device 710 are performed. The execution period of the effect may be adjusted or the variable display time of the lamp variable display may be adjusted so that the stop display is not performed in 730.

In the seventh embodiment, the middle reel 711M that has been stopped from the variable display prior to the variable display of the prefetch target in the second subsymbol predictor notice is changed by the left and right reels 711L and 711R in the variable display of the prefetch target. Although the variation is started in synchronization with the formation of the reach display on the middle line L2, the variation of the stopped middle reel 711M is the end time of the variation display of the prefetch target (that is, stop display). It may be configured to start a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) before the time.

It should be noted that the fluctuation of the stopped middle reel 711M is not limited to be started in synchronization with the occurrence of the reach display, but may be performed by the light emission of the frame light emitting devices 271-275, or as a light guide plate in the reel device 710. The configuration may be started in synchronism with the effect performed by displaying an image on the configured resin cover.

In the seventh embodiment, in the second sub-symbol predictor advance notice, in the variation display prior to the variation display of the prefetch target, the second sub-symbol 713B (that is, a symbol that does not form a jackpot symbol) is displayed in the middle line L2. When the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed in the state that the left and right reels 711L, while maintaining the second sub-pattern 713 of the middle reel 711M on the middle line L2 from the beginning to the end of the variation display in the subsequent variable display, 711R is changed.

Instead of this, or in addition to this, in the variable display before the variable display of the prefetch target, when the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stopped and displayed in the middle line L2 with a symbol that does not constitute reach display, In the variable display, the middle reel 711M may be varied while maintaining the symbols of the middle line L2 on the left and right reels 711L and 711R from the beginning to the end of the variable display.

In this configuration, in the variable display two or more before the prefetch target, the changing middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed in the state in which the second sub symbol 713B or the first sub symbol 713A is displayed in the middle line L2, In the next change display, the middle reel 711M is changed again. After that, in the previous variable display of the prefetch target, the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed with the main symbol 712 displayed on the middle line L2, and the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stopped with the middle reel 711M stopped. It fluctuates, and one reel (for example, the left reel 711L) is stopped first. At this time, the main symbol 712 of the reel displayed on the middle line L2 can constitute a reach display together with the main symbol 712 of the middle reel 711M displayed on the middle line L2. After stopping one of the left and right reels 711L and 711R, the other reel is stopped.

In the above-described seventh embodiment, in the second sub-symbol predictor announcement, the decorative design of the left reels 711L, 711M, 711R, the main design 712 and the sub-design 713 (713A, 713B) are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction. However, with respect to the left reel 711L stopped next to the middle reel 711M, three or more sub-patterns 713 are continuously arranged between the main symbol 712 and the main symbol 712, or "3" is attached. A plurality of sub-patterns 713 may be continuously arranged between the main symbol 712 and the main symbol 712 to which "5" is attached.

According to this configuration, by arranging the continuous sub-patterns 713 on the left reel 711R on the middle line L2 while the second sub-symbol 713B of the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, the upper line L1. In each of the middle line L2 and the lower line L3, it is possible to prevent the reach display from being formed by the symbol of the left reel 711L and the symbol of the middle reel 711R.

In the seventh embodiment, the second sub symbol 713B provided on the middle reel 711M is used to give the second sub symbol warning, but the second sub symbol 713B is provided on the left reel 711L or the right reel 711R. Alternatively, the second sub-symbol 713B provided on the left reel 711L or the right reel 711R may be used to perform a pre-reading effect similar to the second sub-symbol predictor announcement.

In the seventh embodiment, in the countdown notice, the countdown of the number of variable displays executed before the variable display of the prefetch target is executed is the main symbol 712 displayed when the middle reel 711M is finally stopped. However, the countdown may be performed by a temporary stop during the change.

In the seventh embodiment, the main symbols 712 provided on the reels 711L, 711M, 711R are all symbols including numbers, but for the left reels 711L, 711R that do not count down in the countdown notice, the main symbols 712 are used. However, it may be composed of a pattern including numerical information other than numbers. In addition, for the middle reel 711M that performs the countdown in the countdown notice, the main symbol 712 is a symbol including a number (eg, "3", "2", "1") that may be used for the countdown notice. , May be composed of a pattern including numerical information other than numbers, and is preferably composed of a pattern including at least "1" and "2".

In the seventh embodiment, in the countdown notice, the countdown of the number of variable displays executed before the variable display of the prefetch target is configured by the main symbol 712 of the middle reel 711M is performed. The reel is not limited to the middle reel 711M, but may be the left reel 711L or the right reel 711R.

In the above-described seventh embodiment, in the countdown notice, the number of variable displays during the prefetching effect that is being executed before the variable display of the prefetching target is executed is displayed by the countdown. The notice effect may be configured by counting up each time the variable display is executed, and the main symbol 712 may be used for counting up in the countup notice (for example, “1”, “2”). , "3") may be included.

(7) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Eighth Embodiment In the eighth embodiment described above, a group of fish facing leftward and continuous is displayed on both sides of the reel device 710. It may be on the right or left side only.

Although the region J is a part of the light-transmitting base 401 in the eighth embodiment, the light-transmitting region J is formed on the non-light-transmitting base. May be

In the eighth embodiment, when the player playing the game obliquely looks at the lower left direction, a part of the passage forming member 1631 (passage wall portions 1631A and 1631B) overlaps with the front side of the left information display portion 753. However, the dedicated member that obstructs the visibility of the information display unit 753 may be configured to overlap the front side of the information display unit 753 when the player who is playing the game obliquely looks at the lower left direction.

In the eighth embodiment, when a game ball that has entered the downstream passage 1613A2, 1613B2 after entering from the entrance 1611 is detected by the start winning prize switches 1441A and 1411B, a special symbol starting prize ( In other words, the special symbol lottery conditions are set). Instead, when a game ball that has entered the downstream passage 1613A2, 1613B2 is detected by the detection unit, a certain number of game balls are awarded as prize balls (privilege) without satisfying the lottery conditions. May be.

In the eighth embodiment, when the game ball entering from the entrance 1611 enters the second passages 1614A and 1614B, the special symbol starting winning is not established, but when entering the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2. A less valuable privilege (for example, the number of prize balls, a winning probability of a special symbol lottery, or a gaming state after winning a special symbol lottery) may be provided.

(8) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Ninth Embodiment In the ninth embodiment, the shape of the resin cover 715 provided with the half mirrors 761A and 761B has an arc shape in a side cross-sectional view. It suffices that the half mirrors 761A and 761B have a shape that faces the upper front side and the lower front side, respectively. For example, the shape of the resin cover 715 may be a shape having at least a slope facing the upper front side and a slope facing the lower front side, such as a trapezoidal shape in cross section, and a convex surface facing the upper front side and facing the lower front side. It may have a shape including a convex surface and a flat surface provided between the convex surfaces.

Although the half mirrors 761A and 761B are provided on the upper side and the lower side of the resin cover 715 in the ninth embodiment, the half mirror 761A or the half mirror 761B is provided on either the upper side or the lower side of the resin cover 715. It may be provided.

In the ninth embodiment, the reel side lamp 717A is provided in the area on the back side of the lower half mirror 761B. However, in addition to or instead of this, the back side of the upper half mirror 761A is provided. A reel side lamp similar to the reel side lamp 717A may be provided in the area. Further, a reel side lamp similar to the reel side lamp 717A may be provided on the entire front side of the partition section 717.

In the ninth embodiment, the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710 is provided with the half mirrors 761A and 761B. However, the cover provided on the surface of the liquid crystal display device such as the decorative pattern display device 479 has a pressing operation device. In order to allow the player to visually recognize the image G2 and the like formed by the reference numeral 261, a protrusion having an arc shape in a side sectional view may be provided, and the half mirrors 761A and 761B may be provided on the protrusion.

In the ninth embodiment, the pressing operation device 261 is configured to be able to light (emit), but the pressing operation device 261 may not emit light. Even if the press operating device 261 does not emit light, the player can recognize the operable period of the press operating device 261 by visually recognizing the image G3 of the wave lamp 771 reflected on the half mirror 761B.

(9) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Tenth Embodiment In the tenth embodiment described above, in the reel device 710 that performs variable display of decorative symbols by the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R, the display area of each symbol row is changed. Although the case of reducing the size is illustrated, the present invention may be applied to a liquid crystal display device such as the decorative pattern display device 479. For example, of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device, the middle symbol column is reduced, and the left and right symbol columns are moved so that they are arranged on both sides of the reduced middle symbol column. You can

In the tenth embodiment, after the middle reel 711M is moved backward, the left and right reels 711L and 711R are moved toward the middle reel 711M, but the position of the middle reel 711M is left unchanged. The reels 711L and 711R may be moved rearward and then in a direction of approaching the middle reel 711M.

Alternatively, while keeping the position of the left reel 711L as it is, the middle reel 711M is moved rearward so as to be behind the left reel 711L and then moved toward the left reel 711L, and then the right reel 711R is moved from the middle reel 711M. The display area of each symbol row may be reduced by moving the symbol reel 711M toward the rear side and then moving toward the middle reel 711M.

In the tenth embodiment, when the left and right reels 711L and 711R are moved toward the middle reel 711M after the middle reel 711M is moved rearward, the LEDs provided inside the middle reel 711M located on the rear side. The brightness of the light emitting means such as LED may be higher than the brightness of the light emitting means such as LEDs provided inside the left and right reels 711L and 711R located on the front side of the middle reel 711M. The brightness of the light emitting means provided inside each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is controlled by the sub control board 940.

According to this modified example, the brightness of the light emitting means provided inside the rear reel 711M located on the rear side is made higher than the brightness of the light emitting means provided inside the left and right reels 711L and 711R, whereby the middle reel 711M. Is located on the rear side of the left and right reels 711L and 711R, so that it is possible to prevent the symbol of the middle reel 711M from being difficult to see.

(10) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Eleventh Embodiment In the eleventh embodiment, the light guide plate unit 810 including the light guide plate 715B arranged on the front side of the reel device 710 has been illustrated. When a light guide plate having a similar curved portion is arranged in front of a movable body such as a character performing a predetermined motion, the present invention may be applied to a light guide plate unit including the light guide plate.

In the eleventh embodiment, the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B is configured to be curved in a substantially cylindrical shape along the curved surface of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R of the reel device 710, and has a substantially arc shape in a side view. Although the curved structure has been described, it is not necessarily required to have an arc shape in a side view, and it may have another shape protruding toward the front side such as including a curved line or a broken line.

In the eleventh embodiment, the through-holes 841A and 843A and the through-holes 841B and 843B of the light source unit 812 are inserted into the protruding portion 892 that is provided on the rear side of the base 701 so as to project rearward. A configuration may be employed in which a front projection of the unit 812 (that is, the front of the reflector 823) is provided with a projection protruding forward, and a mounting hole corresponding to the projection is provided in the base 701. In this case, like the through hole 841A, the mounting hole provided in the base body 701 is formed in a long hole shape that is slightly larger in the up-down direction than the outer diameter of the protruding portion corresponding to the mounting hole. The same effect as in the case where the through hole 841A and the like are formed in a long hole shape that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the protruding portion 892 in the up and down direction. Similarly, a configuration may be employed in which a protruding portion protruding forward is provided on the front side of the light source unit 813, and a mounting hole corresponding to the protruding portion is provided in the base body 701.

In the eleventh embodiment, the light source units 812 and 813 are fixed (attached) to the upper and lower sides of the light guide plate 715B, and then the light guide plate 715B is integrated with the outer cover 715A via the light source units 812 and 813. It is configured to be fixed to. Instead of this, upper and lower light source units corresponding to the light source units 812 and 813 may be fixed to the base body 701 integrated with the outer cover 715A, and then the light guide plate 715B may be fixed to the light source unit.

In the eleventh embodiment, the pressing portion 811A of the pressing member 811 is configured to have a substantially arcuate front end shape in a side view along the curved shape of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A. The curved shape of 715A1 does not have to be followed, and one or a plurality of protruding portions is formed so as to project toward the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A, and is deformed as a part of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B. It may be configured to partially correct the part to be corrected. In this case, it is preferable to provide at least a central pressing portion that presses the rear side of the most projecting front portion at a substantially central height position in the vertical direction of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B. In a situation where the radius of curvature is larger than the curvature set by the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B and the amount of bending is insufficient, the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B can be efficiently corrected. In addition, it is preferable to provide at least a vertical pressing portion that presses the rear side of the portion located at the rear side of the curved portion 715B1 at the height position of the upper and lower end sides in the vertical direction of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B. Accordingly, in the situation where the radius of curvature is smaller than the curvature set by the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B and the amount of bending is excessive, the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B can be efficiently corrected.

(11) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Twelfth Embodiment In the twelfth embodiment, the trapezoidal recess Z having the sides Z1 to Z3 in front view is provided on the upper and lower end surfaces 715B4 and 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B. Although the configuration is adopted, the shape of the recesses provided in the end faces 715B4, 715B5 does not necessarily have to be trapezoidal. For example, it may be a recess formed by two sides continuous in a mountain shape or a recess including four or more sides.

In the eleventh embodiment, the recess Z provided in the upper and lower end surfaces 715B4, 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B has a corner portion formed by the intersection of two continuous sides. The corners may be rounded or chamfered as long as they do not enter or a region where light weaker than the light traveling in the directions of the arrows F1 to F3 enters is formed.

In the twelfth embodiment, the trapezoidal recess Z is provided in the upper and lower end surfaces 715B4 and 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B in a front view so that light does not enter, like the regions D1 and D2, or the arrow F1 to F1. Although the light guide including a predetermined direction in which light weaker than the light traveling in the F3 direction enters is configured, the recess Z is formed in an arc shape so that light does not partially enter due to black coating or plating. By doing so, the predetermined direction may be configured. Alternatively, a dedicated component that can configure the predetermined direction may be provided between the end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B and the light emitting means 834 or between the end surface 715B5 and the light emitting means 824.

In the twelfth embodiment, the concave Z is provided in the upper and lower end surfaces 715B4, 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B having the curved portion 715B1 so that the light guide plate 715B has randomness in how the light is emitted. Even when a concave portion similar to the concave portion Z is provided on the end surface of the flat light guide plate that does not have the light guide plate, the light guide plate can be provided with randomness in the way of light emission.

(12) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Thirteenth Embodiment In the above thirteenth embodiment, in the reel device 710 that performs variable display of decorative symbols by the reels 711L, 711M, 711R, the reels 711L, 711R Although the width is changed, the present invention may be applied to a liquid crystal display device such as the decorative pattern display device 479. That is, the width of the left and right symbol rows may be changed among the symbol rows of the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

In the thirteenth embodiment, in the state where the right of the unit game relating to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not reserved, the symbol in the unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol Although the width of the left and right reels 711L and 711R is changed when the variable display of is started, the left and right reels are operated when the player operates a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261). The widths of 711L and 711R may be changed.

In the thirteenth embodiment, of the three rows of reels 711L, 711M, 711R, the middle reel 711M in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed last is such that the left and right reels 711L, 711R are partially overlapped forward. Although it is configured to be stopped, when the reach display is formed by the left and right reels 711L and 711R, the left and right reels 711L and 711R are moved so that the entire middle reel 711M is visible from the front. May be.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the display area of each symbol row is reduced by reducing the width of each of the left and right reels 711L and 711, and the display area of each symbol row is reduced by moving each reel 711L, 711M, 711R. However, the display area of each symbol row may not be reduced by moving the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the left and right reels 711L and 711 are moved toward each other to reduce the width of the display area of each symbol row, but at least one reel is arranged in the reel arrangement direction. The width of the display area of each symbol row may be reduced by moving it to one side or the other side. For example, by moving only one of the left and right reels 711L and 711 to the left or right of the three rows of reels 711L, 711M and 711R, the width of the display area of each symbol row may be reduced. Good.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the rotation of the reels 711L and 711R is used to pull the second reel body 1702 toward the first reel body 1701 by the one drive solenoid 1711. A plurality of drive solenoids similar to the solenoid 1711 may be provided in the circumferential direction of each reel 711L, 711R. By providing a plurality of drive solenoids in the circumferential direction of the reel, it is possible to pull the second reel body 1702 toward the first reel body 1701 even when the reel is stopped.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the width of the reel (reel 711L, 711R) is changed by changing the insertion amount of the second reel body 1702 with respect to the first reel body 1701. Instead, the outer peripheral surface of the reel is made of a material that can expand and contract, and one side of the reel in the left-right direction (width direction) is pulled from the other side to contract the outer surface of the reel. The width may be narrowed.

In the thirteenth embodiment, each reel 711L. The main symbols are formed by the numbers drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the 711M and 711R. A display capable of displaying a symbol such as a number by electrical control may be provided on the outer peripheral surfaces of the 711M and 711R, and the main symbol may be displayed on the display. In this case, when the widths of the left and right reels 711L and 711R are narrowed, a main symbol having a size corresponding to the width may be displayed.

(13) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Fourteenth Embodiment In the fourteenth embodiment, the radius of curvature of the bending portion 715B1 is changed (increased by extending the light guide plate 715B in the vertical direction by the drive solenoid 1731. However, the radius of curvature of the curved portion 715B1 may be changed (decreased) by compressing the light guide plate 715B in the vertical direction.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the light guide plate 715B having the curved portion 715B1 is used, and the radius of curvature of the curved portion 715B1 is changed so that the light guided inside the light guide plate 715B is refracted at the inside and outside of the light guide plate 715B. The position where the fish pattern 743 shines is changed so that the position where the fish pattern 743 shines is changed. Instead of this, the flat light guide plate may be gently bent to change the position of refraction on the front and back sides of the light guide plate.

(14) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Fifteenth Embodiment In the fifteenth embodiment, the flat light guide plate 1751 and the light guide plate 1771 are stacked in the front-rear direction. The two light guide plates may be stacked in the front-rear direction. When two curved light guide plates are stacked in the front-rear direction, a reel device capable of displaying a decorative pattern such as a reel device 710 or a character performing a predetermined action is provided behind the two light guide plates. A movable body may be arranged.

In the fifteenth embodiment, of the light guide plate 1751 and the light guide plate 1771 stacked in the front-rear direction, the light guide plate 1771 located on the rear side is configured to be movable relative to the light guide plate 1751. Of the light guide plates stacked in the direction, the light guide plate located on the front side may be configured to be movable relative to the light guide plate located on the rear side.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the flat light guide plate 1751 and the light guide plate 1771 are stacked in the front-rear direction, but three or more light guide plates are stacked, and at least one light guide plate is stacked on another light guide plate. It may be configured to move relative to each other.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the movable light guide plate 1771 is relatively moved with respect to the fixed light guide plate 1751, but both two light guide plates are movable. Alternatively, one of these two light guide plates may be moved with respect to the other.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the light guide plate 1771 is moved in the left-right direction relative to the light guide plate 1751, but the moving direction of the other light guide plate with respect to one light guide plate is not necessarily the left and right direction. Instead, it may be a predetermined direction other than the horizontal direction such as the vertical direction. Further, the relative movement direction of the other light guide plate with respect to the one light guide plate does not necessarily have to be a linear direction, and may be curved.

(15) Modification of the pachinko machine 100 according to the 16th embodiment In the 16th embodiment described above, in the configuration in which the number of holdings for the special symbol is represented by the number of holding icons 1812 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, the special symbol is displayed. Although the display mode of the hold icon 1812 is changed according to the occurrence interval of the starting winning prize, the number of holding times for special symbols, such as the holding lamp 720 provided on the lower side of the reel device 710, depends on the number of lit lamps. In the configuration shown, the display mode of each lamp (for example, any one of the emission color, the blinking interval, or the brightness, or a combination of a plurality of) corresponding to each number of holdings is determined according to the occurrence interval of the start winning of the special symbol. The configuration may be different.

In the 16th embodiment, in the configuration in which the number of holdings for the special symbol is represented by the number of holding icons 1812 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, the display mode of the holding icon 1812 according to the occurrence interval of the start winning of the special symbol. However, instead of this, or in addition to this, it may be configured to change the display mode of the hold icon when displaying the number of holdings for the normal symbol, during the probability variation game state, etc. The display mode of the hold icon may be different when displaying the number of times of holding for the starting winning to the right starting winning device 432 in which the starting winning occurs.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the display mode of the hold icon 1812 is changed according to the occurrence interval of the special winning symbol, but instead of or in addition to this, the special symbol starting symbol. The contents of the variable display of the special symbol may be controlled to be different according to the occurrence interval of. For example, if the interval of occurrence of the starting prize of the special symbol is short, the fluctuation time of the special symbol for the starting prize is set to be short, and the interval of occurrence of the starting prize of the special symbol is shorter than that when the interval of occurrence of the starting prize is short. If it is long, it may be controlled so that the variation time of the special symbol for the starting prize is likely to be set long, and conversely, if the occurrence interval of the starting prize of the special symbol is long, the special symbol for the starting prize is long. The variation time is set to be short, and when the generation interval of the special winning symbol is short compared to the case where the occurrence interval of the starting winning symbol is long, the variation time of the special symbol for the starting winning symbol is easily set to be long. You may control. Further, the control according to the length of the start winning interval of this special symbol may be executed by the control of the variable time according to the number of holdings, and the special symbol started when the number of holdings is a predetermined number. The variable display may be controlled so that the variable time may be set longer than the variable display of the special symbol which is started when the number is smaller than the predetermined number.

In the sixteenth embodiment, before the occurrence of the starting winning prize of the special symbol scheduled next, the hold schedule icon 1811 whose display mode is changed according to the elapsed time from the last winning start winning is displayed as a decorative symbol. Although it is configured to be displayed on the device 479, the number of times of holding the special symbol, such as the holding lamp 720 provided on the lower side of the reel device 710, is displayed on the display mode of the lamp (for example, emission color or blinking interval). Similar to the icon 1811, it may be configured to change according to the elapsed time from the last-generated start prize before the occurrence of the next scheduled special prize start prize.

In the sixteenth embodiment, both the hold schedule icon 1811 and the hold icon 1812 are configured to represent the elapsed time from the last generated winning prize based on the size and numerical value of the circle, but the size of the circle ( The elapsed time may be represented by any one of (size of shape) or numerical value. In addition, by changing the position or orientation of the hold scheduled icon 1811 or the hold icon 1812 from the reference position or orientation according to the elapsed time from the last generated start winning, the position or orientation of the icon ends. It may be configured to represent the elapsed time from the start winning that has occurred.

In the sixteenth embodiment, both the hold schedule icon 1811 and the hold icon 1812 are configured to represent the elapsed time since the last winning start prize depending on the size of the circle, but at least one of them is a bar graph shape or the like. It may be configured such that the elapsed time from the last winning prize that has occurred last is represented by another form.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the hold schedule icon 1811 and the hold icon 1812 are configured such that their sizes fall between a predetermined minimum size and a predetermined maximum size, but the predetermined maximum size is set. Without the provision, the size may be increased as the elapsed time from the last generated winning a prize becomes longer.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the hold schedule icon 1811 and the hold icon 1812 are both configured to display a numerical value indicating the elapsed time from the last generated winning prize, but in addition to the numerical value indicating the elapsed time. Alternatively, instead of the numerical value indicating the elapsed time, a numerical value indicating the number of shots of the game balls shot during the elapsed time may be displayed.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the hold schedule icon 1811 is configured to change according to the elapsed time from the last-generated start winning, but it may be changed according to the elapsed time during a predetermined game period. Well, for example, in a situation where the game ball is not fired from the launching device 330, the change may be temporarily stopped, or the game state changes according to the elapsed time only when the game state is the normal game state, In some gaming states such as a special gaming state, a time saving gaming state, and a probability variation gaming state, it may be temporarily stopped. According to such a configuration, the display mode of the hold-scheduled icon 1811 shows an abnormal value caused by a stop hit by the player during the special game state to stop the firing of the game ball or a game state in which the position where the game ball flows down is changed. It is possible to suppress that the display state of the hold icon 1812, which is the final display, is reflected.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the game ball is launched from the launch device 330 as the “predetermined game period” that is the update condition of the display content of the platform state icon display area 1820 (that is, the number of platform state icons 1821). Although the period during which the pachinko machine 100 is activated is illustrated, the "predetermined game period" may be during the pachinko machine 100 is being activated by power supply (while the pachinko machine 100 is powered on).

Also, in a pachinko machine having a configuration in which the game balls can be separately divided into left and right regions with respect to the central structure (that is, a game can be played by a left-handed game method and a right-handed game method), a game by the left-handed game method, or , If the start winning of the special symbol does not occur in any of the games by the right-handed playing technique (or the starting winning of the special symbol does not substantially occur), of the game by the left-handed playing technique or the right-handed playing technique Of these, only in the case of a game in which a start winning of a special symbol can be generated, the period during which the game balls are being shot from the launch device 330 may be set as the “predetermined game period”. In such a case, at least one of a predetermined area in which a game ball fired by a left-handed game method has a high probability of passing, or a predetermined area in which a game ball fired by a right-handed game method has a high probability of passing. By providing a sensor in the area of, it is possible to determine whether the game is a left-handed game method or a right-handed game method.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the state of the pachinko machine 100 is configured to be reflected in the number of platform state icons 1821. However, in addition to the number of platform state icons 1821, the game time during which a game is played in the pachinko machine 100 ( For example, it may be configured to display a time) which is the total of the periods during which the game balls are being shot from the launching device 330.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the start interval of the special winning symbol during the predetermined game period is a predetermined period that is set in advance as a period sufficient to suspect the possibility of an abnormality relating to the occurrence of the special symbol starting prize. When it exceeds one period, the number of platform state icons 1821 decreases, and a new second period is provided before a predetermined second period is set as a period in which there is a low possibility of an abnormality relating to the occurrence of a special symbol starting prize. When the number of platform status icons 1821 is increased when the number of events for which the winning a prize occurs is continuously generated a predetermined number of times, the number of platform status icons 1821 is increased in the former case and the platform status icons 1821 are increased in the latter case. The number may be reduced.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the start interval of the special winning symbol during the predetermined game period is a predetermined period that is set in advance as a period sufficient to suspect the possibility of an abnormality relating to the occurrence of the special symbol starting prize. When one period is exceeded, one stand state icon 1821 of the stand state icons 1821 being displayed in the stand state icon display area 1820 is deleted, but the display state of the one stand state icon 1821 is changed. , It may be changed according to the lapse of time since the last start winning occurs, and the stand state icon 1821 may be deleted at a timing when the occurrence interval of the starting winning of the special symbol exceeds the first period. When the platform state icon 1821 is deleted, it may be deleted by an animation such as the icon exploding.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the start interval of the special winning symbol during the predetermined game period is a predetermined period that is set in advance as a period sufficient to suspect the possibility of an abnormality relating to the occurrence of the special symbol starting prize. When one period is exceeded, one stand state icon 1821 of the stand state icons 1821 displayed in the stand state icon display area 1820 is deleted, but the occurrence interval of the start winning of the special symbol is concerned. It is also possible to have a configuration in which when the event exceeding the first period continues for a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), the single platform state icon 1821 is deleted.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the start interval of the special winning symbol during the predetermined game period is a predetermined period that is set in advance as a period sufficient to suspect the possibility of an abnormality relating to the occurrence of the special symbol starting prize. When one period is exceeded, one stand state icon 1821 among the stand state icons 1821 displayed in the stand state icon display area 1820 is deleted, but it is deleted as the occurrence interval becomes longer. The configuration may be such that the platform status icon 1821 increases.

In the sixteenth embodiment, during a predetermined game period, a new start prize is given before a predetermined second period provided in advance as a period in which there is a low possibility of an abnormality relating to the occurrence of a special symbol start prize. In the case where the occurrence event occurs a predetermined number of times in succession, one platform status icon 1821 is added to the platform status icon display area 1820. However, in such a case, the number of platform status icons 1821 to be added is 2 or more. May be

In addition, before the predetermined third period which is shorter than the predetermined second period has elapsed, the event in which the starting winning of the next special symbol occurs for a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) continuously occurs, Before the predetermined second period elapses, the number of base state icons 1821 is larger than that in the case where the start winning of the next special symbol occurs a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) consecutively. The configuration may be added to the 1820.

In the sixteenth embodiment, if the number of events in which a new start winning occurs occurs for a predetermined number of times consecutively before a predetermined second period elapses during a predetermined game period, one unit state icon 1821 Although it is configured to be added to the platform state icon display area 1820, a predetermined number of events have a special symbol starting prize winning interval that is a specific value (for example, 3.0 seconds) before the second period. When it occurs consecutively (for example, three times), in addition to the addition of the platform status icon 1821 or in place of the platform status icon 1821, the manager of the amusement park, etc. The set value of the exit rate (machine ratio, payout rate) of the game balls set for the setting may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 or another display device.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the start interval of the special winning symbol during the predetermined game period is a period in which there is a high possibility of an abnormality relating to the occurrence of the special symbol starting winning symbol, and the condition regarding the low period is satisfied. Although the number of the platform status icons 1821 is changed, the size of the platform status icons 1821 may be changed in place of or in addition to this, and the condition relating to the period with a high possibility of abnormality. When one stand state icon 1821 is expanded, the stand state icon 1821 may be reduced when a condition relating to a period with a low possibility of abnormality is established. Instead of the stand state icon 1821, Alternatively, in addition to the platform status icon 1821, a number that is updated when a condition related to a period with a high possibility of abnormality and a condition related to a period with a low possibility of abnormality is satisfied is displayed to indicate the possibility of abnormality. The number of times the condition relating to the period with a high probability and the number of times the condition relating to the period with a low probability of abnormality are satisfied may be counted separately, and a number of 10 may be displayed in advance to indicate the condition regarding the period with a high possibility of abnormality. The number of 1 may be subtracted when the above condition is satisfied, and the number of 1 may be added when the condition relating to the period with a low possibility of abnormality is satisfied and displayed.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the start winning interval of the special symbol during the predetermined game period is set as a long start winning period as a period in which there is a high possibility of an abnormality relating to the occurrence of the starting winning of the special symbol, As an example, the case where the starting winnings occur continuously in a short time as a low period has been exemplified, but instead of this, or in addition to this, starting as a period with a high possibility of an abnormality relating to the occurrence of the starting winnings of the special symbol Set a short period in which the winnings occur continuously in a short time, and display the platform status icon that sets a period for which the starting winnings are longer than a certain period as a period in which there is a low possibility of an abnormality relating to the occurrence of the starting winnings of special symbols You may do it.

(16) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Seventeenth Embodiment In the seventeenth embodiment described above, in the probability variation gaming state, as a performance corresponding to winning the big jackpots 1 and 2 and shifting to another gaming state, Although the battle effect has been illustrated, the transition of the game state may be indicated by another effect. For example, a configuration for displaying a competition such as a car race is configured, and a plurality of cars run in parallel as an effect corresponding to the battle standby. , A configuration may be adopted in which a specific character selected by a player wins or loses in a race, and an effect indicating a transition to another gaming state is performed, or an effect aiming at reaching a set target. It is also possible to use, for example, a configuration for displaying a high jump effect, perform training as an effect corresponding to battle standby, perform high jump as an effect corresponding to battle effect, and exceed or exceed the bar of the set height. It may be configured to perform an effect indicating a transition to another gaming state depending on whether or not there is.

In the seventeenth embodiment, in the probability variation game state, as an effect corresponding to winning the big hits 1 and 2 and shifting to another game state, an example is an effect in which the character performs an action. A transition of the game state may be shown, for example, as a production corresponding to a battle standby, a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols including “present” and “end” keeps changing, and a production corresponding to a battle victory. As a result, the design of "this" corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot 1 is stopped in the center part of the display screen, and the production of the "end" is stopped in the center part of the display screen as an effect corresponding to the battle defeat. Good.

In the 17th embodiment described above, in the time saving game state in which the upper limit number of times is limited to 100 times, the configuration in which the effect display of the battle defeat is executed in the 80th unit game corresponding to the number close to the end has been described. Up to 99 times of unit games when the jackpot is not won, the effect of battle waiting is displayed, and the effect display of battle defeat may be displayed at the last 100 times, or at other 50 times. Of course, as a battle effect, for example, in a plurality of unit games such as 50 times, 70 times, and 90 times, a battle defeat effect in which a story progresses may be displayed.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, a configuration in which a unit game is executed in which a variation display of a variation time set to a certain short time is performed unless the big hit 1 is won except for special effect times has been described. A unit game may be executed in which a variable display is performed in which the variable time of more than one type is selected and set, and the variable display of the variable time of a constant long time is always performed even in the special performance time. It is not limited to the configuration in which the unit game described above is executed, and may be a configuration in which variable display of other variable time can be performed.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the configuration in which the unit game in which the variable display of the variable time set to the fixed short time is displayed is executed unless the big hit 1 is won except the specific game times has been described. A unit game may be executed in which a variable display is performed in which the variable time of more than one type is selected and set, and the variable display of the variable time of a constant long time is always performed even in the special performance time. It is not limited to the configuration in which the unit game described above is executed, and may be a configuration in which variable display of other variable time can be performed.

In the 17th embodiment described above, the configuration for displaying the invincible period with the remaining time as the invincible time effect has been described, but the invincible period does not necessarily have to be displayed with the remaining time, and is displayed with the number of remaining unit games. Alternatively, in each process of S2008, S2011, S2014, and S2015 of the display effect setting process S2000, the number of times of variable display that does not reach the special effect time may be set as the number of times of change, not the time as the invincible time. ..

(17) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Eighteenth Embodiment In the eighteenth embodiment described above, a switch (a rear setting switch 905, initialization) provided on the pachinko machine 100 by a person who has changed the settings such as a game hall manager. The switch 907) is operated to change the setting of the rate of exit (that is, the setting of the game mode). Instead, an external device (for example, a management device called a “hall computer”) or a mobile terminal device (portable terminal device) that can communicate with the pachinko machine 100 changes the game mode to the next game mode. It may be configured to input a signal corresponding to an instruction or information indicating a game mode to be set to the pachinko machine 100 by communication.

In the eighteenth embodiment, in the determination process S1601, it is configured to determine whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied for the nail state level calculated in the process of S1503, but instead of this, In the determination processing S1601, it may be configured to determine whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied with respect to the value calculated in the processing of S1502, that is, (the value of the general winning number counter/the value of the number of fired balls counter). Good. Further, in the determination processing S1601, it may be configured to determine whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied with respect to the value of the general winning number counter counted in a predetermined period (for example, one hour).

Alternatively, when the number of times the variable display of the first special symbol and/or the second special symbol is changed, the number of times the normal symbol is displayed, the number of times of a special game state, etc. are adopted as the divisor for the value (dividend) of the general prize number counter. Further, it may be configured to determine whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied in the determination process S1601 with respect to the value obtained by adding the value of the general prize number counter to the divisor.

In addition, the number of game balls emitted from the launch device 330 is counted, and as the number of game balls thus counted, or from the number of game balls concerned, as the number of game balls that have been launched from the launch device 330 but cannot reach the game area in advance. When the value obtained by subtracting the determined value is adopted as the divisor for the value (dividend) of the general prize number counter, the setting suggestion information in the determination processing S1601 for the value obtained by adding the value of the general prize number counter with the divisor. It may be configured to determine whether or not the output condition of is satisfied.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the determination process S1601 is configured to determine that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied when the nail state level is “2” or more, but the nail state level is “1”. In some cases, it may be configured to determine that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied when the value indicating that the nail 411 is likely to be in an appropriate state is high.

In the eighteenth embodiment, in the determination processing S1602, it is determined whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information regarding the entry of the game ball into the general winning award devices 2439A and 2439B is determined. , 2439B as well as the medium starting prize winning device 2431 and the like, it may be configured to determine whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied with respect to the entry of the game ball into the winning device including the starting winning device.

In the eighteenth embodiment, when the game ball enters a predetermined one general winning device (for example, the general winning device 2439B) among the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B, the setting suggestion information is set. Although the configuration for determining that the output condition is satisfied is illustrated, the setting suggestion information is output when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls has entered a predetermined one general winning device. The configuration may be such that it is determined that the condition is satisfied.

In the eighteenth embodiment, when the game ball enters a predetermined one general winning device (for example, the general winning device 2439B) of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B, the setting suggestion information is set. Although the configuration for determining that the output condition is satisfied is illustrated, the configuration for determining that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied regardless of whether the game ball enters the general winning device 2439A or the general winning device 2439B may be adopted. .. That is, the configuration may be such that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is determined in the determination process S1601 when the game ball enters any of a plurality of (two or more) winning devices determined in advance. In addition, when the game ball enters both of a plurality of (two or more) winning devices determined in advance, it may be determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied in the determination process S1601.

In addition, when the game balls enter the predetermined plurality of winning devices in a predetermined order (for example, the general winning device 2439B and the general winning device 2439A), the setting suggestion information in the determination process S1601. The output condition may be determined to be satisfied. That is, when a plurality of predetermined prize winning devices are provided, not only the game balls entering these prize winning devices but also the order of the entrance may be included as a requirement for the output condition of the setting suggestion information. Good. As a result, the player can obtain the setting suggestion information as a privilege that the game balls have entered the plurality of predetermined winning devices in a predetermined order. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game in which the game balls enter the plurality of predetermined winning devices in the predetermined order.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the output condition of the setting suggestion information can be satisfied by the operation capable of selecting whether to execute or not according to the intention of the player in the special game state has been described. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied by another operation. For example, in the normal game state where it is advantageous for the player to play by the left-handed playing technique, the output condition of the setting suggestion information is easily established when the right-handed playing technique different from the left-handed playing technique is performed. In this case, for example, a game ball shot by a right-handed game technique such as the combination operation device 435 can pass with a high probability (preferably about 50% or more, preferably about 70% or more). It is preferable that the area is such that the player can easily establish the output condition of the setting suggestion information, and the area where the other function is added and which is not used in the normal game state is It is preferable that the passing condition is set as the output condition of the setting suggestion information because the number of parts can be suppressed and the region can be easily set to allow the game ball to pass through with a high probability. In addition, when a ball overflow signal indicating that the game balls are excessively stored in the storage unit 241 is received from the ball overflow switch 249 in the normal game state, it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied, and the game ball lending operation is performed. The setting suggestion information is obtained by the player who has performed the operation to operate the ball removing operation member 232 (see FIG. 1) and to positively operate the ball overflow switch 249 so that the game balls are excessively stored in the storage portion 241. May be added to the game property.

In the eighteenth embodiment, if it is determined in the setting suggestion information-related process S2021 that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied in any one of the determination processes S1601, S1602, S1603, and S1605, the setting is performed. Although the output of the suggestion information is executed, a part of the output conditions of the set suggestion information is individually set in a plurality of determination processes, and the output condition of the set suggestion information is satisfied when all the conditions are satisfied. Alternatively, the setting suggestion information may be output. For example, the configuration may be such that the output of the setting suggestion information is executed when it is determined that the output condition of each setting suggestion information is satisfied in all of the determination processes S1601, S1602, S1603, S1605.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the variable display time (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol performed in the unit game relating to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special) is the currently set game mode. However, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during a predetermined operable period set within the period in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, The presentation time of a predetermined suggestive presentation that appears may be selectable according to the currently set game mode. For example, as in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, the operable period during the variable display of the decorative pattern (for example, the first to the third that can occur in the variable display including the super reach whose variable display time is 90 seconds). In the gaming machine in which the operable period) can be generated, the effect time of the predetermined suggestive effect that appears when the pressing operation device 261 is pushed in during the operable period corresponds to the currently set game mode. The configuration may be selectable. In the eighteenth embodiment, when the lottery for selecting whether or not to change the variable display time according to the game mode is won, the currently set game mode (that is, the main control board 920 at that time). The configuration is such that the variation pattern of the variable display time assigned to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM) is selected, but the lottery is performed to determine whether or not the variable display time is changed according to the game mode. When winning, the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 is output to the sub control board 940, and the variable display time assigned to the game mode currently set in the sub control board 940. The variation pattern may be selected. In addition, the sub-control board 940 may be configured to perform a lottery for randomly selecting whether or not to change the variable display time according to the game mode.

In the eighteenth embodiment, by providing the counting invalid period after the continuous throwing of game balls into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B is detected, the gaming balls that have entered the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B during the counting invalid period. Is not counted as the number of general prizes. In this case, the game balls used to detect continuous insertion are counted as general prize numbers by the general prize number counter, but when continuous insertion is detected, the game used for such detection from the general prize number counter. The configuration may be such that the value is subtracted from the number of spheres.

In the eighteenth embodiment, some examples of the period that can be the “counting period” that is the determination criterion of S1401 have been described, but a big winning device such as big winning devices 2433 and 2434 is located at the lower right of the central structure 420. In the case of being arranged on the side, instead of the above example, or in addition to the above example, the start of the normal gaming state is set as the counting start condition, and the period until the normal gaming state is ended is the “ It may be "counting period".

Of the general winning apparatuses 2439A and 2439B, the general winning apparatus 2439A, which is arranged on the left side of the middle starting winning apparatus 2431, can enter (win) the game ball only by the left-handed playing method, while A game ball can enter (win) the general winning device 2439B arranged on the right side of the starting winning device 2431 by either the left-handed game technique or the right-handed game technique. Here, in the gaming machine in which the big winning devices such as the big winning devices 2433 and 2434 are arranged on the lower right side with respect to the central structure 420, in the special game state, the player plays the game by the right hitting game technique. Will be done. Therefore, when the game ball enters the general winning device 439B during the special game state, the general winning number counted by the general winning number counter, and the nail state calculated based on the general winning number thus counted There is a possibility that the level does not properly reflect the state of the nails 411 provided at the entrances of the winning openings of the general winning apparatuses 2439A and 2439B or in the vicinity thereof.

On the other hand, when the normal game state is started, the counting start condition is set, and the period until the normal game state is finished is set as the "counting period", so that the general winning device 2439B is entered during the special game state. It is possible to preferably exclude the game ball from the counting target. Therefore, the general prize number counted by the general prize number counter and the nail state level calculated based on the general prize number thus counted are provided at the entrance of the prize holes of the general prize devices 2439A and 2439B or in the vicinity thereof. It is possible to accurately acquire the state of the provided nail 411 as a value that appropriately reflects the state.

The start of the normal gaming state can be determined based on the output state of the signal from the external terminal board 580, for example. Specifically, for example, when the signal indicating that it is in the special game state is not output from the external terminal board 580, it can be determined that the normal game state is started.

Alternatively, in a gaming machine in which a big winning device such as big winning devices 2433 and 2434 is arranged on the lower right side with respect to the central structure 420, a left-handed gaming method can be performed during the special gaming state. The sex is low. Therefore, based on the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 252, it is determined whether or not the left-handed playing technique is being performed, and the case where the left-handed playing technique is being performed may be the normal gaming state.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the period in which the front block 102 is in the open state is illustrated as an example of the “count invalid period”, but the period in which the front block 102 is in the closed state may be set as the “count invalid period”. Further, when the front block 102 is in the closed state and the continuous throwing of game balls into the general winning apparatuses 2439A and 2439B is detected, the subsequent predetermined period may be set as the “counting invalid period”. When the front block 102 is in the closed state and the continuous throwing of game balls into the general winning apparatuses 2439A and 2439B is detected, the subsequent predetermined period is set as the “counting invalid period”, for example, the game area. A game ball is accumulated in a part of the game ball, and the game ball is prevented from flowing down in a part of the game area due to the ball jam condition, so that the game ball is continuously transferred to the general winning apparatuses 2439A and 2439B. It is possible to prevent the general winning number counter from being updated for the entry of at least a part of these game balls when a situation occurs in which the game ball enters. As a result, in the case where the player continues to shoot the game balls in a ball-clogging state and illegally continuously enters the game balls into the general-prize-winning devices 2439A and 2439B, the general prize-number counter is updated as follows. It is possible to correspond to the number of entered game balls excluding a part of the game balls. Therefore, it is possible to more appropriately count whether or not the performance of the pachinko machine 100 is as designed. In addition, even if an illegal act of illegally using a magnet to continuously enter the game balls into the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B is performed, the general prize number counter is updated for at least a part of the game balls entering. The performance of the pachinko machine 100 can be evaluated more appropriately.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the section indicating that the nail 411 may be out of the proper state is subdivided into two sections, while the section indicating that the state of the nail 411 is appropriate is subdivided. Although the case in which the nail 411 is divided into one section without being converted is illustrated, the section indicating that the state of the nail 411 is appropriate may be subdivided into two or more sections.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the nail state level indicating that the state of the nail 411 is appropriate is set to the minimum value "1", and the higher the possibility that the nail 411 is out of the appropriate state, the higher the nail state. Although the level is increased, the nail state level indicating that the state of the nail 411 is appropriate is set to the maximum value, and the higher the possibility that the nail 411 is out of the appropriate state, the smaller the nail state level is. It may be configured.

In the eighteenth embodiment, a prize ball is awarded by entering the winning device to be counted, but it is not related to the big hit lottery, and a movable piece that can change the entering probability is also provided. Although it is limited to the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B which are not provided, a prize winning device such as a starting prize winning device 2431 and 2432 in which a big hit lottery is performed and a movable piece capable of changing the probability of entry are provided at the entrance portion. The right starting prize winning device 2432 or the like may be counted and the nail state level may be calculated for each winning device.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the configuration has been described in which a plurality of general winning switches 2449A and 2449B for detecting the game balls that have entered the plurality of general winning apparatuses 2439A and 2439B are separately provided, but a plurality of general winning apparatuses 2439A and You may make it the structure where the passage of the game ball which entered into 2439B merges on the downstream side, and count the number of general prizes by a common prize switch. Further, the winning switch used for counting the number of general winnings may be a switch used for paying out prize balls, or may be provided separately from the switch used for paying out prize balls.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the general prize number is collectively counted for the plurality of general prize switches 2449A and 2449B for detecting the game balls that have entered the plurality of general prize devices 2439A and 2439B, respectively. A general prize number counter may be separately provided corresponding to the plurality of general prize switches 449A and 449B, and the general prize number and the nail state level may be separately displayed for the plurality of general prize devices 2439A and 2439B. .. In this case, the prize switch for counting the number of prizes by the prize number counter allows the game ball to enter only by the particular game technique (for example, left-handed game technique) when the particular game technique is performed. A prize device (or a prize hole, for example, a general prize device 2439A) and a prize device (or prize hole, for example, a general prize device 2439B) that allows a game ball to enter by a different game technique (for example, a right-handed game technique) It is preferable to provide separately for, and by this, a value that appropriately reflects the arrangement state of the members that affect the flow of the game ball such as the nail 411 provided near the entrance of the winning opening of each winning device or in the vicinity thereof. As a result, it is possible to accurately obtain the number of general prizes and the nail state level.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the configuration in which the number of general prizes is counted and the nail state level is displayed in one counting period has been described, but the number of general prizes is separately counted in a plurality of counting periods. May be For example, a general prize number counter is separately provided corresponding to a plurality of game states (for example, a normal game state and a special game state), and a general prize number and a nail state level are separately provided corresponding to each game state. May be displayed in.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the number of general prizes and the number of shot balls are counted by the pachinko machine 100 (more specifically, the main control board 920). However, the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B are counted during the counting period. The management device may be configured to acquire the number of game balls that have entered into and the number of shot balls during the counting period, and the management device may calculate the nail state level.

(18) Modification of the Pachinko machine 100 according to the nineteenth embodiment In the nineteenth embodiment, in the case where the gaming mode having the highest initial hit probability (that is, third-stage probability) of each type is set, , When the number of holding times of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) reaches the upper limit, the setting corresponding to the currently set game mode (that is, the game mode of the third stage probability in each type) Although it is configured to be able to output the suggestion information, when the number of holdings of the special symbol reaches the upper limit, it is not limited to the case where the game mode of the highest initial winning probability in each type is set, but is currently set. The configuration may be such that setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode can be output.

For example, in the configuration in which the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is output as the emission color of the stop display in the variable display by the lottery result display unit 2730, the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) When the number of times of holding of has reached the upper limit, the light emission color of the stop display in the variable display by the lottery result display unit 2730 may be a light emission color according to the currently set game mode.

Alternatively, instead of, or in addition to, the case where the game mode having the highest initial hit probability in each type is set, the game mode having the lowest initial hit probability in each type (that is, the first round probability) If is set, it may be configured to be able to output the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode when the number of holdings of the special symbol reaches the upper limit. Thereby, the player infers that the game mode currently set in the pachinko machine 100 in which he/she is playing is the game mode having the lowest initial hit probability in each type, based on the output setting suggestion information. It becomes possible to do.

Here, a start opening relating to the establishment of the start condition, and a winning opening (eg, a so-called "V winning opening") to which a predetermined privilege (for example, transition to a probability gaming state) is given when the player enters in a special gaming state. Since the probability of the game ball entering the “winning hole” is dependent on the physical condition of the pachinko machine 100, such as the individual differences and mounting angles of the pachinko machine 100, the initial winning probability is set to the lowest gaming mode. Even if the pachinko machine 100 is used, the pachinko machine 100 may be an advantageous game machine for the player depending on the physical state of the pachinko machine 100. Therefore, when the currently set game mode is a game mode in which the first hit probability is the lowest in each type, the physical state of the pachinko machine 100 is indicated by indicating the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode to the player. In consideration of the above, the setting suggestion information can be used by the player as one of the information for selecting the pachinko machine 100 to be played by the player, so that a new fun for the player to select the pachinko machine 100 is provided. Can be provided.

In the nineteenth embodiment, when the game mode of the highest initial hit probability in each type (that is, the third tier probability) is set, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) When the number of holding times reaches the upper limit, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode (that is, the game mode of the third stage probability in each type) is output with a predetermined probability. The "predetermined probability" is the probability (that is, 100%) that the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is always output when the number of holdings of the special symbol reaches the upper limit. It may be a probability that the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is output or not output when the number of times of holding the special symbol reaches the upper limit, such as 10% described above. ..

In the nineteenth embodiment, when the number of times of holding the special symbol reaches the upper limit, if the holding full tank production lottery is selected not to be displayed, the currently set game is selected. In the case where the setting suggestion information corresponding to the aspect is not output (that is, the fourth display portion 2730D does not emit gold color), but it is selected that the held full tank effect is not displayed by the held full tank effect lottery. However, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode may be output, or the output of the setting suggestion information may be selected with a predetermined probability.

In the nineteenth embodiment, when the number of times of holding the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) reaches the upper limit, the lottery result is displayed by using the lottery result display unit 2730. In this case, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is output, but the output timing of the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is the lottery result display portion 2730. After displaying the lottery result by the holding full tank production lottery by, for example, during the special period in which the holding full tank production is executed (the period during which the holding full tank production can appear), it corresponds to the currently set game mode. The configuration suggestion information may be output. For example, during the special period, numbers or symbols indicating setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 or a dedicated display device.

In the nineteenth embodiment, depending on whether the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is output or not, the fourth display is performed after the variation display by the lottery result display unit 2730. Although the light emission color of the stop display stopped by the unit 2730D is made different, the case where the setting suggestion information is output and the case where the setting suggestion information is not output are not limited to being represented by the color difference, and the display is not limited. The configuration may be represented by different modes. For example, when the setting suggestion information is not output, the fourth display unit 2730D is made to emit red light in the stop display after the variable display by the lottery result display unit 2730, and when the setting suggestion information is output, the lottery is performed. In the variable display by the result display unit 2730, the display units 2730A to 2730D may be stopped by emitting or blinking red or a color other than red.

In the nineteenth embodiment, as the output destination of the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode, the lottery result display portion 2730 for displaying the lottery result by the holding full production lottery is used. The setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode may be output independently of the display of the lottery result by the holding full production effect lottery. That is, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is output to a region different from the display region on the lottery result display unit 2730 of the decorative symbol display device 479, a dedicated display device, or the like. Good.

In the nineteenth embodiment, when the number of times of holding the special symbol reaches the upper limit, a case of performing the holding full production effect lottery and outputting the setting suggestion information is illustrated, but the number of times of holding the special symbol is not necessarily the upper limit. It is not necessary to output the setting suggestion information when the number reaches, and when the number of holdings of special symbols increases from 3 times to 4 times, or when holding occurs during fluctuation stop and fluctuation display is started after that. The setting suggestion information may be displayed by selecting whether or not to output the setting suggestion information in response to the establishment of the condition for the other number of times of holding, such as when it is only once for a moment. May be started. Further, a condition for a plurality of holding times (for example, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of increasing the number of holding times within a fixed time (within 10 seconds) and a condition that the number of holding times reaches an upper limit) is set, and either condition is satisfied. It may be possible to select whether or not to output the setting suggestion information or to select whether to start the special period, or to output the setting suggestion information when all of the plurality of conditions are satisfied. Whether or not to do it may be selected, or whether or not to start the special period may be drawn by lottery.

(19) Modification of pachinko machine 100 according to twentieth embodiment In the twentieth embodiment described above, as a predetermined condition for extending the period, an extended waiting period (that is, a special period for holding full tank production is started). From the above, the case where the player wins in the production extension lottery during the period ending at an end time earlier than the end time of the special period is illustrated, but a condition other than the above case may be adopted as the predetermined condition for the period extension. . For example, if the number of holding special symbols is increased by 1 during the extension waiting period, it is assumed that the predetermined condition for the period extension is satisfied, and the production extension is not performed (that is, with a probability of 100%) without performing the production extension lottery. The function may be activated.

Alternatively, during the extended waiting period, when the game ball wins a winning device other than the winning device related to the starting winning of the special symbol, such as the general winning devices 439A and 439B, or each time the winning is performed, an extension lottery is performed and When the predetermined situation occurs due to the game ball shot by the player, such as when the player wins in the production extension lottery, the production extension function may be activated assuming that the predetermined condition for the period extension is satisfied. .. Further, the predetermined condition related to the extension of the period may be a condition that can be satisfied regardless of the game ball shot by the player. For example, the execution of a part of the effects whose execution is determined in the variable display, which has already been suspended, may be satisfied as the extension condition, or the extension condition may be satisfied by combining a plurality of conditions.

In the twentieth embodiment, as the extended standby period, the period during which the special period relating to the reserved full tank production is started and ended at an end time earlier than the end time of the special period is illustrated, but the special symbol is held. The extended standby period may be a period provided after the number of times reaches the upper limit, and a period that reaches an end time earlier than the end time of the special period for the reserved full tank production. For example, after the number of times the special symbol is held reaches the upper limit, a period that ends at an end time earlier than the end time of the special period relating to the holding full production, or a predetermined time after the number of times the special symbol is held reaches the upper limit. The extended standby period may be a period that is started and ends at an end time earlier than the end time of the special period for the reserved full tank production.

In the twentieth embodiment, in any of the production extension lottery performed within the extension waiting period, the case where the winning probability by the lottery concerned is constant (for example, 50%) is illustrated, but the special symbol within the extension waiting period. The winning probability of the production extension lottery may change as the number of times of holding increases. For example, the winning probability of the production extension lottery may be increased stepwise as the number of times of holding the special symbol is increased in the extension waiting period, and the winning probability of the production extension lottery may be appropriately increased or decreased. May be.

In the twentieth embodiment, the extended standby period is defined by the time (for example, 3 minutes), but the fixed display (stop display) is performed in the variable display of the special symbol or the variable display of the special symbol. The extended waiting period may be defined by factors other than time, such as the number of times is displayed.

In the twentieth embodiment, when the predetermined condition for the period extension is satisfied, the special period for the reserved full tank effect is extended by the predetermined time (for example, 1 minute). The extension of may be configured to be extended by an element other than time, such as the number of times variable display of special symbols is executed or the number of fixed display (stop display) displayed in variable display of special symbols.

In the twentieth embodiment, the case where the special period related to the reserved full tank effect is extended for a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) when the predetermined condition related to the period extension is satisfied is described. The extension amount of the special period may change as the number of times of holding the special symbol increases within the period. For example, as the number of times the special symbol is held in the extended waiting period increases, the extension amount of the special period (such as the number of times the variable display of the special symbol is executed) may be increased stepwise. The extension amount may be appropriately increased or decreased.

In the twentieth embodiment, the case where the lottery for the extension of the period is performed in the starting prize generated in a part of the special period has been exemplified. However, the lottery for the extension of the period is provided for the starting prize until the end of the special period. May be performed.

In the twentieth embodiment, when the reserved full tank production lottery is won, the length of the special period is set in advance, and the length of the special period is extended when a predetermined condition regarding the period extension is satisfied. Thus, the length of the special period is made different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the length of the special period may be changed by another method. For example, the end condition may be changed according to the number of game balls that have entered during the execution of the variable display of the number of the hold upper limit subject to the hold full production, and as many game balls have entered, the later The probability that the special period continues in the variable display may be set to a high probability. That is, as the continuation probability, the initial value may be set to 30%, and the continuation probability may be determined by adding a value obtained by multiplying the number of occurrences of starting winnings by 5%. Even in this case, the more the start prize is generated after the start of the special period, the longer the special period can be extended.

(20) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Twenty-First Embodiment In the twenty-first embodiment, the first effect image 3001, the second effect image 3002, and the third effect image 3003 are displayed after the special game state. Although it is configured to be an effect image that suggests the degree of expectation or probability of shifting to, the degree of expectation or probability that these effect images 3001 to 3003 suggest is not necessarily the degree of expectation or probability of shifting to the special game state. It need not be, and may be the expectation or probability that an advantageous event will occur. The "expected degree or probability of occurrence of an advantageous event" is, in addition to the expected degree or probability of transitioning to the special game state after the variable display of the symbols described above, for example, a game unit executed during the special game state. For example, the degree of expectation or the probability that the number of rounds will be increased (promoted) is exemplified.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the first effect image 3001 displayed in the intersection area 3021 and the second effect image 3002 or the third effect image 3003 displayed in the non-intersection area 3022 are different target images. However, at least one of the second effect image 3002 and the third effect image 3003 (for example, the second effect image 3002) may be the same target image as the first effect image 3001. For example, both the first effect image 3001 and the second effect image 3002 may be images showing a plurality of bubbles.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the first effect image 3001, the second effect image 3002, and the third effect image 3003 are all images showing the design of a predetermined character, but the effect images 3001 to 3003 are However, none of them are necessarily images showing a picture of a predetermined character, and each of the effect images 3001 to 3003 includes one element or a combination of a plurality of elements among elements such as symbols, shapes, and characters. It may be a composed image.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the first effect image 3001 is displayed in a state where nothing is displayed at the position overlapping the front side of the reel device 710 (that is, the second effect image 3002 or the third effect image 3003 is not displayed). However, the first effect image 3001 may be displayed in a state where the second effect image 3002 or the third effect image 3003 is displayed at a position overlapping the front side of the reel device 710. In such a configuration, even when the portion of the first effect image 3001 that emits a predetermined amount of light is moved toward or away from the second effect image 3002 or the third effect image 3003, Similar to the twenty-first embodiment, the movement can make it easier for the player to direct attention to the first effect image 3001 that is relatively difficult to be noticed.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the second effect image 3002 is generated by the light emitted from the lower light emitting means provided on the lower end surface side of the light guide plate 715C (light traveling in the light guide plate 715C from the bottom to the top). Although the third effect image 3003 is displayed (light emission display), a light emitting means is also provided on the upper end surface side of the light guide plate 715C, and light emitted from the light emitting means (from inside the light guide plate 715C to the lower side). The second effect image 3002 and the third effect image 3003 may be displayed by the light that travels toward the light) and the light emitted from the lower light emitting means.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the second effect image 3002 is displayed within the range of the non-intersection area constituent parts AQ3 to AQ8, and the third effect image 3003 within the range of the non-intersection area constituent parts AQ1, AQ2, AQ9, AQ10. Is displayed. That is, each of the non-intersecting area constituent parts AQ1 to AQ10 displays the second effect image 3002 or the third effect image 3003, but in one intersecting area constituent part, at least a part of the second effect image 3002 is displayed. , And at least a part of the third effect image 3003 may be displayed.

For example, in the non-intersection area configuration part AQ2, a partial image on the right end side of the second effect image 3002 and a partial image in the third effect image 3003 on the right side are displayed, and the second image is displayed in the non-intersection area configuration part AQ9. The left end side partial image in the effect image 3002 and the partial image in the left third effect image 3003 may be displayed. Even in such a case, the third effect image 3003 (more specifically, the third effect image 3003) is displayed by displaying the image portions respectively drawn on the non-intersecting area constituent parts AQ1 and AQ10 in the left and right third effect images 3003. Can be displayed so as not to overlap the front side of the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the light guide plate 715C having the curved portion 715C1 is arranged so as to be stacked on the front side of the reel device 710, but a flat light guide plate configured similarly to the light guide plate 715C is used. The decorative pattern display device 479 and the image display device such as the decoration pattern display device 479 may be arranged in front of each other. Even in a configuration in which a flat light guide plate is arranged in a front side of the image display device, the first effect image 3001 is displayed in a region of the light guide plate below the image display device, and the image display device in the light guide plate is displayed. By displaying the second effect image 3002 and the third effect image 3003 in the area overlapping the front side of, the effect image suggesting the degree of expectation or probability of shifting to the special game state after the display can be suitably displayed. ..

In the twenty-first embodiment, one light guide plate 715C is provided with one intersection region 3021. However, two or more intersection regions 3021 may be provided. When two or more intersecting regions 3021 are provided in the light guide plate 715C, the images displayed in the intersecting regions 3021 by light traveling in the light guide plate 715C in the left-right direction are all the same target (symbol or shape) for all intersecting regions 3021. Or a character) may be displayed, or an image displayed in at least one intersection area 3021 is different from an image displayed in another intersection area 3021 (a symbol, a shape, a character, etc.). ) May be displayed.

In the twenty-first embodiment, a configuration in which an effect image (specifically, a second effect image 3002 and a third effect image 3003) is displayed on one side (specifically, an upper side) with respect to the intersecting area 3021. However, the effect image may be displayed on both sides of the intersection area 3021.

(21) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Twenty-Second Embodiment In the above-described twenty-second embodiment, a first light guide plate 1715A having a recess formed in the lower end surface 1715A1 and a lower side of the first light guide plate 1715A are provided. Although the light guide plate 1715 composed of the second light guide plate 1715B positioned is illustrated, the concave portion is formed also on the upper end surface of the first light guide plate 1715A, and the second light guide plate 1715A is also provided above the first light guide plate 1715A. A light guide plate similar to the light guide plate 1715B may be arranged. Thereby, not only the light is separated into three directions at the lower end surface 1715A1 of the first light guide plate 1715A, but also the light is separated into three directions at the upper end surface of the first light guide plate 1715A. be able to.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the first light guide plate 1715A is a light guide plate including a curved portion, but the first light guide plate 1715A may be a flat light guide plate. ..

(22) Modification of pachinko machine 100 according to 23rd embodiment In the 23rd embodiment described above, in the short time gaming state transitioned after the end of the special gaming state, output as the BGM of the last time variable display in the short time gaming state. The output level of the sound (musical sound) to be output is the output level before the start of the variable display of the final time, or the output level of the last time of the final time, during a certain period before the end including the time TB2 when the variable display of the last time ends. It is configured to be smaller than the output level in the variable display executed before the variable display. Instead of this, the present invention may be applied to the probability variation game state that has shifted after the end of the special game state.

In other words, the probability variation game state, in a configuration that returns to the normal game state when the jackpot is not won even after executing the unit game a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the last variation in the probability variation game state. The output level of the sound (tone) output as the BGM of the display is the output level before the start of the final variable display in a certain period before the end including the time when the final variable display ends, or The output level may be lower than the output level in the variable display executed before the final variable display.

In the twenty-third embodiment, in the variable display of each time executed in the time saving game state, as the BGM, a series of musical sounds output over the variable display of each time is output, but in the time saving game state. A configuration may be employed in which independent musical tones are output in each executed variable display. The independent musical tones may be musical tones including a predetermined melody (same melody) or may be musical tones not including the predetermined melody. In such a configuration, the output level of the sound (musical sound) output as the BGM of the fluctuation display of the final time in the time saving game state is the final time in a certain period before the end including the time when the fluctuation display of the final time is ended. The output level may be set to be smaller than the output level before the start of the variable display in step 1 or the output level in the change display executed before the final display of the change.

In the twenty-third embodiment, when the unit game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the short time gaming state in which the game state returns to the normal gaming state when the jackpot is not won is illustrated. The output level of the sound (musical sound) output as the BGM of the first variation display, which is also the last time, in the configuration that returns to the normal game state when the big hit is not won in the one unit game executed after the transition to The output level at the start of the variable display may be set to be lower during a certain period before the end of the variable display including the time when the variable display ends. Thereby, for example, a plurality of types of loss variation display, which are the end conditions for the time saving game state, are provided, and even if one of them is once, the final variation display in the time saving game state is being executed. That is, it can be notified by a change in the output level of the sound (tone) that is the BGM of the variable display.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the output level of the sound (musical sound) output as the BGM of the final fluctuation display in the time-saving game state is a fixed period before the end including the time TB2 when the final fluctuation display ends. In the above, the output level before the start of the final variable display or the output level in the variable display executed before the final variable display is set to be smaller than the output level of the final display. The output level before the start or the output level in the variation display executed before the final variation display may be set higher.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the output level of the sound (musical sound) output as the BGM of the final fluctuation display in the time-saving game state is a fixed period before the end including the time TB2 when the final fluctuation display ends. In the above configuration, the output level before the start of the final variable display or the output level in the variable display executed before the final variable display is set to be smaller than the output level of the musical sound. The period does not necessarily have to be a fixed period before the end including the time TB2 at which the variable display of the final time ends, and an appropriate time during the period of the variable display of the final time (for example, when the variable display starts). May be a predetermined period including.

(23) Light guide plate In each of the light guide plates (for example, light guide plate 715B, light guide plates 715C and 1751, light guide plate 1771, light guide plates 1715A and 1715B forming the light guide plate 1715) illustrated in the above-described embodiment, in the light guide plate, Images (for example, a fish pattern 743, a fish pattern 1761, a fish pattern 1781, a first effect image 3001, a second effect image 3002, a third effect image 3003) displayed by light emission are displayed on one side of each light guide plate (for example, the back surface). Although the side surface is drawn with fine irregularities, a reflection portion corresponding to the target image may be formed in the thickness of the light guide plate by laser processing.

(24) The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which once a big hit occurs, the expected big hit value is increased until a big hit state occurs a plurality of times (for example, twice or three times) including the big hit. Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine which is in a special game state on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after a big hit symbol is displayed. Alternatively, it may be implemented in an enclosed pachinko machine in which balls circulate. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arrangement ball type pachinko machines and sparrow balls. Further, the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine, and may be applied to a slot machine, or may be applied to a gaming machine such as a parrot in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

<Invention extracted from each of the above embodiments>
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing problems and effects as necessary. It should be noted that, in the following, for ease of understanding, the configuration corresponding to each of the above-described embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in brackets or the like. The meanings and examples of the terms described in each feature may be applied as the meanings and examples of the terms described in other features described in the same wording.

<Characteristic 10>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying a plurality of columns of symbols in a variable manner,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Variation mode selection means (main control board 920) for selecting a variation mode (variation pattern of decorative symbols) of variable display of symbols in the plurality of columns when the starting condition is satisfied,
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit displays the symbols in the plurality of columns in a variation mode selected by the variation mode selection means, and then stops at a combination of symbols according to the lottery result. A variation executing means (sub-control board 940) for displaying,
When the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols of the plurality of columns are stopped and displayed by the combination of the symbols showing the first result by the variation executing means, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is obtained. With game control means (main control board 920) to be generated,
Of the lottery results by the lottery means, a lottery result in which the variation display means holds the variation display of the symbols in the plurality of columns is a predetermined storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit (RAM of the main control board 920). Reserved storage means (main control board 920) capable of storing in
Special effect display means (sub control board 940) for displaying a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit reaches the upper limit. And
When the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit includes a lottery result indicating the first result, the change mode selection unit stores the lottery result in the storage unit by the hold storage unit. As compared with the case where the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery results, the variation mode in which the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the storage unit is likely to increase is selected. A gaming machine characterized by.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, in the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine, if the game ball enters the starting port while the variable display of the symbol is being displayed on the display device, the hit information used for the big hit lottery (corresponding to the lottery result) There is information configured such that information, which corresponds to a lottery result, is reserved and stored with a predetermined number (for example, four) set in advance as an upper limit (see, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine having the conventional structure capable of storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, when the hit information reaches the upper limit value, even if a game ball enters the starting opening, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is simply wasted.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in Feature 10, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation mode of the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of columns is selected by the variation mode selection means, and the variation execution means displays the symbols in the plurality of columns in the selected variation mode. After being displayed in a variable manner, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols according to the result of the lottery. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the symbols in a plurality of columns are stopped and displayed by a combination of symbols showing the first result. To do.

Among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results in which the execution of the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of columns by the variation executing means is suspended can be stored in the predetermined storage unit by the suspending storage means up to the predetermined number. It When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit has reached the upper limit, the special effect display unit displays a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player can enter the game aiming at the establishment of the starting condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play a game with respect to the gaming machine capable of storing the lottery result up to a predetermined number (upper limit) in the storage unit by the holding storage means.

When the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit includes a lottery result indicating the first result, the variation mode selection unit determines whether the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit is included in the lottery results. As compared with the case where the lottery result indicating the first result is not included, it is configured to select the variation mode in which the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the storage unit is likely to increase.

Therefore, when the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit includes the lottery result indicating the first result, the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit is likely to increase. Therefore, the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit easily reaches the upper limit, and the possibility of displaying the special effect is increased. As a result, the player is less likely to be dissatisfied with not being able to see the special effect, and thus it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

When the lottery result stored in the storage unit includes a lottery result indicating the first result, and when the lottery result stored in the storage unit does not include the lottery result indicating the first result. Since the special effect is easily displayed in comparison, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state by displaying the special effect. Therefore, the progress of the game can be refreshed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The "special effect" in the gaming machine described in Feature 10 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but may be used in place of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. , A sound effect, a light effect, an operation effect of an operable structure, or a combination of some or all of them. Therefore, the "special effect display means" in Feature 10 may be "special effect execution means" that executes various special effects including display.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in Feature 10, the information stored (held) in the storage unit by the suspending storage means is replaced with the description of “lottery result” and also as “information used for lottery by lottery means”. Alternatively, “information corresponding to the lottery result” may be used.

<Characteristic 11>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying a plurality of columns of symbols in a variable manner,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Variation mode selection means (main control board 920) for selecting a variation mode (variation pattern of decorative symbols) of variable display of symbols in the plurality of columns when the starting condition is satisfied,
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit displays the symbols in the plurality of columns in a variation mode selected by the variation mode selection means, and then stops at a combination of symbols according to the lottery result. A variation executing means (sub-control board 940) for displaying,
When the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols of the plurality of columns are stopped and displayed by the combination of the symbols showing the first result by the variation executing means, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is obtained. With game control means (main control board 920) to be generated,
Among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery result in which the execution of the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of columns by the variation execution means is withheld can be stored in a predetermined storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Sub-control board 940),
Special effect display means (sub control board 940) for displaying a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit reaches the upper limit. And
The variation mode selectable by the variation mode selection means is such that after the symbols are stopped and displayed in a state where a part of the symbol combination showing the first result is formed, the remaining symbols for which the variation display is continued are drawn by the lottery. Including at least a reach display mode in which stop display is performed with a symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the means, and a non-reach display mode not including the reach display mode,
When the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit includes a lottery result indicating the first result, the change mode selection unit stores the lottery result in the storage unit by the hold storage unit. A gaming machine which selects a non-reach display mode with a high probability compared to a case where the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery results.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, in the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine, if the game ball enters the starting port while the variable display of the symbol is being displayed on the display device, the hit information used for the big hit lottery (corresponding to the lottery result) There is information configured such that information, which corresponds to a lottery result, is reserved and stored with a predetermined number (for example, four) set in advance as an upper limit (see, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine having the conventional structure capable of storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, when the hit information reaches the upper limit value, even if a game ball enters the starting opening, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is simply wasted.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in Feature 11, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation mode of the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of columns is selected by the variation mode selection means, and the variation execution means displays the symbols in the plurality of columns in the selected variation mode. After being displayed in a variable manner, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols according to the result of the lottery. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the symbols in a plurality of columns are stopped and displayed by a combination of symbols showing the first result. To do.

Among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results in which the execution of the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of columns by the variation executing means is suspended can be stored in the predetermined storage unit by the suspending storage means up to the predetermined number. It When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit has reached the upper limit, the special effect display unit displays a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player can enter the game aiming at the establishment of the starting condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play a game with respect to the gaming machine capable of storing the lottery result up to a predetermined number (upper limit) in the storage unit by the holding storage means.

When the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit includes a lottery result indicating the first result, the variation mode selection unit determines whether the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit is included in the lottery results. The non-reach display mode is selected with a higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included. Therefore, when the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit includes the lottery result indicating the first result, the variable display in the non-reach display mode is likely to be displayed.

When the variation display of the reach display mode is displayed, the player may stop firing the game ball during the variation display in consideration of the fact that a special game state will occur thereafter. On the other hand, in the gaming machine described in Feature 11, when the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means includes the lottery result indicating the first result, the variable display in the non-reach display mode is displayed. Since it is easy to be displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the firing of the game ball during the variable display.

As a result, the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the storage unit is likely to increase, so that the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit easily reaches the upper limit, and the possibility of displaying the special effect is increased. Increase. As a result, the player is less likely to be dissatisfied with not being able to see the special effect, and thus it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

When the lottery result stored in the storage unit includes a lottery result indicating the first result, and when the lottery result stored in the storage unit does not include the lottery result indicating the first result. In comparison, since the variable display in the non-reach display mode is easily displayed, it is possible to more easily display the special effect when the lottery result stored in the storage unit includes the lottery result indicating the first result. it can. Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state by displaying the special effect, so that the progress of the game can be refreshed and the interest in the game can be improved.

The "special effect" in the gaming machine described in Feature 11 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but may be used instead of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. , A sound effect, a light effect, an operation effect of an operable structure, or a combination of some or all of them. Therefore, the "special effect display means" in Feature 11 may be "special effect execution means" that executes various special effects including display.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the feature 11, the information stored (held) in the storage unit by the holding storage means may be “information used for lottery by the lottery means” instead of the description of “lottery result”. Alternatively, “information corresponding to the lottery result” may be used.

<Characteristic 12>
A gaming machine according to feature 11,
A variation time determining means for determining a variation time relating to variable display of symbols in a plurality of columns when the starting condition is satisfied,
The variation mode selecting means is for selecting the variation mode corresponding to the variation time determined by the variation time determining means,
The variation mode selection means, when the variation time determined by the variation time determination means corresponds to the reach display mode, the first result in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means. When the lottery result indicating is included, the non-reach display mode of the variation time shorter than the variation time determined by the variation time determination means, among the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the pending storage means. Is selected with a higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in
The variation execution means corresponds to the reach display mode determined by the variation time determination means, and displays the first result in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means. When the non-reach display mode of the variation time shorter than the variation time determined by the variation time determination means is selected by the variation mode selection means when the lottery result shown is included, the selected non-reach A gaming machine characterized by performing a variation display of the variation time determined by the variation time determining means by performing the display mode one or more times.

With the gaming machine according to Feature 12, when the variation time determined by the variation time determination means corresponds to the reach display mode, the first result is displayed in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means. When the lottery result shown is included, the variation mode selection means, the non-reach display mode of the variation time shorter than the variation time determined by the variation time determination means, of the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the pending storage means. It is selected with a higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included therein.

When the variation time determined by the variation time determination means corresponds to the reach display mode and the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means includes the lottery result indicating the first result, the variation mode When the non-reach display mode of the fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determination unit is selected by the selection unit, the fluctuation execution unit performs the selected non-reach display mode one or more times. Then, the fluctuation display of the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determining means is performed.

Therefore, in order to perform the variable display of the non-reach display mode of the variable time corresponding to the reach display mode, the data related to the non-reach display mode of the variable time shorter than the reach display mode can be diverted, and the reach display mode is supported. It is not necessary to exclusively prepare the data relating to the non-reach display mode of the variable time. Thereby, the consumption amount of the storage capacity of the gaming machine can be appropriately suppressed.

<Characteristic 20>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying a design,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, after the variable display of the symbols is performed on the display unit, a variation execution means (sub-control board 940) that stops and displays a symbol according to the lottery result as a stopped symbol,
When the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation executing means, a game control means for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state (Main control board 920),
An operation unit (press operation device 261) that can be operated by the player,
It is composed of at least a part of the period from the satisfaction of the starting condition where the first result is obtained by the lottery means to the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result by the variation executing means. Each operation mode is performed for each of the plurality of operation modes of the operation unit that can be operated at one or a plurality of operation times set within the production executable period (the execution period of the variable display of the decorative pattern). Special effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting each special effect to be executed in the case of being broken, from among a plurality of kinds of effects,
Of the plurality of operation modes of the operation unit that can be operated at the one or more operation times set in the effect executable period, the first operation mode is A first special effect display unit (sub-control board 940) that displays the special effect selected by the special effect selection unit on the display unit when the operation unit is operated,
Each special effect selected by the special effect selecting means for each of the plurality of operation modes of the operation unit that can be operated at the one or more operation times set in the effect executable period. Storage control means (sub-control board 940) for storing the effect information to be stored in a predetermined storage section (RAM of the sub-control board 940) so that the respective special effects can be restored.
When the operation unit is operated in the second operation mode of the plurality of operation modes within a predetermined restoration possible period set after the end of the effect executable period, the storage control unit stores the operation unit in the storage unit. Second special effect display means (sub-control board 940) that displays the special effect selected by the special effect selection means for the second operation mode on the display unit based on the stored effect information; A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, in the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

In recent years, a game machine in which a player operates a staging button at a predetermined timing to change a display content on a display device or output a corresponding sound from a speaker, etc. It is known (see, for example, JP-A-2016-193329).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the conventional gaming machine configured to execute the predetermined effect based on the operation of the effect button by the player at the predetermined timing. For example, if the player operates the effect button at a predetermined timing, the player can experience the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button, but if the player does not operate the effect button at that timing, The player cannot experience the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in Feature 20, it is possible to provide a gaming machine configured to suitably execute a predetermined effect based on the fact that the player operates the operation unit at a predetermined timing. it can. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation execution means performs variable display of the symbols on the display section, and then the symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of symbols showing the first result, the game control means causes a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state.

It is possible to perform at least part of the period from when the starting condition for which the first result is obtained by the lottery means is satisfied until the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation execution means. The operation time is set within the period. With respect to each of the plurality of operation modes of the operation unit that can be operated at the operation time, each special effect executed when each operation mode is performed is a plurality of types of effects by the special effect selection unit. To be selected from. The effect information indicating each special effect selected by the special effect selecting unit is stored in a predetermined storage unit by the storage control unit so that each special effect can be restored.

When the operation unit is operated in the first operation mode among the plurality of operation modes that can be operated at the one or more operation times set in the production executable period. With the first special effect display means, the special effect selected by the special effect selection means for the first operation mode is displayed on the display unit.

On the other hand, when the operation unit is operated in the second operation mode of the plurality of operation modes within the predetermined restoration available period set after the end of the effect executable period, the storage control unit stores the operation result. Based on the effect information stored in the section, the special effect selected by the special effect selecting unit for the second operation mode is displayed on the display unit.

Therefore, even if the operation unit is not operated in the second operation mode at a predetermined operation time within the production executable period, by operating the operation unit in the second operation mode within the restoration possible period. The special effect that the player could not see because he/she did not operate the operation section in the second operation mode at a predetermined operation time in the effect executable period (special operation corresponding to the second operation mode You can restore the production and see it. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will have a negative emotion in the game, such as regret not having seen some or all of the special effects in his/her will during the production executable period. The decline in interest is suppressed.

The "special effect" in the gaming machine described in the feature 20 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but may be used instead of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. , A sound effect, a light effect, an operation effect of an operable structure, or a combination of some or all of them. Therefore, the “first special effect display device” and the “second special effect display device” in the feature 20 respectively execute the “first special effect execution device” and the “second special effect execution device” that execute various special effects including display. It may be a "performance production means".

<Characteristic 21>
A gaming machine according to feature 20,
The production executable period includes an execution period of variable display of symbols executed by the change executing means,
A plurality of the operation times are set within the execution period of the variable display of the symbols,
The second special effect display means, during the restorable period, the second special effect display means, at a second operation time after the operation time when the operation unit is operated in the first operation mode, of the plurality of operation modes. When the operation section is operated in this operation mode, based on the effect information stored in the storage section by the storage control means, the special effect selection means selected for the second operation mode by the special effect selection means. A game machine characterized by displaying an effect on the display unit.

If the gaming machine described in the feature 21, in the configuration in which the operation unit can be operated in the first operation mode or the second operation mode at different operation times within the execution period of the variable display of the symbols, the variable display of the symbols The special effect corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed by operating the operation unit in the first operation mode at the previous operation time within the execution period, but the second operation mode is displayed at the subsequent operation time. Even when the special effect corresponding to the second operation mode is not displayed without operating the operation section, the player operates the operation section in the second operation mode within the restorable period, so that the player can , The special effect corresponding to the second operation mode can be restored and viewed.

If multiple operation times are provided within the execution period of variable display of symbols, if the special effect that can be displayed for each operation time is an effect that suggests the probability of occurrence of a special game state thereafter, then later If the displayed special effect is an effect that suggests that it is less likely to transit to the special game state than the previously displayed special effect, the player loses the expectation of transitioning to the special game state. There is a risk of disappointment in the game. In order to prevent such discouragement, the player may choose not to operate the operation part at a later operation time, but if the operation part is not operated at a later operation time, then transition to a special game state. In some cases, it may be tempting to know later what happened if a special effect that was not displayed by the user was displayed.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 21, the player can restore and see the special effect corresponding to the second operation mode during the restorable period, which gives the player a sense of satisfaction. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic 22>
A gaming machine according to feature 20 or feature 21,
The second special effect display means performs the operation in the second operation mode at the operation time when the operation section is operated in the first operation mode among the plurality of operation modes during the restoration possible period. When the unit is operated, the special effect selected by the special effect selecting unit for the second operation mode is displayed on the display unit based on the effect information stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. A gaming machine characterized by displaying.

With the gaming machine according to feature 22, in the configuration in which the operation unit can be operated in the first operation mode or the second operation mode at the common operation time within the effect executable period, the first operation can be performed in the effect executable period. Even if the operation unit cannot be operated in the second operation mode by operating the operation unit in the operation mode No., the player corresponds to the second operation mode in the restorable period. You can see the special effects restored. As a result, the special game that the player could not see in the production executable period can be seen, so that the player can be satisfied and the interest in the game can be improved suitably.

<Characteristic 30>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying a design,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, after the variable display of the symbols is performed on the display unit, a variation execution means (sub-control board 940) that stops and displays a symbol according to the lottery result as a stopped symbol,
When the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation executing means, a game control means for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state (Main control board 920),
A first operation section (press operation device 261) that can be operated by the player;
A second operation unit (selection operation device 263) provided at a position different from the first operation unit and operable by the player;
It is composed of at least a part of a period from when the starting condition for which the first result is obtained by the lottery means is satisfied until the stop display of the stop symbol showing the first result is performed by the variation executing means. The special effect executed when the first operation section is operated at the operation time set within the effect executable period (the execution period of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is selected from a plurality of types of effects. Special effect selection means (sub-control board 940),
When the first operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the effect displayable period, the special effect selected by the special effect selection unit with respect to the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time. Is displayed at a predetermined position on the display unit, and when the second operation unit is operated at the operation time, the special effect selection unit selects the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time. A special effect control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the displayed special effect to be displayed at a position different from the predetermined position, and a gaming machine.

In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, in the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

In recent years, a game machine in which a player operates a staging button at a predetermined timing to change a display content on a display device or output a corresponding sound from a speaker, etc. It is known (see, for example, JP-A-2016-193329).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the conventional gaming machine configured to execute the predetermined effect based on the operation of the effect button by the player at the predetermined timing. For example, since the effect displayed on the display device by the player operating the operation button is always displayed in the same area, in that respect, there is no novelty and it is monotonous.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine having the characteristic 30, it is possible to provide a gaming machine configured to suitably execute a predetermined effect based on the fact that the player operates the operation unit at a predetermined timing. it can. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation execution means performs variable display of the symbols on the display section, and then the symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of symbols showing the first result, the game control means causes a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state.

It is possible to perform at least part of the period from when the starting condition for which the first result is obtained by the lottery means is satisfied until the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation execution means. The operation time is set within the period. Each special effect executed when the operation unit is operated at the operation time is selected from a plurality of types of effects by the special effect selection means.

When the first operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the production executable period, the special effect control unit selects the special operation selection unit for the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time. The special effect is displayed at a predetermined position on the display unit. On the other hand, when the second operation unit is operated at the operation time, the special effect control unit causes the special effect selected by the special effect selection unit with respect to the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time. It is displayed at a position different from the predetermined position.

Therefore, the display position of the special effect can be changed by operating the first operation unit or the second operation unit, so that the game in which the special effect is displayed according to the operation of the player has variety. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the user.

<Characteristic 31>
A gaming machine according to feature 30,
When the second operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the effect displayable period, the special effect control means selects the special effect with respect to the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time. A game machine characterized by transmitting effect information indicating a special effect selected by means to another game machine and displaying the special effect on a display unit of the other game machine.

With the gaming machine described in the feature 31, when the second operation section is operated at the operation time set within the effect displayable period, the special effect control means causes the first operation section to operate at the operation time. By transmitting the effect information indicating the special effect selected by the special effect selecting unit to the operation to the other gaming machine, the special effect is displayed on the display unit of the other gaming machine.

Therefore, the special effect can be displayed on the display unit of another gaming machine, so that the special effect can be viewed together with the other player, and an interest different from the case of playing the game alone can be obtained.

<Characteristic 32>
A gaming machine according to feature 30,
When the second operation section is operated at the operation time set within the effect displayable period, the special effect control means performs the special effect with respect to the operation of the first operation section at the operation time. The special effect selected by the selection means is displayed at a position different from the predetermined position on the display unit, and the first operation unit or the second operation unit is displayed at the predetermined position at the operation time. A game machine, which displays contents displayed on the display unit when not operated.

With the gaming machine according to feature 32, when the second operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the effect displayable period, the special effect control means causes the first operation unit to operate at the operation time. A position where the special effect selected by the special effect selecting unit for the operation is different from a predetermined position on the display unit (that is, a position where the special effect is displayed when the first operation unit is operated at the time of the operation). Displayed in. On the other hand, at a predetermined position on the display unit, the content displayed on the display unit when neither the first operation unit nor the second operation unit is operated at the operation time is displayed.

Therefore, the player simultaneously displays the special effect displayed by operating the second operation unit and the content displayed on the display unit when neither the first operation unit nor the second operation unit is operated. Since it can be seen, the interest in the game can be suitably improved.

<Characteristic 33>
A gaming machine according to feature 30 or feature 31,
A receiving unit (sub-control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100B) capable of receiving the effect information from another gaming machine,
The special effect control means, when the effect information transmitted from another game machine is received by the receiving means, displays the special effect indicated by the effect information on the display unit.

With the gaming machine described in Feature 33, when the effect information transmitted from another gaming machine is received, the special effect display means displays the special effect indicated by the effect information based on the received effect information. Displayed in the section. Therefore, the special effect based on the effect information received from the other gaming machine can be displayed on the display unit, so that the special effect can be viewed together with the other player playing on the other gaming machine, and the player can play the game alone. You can get a different interest from doing it.

<Characteristic 40>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying a design,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, after the variable display of the symbols is performed on the display unit, a variation execution means (sub-control board 940) that stops and displays a symbol according to the lottery result as a stopped symbol,
When the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation executing means, a game control means for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state (Main control board 920),
Among the lottery results, a hold storage means capable of storing a lottery result in which the execution of the variable display of the symbols by the change executing means is held in a predetermined storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. (Main control board 920),
Special effect display means (sub control board 940) for displaying a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit reaches the upper limit. And
When the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit includes a lottery result indicating the first result, the special effect display unit stores the lottery result in the storage unit by the holding storage unit. A gaming machine, which displays the special effect with a higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery results.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, in the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine, if the game ball enters the starting port while the variable display of the symbol is being displayed on the display device, the hit information used for the big hit lottery (corresponding to the lottery result) There is information configured such that information, which corresponds to a lottery result, is reserved and stored with a predetermined number (for example, four) set in advance as an upper limit (see, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine having the conventional structure capable of storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, when the hit information reaches the upper limit value, even if a game ball enters the starting opening, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is simply wasted.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the characteristic 40, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation execution means performs variable display of the symbols on the display section, and then the symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of symbols showing the first result, the game control means causes a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state.

Among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results for which the execution of the variable display of the symbols by the variation executing means is suspended can be stored in the predetermined storage unit by the suspension storage means up to the predetermined number. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit has reached the upper limit, the special effect display unit displays a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player can enter the game aiming at the establishment of the starting condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play a game with respect to the gaming machine capable of storing the lottery result up to a predetermined number (upper limit) in the storage unit by the holding storage means.

When the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit includes the lottery result indicating the first result, the special effect display unit displays the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit. The special effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included.

Therefore, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit, when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit, Since the special effect is easily displayed in comparison, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state by displaying the special effect. Therefore, the progress of the game can be refreshed, and the interest in the gaming machine capable of storing the lottery result up to the predetermined number (upper limit) in the storage unit by the holding storage means can be improved.

The "special effect" in the gaming machine described in the feature 40 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but may be used instead of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. , A sound effect, a light effect, an operation effect of an operable structure, or a combination of some or all of them. Therefore, the "special effect display means" in the feature 40 may be "special effect execution means" that executes various special effects including display.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the characteristic 40, the information stored (held) in the storage unit by the holding storage unit may be “information used for lottery by the lottery unit” instead of the description of “lottery result”. Alternatively, “information corresponding to the lottery result” may be used.

<Characteristic 50>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying a design,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, after the variable display of the symbols is performed on the display unit, a variation execution means (sub-control board 940) that stops and displays a symbol according to the lottery result as a stopped symbol,
When the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation executing means, a game control means for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state (Main control board 920),
Among the lottery results, a hold storage means capable of storing a lottery result in which the execution of the variable display of the symbols by the change executing means is held in a predetermined storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. (Main control board 920),
Special effect display means (sub control board 940) for displaying a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit reaches the upper limit. And
The special effect display means, after the number of lottery results stored in the storage section by the holding storage means reaches an upper limit in a predetermined first time period, then performs a predetermined second time within a predetermined time period including the first time period. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means reaches the upper limit again at the time, the special effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the special effect is displayed at the first time. A gaming machine characterized by that.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, in the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine, if the game ball enters the starting port while the variable display of the symbol is being displayed on the display device, the hit information used for the big hit lottery (corresponding to the lottery result) There is information configured such that information, which corresponds to a lottery result, is reserved and stored with a predetermined number (for example, four) set in advance as an upper limit (see, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine having the conventional structure capable of storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, when the hit information reaches the upper limit value, even if a game ball enters the starting opening, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is simply wasted.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine having the feature 50, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation execution means performs variable display of the symbols on the display section, and then the symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of symbols showing the first result, the game control means causes a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state.

Among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results in which the execution of the variable display of the symbols by the variation execution means is suspended can be stored in the predetermined storage unit by the suspension storage means with a predetermined number as the upper limit. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit has reached the upper limit, the special effect display unit displays a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player can enter the game aiming at the establishment of the starting condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play a game with respect to the gaming machine capable of storing the lottery result up to a predetermined number (upper limit) in the storage unit by the holding storage means.

The special effect display means, after the number of lottery results stored in the storage section by the hold storage means reaches the upper limit in a predetermined first time period, holds the special production time in a predetermined second time period within a predetermined time period including the first time period. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the storage unit reaches the upper limit again, the special effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the special effect is displayed in the first period.

Therefore, within the predetermined period, when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit reaches the upper limit again, a special effect is displayed compared to when the number of lottery results reaches the upper limit before that. Since it becomes easier, the player can face the game aiming at establishment of the start condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play a game with respect to the gaming machine capable of storing the lottery result up to a predetermined number (upper limit) in the storage unit by the holding storage means.

Note that the "special effect" in the gaming machine described in the feature 50 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but may be used instead of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. , A sound effect, a light effect, an operation effect of an operable structure, or a combination of some or all of them. Therefore, the "special effect display means" in the feature 50 may be "special effect execution means" that executes various special effects including display.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the feature 50, the information stored (held) in the storage unit by the suspension storage unit may be replaced with the description of the “lottery result” as “information used in the lottery by the lottery unit”. Alternatively, “information corresponding to the lottery result” may be used.

<Characteristic 51>
In the gaming machine described in feature 50,
The special effect display means stores the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit in the storage unit by the holding storage unit in the second period after the number of lottery results reaches the upper limit in a predetermined first period. When the number of stored lottery results reaches the upper limit again, when the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means includes the lottery result indicating the first result, the holding A gaming machine, which displays the special effect with a higher probability than when the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the storage means does not include the lottery result indicating the first result.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 51, the special effect display means stores the hold result in the second time after the number of the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means reaches the upper limit in the predetermined first time. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the means again reaches the upper limit, when the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit includes the lottery result indicating the first result, The special effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means does not include the lottery result indicating the first result.

Therefore, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit, when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit, Since the special effect is easily displayed in comparison, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state by displaying the special effect. Therefore, the progress of the game can be refreshed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic 60>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying a design,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, after the variable display of the symbols is performed on the display unit, a variation execution means (sub-control board 940) that stops and displays a symbol according to the lottery result as a stopped symbol,
When the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation executing means, a game control means for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state (Main control board 920),
A predetermined period set within a period from when the start condition for obtaining the first result by the lottery means is satisfied until the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation execution means. As a first special effect that can be displayed at the first time, a first special effect selecting unit (sub-control board) that selects one special effect from a plurality of types of special effects that suggest the probability of occurrence of the special game state thereafter. 940),
A first special effect means (sub control board 940) for displaying the first special effect selected by the first special effect selecting means on the display unit at the first time period;
An operation unit (press operation device 261) that can be operated by the player,
After the first special effect is executed by the first special effect means at the first time period, and before the predetermined second time period set after the first time period in the period comes, the operation unit Is operated, and if the occurrence probability of the special game state suggested by the first special effect is higher than a predetermined probability, the second special effect suggesting the occurrence probability of the special game state is given by the second. Second special effect control means for controlling such that the second special effect that is not displayed on the display unit at a time or that indicates a higher probability of occurrence of the special game state than the first special effect is displayed on the display unit (Sub-control board 940), and provided with a gaming machine.

In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, in the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

In recent years, various character designs and the like are displayed during variable display of the designs, and every time the character designs and the like are displayed, the expectation that a big hit according to the type of the displayed character design, etc. What is suggested to a person is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-153699).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the conventional gaming machine configured so that the effect that suggests the expectation to the big hit to the player is displayed during the variable display of the symbols. For example, during the variable display of the symbols, if the display of the character symbols or the like displayed later is lower in the expectation for the jackpot suggested by the display than the display of the character symbols or the like displayed earlier, the player is The expectation for the big hit is temporarily increased by the previous display, but is lost by the subsequent display, which may reduce the interest in the game.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 60, it is possible to provide a gaming machine configured to appropriately execute a predetermined effect based on the fact that the player operates the operation unit at a predetermined timing. it can. When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, after the variation display means displays the variation of the symbols on the display unit, the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of the symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of symbols showing the first result, the game control means causes a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state.

At a predetermined first time set within a period from when the starting condition in which the first result is obtained by the lottery means is satisfied until the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation executing means. The displayable first special effect is selected by the first special effect selection means from a plurality of types of special effects that indicate the probability of occurrence of the special game state thereafter. The selected first special effect is displayed on the display unit at the first time by the first special effect means.

After the first special effect is executed by the first special effect means at the first time, the period (the starting condition for which the first result is obtained by the lottery means is satisfied, and then the first result is changed by the change executing means). When the operation unit is operated before the predetermined second time set after the first time within the period until the stop display of the stop symbol shown is performed), it is suggested by the first special effect. When the probability of occurrence of the special game state is higher than the predetermined probability, the second special effect indicating the probability of occurrence of the special game state is not displayed on the display unit during the second period by the control of the second special effect control means. Or, a second special effect that indicates a higher probability of occurrence of a special game state than the first special effect is displayed on the display unit.

Therefore, after the first special effect, it is possible to suppress the display of the second special effect that indicates the occurrence probability of the special game state lower than that of the first special effect, so that the second special effect is displayed after the first special effect. In the configuration that is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his/her expectation for the occurrence of the special gaming state and deteriorating the interest in the game.

The "special effect" in the gaming machine described in the feature 60 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but may be used instead of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. , A sound effect, a light effect, an operation effect of an operable structure, or a combination of some or all of them. Therefore, the "first special effect display means" in the feature 60 may be "first special effect execution means" that executes various special effects including display, and the "second special effect control means" may be The control may be performed so as to execute various special effects including display.

<Characteristic 70>
A predetermined symbol row is a rotating body (middle reel 711M) arranged so that a plurality of symbols including at least two symbols (main symbols 712) to which two or more numerical information corresponding to the number of variable displays are attached , Each of a plurality of symbol columns configured by arranging a plurality of rotating bodies including the rotating body (left reel 711L, middle reel 711M, right reel 711R) by rotating each of the plurality of rotating bodies A display unit (reel device 710) capable of displaying,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit variably displays the plurality of symbol arrays, and then the variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) performs the stop display with the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed by the stop symbol corresponding to the first result by the variation executing means, a game more advantageous than the normal game state A game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a state,
When the start condition is satisfied while the variation display is being performed by the variation executing means, information corresponding to a lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main control board) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. A storage unit (main control board 920) for storing the information until the variation display corresponding to the information is performed by storing the information in the RAM (920 RAM).
Based on the performance target information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined variable display executed after at least two variable displays are executed, the predetermined effect is information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means. And an effect execution means (sub-control board 940) for executing
In the variation display executed before the predetermined variation display by the variation executing means, the predetermined effect is the symbol of the symbol row displayed on the predetermined spinning body among the plurality of symbol rows, The game machine characterized in that it is an effect in which the player visually stops with a pattern having numerical information corresponding to the number of times of variable display executed before the variable display of.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In the conventional typical pachinko machine, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening, the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the symbol display device and the jackpot lottery is performed, and the jackpot is awarded based on the result of the jackpot lottery. When it is determined to generate, a configuration is known in which a big hit is generated after the effect design is stopped and displayed with a big hit design (for example, "777").

In addition, there is a conventional pachinko machine that pre-reads the result of the big hit lottery and performs the pre-reading effect while the effect symbol is changing (for example, refer to JP-A-2009-291480). With pre-reading production, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening while the production design is changing, the number of reserved balls is added, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the random number value obtained at the winning timing, and the lottery Based on the result, it is an effect that gives advance notice of the game state that occurs when the variable display of the effect symbol that is performed by the digestion of the holding ball is completed. For example, when the result of the big hit lottery for the first holding ball is a big hit, it is announced that a big hit will occur when the next variable display of the current variable display ends.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the game machine having the conventional configuration that performs the prefetching effect. For example, in order to increase the player's interest in the prefetching effect, diversification of the prefetching effect is required.

Further, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, in the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine, if the game ball enters the starting port while the variable display of the symbol is being displayed on the display device, the hit information used for the big hit lottery (corresponding to the lottery result) There is information configured such that information, which corresponds to a lottery result, is reserved and stored with a predetermined number (for example, four) set in advance as an upper limit (see, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine having the conventional structure capable of holding and storing the lottery result up to the predetermined upper limit value. The said subject is a subject also common to the gaming machines described in the following features 80-B0.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 70, it is possible to provide the gaming machine in which the prefetching effect is diversified. Further, with the gaming machine described in the feature 70, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably utilize a configuration capable of holding and storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, the display unit has a three-dimensional revolving body arranged so as to circulate a plurality of symbols including at least two symbols with numerical information of two or more corresponding to the number of variable displays, as a predetermined symbol row, Each of a plurality of symbol columns configured by arranging a plurality of rotating bodies including the rotating body is configured to be variably displayable by rotating each of the plurality of rotating bodies.

When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation execution means causes the display section to variably display the plurality of symbol rows, and thereafter, the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stopped and displayed. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after a plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the first result, a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means. To do.

When the start condition is satisfied when the fluctuation display means is performing the fluctuation display, the holding means stores the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means in a predetermined storage section, thereby storing the information. With the predetermined number as the upper limit, it is possible to suspend the change display means until the change display corresponding to the information is executed.

Based on the performance target information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined variable display that is executed after at least two variable displays have been executed, the effect execution means, based on the information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means, As the predetermined effect, in the variable display executed before the predetermined variable display by the change executing means, the symbols in the symbol row displayed on the predetermined body of the plurality of symbol rows are displayed in the predetermined variable display. The effect of stopping the game so that the player can visually recognize the symbol with the numerical information corresponding to the number of times of variable display executed until the time is reached is executed.

Therefore, the player visually recognizes the numerical information attached to the symbols in the symbol row displayed on the predetermined spinning body in the variable display being executed, and then executes it until the predetermined variable display is executed. It is possible to grasp the number of times of variable display performed from the numerical information. Since the number of times is counted down every time the variable display is performed, the sense of expectation for the lottery result for the gradually changing predetermined display is amplified, and thereby the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, the countdown of the number of times of variable display executed until the predetermined variable display is executed is performed by the symbols in the symbol row displayed on the rotating body to be variable displayed, so that the player may miss the countdown. Can be suppressed.

Further, the symbol string to be variably displayed is not limited to the rotating body, but there is a game machine executed by image display by a liquid crystal display device or the like, however, when the variable display is executed by image display, the development cost becomes high, There are many players who tend to increase the cost of parts and also prefer variable display by a three-dimensional rotating body. At this time, in a gaming machine that performs variable display using a three-dimensional rotating body, the cost of the display device is added when trying to display the number of countdowns described above in addition to the variable display symbols.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 70, the three-dimensional rotating body is configured to include a symbol to which numerical information is attached, and a part of the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means by this symbol. Can be configured. Therefore, in a gaming machine that performs variable display using a three-dimensional rotating body, the display size of the symbol displayed on the rotating body is set large to make it easy for the player to see the symbol, and to suppress cost increase. In the meanwhile, it is possible to provide a gaming machine provided with an effect in which the countdown is displayed by the pattern until the predetermined variable display is executed.

It should be noted that in the gaming machine described in Feature 70, “...stop visibly for the player with the symbol with the number information” is not limited to complete stop of the symbol with the number information. The symbol may be stopped within a predetermined range and accompanied by an action such as swinging, and may be a temporary stop during the change, not the final stop of the symbol.

<Feature 71>
A gaming machine according to feature 70,
The predetermined effect is executed by the change executing means before the predetermined change display. In the change display, the symbols in the symbol row displayed on the predetermined turn body are different from the predetermined turn body. In the state where the body is fluctuating, it is an effect that the player visually stops with a pattern with numerical information corresponding to the number of fluctuation displays executed until the predetermined fluctuation display is executed. A gaming machine characterized by.

With the gaming machine described in the feature 71, the player can change the running display to the predetermined turning body in a state where the other turning body (the turning body different from the predetermined turning body) is changing. By visually observing the numerical information attached to the symbols in the displayed symbol string, the number of variable displays executed until a predetermined variable display is executed thereafter can be grasped from the numerical information. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the predetermined rotating body from the plurality of rotating bodies by distinguishing it from the other rotating bodies, and thus can prevent the player from overlooking the countdown performed in the predetermined rotating body.

<Feature 80>
A display unit (reel device 710, decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying a symbol,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is met, the display unit variably displays the symbols, and then the first variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) is stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. ,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the stop change display corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed by the first variation execution means, a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state A game control means (main control board 920) for generating a game state,
When the starting condition is satisfied when the variation display of the symbols is being performed by the first variation execution means, the predetermined number is set as an upper limit, and the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit By storing in the (RAM of the main control board 920), the information is held by the first fluctuation executing means until the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the information is held (main control board 920). When,
Special effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting execution of a predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability when the number of pieces of information corresponding to the lottery results held by the holding means reaches an upper limit,
The display unit or the display unit when the number of pieces of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding unit has reached the upper limit and execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting unit. Second variation execution means (sub-control board 940) that performs a predetermined second variation display on a second display unit (lottery result display device 730) different from the above, and then performs a stop display in a predetermined stop mode;
Special effect executing means (sub-control board 940) for executing the special effect when the second variable display is stopped and displayed in the predetermined stop mode by the second change executing means. And the gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, in the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine, if the game ball enters the starting port while the variable display of the symbol is being displayed on the display device, the hit information used for the big hit lottery (corresponding to the lottery result) There is information configured such that information, which corresponds to a lottery result, is reserved and stored with a predetermined number (for example, four) set in advance as an upper limit (see, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine having the conventional structure capable of storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, when the hit information reaches the upper limit value, even if a game ball enters the starting opening, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is simply wasted.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in Feature 80, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, after the symbols are variably displayed on the display unit by the first variation executing means, the symbols are stopped and displayed in the stopped symbols corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state, which is more advantageous than the normal game state, is generated by the game control means after being stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the first result.

When the start condition is satisfied while the variation display is being performed by the first variation execution means, the holding means stores the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means in a predetermined storage unit, thereby The information can be held up to a predetermined number until the fluctuation display means executes the fluctuation display corresponding to the information.

When the number of pieces of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means reaches the upper limit, the special effect selecting means selects execution of a predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability. When the execution of the special effect is selected, the second variation executing means performs a predetermined second variation display on the display unit or a second display unit different from the display unit, and then stops in a predetermined stop mode. The special effect is displayed by the special effect executing means.

Therefore, when the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting unit, the special effect is executed by the special effect executing unit, so that the player increases the number of information corresponding to the held lottery result. With the purpose, it is possible to face the game aiming at the establishment of the starting condition. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play a game machine that can hold and store the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value.

Further, since the player is informed as to whether or not the special effect is selected by the special effect selection means as a stop display after the second variation display, the number of pieces of information corresponding to the held lottery result reaches the upper limit. Therefore, in the period until the second variable display is finished (that is, during the second variable display execution period), the player's expectation for the execution of the special effect can be appropriately amplified.

The "special effect" in the gaming machine described in the feature 80 may be an effect displayed on the display unit, a sound effect, a light effect, or an operation of an operable structure, or It may be a combination of some or all of these effects.

Further, the second variation executing means in the gaming machine described in the feature 80 is a display section or a second different from the display section when the number of pieces of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means reaches the upper limit. After performing the predetermined second variable display on the display unit, when the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection unit, the stop display is performed in a predetermined stop mode, and the execution of the special effect is not selected. The stop display may be displayed in a stop mode different from the predetermined stop mode.

<Characteristic 81>
A gaming machine according to feature 80,
The second variation execution means performs the second variation display that varies within a predetermined range on the display unit or the second display unit, and then the special effect selection unit selects execution of the special effect. A gaming machine, wherein stop display is performed at different positions within the predetermined range depending on whether the special effect is executed or not.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 81, when the second variation display is performed by the second variation executing means, when the special effect selecting means selects the special effect executing, and when the special effect executing is selected. Since the position of the stop display after the second variation display is different from that in the case where the second display is not performed, the player can easily intuitively determine from the position of the stop display whether or not the execution of the special effect is selected. In particular, since the stop display is limited to a predetermined range, the player can easily grasp the position of the stop display.

<Characteristic 90>
A display unit (reel device 710, decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol strings,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit variably displays the plurality of symbol rows, and then a variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) that stops and displays the symbol combination according to the lottery result.
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed by the combination of symbols corresponding to the first result by the variation executing means, in a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a certain special game state,
When the start condition is satisfied when the fluctuation display means displays the fluctuation, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Storage means (main control board 920) for storing the information until the variation display corresponding to the information is performed by the variation execution means.
Special effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting execution of a predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability when the number of pieces of information corresponding to the lottery results held by the holding means reaches an upper limit,
Special effect executing means (sub-control board 940) for executing the special effect when execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means,
When the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection unit and the variable display is being executed by the fluctuation execution unit, a predetermined attention display is displayed as the content of the variable display. And a selection result display means (sub-control board 940) for recognizing that the execution of the special effect is selected at a time different from the time when the game is played. Machine.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, in the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine, if the game ball enters the starting port while the variable display of the symbol is being displayed on the display device, the hit information used for the big hit lottery (corresponding to the lottery result) There is information configured such that information, which corresponds to a lottery result, is reserved and stored with a predetermined number (for example, four) set in advance as an upper limit (see, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine having the conventional structure capable of storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, when the hit information reaches the upper limit value, even if a game ball enters the starting opening, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is simply wasted.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 90, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, after the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed on the display unit by the variation executing means, the symbols are stopped and displayed in the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after a plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the first result, a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means. To do.

When the start condition is satisfied when the fluctuation display means is performing the fluctuation display, the holding means stores the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means in a predetermined storage section, thereby storing the information. With the predetermined number as the upper limit, it is possible to suspend the change display means until the change display corresponding to the information is executed.

When the number of pieces of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means reaches the upper limit, the special effect selecting means selects execution of a predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability. When execution of the special effect is selected, the special effect is executed by the special effect executing means. Therefore, when the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting unit, the special effect is executed by the special effect executing unit, so that the player increases the number of information corresponding to the held lottery result. With the purpose, it is possible to face the game aiming at the establishment of the starting condition. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play a game machine that can hold and store the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value.

Further, when the special effect selecting means selects the execution of the special effect, and when the fluctuation executing means executes the variable display, it means that the execution of the special effect is selected. As a result, the variable display is displayed so that the player can recognize it at a time different from the time when the predetermined attention display is displayed.

Therefore, the display indicating that the special effect has been selected does not overlap with the display time of the notice display, so that the player is unlikely to miss the display indicating that the special effect has been selected. Further, when a predetermined attention display is displayed as the content of the variable display, the player can concentrate on the attention display, so that the expectation for the variable display being executed by the attention display is suitably improved. be able to.

The "predetermined attention display" in the gaming machine described in the feature 90 is a stop display in a state in which a part of the plurality of symbol columns constitutes a part of the symbol combination corresponding to the first result. It may be a display until so-called (so-called "reach display"), and display of characters (for example, a school of fish) on the display unit or suggestive effects by light emission of the light emitting unit (for ease of transition to a special game state) It may be a performance that suggests the degree or the degree of expectation.

Further, the "special effect" in the gaming machine described in the feature 90 may be an effect displayed on the display unit, a sound effect, a light effect, or an operation of an operable structure, or It may be a combination of some or all of these effects.

<Characteristic 91>
A gaming machine according to feature 90,
The selection result display means is a case where execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection means, and when the predetermined attention display is displayed in the change display executed by the change execution means. A gaming machine characterized by accelerating the end time of the notice display and displaying the fact that the execution of the special effect has been selected so that the player can recognize the end of the notice display.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 91, in the case where the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means and the predetermined attention display is displayed in the change display executed by the change executing means, The selection result display means advances the end time of the attention display, and the player can recognize that the execution of the special effect is selected after the attention display is finished. This allows the player to show the attention display and also show the display indicating that the execution of the special effect has been selected at an early stage.

<Characteristic 92>
A gaming machine according to feature 90 or feature 91,
The predetermined attention display is stopped and displayed in a state in which some of the plurality of symbol columns form a part of the symbol combination corresponding to the first result, and then the remaining symbol columns are displayed. It is a display until it is stopped and displayed with a symbol according to the lottery result by the lottery means,
The selection result display means is a case where execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection means, and when the predetermined attention display is displayed in the change display executed by the change execution means. After the end of the predetermined attention display, the player displays that the execution of the special effect has been selected so that the player can recognize it.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 92, in the case where the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means and the predetermined attention display is displayed in the change display executed by the change executing means, The selection result display means displays that the selection of execution of the special effect is recognizable to the player after the attention display is finished. Here, the attention display is stopped and displayed in a state where a part of the plurality of symbol columns constitutes a part of the symbol combination corresponding to the first result, and then the remaining symbol columns are drawn by lottery means. It is a display until it is stopped and displayed with a symbol according to the lottery result, and it is a display that expects the player to transition to the special game state, so by devoting the player to the attention display, execution by the attention display It is possible to preferably improve the expectation for the variable display inside.

<Feature A0>
A display unit (reel device 710, decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol strings,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit variably displays the plurality of symbol arrays, and then the variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) performs the stop display with the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed by the stop symbol corresponding to the first result by the variation executing means, a game more advantageous than the normal game state A game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a state,
When the start condition is satisfied when the fluctuation display means displays the fluctuation, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Storage means (main control board 920) for storing the information until the variation display corresponding to the information is performed by the variation execution means.
Based on the production target information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined variable display executed after at least one variable display is executed, which is information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means, a predetermined effect is produced. And an effect execution means (sub-control board 940) for executing
The predetermined effect is
In a predetermined display area (middle line L2) that will transition to the special game state when the stop symbol corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed, the plurality of symbol columns are different from the first result. Execute a first variable display that is a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result and is stop-displayed with a stop symbol that is a combination of predetermined symbols that does not transition to the special game state,
After executing the first variation display, one or more variation displays executed before the predetermined variation display by the variation execution means, or in the predetermined variation display, included in the predetermined symbol combination. Part of the symbols which are part of the symbols that are included and cannot include the stop symbol corresponding to the first result in the predetermined display area when the part of the symbols is included (the second sub symbol 713B) is the symbol. While maintaining the state of being displayed in a predetermined display area, another symbol row (left symbol row, right symbol row) different from the symbol row (middle symbol row) including the part of the symbols among the plurality of symbol rows ) Starts the second variation display that changes,
In synchronization with a predetermined attention display performed in the predetermined variation display, or at a timing a predetermined time before the end time of the predetermined variation display, a symbol that has been stopped from before the previous time in the plurality of symbol arrays A gaming machine characterized by an effect of starting a variation of a row (a middle symbol row).

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In the conventional typical pachinko machine, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening, the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the symbol display device and the jackpot lottery is performed, and the jackpot is awarded based on the result of the jackpot lottery. When it is determined to generate, a configuration is known in which a big hit is generated after the effect design is stopped and displayed with a big hit design (for example, "777").

In addition, there is a conventional pachinko machine that pre-reads the result of the big hit lottery and performs the pre-reading effect while the effect symbol is changing (for example, refer to JP-A-2009-291480). With pre-reading production, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening while the production design is changing, the number of reserved balls is added, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the random number value obtained at the winning timing, and the lottery Based on the result, it is an effect that gives advance notice of the game state that occurs when the variable display of the effect symbol that is performed by the digestion of the holding ball is completed. For example, when the result of the big hit lottery for the first holding ball is a big hit, it is announced that a big hit will occur when the next variable display of the current variable display ends.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the game machine having the conventional configuration that performs the prefetching effect. For example, in order to increase the player's interest in the prefetching effect, diversification of the prefetching effect is required.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine having the feature A0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the pre-reading effect is diversified. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, after the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed on the display unit by the variation executing means, the symbols are stopped and displayed in the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after a plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the first result, a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means. To do.

When the start condition is satisfied when the fluctuation display means is performing the fluctuation display, the holding means stores the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means in a predetermined storage section, thereby storing the information. With the predetermined number as the upper limit, it is possible to suspend the change display means until the change display corresponding to the information is executed.

Based on the production target information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined variable display executed after at least one variable display is executed, which is information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means, the predetermined effect is produced. It is executed by the execution means.

Specifically, in the predetermined effect, first, a plurality of symbol rows are displayed in a predetermined display area that will be transitioned to the special game state when the stop symbol corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed. The first variable display is performed in which stop display is performed with a stop symbol corresponding to a lottery result different from 1 result and a predetermined symbol combination that does not transition to the special game state.

After the first variable display is executed, one or more variable displays executed before the predetermined variable display by the fluctuation executing means, or in the predetermined variable display, the stop displayed in the first variable display is stopped. A part of the symbols included in the combination of the predetermined symbols which are symbols, and a part of the symbols which cannot stop display the stop symbol corresponding to the first result in the predetermined display area when the symbol is included in the part. While maintaining the state of being displayed in the predetermined display area, the second variable display is started in which other symbol columns different from the symbol column including the part of the symbols vary among the plurality of symbol columns.

Then, in synchronization with a predetermined attention display that is performed in a predetermined variable display, or at a timing a predetermined time before the end time of the predetermined variable display, the symbols that have been stopped from before the previous time in the plurality of symbol rows The variation of the column (that is, the symbol column including a part of the symbols displayed in the predetermined display area among the stopped symbols stopped and displayed in the first variable display) is started.

Therefore, one or more variable displays executed before the predetermined variable display, or in the predetermined variable display, as the second variable display, a part of the stop symbols stopped and displayed in the first variable display is displayed. While the state in which the symbol is displayed in the predetermined display area is maintained, the variation of the symbol sequence different from the symbol sequence including the part of the symbol is performed, so that the player starts the second variation display. As a result, the sense of expectation for the display (stop display) of the lottery result for the predetermined variable display that comes afterwards is amplified, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In particular, the symbol sequence stopped from the variable display before the predetermined variable display is synchronized with the predetermined attention display performed in the predetermined variable display, or a predetermined time from the end time of the predetermined variable display. Since the fluctuation is started at the previous timing, it is strongly impressed that the end time of the predetermined fluctuation display is approaching, and thereby the expectation of the lottery result for the predetermined fluctuation display can be further enhanced.

Further, the symbols displayed in the predetermined display area in the symbol column that has been stopped from the variable display before the predetermined variable display (part of the symbols stopped and displayed in the first variable display), If the symbol is included, the stop symbol corresponding to the first result cannot be stopped and displayed in the predetermined display area. Therefore, in the one or more variable displays executed before the predetermined variable display, the second variable display It is possible to prevent the stop symbol corresponding to the first result from being stopped and displayed when another symbol row that fluctuates as is stopped.

The "predetermined attention display" in the gaming machine described in the feature A0 is a stop display in a state in which a part of the plurality of symbol columns constitutes a part of the symbol combination corresponding to the first result. It may be a display until so-called (so-called "reach display"), and display of characters (for example, a school of fish) on the display unit or suggestive effects by light emission of the light emitting unit (for ease of transition to a special game state) It may be a performance that suggests the degree or the degree of expectation.

<Feature A1>
A gaming machine according to feature A0,
The first variable display is a state in which the other symbol sequence is changing, and a symbol that cannot constitute the first result in a symbol sequence different from the other symbol sequence is stopped in the predetermined display area. After that, the game machine characterized in that the other symbol row is stopped so as to become a stop symbol which is a combination of the predetermined symbols.

In the gaming machine described in the feature A1, in the first variable display, the symbol row stopped prior to the other symbol rows is synchronized with a predetermined attention display performed in the subsequent predetermined variable display, or Since it is stopped until it is changed again at a timing a predetermined time before the end time of the predetermined fluctuation display, it is easy to attract the player's attention to the most fluctuated symbol sequence, and the predetermined fluctuation display due to the maximum fluctuation is It is possible to suitably increase the expectation of the lottery result.

<Feature B0>
A display unit (reel device 710, decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol strings,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit variably displays the plurality of symbol arrays, and then the variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) performs the stop display with the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the stop display corresponding to the first result by the variation execution means is stopped and displayed, a special game state that is a game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state And a game control means (main control board 920) for generating
When the start condition is satisfied when the fluctuation display means displays the fluctuation, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Storage means (main control board 920) for storing the information until the variation display corresponding to the information is performed by the variation execution means.
Based on the production target information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined variable display executed after at least one variable display is executed, which is information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means, a predetermined effect is produced. And an effect execution means (sub-control board 940) for executing
The predetermined effect is a part of the symbols (second sub-symbol 713B) that does not form a stop symbol corresponding to the first result, as a variation display executed before the predetermined variation display by the variation executing means. , When the stop symbol corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed, the display is continued in the predetermined display area (middle line L2) to be transited to the special game state in the entire period of the variable display, After the variable display of a different design row (left design row, right design row) from the design row (middle design row) including the above-mentioned part of the design row, stop production display of the other design row A gaming machine characterized by being.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In the conventional typical pachinko machine, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening, the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the symbol display device and the jackpot lottery is performed, and the jackpot is awarded based on the result of the jackpot lottery. When it is determined to generate, a configuration is known in which a big hit is generated after the effect design is stopped and displayed with a big hit design (for example, "777").

In addition, there is a conventional pachinko machine that pre-reads the result of the big hit lottery and performs the pre-reading effect while the effect symbol is changing (for example, refer to JP-A-2009-291480). With pre-reading production, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening while the production design is changing, the number of reserved balls is added, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the random number value obtained at the winning timing, and the lottery Based on the result, it is an effect that gives advance notice of the game state that occurs when the variable display of the effect symbol that is performed by the digestion of the holding ball is completed. For example, when the result of the big hit lottery for the first holding ball is a big hit, it is announced that a big hit will occur when the next variable display of the current variable display ends.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the game machine having the conventional configuration that performs the prefetching effect. For example, in order to increase the player's interest in the prefetching effect, diversification of the prefetching effect is required.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature B0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the prefetching effect is diversified. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, after the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed on the display unit by the variation executing means, the symbols are stopped and displayed in the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after a plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the first result, a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means. To do.

When the start condition is satisfied when the fluctuation display means is performing the fluctuation display, the holding means stores the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means in a predetermined storage section, thereby storing the information. With the predetermined number as the upper limit, it is possible to suspend the change display means until the change display corresponding to the information is executed.

Based on the production target information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined variable display executed after at least one variable display is executed, which is information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means, the predetermined effect is produced. It is executed by the execution means. By executing the predetermined effect, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the display (stop display) of the lottery result with respect to the predetermined variable display that comes after that, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the predetermined effect, in the variation display executed before the predetermined variation display by the variation execution means, some symbols that do not form the stop symbol corresponding to the first result are the stop symbols corresponding to the first result. Is displayed in a predetermined display area that will transition to the special game state when stopped and displayed, and continues to be displayed for the entire period of the variable display, and among the plurality of symbol rows, the symbol row including the part of the symbol is After the different symbol sequence is variably displayed, the different symbol sequence is stopped and displayed.

Therefore, in the variable display executed before the predetermined variable display, by showing that some symbols that do not form the stop symbol corresponding to the first result are displayed from the start to the end of the variable display, the game The person recognizes that the stop symbol corresponding to the first result is not displayed in the variable display, and thereby, the expectation for the subsequent predetermined variable display can be further amplified.

In the gaming machine described in the feature B0, "a symbol that does not form a stop symbol corresponding to the first result" displayed in a predetermined display area during the entire period of the variable display is one symbol of a plurality of symbol strings. It may be a symbol included in the row, or may be a plurality of symbols included in a part or all of the symbol row except one of the plurality of symbol rows.

<Characteristic C0>
A gaming machine having a game area in which a game ball shot from a launching device (launching device 330) flows down,
A ball guide nail portion (nail 411A, nail 411B) made up of a plurality of game nails standing side by side so that the game balls can be guided in a predetermined direction in the game area,
A plate-shaped light-transmissive nail support member (area J of the base 401) that supports the base end sides of the plurality of game nails that form the ball guide nail portion and has a light-transmitting property that allows the front side to the rear side to be seen through. When,
A first passage (left side first passage 1613A, right side first passage 1613B) provided on the rear side of the light transmissive nail support member;
A passage forming portion (guide passage 1612) that guides a game ball that has entered from a predetermined entrance (entrance 1611) among the game balls flowing down the game area to the first passage,
A detection unit (left-side starting prize switch 1441A, right-side starting prize switch 1441B) capable of detecting a game ball flowing down along the first passage,
A privilege granting unit (main control board 920) for granting a predetermined privilege when the game ball is detected by the detection unit,
It is a second passage branched in a direction different from the first passage on the upstream side of the detection unit, and when a game ball enters from the first passage, the game ball is detected by the detection unit. A second passage (left-side second passage 1614A, right-side second passage 1614B) that is not operated;
An information display unit that displays predetermined privilege non-grant information (non-start prize area information) that allows the player to recognize that the second passage is an area to which the predetermined privilege is not granted when a game ball enters. And an information display section 753),
When the information display unit is behind the light-transmitting nail support member, does not overlap the plurality of game nails in a front view of the gaming machine, and the player's viewpoint is located on the front side of the gaming machine. The game machine is provided at a position overlapping the back side of the plurality of game nails when viewed in a predetermined oblique direction in.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball that enters a winning opening (for example, a starting opening) provided in a game area is detected by a detection sensor (winning switch), a bonus is given to the game ( For example, when a winning prize is generated and a big hit lottery is carried out, and when the big hit is won in the big hit lottery, a special game state is set and a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening). (See, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

Further, in a conventional pachinko machine, with respect to a guide passage that guides a game ball that has entered from a predetermined entrance to the start opening, it may be detected by a detection sensor that branches from the guide passage and detects a prize at the start opening. By providing an unbranched passage, even if a game ball enters the entrance, a part of it may not be a starting prize.

However, as typified by the above-mentioned gaming machine, when another passage is provided so that a part of the game ball that has entered the guide passage from the predetermined entrance does not become a prize for giving a predetermined privilege, the other passage is provided. There may be room for improvement in the configuration that allows the player to appropriately recognize the existence of the passage.

For example, when predetermined information is displayed so that the player can recognize the existence of an area where the game ball that has entered through a predetermined entrance can enter, such as the above-mentioned branch passage, which is not a starting prize, the starting prize is indicated by the information. While it is possible to inform the player of the existence of the area that does not become a player, there is a possibility that the player may feel the game uninteresting when the game ball enters the area where the start winning is not achieved.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature C0, a part of the game ball that has entered through the predetermined entrance leading to the detection unit that is provided with the predetermined privilege when the game ball is detected has the predetermined privilege. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a configuration in which another passage is provided so as not to be a prize to be awarded, and that can appropriately display the presence of the other passage. That is, the game ball that has entered from a predetermined entrance among the game balls flowing down the game area is guided to the first passage by the passage forming unit. When the detecting unit detects the game ball flowing down along the first passage, the privilege granting unit grants a predetermined privilege.

On the other hand, a second passage that branches in a direction different from the first passage is provided on the upstream side of the detection unit, and some of the game balls flowing down the first passage can pass through the second passage. When the game ball enters the second passage, the game ball is not detected by the detection unit. Therefore, when the game ball that has entered from the predetermined entrance flows down the first passage and is detected by the detection unit, the player can obtain a predetermined privilege, but from the first passage to the second passage. When entering, the player cannot obtain a predetermined privilege.

Since the first passage is provided on the back side of the plate-like light-transmitting nail support member having the light-transmitting property that allows the front side to the rear side to be seen through, the player visually recognizes the game ball flowing down the first passage. It is possible to visually recognize the entry of the game ball from the first passage to the second passage.

An information display unit is provided on the rear side of the light transmissive nail support member. On the information display section, predetermined privilege non-grant information that allows the player to recognize that the second passage is an area where a predetermined privilege is not granted when a game ball enters is displayed. Therefore, the player visually recognizing the predetermined privilege non-granting information recognizes that the second passage is a region where the predetermined privilege is not given when the game ball enters.

The information display unit is provided at a position overlapping the back side of the plurality of game nails in a predetermined diagonal view when the player's viewpoint is located on the front side of the gaming machine, so that the viewpoint is A player located on the front side of the gaming machine will see the information display section that overlaps the back side of the plurality of game nails when looking at a predetermined diagonal direction. Therefore, since it is difficult for the player during the game to recognize the predetermined privilege non-granting information by the plurality of game nails, even when the game ball entering from the predetermined entrance enters the second passage through the first passage. The player's discouragement that the predetermined privilege is not granted can be appropriately suppressed.

On the other hand, the light-transmissive nail support member is configured as a member that supports the base end sides of the plurality of game nails that form the ball guide nail portion, but the information display unit is used for the plurality of games when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. It is provided so that it does not overlap the nails. Therefore, the visibility of the information display section from the front of the gaming machine is sufficiently ensured, and the predetermined privilege non-granting information can be appropriately reported.

In addition, examples of the "predetermined privilege" described in the characteristic C0 include occurrence of a start prize, lottery conditions, lottery probability, a special game state that occurs when a lottery is won, and the number of game balls paid out.

Further, the “position overlapping the back side of the plurality of gaming nails in the predetermined diagonal direction view” described in Feature C0 overlaps the tip side in the diagonal direction with respect to the plurality of gaming nails in the predetermined diagonal direction view. It may be the position.

<Characteristic C1>
A gaming machine described in feature C0,
A first rear side portion (passage forming member 1631) having a portion (passage wall portion 1631A) that is disposed on the rear side of the light-transmissive nail support member and that overlaps with the front side of the information display unit in a front view of the gaming machine. A gaming machine characterized by being provided.

In the gaming machine described in Feature C1, since the first rear side portion having a portion overlapping the front side of the information display portion in the front view of the gaming machine is provided on the rear side of the light transmissive nail support member. It is possible to reduce the visibility of the predetermined non-privileged information that overlaps the rear side of the first rear side when viewed from the front. As a result, it becomes more difficult for the player in the game to recognize the predetermined privilege non-grant information, so that the player is discouraged when the game ball that has entered from the predetermined entrance enters the second passage through the first passage. It can be suppressed more favorably.

<Characteristic C2>
The gaming machine according to feature C0 or feature C1,
A portion (passage wall) that is disposed behind the light-transmissive nail support member and that overlaps with the front side of the information display unit in the predetermined oblique view when the player's viewpoint is located on the front side of the gaming machine. A game machine having a second rear side portion (passage forming member 1631) having a portion 1631B).

With the gaming machine described in Feature C2, on the rear side of the light-transmissive nail support member, the information display unit is on the front side in a predetermined oblique view when the player's viewpoint is located on the front side of the gaming machine. Since the second rear side portion having the overlapping portion is provided, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the predetermined privilege non-granting information overlapping the rear side of the second rear side portion when viewed from the front. As a result, it becomes more difficult for the player in the game to recognize the predetermined privilege non-grant information, so that the player is discouraged when the game ball that has entered from the predetermined entrance enters the second passage through the first passage. It can be suppressed more favorably.

<Characteristic C3>
The gaming machine according to any one of features C0 to C2,
The predetermined privilege non-granting information is composed of a predetermined character string indicating that the predetermined privilege is not given,
The predetermined character string is arranged along the arrangement of the plurality of game nails that overlap the front side of the information display unit in the predetermined oblique view when the player's viewpoint is located on the front side of the gaming machine. A gaming machine characterized by being present.

In the gaming machine described in Feature C3, the predetermined privilege non-granting information is composed of a predetermined character string, and the predetermined character string has a predetermined slant when the player's viewpoint is located on the front side of the game machine. When viewed from the direction, they are arranged along the arrangement of a plurality of game nails that overlap the front side of the information display unit. Therefore, many areas of the character string forming the predetermined privilege non-grant information are arranged so as to overlap the plurality of game nails in the predetermined oblique view, so that the player who is playing the game can obtain the predetermined privilege non-grant information. Is harder to recognize. Therefore, the player's discouragement when the game ball that has entered from the predetermined entrance enters the second passage through the first passage can be suppressed more appropriately.

<Feature D0>
A game area (base body 401) having a game area in which a game ball can flow down is formed on the front side and having an opening formed in the game area,
A decorative surface (base 701) provided on the rear side of the game board and located in the opening when viewed from the front of the game machine;
A three-dimensional rotating body arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate is defined as one symbol row, and each of the plurality of symbol rows formed by arranging the plurality of the rotating barrels is variably displayed by rotating each rotating barrel. A variable display unit configured to be possible, provided in the opening in the game board, a variable display in which a part of the plurality of turning bodies protrudes forward from the opening so that the plurality of symbols can be visually recognized. Part (reel device 710),
The plurality of symbols are provided so as to be visible on the front side of the plurality of rotating bodies, and a cross section of the predetermined direction that intersects the front-rear direction in the front view of the game machine as viewed from a predetermined direction projects in a substantially arc shape to the front side. A display cover portion configured in a plate shape, and when light is emitted from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a direction in which the plate surface is continuous, a predetermined image is generated by the light. A display cover section (resin cover 715) having a light guide section (light guide plate 715B) capable of displaying (pattern 743) by light emission;
A game board image display unit that is provided on at least one side of the predetermined image that can be displayed by the light guide unit, at least in part of the periphery of the opening in the game plate, and is predetermined together with the predetermined image. A game board image display portion (pattern 741) that constitutes a part of a decorative image (a group of fish that faces leftward) that is continuous on the direction side of
The decorative surface is provided between the light guide section and the game board image display section in the display cover section in a front view of a gaming machine, and the decoration is continuous with the predetermined image and the game board image display section. A game machine provided with a decorative surface image display portion (design 742) forming a part of an image.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening (see, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

In such a conventional pachinko machine, a liquid crystal display device displays a symbol corresponding to a lottery result or various effect images to improve the interest of the game. Further, there is also known a configuration in which a lottery result is displayed by printing a design or the like on a three-dimensional rotating body in which a plurality of designs are arranged so as to circulate. However, in a gaming machine equipped with a three-dimensional rotating body in which a plurality of symbols are arranged to circulate, it may be difficult to provide a display area for effect in a wide range.

On the other hand, if the gaming machine described in the feature D0, even if it is a gaming machine having a three-dimensional rotating body arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate, a wide display area for effect is suitable. A game machine that can be installed can be provided. In other words, the variable display unit uses each of the plurality of symbol columns configured by arranging the three-dimensional rotating bodies as one symbol row, with the three-dimensional rotating body arranged so as to circulate a plurality of symbols. Each of them can be displayed in a variable manner by moving them. The variable display portion is provided in the opening formed in the game area of the game board so that a part of the plurality of spinning bodies projects forward from the opening so that the plurality of symbols can be visually recognized.

In the position where the plural symbols in the variable display portion are visible so that the plural symbols can be visually recognized, the cross section seen from a predetermined direction side that intersects the front-rear direction in the gaming machine front view protrudes in a substantially arc shape in the front side. A display cover portion having a plate shape is provided. The display cover section can display a predetermined image by the light when the light is emitted from a predetermined end side so that the light travels in a direction in which the plate surface of the display cover section is continuous. It has a light guide part.

A game board image display section is provided on at least one side of a predetermined image that can be displayed by the light guide section of the display cover section, which is at least a part of the periphery of the opening in the game board. Since the game board image display section constitutes a part of the decoration image continuous in the predetermined direction side together with the predetermined image that can be displayed by the light guide section, the decoration image continuous in the predetermined direction side is displayed in the light guide section. It can be displayed beyond the display range. As a result, the effect of the decoration images that are continuous in the predetermined direction can be made more impressive than when the decoration images are displayed using only the light guide section.

However, when there is a structural separation between the opening of the game board and the display cover section, the predetermined image is displayed due to the discontinuity between the predetermined image displayed on the light guide section and the game board image display section. There is a possibility that an unnatural feeling may be given to the effect by the decorative image that is continuous on the direction side.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature D0, the decorative surface located in the opening of the gaming board in the front view of the gaming machine is provided on the rear side of the gaming board, and the decorative surface is viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Between the light guide and the game board image display section of the game board, there is provided a decorative surface image display section which is a part of a continuous decorative image on the predetermined direction side.

As a result, even when there is a structural separation between the opening of the game board and the display cover section (light guide section), the predetermined image displayed on the light guide section and the game board image display section are displayed. The discontinuity that occurs between and can be compensated by the decorative surface image display unit. Therefore, it is possible to realize the effect by the decoration image that is continuous in the predetermined direction beyond the display range of the light guide unit, as a suitable effect in which unnaturalness due to discontinuity is suppressed.

<Feature D1>
A gaming machine described in feature D0,
A side wall surface (side wall portion 702) extending in a direction intersecting the game plate and the decorative surface, which is provided between a peripheral portion of the opening of the game plate and the decorative surface;
The side wall surface is provided between the decorative surface image display unit and the game board image display unit, and together with the decorative surface image display unit and the game board image display unit, a part of the continuous decorative image. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a side wall image display section (a pattern connecting the pattern 741 and the pattern 742) constituting the side wall image.

In the gaming machine described in the feature D1, a side wall surface extending in a direction intersecting with the game board and the decorative surface is provided between the peripheral edge of the opening of the game board and the decorative surface. On the side wall surface, a side wall surface image display portion is provided between the decoration surface image display portion of the decoration surface and the image display portion of the game board. The side wall surface image display unit is configured to be a part of the decoration image that is continuous in the predetermined direction side together with the decoration surface image display unit and the game board image display unit. Therefore, the discontinuity in the height direction due to the height difference between the game board and the decorative surface can be compensated by the side wall surface image display unit. As a result, the continuity of the decoration images that are continuous in the predetermined direction is improved, and thus unnaturalness due to discontinuity in the effect of the decoration images that are continuous in the predetermined direction can be suppressed more preferably.

<Feature D2>
The gaming machine described in the feature D0 or the feature D1,
The light guide unit displays a first image (patterns 743B, 743C), which is a part of one image forming a continuous decorative image on the side of the predetermined direction, from the top located at the front in the display cover unit. In a predetermined area (areas R1 and R2) on the side so that it can be displayed as a part of the predetermined image,
The decorative surface image display unit is displayed at a position adjacent to the first image displayed on the light guide unit and forms a second image together with the first image (second patterns 742B, 742C). A gaming machine including:

In the gaming machine described in the feature D2, the first image displayed on the light guide section and the second image displayed on the decorative surface image display section form a decorative image continuous in the predetermined direction side. One image is formed. Accordingly, one image forming a decorative image that is continuous in the predetermined direction can be arranged at the boundary between the light guide portion and the decorative surface, so that the continuity in the decorative image can be suitably increased.

In particular, since the first image is displayed in a predetermined area below the foremost top portion of the display cover unit, the height difference from the second image displayed on the decorative surface image display unit (decorative surface) ( The height in the front-back direction) can be kept low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the distortion of the one image including the first image and the second image, and it is possible to prevent the sense of discomfort from occurring in the one image.

<Feature E0>
A game area (base body 401) having a game area in which a game ball can flow down is formed on the front side and having an opening formed in the game area,
A variable display section (reel device 710) arranged in the opening of the game board and capable of variable display of a plurality of symbol rows,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the variable display unit variably displays the plurality of symbol columns, and then the variable execution unit (sub-control board 940) stops and displays the stopped symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. )When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed by the stop symbol corresponding to the first result by the variation executing means, a game more advantageous than the normal game state A game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a state,
A display cover portion (resin cover 715) provided so as to project forward from the position where the stop symbol is displayed,
An operation unit (pressing operation device 261) capable of emitting light, which is arranged toward the upper side of the display cover unit when viewed from the front side of the gaming machine and is operable by the player,
The operation unit is displayed in a predetermined color in synchronization with an operation valid period (operation possible period) during which the input to the operation unit is valid, or a notification period prior to the operation valid period and reporting the operation valid period. Emission control means (sub-control board 940) for emitting light,
A reflecting portion (half mirror 761B) provided in a predetermined region below the foremost top portion of the display cover portion and capable of reflecting the light emitted from the operation portion so that the player can visually recognize the reflected light. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening.

In recent years, when a player operates an effect button (operation unit) at a predetermined timing, a display effect on a display device is changed, or a corresponding sound is output from a speaker, so that a predetermined effect is executed. There are also known gaming machines (for example, see JP-A-2016-193329). There is a gaming machine of this type that informs the player of the operation timing of the operation unit by configuring the operation unit to emit light.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the conventional gaming machine configured to notify the player of the operation timing of the operating section by the light emission of the operating section. For example, since the player tends to pay attention to the variable display performed on the display device, it is difficult to recognize the operation timing of the operation unit notified by the light emission of the operation unit provided below the display device. was there.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature E0, in the configuration in which the operation time of the operation unit is notified to the player by the light emission of the operation unit, the operation time of the operation unit is appropriately recognized by the player. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of playing. That is, in the game board in which the game area where the game balls can flow down is formed on the front side, an opening is formed in the game area in a front view of the game machine, and a plurality of symbol rows are formed in the opening. A variable display unit capable of variable display is provided. When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, after the fluctuation execution means displays the fluctuations of the plurality of symbol rows on the fluctuation display portion, the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of the symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of symbols showing the first result, the game control means causes a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state.

A display cover portion is provided so as to project in front of the position where the stop symbol is displayed. An operation unit that can be operated by the player is disposed on the lower side of the display cover unit when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, facing upward. The operation unit is configured to emit light. The operation unit is controlled by the light emission control means and is synchronized with an operation effective period during which the input to the operation unit is effective, or a notification period before the operation effective period and reporting the operation effective period. It is emitted in a predetermined color.

Here, in a predetermined region below the foremost top portion of the display cover portion, there is provided a reflection portion capable of reflecting the light emitted from the operation portion so that the player can visually recognize the reflected light. The player can visually recognize the light emitted from the operation unit as the light reflected by the reflection unit. Thereby, even when the player is paying attention to the variable display section, it is difficult for the player to miss the notification of the operation time of the operation section by the light emission of the operation section, and it is easy to recognize the operation time.

Further, since the player is informed of the operation time of the operation unit using the light reflected by the reflection unit, the control load does not increase due to the notification. Therefore, also in this respect, it is possible to allow the player to appropriately recognize the operation timing of the operation unit. Further, since it is not necessary to provide an image display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) or the like for notifying the operation time of the operation unit by an image or the like, there is no increase in manufacturing cost and control load, and this point is provided. Also in this case, the player can be made to appropriately recognize the operation timing of the operation unit.

<Feature E1>
A gaming machine according to feature E0,
The variable display section uses each of the plurality of symbol columns configured by arranging a plurality of the three-dimensional rotating bodies as one of the three-dimensional rotating bodies arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate. Each of them is configured to be variable display by rotating, and a part of the plurality of turning bodies is provided so as to project forward from the opening in the game board,
The display cover portion is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the plurality of rotating bodies so that the plurality of symbols can be visually recognized, and a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction side that intersects the front-rear direction in the gaming machine front view is a front side. A gaming machine having a plate-like shape that projects in a substantially arc shape.

In the gaming machine described in the feature E1, the variable display unit has a three-dimensional rotating body in which a plurality of symbols are arranged in a circle as one symbol row, and a plurality of rotating bodies including the rotating body are arranged side by side. Each of the plurality of symbol columns to be displayed is configured to be variably displayed by rotating the plurality of rotating bodies. If the variation display of the symbols is a gaming machine that is displayed on the screen of a display unit such as an LCD, it is possible to notify the valid operation period by displaying a predetermined character string or a predetermined image on the screen of the display unit. is there. However, it is difficult to display a character string or an image on the rotating body in the gaming machine having the feature E1 in which the variable display of the symbols is performed by the rotating body of the rotating body.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine described in the feature E1, a part of the plurality of spinning bodies intersects in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine on the front side of the variable display portion provided so as to project forward from the opening of the gaming board. A plate-shaped display cover portion is provided, the cross-section of which is viewed from the predetermined direction side and which projects in a substantially arc shape toward the front side. By providing the reflecting portion in a predetermined region below the foremost top portion of the display cover portion, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the light emitted from the operating portion as reflected light by the reflecting portion.

<Feature E2>
A gaming machine described in Feature E1,
Within the opening in the game board, a predetermined display section (holding lamp 720, lottery result display device 730) provided at the rear end side and the lower side of the predetermined area in the front view of the gaming machine is provided. A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the gaming machine described in the feature E2, the predetermined display section provided in the opening of the game board is provided at the rear end side and the lower side of the predetermined area in the front view of the game machine, so the predetermined display is provided. It is possible to stop the area where the display content of the portion is reflected on the reflection portion in a limited area on the rear end side of the reflection portion. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the light of the light emitting unit reflected by the reflecting unit from being hindered by the display content of the predetermined display unit reflected on the reflecting unit. In addition, the region where the light of the light emitting unit is reflected in the reflective unit (that is, an image formed by the light of the light emitting unit is formed) without increasing the size of the reflecting unit (that is, without increasing the forward projection of the display cover unit). It is possible to secure a large area on the front side of the reflecting portion.

<Feature F0>
A game area (base body 401) having a game area in which a game ball can flow down is formed on the front side and having an opening formed in the game area,
A variable display section (reel device 710) arranged in the opening of the game board and capable of variable display of a plurality of symbol rows,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the variable display unit variably displays the plurality of symbol columns, and then the variable execution unit (sub-control board 940) stops and displays the stopped symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. )When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed by the stop symbol corresponding to the first result by the variation executing means, a game more advantageous than the normal game state A game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a state,
A display cover portion (resin cover 715) provided so as to project forward from the position where the stop symbol is displayed,
An operation unit (pressing operation device 261) that is arranged toward the upper side of the display cover unit when viewed from the front side of the gaming machine and is operable by the player,
A light emitting section (wave lamp 771) which is arranged on one side of the operating section and which is capable of emitting light;
The light emitting unit is operated in a predetermined color in synchronization with an operation valid period (operable period) during which the input to the operation unit is valid, or a notification period before the operation valid period and reporting the operation valid period. Emission control means (sub-control board 940) for emitting light,
A reflector (half mirror 761B) provided in a predetermined region below the top located at the forefront of the display cover, and capable of reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting unit so that the player can visually recognize the reflected light. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening.

In recent years, when a player operates an effect button (operation unit) at a predetermined timing, a display effect on a display device is changed, or a corresponding sound is output from a speaker, so that a predetermined effect is executed. There are also known gaming machines (for example, see JP-A-2016-193329). There is a gaming machine of this type that informs the player of the operation timing of the operation unit by configuring a light emitting unit provided around the operation unit to emit light.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the conventional gaming machine configured to notify the player of the operation timing of the operating portion by the light emission of the light emitting portion. For example, since the player tends to pay attention to the variable display performed on the display device, the operation timing of the operation unit notified by the light emission of the light emitting unit provided around the operation unit provided below the display device. There was a problem that it was difficult to recognize.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature F0, in the configuration in which the player is informed of the operation time of the operation section by the light emission of the light emitting section provided around the operation section, the operation time of the operation section It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of making the player recognize appropriately. That is, in the game board in which the game area where the game balls can flow down is formed on the front side, an opening is formed in the game area in a front view of the game machine, and a plurality of symbol rows are formed in the opening. A variable display unit capable of variable display is provided. When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, after the fluctuation execution means displays the fluctuations of the plurality of symbol rows on the fluctuation display portion, the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of the symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of symbols showing the first result, the game control means causes a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state.

A display cover portion is provided so as to project in front of the position where the stop symbol is displayed. An operation unit that can be operated by the player is disposed on the lower side of the display cover unit when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, facing upward. A light emitting unit capable of emitting light is arranged on one side of the operation unit. The light-emitting unit is controlled by the light-emission control means and has a predetermined period in synchronization with an operation valid period during which an input to the operation unit is valid, or a notification period prior to the operation valid period and reporting the operation valid period. Is emitted in the color of.

Here, in a predetermined region below the top located in the forefront of the display cover portion, a reflection portion that can reflect the light emitted from the light emitting portion so that the player can visually recognize the reflected light is provided. The player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting unit as the light reflected by the reflecting unit. Thus, even when the player pays attention to the variable display section, it is difficult for the player to miss the notification of the operation time of the operation section by the light emission of the light emitting section, and it is easy to recognize the operation time.

Further, since the player is informed of the operation time of the operation unit using the light reflected by the reflection unit, the control load does not increase due to the notification. Therefore, also in this respect, it is possible to allow the player to appropriately recognize the operation timing of the operation unit. Further, since it is not necessary to provide an image display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) or the like for notifying the operation time of the operation unit by an image or the like, there is no increase in manufacturing cost and control load, and this point is provided. Also in this case, the player can be made to appropriately recognize the operation timing of the operation unit.

<Feature F1>
A gaming machine according to feature F0,
The variable display section uses each of the plurality of symbol columns configured by arranging a plurality of the three-dimensional rotating bodies as one of the three-dimensional rotating bodies arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate. Each of them is configured to be variable display by rotating, and a part of the plurality of turning bodies is provided so as to project forward from the opening in the game board,
The display cover portion is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the plurality of rotating bodies so that the plurality of symbols can be visually recognized, and a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction side that intersects the front-rear direction in the gaming machine front view is a front side. A gaming machine having a plate-like shape that projects in a substantially arc shape.

In the gaming machine described in the feature F1, the variable display unit has a three-dimensional rotating body arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate as one symbol row, and a plurality of rotating bodies including the rotating body are arranged side by side. Each of the plurality of symbol columns to be displayed is configured to be variably displayed by rotating the plurality of rotating bodies. In the case of a gaming machine in which the variable display of symbols is displayed on the screen of a display unit such as an LCD, it is possible to notify the operation time by displaying a predetermined character string or a predetermined image on the screen of the display unit. .. However, it is difficult to display a character string or an image on the rotating body in the game machine having the characteristic F1 in which the variable display of the symbols is performed by the rotating body of the rotating body.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine described in the feature F1, a part of the plurality of spinning bodies intersects in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine on the front side of the variable display portion provided so as to project forward from the opening of the gaming board. A plate-shaped display cover portion is provided, the cross-section of which is viewed from the predetermined direction side and which projects in a substantially arc shape toward the front side. By providing the reflecting portion in a predetermined region below the foremost top portion of the display cover portion, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the light emitted from the operating portion as reflected light by the reflecting portion.

<Feature F2>
A gaming machine according to feature F1,
A second light emitting portion (reel side lamp 717A) capable of emitting light, provided between the rotating body and the rotating body,
The light emission control unit causes the second light emitting unit to emit light in the same color as the color emitted from the light emitting unit when the light emitting unit emits light in a predetermined color in synchronization with the operation valid period or the notification period. A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the gaming machine described in the feature F2, the second light emitting unit capable of emitting light is provided between the rotating bodies. The second light emitting unit emits light in the same color as the light emitting unit that emits light in synchronization with the operation valid period or the notification period by the light emission control unit. Therefore, not only the light reflected by the reflecting portion but also the second light emitting portion provided on the variable display portion (more specifically, between the rotating bodies) that the player can easily notice is notified of the operation time. Since it is performed by direct light, it is possible to suitably prevent the player from missing the notification of the operation time.

<Feature F3>
A gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2,
The rotating body is configured to be capable of emitting light to display the design,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reflector is configured to reflect light incident from the front side and transmit light incident from the rear side.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature F3, since the reflecting portion is configured to reflect the light incident from the front side and to transmit the light incident from the rear side, it is possible to display the symbol on the rotating body by light emission The symbols displayed by light emission can be visually recognized by the player through the reflecting portion. Therefore, the reflecting portion can be arranged in front of the design on the rotating body so as to be overlapped with each other, so that the size of the display cover portion can be prevented from becoming too large.

<Feature F4>
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3,
Within the opening in the game board, a predetermined display section (holding lamp 720, lottery result display device 730) provided at the rear end side and the lower side of the predetermined area in the front view of the gaming machine is provided. A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the gaming machine described in the feature F4, the predetermined display section provided in the opening of the game board is provided at the rear end side and the lower side of the predetermined area in the front view of the game machine, so the predetermined display is provided. It is possible to stop the area where the display content of the portion is reflected on the reflection portion in a limited area on the rear end side of the reflection portion. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the light of the light emitting unit reflected by the reflecting unit from being hindered by the display content of the predetermined display unit reflected on the reflecting unit. In addition, the area where the light of the light emitting section is reflected in the reflective section without increasing the size of the reflective section (that is, without increasing the projection to the front of the display cover section) (the area where an image is formed by the light of the light emitting section) ) Can be largely secured on the front side of the reflecting portion.

<Characteristic G0>
A variable display section (reel device 710) capable of variable display of a plurality of symbol rows,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the variable display unit variably displays the plurality of symbol columns, and then the variable execution unit (sub-control board 940) stops and displays the stopped symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. )When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed by the stop symbol corresponding to the first result by the variation executing means, a game more advantageous than the normal game state A game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a state,
An operation unit (press operation device 261) that can be operated by the player,
When the player operates the operation unit, at least two symbol columns (left symbol column, which can configure a part of the combination of the stopped symbols corresponding to the first result among the plurality of symbol columns) A display area control unit (sub-control board 940) that reduces the display range in which the at least two symbol rows are displayed by moving the position of the right symbol row), and a gaming machine.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening (see, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

Such a conventional pachinko machine includes a display device (display unit), and on the display device, the variable display of the symbols is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display. As a result, the stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine in which a variable display of symbols is performed on the display unit, as represented by the above gaming machine. For example, when the variable display is displayed large, the player can give a strong impression to the variable display by the large pattern, while the area where the variable display is performed is large with respect to the field of view depending on the player. There were times when it became too difficult to see the fluctuation display.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature G0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can appropriately change the appearance of the display unit as needed. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, after the fluctuation display means performs the fluctuation display of the plurality of symbol rows on the fluctuation display portion, it is stopped and displayed in the combination of the symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. .. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of symbols showing the first result, the game control means causes a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state.

An operation unit that can be operated by the player is provided, and when the operation unit is operated by the player, a part of the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the first result is selected from the plurality of symbol rows. The positions of the at least two symbol arrays that can be configured are moved by the display area control means, whereby the display range in which the at least two symbol arrays are displayed is reduced. In this way, the player can reduce the display area of the plurality of symbol rows by operating the operation unit as necessary, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the variable display is difficult to see.

Further, by moving the position of at least two symbol rows, the display range in which the at least two symbol rows are displayed is reduced, so that the appearance of the at least two symbol rows is before and after the display range is reduced. There is no change in size, and it is possible to prevent these symbol strings from becoming difficult to see due to the reduced display range. In particular, the at least 2 symbol row is a symbol row that can form a part of the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the first result, so the player corresponds to the first result by the at least 2 symbol row. When a part of the combination of stop symbols to be displayed is displayed, the player can appropriately visually recognize the display.

Note that "to reduce the display range" described in the feature G0 may be to reduce either the up-down direction or the left-right direction of the display range, and to reduce both the up-down direction and the left-right direction of the display range. It may be smaller.

<Characteristic G1>
A gaming machine described in feature G0,
The variable display section uses each of the plurality of symbol columns configured by arranging a plurality of the three-dimensional rotating bodies as one of the three-dimensional rotating bodies arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate. By rotating, it is configured to be able to change display,
The gaming machine is
Of the plurality of spinning bodies, the first spinning body (left reel 711L, right reel 711R) corresponding to at least two symbol rows that can form part of the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the first result is played. First moving means (gear 782, 783, rack gear corresponding to the gears 782, 783) movable in a predetermined direction intersecting the front-rear direction in the machine front view;
Of the plurality of rotating bodies, a second rotating body (middle reel 711M) different from the first rotating body is movable to the rear side in the game machine front view (corresponding to the gear 781 and the gear 781). Rack gear) and
When the player operates the operation section, the display area control means moves the second-time body to a rear side of the first-time body by the second moving means, and then performs the first-time operation. A game machine characterized in that the display area of the plurality of symbol rows is reduced by moving the body by the first moving means.

In the gaming machine described in the feature G1, the variable display unit has a three-dimensional rotating body arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate as one symbol row, and a plurality of rotating bodies including the rotating body are arranged side by side. Each of the plurality of symbol columns to be displayed is configured to be variably displayed by rotating the plurality of rotating bodies.

Of the plurality of turning bodies, the first turning body corresponding to at least two symbol rows that can form a part of the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the first result is viewed from the front of the gaming machine by the first moving means. It is configured to be movable in a predetermined direction intersecting with the front-rear direction. On the other hand, of the plurality of rotating bodies, the second rotating body different from the first rotating body is configured to be movable to the rear side in the front view of the gaming machine by the second moving means.

When the operation unit is operated by the player, the display area control means moves the second-time body to the rear side of the first-time body by the second moving means, and then the first-time body is changed to the first-time body. 1 Moved by moving means. This makes it possible to reduce the display area of the plurality of symbol rows.

<Characteristic G2>
A gaming machine described in Feature G1,
The first turning body is a turning body located at least at both ends of the plurality of turning bodies,
The first moving means is configured to be movable by substantially the same distance in a direction in which the second rotating bodies located at both ends of the plurality of rotating bodies are brought closer to each other.

In the gaming machine described in the feature G2, when the operating section is operated by the player, the second rotating bodies located at both ends of the plurality of rotating bodies are substantially moved in the direction in which they are brought closer to each other by the first moving means. It is moved the same distance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the centers of the display regions of the plurality of symbol rows from moving due to the reduction. As a result, it is possible to suppress a change in the line of sight of the player when viewing the variable display of the symbols due to the reduction of the display area of the plurality of symbol rows.

<Characteristic H0>
A predetermined structure (reel device 710) is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the structure so as to be visible from the front side, and the cross section viewed from the predetermined direction side that intersects the front-rear direction in the gaming machine front view is the front side. A light guide member having a plate-like (or formed to have a substantially constant thickness) light guide curved portion (curved portion 715B1) that is curved and protrudes, and has a predetermined continuous direction (or plate When light is incident from a predetermined end side (end surfaces 715B4, 715B5) so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction in which the surfaces are continuous or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided. A light guide member (light guide plate 715B) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (design 743) on at least the light guide curved portion by the light;
The light guide member is provided so as to be overlapped with at least the front side of the light guide curved portion, and has the light transmittance that allows the predetermined image displayed by light emission on the light guide member to be visually recognized from the front side. A cover portion (outer cover 715A) having a curved cover curved portion (curved portion 715A1) along the portion,
A light source unit (light source units 812, 813) having light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member;
A first mounting part (projection) that is a part used when the light guide member and the cover part are integrated and allows displacement along the predetermined continuous direction due to deformation of the light guide curved part. Part 892, through holes 841A, 841B, 843A, 843B, a protrusion 893, through holes 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B),
A second attachment portion (projection portion) that is a portion used when the light guide member and the light source unit are integrated and that does not allow displacement along the predetermined continuous direction as compared with the first attachment portion. 844A, through holes 861A and 842A, protrusions 844B, through holes 861B and 842B, protrusions 854A, through holes 862A and 852A, protrusions 854B, and through holes 862B and 852B). Machine.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In recent years, a pachinko machine has been known in which the production is diversified by providing a light guide plate for emitting and displaying a predetermined design by allowing light to enter from an end surface (for example, JP-A-2015-80625). ).

However, not a flat light guide plate but a light guide member having a curved plate-shaped portion (curved portion) may cause a problem at the time of assembly when unitized. For example, if the curved portion cannot be accurately manufactured into a shape as designed, there is a possibility that a predetermined design cannot be displayed in a good-looking manner. On the other hand, if the tolerance of the light guide member including the curved portion is reduced and it is attempted to be manufactured with high accuracy, the cost of the light guide member increases and the cost of the game machine increases. Further, if excessive force is applied so that the curved portion of the light guide plate is deformed, there is a possibility that the light source and the light guide member are displaced, and the light guide function is impaired.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine having the feature H0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a unit including a light guide member having a curved portion can be suitably assembled. That is, at a position where a predetermined structure is visible from the front side and overlaps with the front side of the structure portion, a cross section seen from a predetermined direction side that intersects the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine is curved and protrudes to the front side. A light guide member having a plate-shaped light guide curved portion is provided. The light guide member is capable of displaying a predetermined image at least on the light guide curved portion by the light when the light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction. Composed. A light emitting unit is provided in the light source unit so that light is incident on a predetermined end portion side of the light guide member. Therefore, when a predetermined structure including a shape that is curved and protrudes to the front side is arranged on the rear side of the light guiding curved portion, the distance is largely separated in front of the predetermined structure. Without displaying the predetermined image. Therefore, even if the player's viewpoint position changes due to the player's height or posture, the position at which a predetermined image is overlapped and displayed on the front side of a predetermined structure may be significantly displaced. Instead, a predetermined image can be displayed at an appropriate position.

Further, at least on the front side of the light guide curved portion of the light guide member, a cover portion having a curved cover curved portion along the light guide curved portion is provided in an overlapping manner. The cover portion has a light-transmitting property that allows a predetermined image displayed on the light guide member to be illuminated and displayed from the front side.

Here, the first attachment portion, which is a portion used when the light guide member and the cover portion are integrated, is configured to allow displacement along a predetermined continuous direction due to deformation of the light guide curved portion. Has been done. Therefore, even when the light guide curved portion is manufactured by being deformed due to manufacturing variations or the like, the displacement along the predetermined continuous direction due to the deformation is allowed by the first mounting portion, so It is possible to largely allow the manufacturing variation of the light guide member along the continuous direction and suppress the manufacturing cost of the light guide member including the curved portion.

On the other hand, the second mounting portion, which is a portion used when the light guide member and the light source unit are integrated, does not allow displacement along the predetermined continuous direction as compared with the first mounting portion. It is configured. Accordingly, the light guide member and the light source unit can be positioned and integrated at a suitable position with little manufacturing variation in a predetermined continuous direction, so that a predetermined image using the light guide member can be displayed aesthetically. It can be possible.

<Characteristic H1>
A predetermined structure (reel device 710) is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the structure so as to be visible from the front side, and the cross section viewed from the predetermined direction side that intersects the front-rear direction in the gaming machine front view is the front side. A light guide member having a plate-like (or formed to have a substantially constant thickness) light guide curved portion (curved portion 715B1) that is curved and protrudes, and has a predetermined continuous direction (or plate When light is incident from a predetermined end side (end surfaces 715B4, 715B5) so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction in which the surfaces are continuous or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided. A light guide member (light guide plate 715B) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (design 743) on at least the light guide curved portion by the light;
The light guide member is provided so as to be overlapped with at least the front side of the light guide curved portion, and has the light transmittance that allows the predetermined image displayed by light emission on the light guide member to be visually recognized from the front side. A cover portion (outer cover 715A) having a curved cover curved portion (curved portion 715A1) along the portion,
A light source unit (light source units 812, 813) having light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member;
In the part used when the light guide member and the cover part are integrated, the predetermined continuous direction has a larger positioning allowable range than the crossing direction intersecting the continuous direction. A first mounting portion (protrusion 892, through holes 841A, 841B, 843A, 843B, protrusion 893, through holes 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B);
A second mounting portion that is used when the light guide member and the light source unit are integrated and is set to have a smaller positioning allowable range in the predetermined continuous direction than the first mounting portion. (Projection 844A, through holes 861A, 842A, projection 844B, through holes 861B, 842B, projection 854A, through holes 862A, 852A, projection 854B, through holes 862B, 852B) And a gaming machine.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In recent years, a pachinko machine has been known in which the production is diversified by providing a light guide plate for emitting and displaying a predetermined design by allowing light to enter from an end surface (for example, JP-A-2015-80625). ).

However, not a flat light guide plate but a light guide member having a curved plate-shaped portion (curved portion) may cause a problem at the time of assembly when unitized. For example, if the curved portion cannot be accurately manufactured into a shape as designed, there is a possibility that a predetermined design cannot be displayed in a good-looking manner. On the other hand, if the tolerance of the light guide member including the curved portion is reduced and it is attempted to be manufactured with high accuracy, the cost of the light guide member increases and the cost of the game machine increases. Further, if excessive force is applied so that the curved portion of the light guide plate is deformed, there is a possibility that the light source and the light guide member are displaced, and the light guide function is impaired.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature H1, it is possible to provide the gaming machine in which the unit including the light guide member having the curved portion can be suitably assembled. That is, at a position where a predetermined structure is visible from the front side and overlaps with the front side of the structure portion, a cross section seen from a predetermined direction side that intersects the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine is curved and protrudes to the front side. A light guide member having a plate-shaped light guide curved portion is provided. The light guide member is capable of displaying a predetermined image at least on the light guide curved portion by the light when the light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction. Composed. A light emitting unit is provided in the light source unit so that light is incident on a predetermined end portion side of the light guide member. Therefore, when a predetermined structure including a shape that is curved and protrudes to the front side is arranged on the rear side of the light guiding curved portion, the distance is largely separated in front of the predetermined structure. Without displaying the predetermined image. Therefore, even if the player's viewpoint position changes due to the player's height or posture, the position at which a predetermined image is overlapped and displayed on the front side of a predetermined structure may be significantly displaced. Instead, a predetermined image can be displayed at an appropriate position.

Further, at least on the front side of the light guide curved portion of the light guide member, a cover portion having a curved cover curved portion along the light guide curved portion is provided in an overlapping manner. The cover portion has a light-transmitting property that allows a predetermined image displayed on the light guide member to be illuminated and displayed from the front side.

Here, in the first attachment portion, which is a portion used when the light guide member and the cover portion are integrated, a predetermined continuous direction has an allowable positioning range more than a crossing direction intersecting the continuous direction. Is set to a large value. Therefore, even when the light guide curved portion is deformed and manufactured due to manufacturing variations or the like, the allowable range of positioning in the continuous direction along the predetermined continuous direction is set to be relatively large by the first mounting portion. Therefore, it is possible to largely allow the manufacturing variation of the light guide member along the predetermined continuous direction and suppress the manufacturing cost of the light guide member including the curved portion.

On the other hand, the second mounting portion, which is a portion used when the light guide member and the light source unit are integrated, is set to have a positioning allowable range in a predetermined continuous direction smaller than that of the first mounting portion. ing. Accordingly, the light guide member and the light source unit can be positioned and integrated at a suitable position with little manufacturing variation in a predetermined continuous direction, so that a predetermined image using the light guide member can be displayed aesthetically. It can be possible.

<Feature H2>
The gaming machine described in the feature H0 or the feature H1,
The first mounting portion,
A first support portion (projection portion 892, 893) projectingly provided on the back side of a flat surface portion of the cover portion that is continuous with the cover curved portion, or at a predetermined position on the front side of the light source unit;
A first hole portion provided in the light source unit or the cover portion so that the first support portion can be inserted therethrough, wherein the predetermined continuous direction is formed longer than an intersecting direction intersecting the continuous direction. A gaming machine comprising one hole portion (through holes 841A, 841B, 843A, 843B, 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B).

In the gaming machine described in the feature H2, the first mounting portion is the first support portion that is provided so as to project at a predetermined position on the back side of the flat portion that is continuous with the cover curving portion of the cover portion or on the front side of the light source unit. The light source unit or the cover has a first hole through which the light source unit can be inserted. The first hole portion is formed longer in a predetermined continuous direction than in an intersecting direction intersecting the continuous direction. Therefore, the predetermined mounting direction of the first mounting portion can have a larger positioning allowable range than the crossing direction, and the predetermined mounting direction (direction in which the plate surface is continuous) accompanying the deformation of the light guide curved portion can be achieved. Can be configured to allow displacement along.

<Characteristic H3>
The gaming machine described in the feature H2,
The second mounting portion is
Second hole portions respectively provided on both ends of the light guide member in the intersecting direction, the length in the predetermined continuous direction being shorter than the length in the continuous direction in the first hole portion. Formed second hole portions (through holes 861A, 861B, through holes 862A, 862B),
A second support portion (projection portions 844A, 844B, projection portions 854A, 854B) formed in the light source unit so as to be inserted into the second hole portion,
The length of the second hole portion (through holes 861B, 862B) provided on one side of the intersecting direction in the intersecting direction is equal to the length of the second hole portion (projecting portion 844A) provided on the other side of the intersecting direction. , 854A) is formed longer than the length in the intersecting direction.

In the gaming machine described in the feature H3, the second mounting portion has the second hole portions provided at both ends of the light guide member in the intersecting direction, and the light source that can be inserted into the second hole portion. And a second support portion provided in the unit. Each of the second hole portions provided at both ends in the intersecting direction is formed so that the length in the predetermined continuous direction is shorter than the length in the predetermined continuous direction in the first hole portion. Therefore, the second mounting portion can be set to have a smaller positioning allowable range in the predetermined continuous direction than the first mounting portion, and the predetermined mounting direction (direction in which the plate surfaces are continuous) can be set as compared with the first mounting portion. Can be configured to disallow displacement along.

Further, of the second hole portions provided on both ends of the intersecting direction, the length of the second hole portion provided on one side of the intersecting direction in the intersecting direction is equal to the other side of the intersecting direction. Since it is formed longer than the length of the provided second hole in the intersecting direction, even if there is a manufacturing error or the like at the installation position of the second hole provided at each end of the intersecting direction, Manufacturing error can be absorbed in the cross direction. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the manufacturing error in the position of the second hole from adversely affecting the positioning accuracy of the light source unit in the predetermined continuous direction with respect to the light guide member.

<Characteristic H4>
The gaming machine according to any one of features H0 to H3,
A curved holding portion (holding member 811) capable of holding the light guide curved portion that overlaps the rear side of the cover curved portion with respect to the cover curved portion while being pressed along the cover curved portion,
The light guide member is configured such that it can be integrated with the cover portion by the first mounting portion after the light guide curved portion is held by the curved holding portion. Machine.

In the gaming machine described in the feature H4, the light guide member is configured such that the light guide bending portion that is overlapped with the back side of the cover bending portion is bent by the bending holding portion before being integrated with the cover portion by the first mounting portion. The cover curved portion is held while being pressed along the cover curved portion. Therefore, when the light guide curved portion is manufactured by being deformed by a certain amount or more due to manufacturing variations or the like, the shape of the light guide curved portion is corrected to the shape of the cover curved portion by the curved holding portion, and It is possible to integrate the light guide member and the cover with the single mounting portion. Therefore, the shape of the light guide curved portion can be corrected within a certain range while allowing a large variation in manufacturing the light guide member including the light guide curved portion, and a predetermined image using the light guide member looks good. It can be displayed well.

<Characteristic H5>
A predetermined structure (reel device 710) is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the structure so as to be visible from the front side, and the cross section viewed from the predetermined direction side that intersects the front-rear direction in the gaming machine front view is the front side. A light guide member having a plate-like (or formed to have a substantially constant thickness) light guide curved portion (curved portion 715B1) that is curved and protrudes, and has a predetermined continuous direction (or plate When light is incident from a predetermined end side (end surfaces 715B4, 715B5) so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction in which the surfaces are continuous or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided. A light guide member (light guide plate 715B) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (design 743) on at least the light guide curved portion by the light;
The light guide member is provided so as to be overlapped with at least the front side of the light guide curved portion, and has the light transmittance that allows the predetermined image displayed by light emission on the light guide member to be visually recognized from the front side. A cover portion (outer cover 715A) having a curved cover curved portion (curved portion 715A1) along the portion,
A light source unit (light source units 812, 813) having light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member,
When one of the light source unit and the cover part is integrated with the other, a mounting part (through holes 841A, 841B) that allows positioning of the other in a direction along the predetermined continuous direction with respect to the other. , 843A, 843B, 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B),
The gaming machine, wherein the light guide member is integrated with the cover part via the light source unit by integrating the light source unit and the cover part with the mounting part.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In recent years, a pachinko machine has been known in which the production is diversified by providing a light guide plate for emitting and displaying a predetermined design by allowing light to enter from an end surface (for example, JP-A-2015-80625). ).

However, not a flat light guide plate but a light guide member having a curved plate-shaped portion (curved portion) may cause a problem at the time of assembly when unitized. For example, if the curved portion cannot be accurately manufactured into a shape as designed, there is a possibility that a predetermined design cannot be displayed in a good-looking manner. On the other hand, if the tolerance of the light guide member including the curved portion is reduced and it is attempted to be manufactured with high accuracy, the cost of the light guide member increases and the cost of the game machine increases. Further, if excessive force is applied so that the curved portion of the light guide plate is deformed, there is a possibility that the light source and the light guide member are displaced, and the light guide function is impaired.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in Feature H5, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a unit including a light guide member having a curved portion can be suitably assembled. That is, at a position where a predetermined structure is visible from the front side and overlaps with the front side of the structure portion, a cross section seen from a predetermined direction side that intersects the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine is curved and protrudes to the front side. A light guide member having a plate-shaped light guide curved portion is provided. The light guide member is capable of displaying a predetermined image at least on the light guide curved portion by the light when the light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction. Composed. A light emitting unit is provided in the light source unit so that light is incident on a predetermined end portion side of the light guide member. Therefore, when a predetermined structure including a shape that is curved and protrudes to the front side is arranged on the rear side of the light guiding curved portion, the distance is largely separated in front of the predetermined structure. Without displaying the predetermined image. Therefore, even if the player's viewpoint position changes due to the player's height or posture, the position at which a predetermined image is overlapped and displayed on the front side of a predetermined structure may be significantly displaced. Instead, a predetermined image can be displayed at an appropriate position.

Further, at least on the front side of the light guide curved portion of the light guide member, a cover portion having a curved cover curved portion along the light guide curved portion is provided in an overlapping manner. The cover portion has a light-transmitting property that allows a predetermined image displayed on the light guide member to be illuminated and displayed from the front side.

Here, since the light guide member is integrated with the cover part through the light source unit by integrating the light source unit and the cover part, it is possible to previously integrate the light source unit with the light guide member. The position of the light source with respect to the light guide member can be appropriately adjusted.

Further, when one of the light source unit and the cover portion is integrated with the other, the attachment portion is configured to allow positioning in the predetermined continuous direction with respect to the other in a predetermined range. There is. Therefore, even when the light guide curved portion is manufactured by being deformed due to manufacturing variations or the like, when the light guide member is integrated with the cover portion via the light source unit, a predetermined continuous direction is required. Since the mounting error is absorbed by the mounting portion, it is possible to largely allow the manufacturing variation of the light guide member along the predetermined continuous direction and to suppress the manufacturing cost of the light guide member including the curved portion.

<Characteristic J0>
A predetermined end portion side (so as to allow the light to travel along a predetermined continuous direction (or a predetermined continuous direction in which the plate surface is continuous or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided) that intersects the thickness direction. A light guide member (light guide plate 715B) having a light guide portion (curved portion 715B1) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (pattern 743) by light when light is incident from the end faces 715B4, 715B5),
A plurality of light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the side of the predetermined end of the light guide member;
The light incident on the light guide member from the light emitting means partially travels as weak light or travels, or is a light guide including a predetermined direction (regions D1 and D2) in which the light does not travel. And means (recess Z),
The light guide means shines more strongly than a portion extending in the predetermined direction on both sides inclined to one side and the other side around the light source along the plate surface of the light guide member with respect to the predetermined direction. A gaming machine characterized by guiding light from a light emitting means.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In recent years, a pachinko machine has been known in which the production is diversified by providing a light guide plate for emitting and displaying a predetermined design by allowing light to enter from an end surface (for example, JP-A-2015-80625). ).

However, the mode in which a predetermined design is displayed by the light guide plate (light guide member) shines uniformly according to the color of a light source such as an LED, and the variation in the mode in which light is displayed tends to be poor. There was a problem.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature J0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing diversification of image display modes by the light guide member. That is, a light guide member having a light guide section capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image by the light when light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction is provided. ing. A plurality of light emitting means for outputting light are provided so that the light is incident on a predetermined end portion side of the light guide member.

In addition, the light guiding means allows the light that has entered the light guiding member from the light emitting means to partially travel as weak light or to travel, or to be a light guiding including a predetermined direction in which the light does not travel. For this reason, the light guide means has a portion which shines more strongly than a portion extending in the predetermined direction on both sides inclined to one side and the other side around the light emitting means along the plate surface of the light guide member with respect to the predetermined direction. Can be provided. This makes it possible to make the light-guiding member illuminate in a non-uniform manner and at random, so that it is possible to realize diversification of image display modes by the light-guiding member.

Note that the predetermined image in the feature J0 may include at least an image displayed by the light output by the plurality of light emitting units.

<Characteristic J1>
A predetermined end portion side (so as to allow the light to travel along a predetermined continuous direction (or a predetermined continuous direction in which the plate surface is continuous or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided) that intersects the thickness direction. A light guide member (light guide plate 715B) having a light guide portion (curved portion 715B1) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (pattern 743) by light when light is incident from the end faces 715B4, 715B5),
A plurality of light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the side of the predetermined end of the light guide member;
The light incident on the light guide member from the light emitting means is separated into at least two directions (arrow F1, arrow F2, and arrow F3 directions) and propagates in the light guide member, and the separated light in each direction. A light guide means (recessed portion Z) configured to form a region (regions D1 and D2) which is weaker than the light or which the light does not reach between the game machine. ..

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In recent years, a pachinko machine has been known in which the production is diversified by providing a light guide plate for emitting and displaying a predetermined design by allowing light to enter from an end surface (for example, JP-A-2015-80625). ).

However, the mode in which a predetermined design is displayed by the light guide plate (light guide member) shines uniformly according to the color of a light source such as an LED, and the variation in the mode in which light is displayed tends to be poor. There was a problem.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature J1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can realize diversification of image display modes by the light guide member. That is, a light guide member having a light guide section capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image by the light when light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction is provided. ing. A plurality of light emitting means for outputting light are provided so that the light is incident on a predetermined end portion side of the light guide member.

In addition, the light guide means separates the light incident on the light guide member from the light emitting means into at least two directions and advances in the light guide member, and the light in each separated direction emits light weaker than the light. Alternatively, a region where the light does not reach can be formed. This makes it possible to make the light-guiding member illuminate in a non-uniform manner and at random, so that it is possible to realize diversification of image display modes by the light-guiding member.

The predetermined image in the feature J1 may include at least an image displayed by the light output by the plurality of light emitting units.

<Characteristic J2>
A gaming machine according to feature J0 or feature J1,
The light guide means includes two or more sides (sides Z1, Z2, Z3) formed on the end surface of the light guide member on the side of the predetermined end portion, and light from the light source among the two or more sides. A gaming machine characterized by being a recess provided with a top portion (left end C1 and right end C2) formed by two adjacent sides having different angles with the output direction.

In the gaming machine according to feature J1, the light guide means is at least two sides formed on the end surface of the light guide member on the side of the predetermined end portion, and among the two or more sides, a light source is used. Since it is a concave portion having a top portion formed by two adjacent sides having different angles formed with the output direction of light, it is possible to process the shape of the end portion of the light guiding member by processing the end portion of the light guiding member without attaching a dedicated component. The way the light shines can be random.

<Characteristic K0>
A variable display section (reel device 710) capable of variable display of a plurality of symbol rows,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the variable display unit variably displays the plurality of symbol columns, and then the variable execution unit (sub-control board 940) stops and displays the stopped symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. )When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed by the stop symbol corresponding to the first result by the variation executing means, a game more advantageous than the normal game state A game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a state,
During the variable display of the symbol by the variation execution unit, a symbol width change control unit (sub-control board 940) that changes the width of the symbol to a small value in a predetermined direction intersecting the variation direction of the symbol in which the variable display is performed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening (see, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

Such a conventional pachinko machine includes a display device (display unit), and on the display device, the variable display of the symbols is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display. As a result, the stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine in which the variable display of the symbols is performed on the display unit like the above gaming machine. For example, when the variable display is displayed large, the player can give a strong impression to the variable display by the large pattern, while the area where the variable display is performed is large with respect to the field of view depending on the player. There were times when it became too difficult to see the fluctuation display.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the characteristic K0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from having difficulty viewing the variable display. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, after the fluctuation display means performs the fluctuation display of the plurality of symbol rows on the fluctuation display portion, it is stopped and displayed in the combination of the symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. .. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of symbols showing the first result, the game control means causes a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state.

During the variation display of the symbol by the variation executing means, the symbol width change control means changes the width of the symbol in a predetermined direction intersecting the variation direction of the symbol for which the variation display is performed to be small. This makes it possible to reduce the area in which variable display is performed. By reducing the area in which the variable display is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty viewing the variable display.

<Characteristic K1>
A gaming machine described in the characteristic K0,
Holding means (main control board 920) for holding the execution of the variable display of the symbol by the variation executing means within a predetermined upper limit number of times,
During the variable display of the symbols by the variation executing means, and in a situation where the execution of the variation display is not suspended by the suspending means after the variation display, after the high-speed variation in the variation display and the variation display. Before the stop, the symbol width restoration control means (sub-control board 940) for greatly changing the width of the symbol that has been changed by the symbol width change control means, and a gaming machine.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the characteristic K1, in the situation where the variation display means is displaying the variation of the symbol, and the execution of the variation display is not suspended by the suspending means after the variation display, the high speed in the variation display is achieved. After the fluctuation and before the fluctuation display is stopped, the symbol width restoration control means largely changes the width of the symbol which is changed by the symbol width change control means.

Thereby, while the execution of the variable display is suspended, it is possible to maintain the width of the symbol that has been slightly changed by the symbol width change control means. Therefore, while the variable display of the suspended symbols is continuously executed, it is possible to keep the area in which the variable display is performed in an easy-to-see state.

<Characteristic K2>
The gaming machine described in the characteristic K0 or the characteristic K1,
When the width of the symbol is changed to be small by the symbol width change control device during the variable display of the symbol by the variation executing device, after the change, the entire width in the arrangement direction in the plurality of symbol rows is narrowed, A symbol display area control means for changing the display range in which the plurality of symbol columns are displayed to be small by moving the display position of the symbols constituting at least one symbol column among the plurality of symbol columns along the arrangement direction. A game machine having a (sub-control board 940).

In the case of the gaming machine described in the characteristic K2, when the width of the symbol is changed to a small value by the symbol width change control means during the variable display of the symbol by the change execution means, after the change, the display area control means, The display position of the symbols forming at least one symbol row of the plurality of symbol rows is moved along the arrangement direction so that the overall width in the row direction in the plurality of symbol rows becomes narrower, and thereby the plurality of symbols. The display range in which the column is displayed is changed to a smaller size. Therefore, by moving not only the fluctuation of the symbol width but also the display position of the symbol, the area in which the variable display is performed can be made smaller than the area where the symbol width is reduced.

<Characteristic K3>
The gaming machine according to any one of features K0 to K2,
The variable display section uses each of the plurality of symbol columns configured by arranging a plurality of the three-dimensional rotating bodies as one of the three-dimensional rotating bodies arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate. By rotating, it is configured to be able to change display,
At least a part of the plurality of rotating bodies that form the plurality of symbol rows has an extending/contracting mechanism that enables expansion/contraction in the predetermined direction that intersects the rotation direction of the rotating body (first reel). Body 1701, second reel body 1702) and an actuating means (drive solenoid) that is provided in the revolving body and acts on the peripheral side on the side surface substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the revolving body to extend and contract the expansion mechanism. 1711) and
The symbol width change control means actuates the actuating means of the revolving body during the acceleration period from the fluctuation stop of the fluctuation display of the plurality of symbol strings by the fluctuation executing means to the high speed fluctuation, and the expansion and contraction. A game machine characterized in that the width of the symbol is changed to be smaller by contracting the mechanism.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature K3, the variable display section has a three-dimensional rotating body arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate as one symbol row, and a plurality of rotating bodies including the rotating body are arranged side by side. Each of the plurality of symbol columns to be displayed is configured to be variably displayed by rotating the plurality of rotating bodies.

At least a part of the plurality of rotating bodies forming the plurality of symbol arrays is capable of expansion and contraction in a predetermined direction intersecting the rotation direction of the rotating body by the expansion and contraction mechanism. Is expanded and contracted by the actuation means provided in the turning body acting on the peripheral side of the side surface substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the turning body.

During the acceleration period from the fluctuation stop to the high speed fluctuation when the fluctuation display of the plurality of symbol rows by the fluctuation executing means, the symbol width change control means operates the operating means of the revolving body forming the symbol row. The width of the design is reduced by contracting the expansion/contraction mechanism.

Therefore, even when the symbol row is a three-dimensional rotating body, it is possible to reduce the area in which the variable display is performed, and by reducing the area in which the variable display is performed, the variable display is displayed to the player. It can suppress making it difficult to see.

Further, since the actuation of the actuating means is performed during the acceleration period from the fluctuation stop of the fluctuation display of the plurality of symbol rows to the reaching of the high-speed fluctuation, the actuating means operates the side surface substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotating body. The force acting on the peripheral edge side is likely to be applied evenly, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects in the contraction of the expansion and contraction mechanism that expands and contracts in a predetermined direction.

<Characteristic L0>
A predetermined structure (reel device 710) is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the structure so as to be visible from the front side, and the cross section viewed from the predetermined direction side that intersects the front-rear direction in the gaming machine front view is the front side. A light guide member having a plate-like (or formed to have a substantially constant thickness) light guide curved portion (curved portion 715B1) that is curved and protrudes, and has a predetermined continuous direction (or plate When light is incident from a predetermined end side (end surfaces 715B4, 715B5) so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction in which the surfaces are continuous or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided. A light guide member (light guide plate 715B) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (design 743) on at least the light guide curved portion by the light;
Light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the side of the predetermined end of the light guide member;
It is possible to change the light emission display of the light guide bending portion by the light incident from the light emitting means while the output of the light incident from the light emitting means to the predetermined end side is kept substantially constant. A game machine characterized in that it is provided with possible changing means (drive solenoid 1731).

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In recent years, a pachinko machine has been known in which the production is diversified by providing a light guide plate for emitting and displaying a predetermined design by allowing light to enter from an end surface (for example, JP-A-2015-80625). ).

However, the mode in which a predetermined design is displayed by the light guide plate (light guide member) is uniformly illuminated by the light incident from a light source such as an LED, and the variation in the mode displayed by the light guide tends to be poor. There was a problem that was.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature L0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can realize a variety of image display modes by the light guide member. That is, at a position where a predetermined structure is visible from the front side and overlaps with the front side of the structure portion, a cross section seen from a predetermined direction side that intersects the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine is curved and protrudes to the front side. A light guide member having a plate-shaped light guide curved portion is provided. The light guide member displays at least a predetermined image by the light when the light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction intersecting the thickness direction. It is configured to be capable of emitting light. A light emitting unit is provided so that light is incident on a predetermined end portion side of the light guide member.

In this way, since a predetermined image can be displayed on the light guiding curved portion, when a predetermined structure including a shape that curves and projects to the front side is arranged on the rear side of the light guiding curved portion, the predetermined image is displayed. A predetermined image can be displayed in front of the structure without a large distance. Therefore, even if the player's viewpoint position changes due to the player's height or posture, the position at which a predetermined image is overlapped and displayed on the front side of a predetermined structure may be significantly displaced. Instead, a predetermined image can be displayed at an appropriate position.

Further, the light emission display of the light guide curved portion by the light incident from the light emitting means is such that the output of the light incident from the light emitting means to the predetermined end portion side of the light guide member is kept substantially constant by the changing means. It is configured to change depending on the state. Therefore, it is difficult for the light-emitting curved portion to uniformly display the light emission, and it is possible to realize diversification of image display modes by the light-guiding member.

In the gaming machine according to feature L0, the change in the light emission display of the light guide bending section by the changing means is, for example, a change in the way the predetermined image light-emitted and displayed in the light guide bending section changes. It may be a change in the shining position of the image, or may be a change in the color of the image to be emitted and displayed.

<Characteristic L1>
A gaming machine according to feature L0,
The changing means changes the curvature of the light guide curved portion in a state where the positional relationship between the light emitting means and the predetermined end portion of the light guide member is kept substantially constant. A gaming machine, which enables a change in the light-emission display of the light-guiding curved portion by the light incident from the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine described in the feature L1, the light emission display of the light guide curved portion by the light incident from the light emitting means is changed by the changing means, and the positional relationship between the light emitting means and the predetermined end of the light guide member is substantially constant. It is configured to be changeable by changing the curvature of the light guide curved portion of the light guide member in the state of being kept at. Therefore, the installed light guide member can be used as it is to change the light emission display of the light guide curved portion.

<Characteristic M0>
A predetermined end portion side (so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction (or a predetermined continuous direction in which the plate surface is continuous or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided) that intersects the thickness direction). When light is incident from the upper end surface and the lower end surface of the light guide plate 1751, a first light guide member (light guide plate) having a first light guide portion capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined first image (picture 1761) by the light. 1751),
First light emitting means (light emitting means provided above and below the light guide plate 1751) for outputting light that is incident on the side of the predetermined end of the first light guide member;
A second light guide member provided on the front side or the rear side of the first light guide member, which is a predetermined continuous direction intersecting the thickness direction (or a predetermined continuous direction in which the plate surface is continuous, or When light is incident from a predetermined end side (upper end surface or lower end surface of the light guide plate 1771) so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided, the predetermined second image is generated by the light. A second light guide member (light guide plate 1771) having a second light guide portion capable of emitting and displaying the (design 1781) so as to overlap the first light guide portion;
Second light emitting means (light emitting means provided above and below the light guide plate 1771) for outputting light incident on the side of the predetermined end of the second light guide member;
At least one of the first light guide member and the second light guide member is connected to the first guide member so that one of the first light guide unit and the second light guide unit moves relatively to the other. A game machine comprising: a moving unit (a light guide plate supporting portion 1772, a gear 1773) for moving the optical member and the second light guiding member in a direction intersecting with the overlapping direction.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In recent years, a pachinko machine has been known in which the production is diversified by providing a light guide plate for emitting and displaying a predetermined design by allowing light to enter from an end surface (for example, JP-A-2015-80625). ).

However, since the display position on the light guide plate is fixed in the predetermined design in which light is displayed by the light guide plate (light guide member), there is a tendency that variations in the manner of displaying by light guide become poor. There was a point.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature M0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can realize a variety of image display modes by the light guide member. That is, when light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction that intersects the thickness direction, a light guide unit capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined first image by the light is provided. The 1st light guide member which has is provided. The first light emitting means is provided so that light is incident on a predetermined end portion side of the first light guide member.

When the light is incident on the front side or the rear side of the first light guide member from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction intersecting the thickness direction, the light causes a predetermined first A second light guide member having a light guide portion capable of emitting and displaying two images is provided. The second light emitting means is provided so that light is incident on a predetermined end portion side of the second light guide member.

At least one of the first light guide member and the second light guide member is moved by the moving means in a direction intersecting with the overlapping direction of the first light guide member and the second light guide member, whereby the first light guide member and the second light guide member are moved. One of the first light guide portion and the second light guide portion can be moved relative to the other. Since one of the first light guide portion and the second light guide portion is movable relative to the other, the first light guide member and the second light guide member are fixed (that is, one is relative to the other. Display mode by a combination of the first image and the second image visible to the player from the front of the first light guide member and the second light guide member, as compared with the case where the first image guide member and the second light guide member are provided. The variation of can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to realize diversification of image display modes by the light guide member.

<Characteristic N0>
A variable display unit (reel device 710, decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying the identification information in a variable manner,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the variation display unit variably displays the identification information, and then the variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) stops and displays the identification information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. ,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, the variation execution means stops and displays the identification information corresponding to the first result, and a special game state which is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated. Game control means (main control board 920) to
When the start condition is satisfied when the fluctuation display means displays the fluctuation, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. RAM), and a holding means (main control board 920) for holding the execution of the variation display corresponding to the information by the variation executing means,
A hold display unit (hold number display area 1810) capable of displaying hold displays (hold icons 1812) corresponding to the number of pieces of information for which execution of variable display is held by the holding means corresponding to the number of pieces of information. When,
When the new starting condition is satisfied while the execution of at least one variable display is suspended by the suspending means, the variable display has already been executed as the suspended display corresponding to the satisfaction of the new starting condition. The first hold display that is held is different from the first hold display according to the time interval from when the starting condition for the first hold display is satisfied until when the new starting condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized by comprising a hold display control means (sub-control board 940) capable of displaying the second hold display in the display mode on the hold display section.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, the starting condition is established by entering the starting opening provided in the game area, and the lottery is performed, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening (see, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in such a conventional gaming machine. For example, for a pachinko machine in play, the player determines the degree of ease of establishment of the start condition, based on the game played over a certain period of time, the number of times the start condition is satisfied with respect to the number of shot game balls. Although it may be sensuously grasped by the above, there is a possibility that it may be difficult to grasp the degree of ease of establishing a short-term starting condition at a certain time. When adjusting the firing force of the game ball, it is preferable to easily understand the ease with which short-term starting conditions are satisfied.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature N0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can grasp the degree of ease of establishing a short-term starting condition at a certain time. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variation execution means variably displays the identification information on the variation display portion, and then the identification information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stopped and displayed. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the stop display of the identification information corresponding to the first result, the game control means causes a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state.

When the start condition is satisfied when the fluctuation display means is performing the fluctuation display, the holding means stores the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means in a predetermined storage section, thereby storing the information. With the predetermined number as the upper limit, it is possible to suspend the change display means until the change display corresponding to the information is executed. The hold display corresponding to the number of pieces of information for which the execution of the variable display is held by the holding means is displayed on the hold display unit corresponding to the number of pieces of information.

When a new starting condition is satisfied while the execution of at least one variable display is being held by the holding means, the holding display control means has already changed the holding display corresponding to the establishment of the new starting condition. The first hold display for which execution of the display has been held and the first hold display according to the time interval from when the start condition for the first hold display is satisfied until the new start condition is satisfied A second hold display having a display mode different from that is displayed on the hold display unit.

Therefore, the player recognizes the time interval from the display state of the second hold display until the start condition corresponding to the second hold display is satisfied after the start condition for the first hold display is satisfied. You can With this, the player can suitably understand the degree of ease of establishing the starting condition, and for example, the degree of ease of establishing the short-term starting condition at a certain time.

<Feature N1>
A gaming machine according to feature N0,
When the new starting condition is satisfied while the execution of at least one variation display is suspended by the suspending unit, the identification performed by the variation executing unit in response to the establishment of the new starting condition. A variable time setting means is provided for setting the variable time of the variable display of the information to be different according to the time interval from the satisfaction of the starting condition for the first hold display to the satisfaction of the new starting condition. A gaming machine characterized by being present.

<Feature N2>
A gaming machine according to feature N0,
Execution of variation display of the variation time by the holding means so that the variation time of variation display of the identification information varies depending on the time interval from the satisfaction of the start condition to the establishment of the new start condition. Is provided with a variable time setting means for setting a value according to the number of the information held.

With the gaming machines described in the features N1 and N2, when a new starting condition is satisfied in a situation in which the execution of at least one variable display is suspended by the suspending means, the new starting is performed by the varying time setting means. The fluctuation display period of the fluctuation display of the identification information executed by the fluctuation executing means in response to the satisfaction of the condition is different depending on the time interval from the satisfaction of one start condition to the satisfaction of the new start condition. The change time of the change display of the identification information can be set according to the interval at which the start condition is satisfied.

<Feature P0>
A variable display unit (reel device 710, decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying the identification information in a variable manner,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the variation display unit variably displays the identification information, and then the variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) stops and displays the identification information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. ,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, the variation execution means stops and displays the identification information corresponding to the first result, and a special game state which is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated. Game control means (main control board 920) to
When the start condition is satisfied when the fluctuation display means displays the fluctuation, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. RAM), and a holding means (main control board 920) for holding the execution of the variation display corresponding to the information by the variation executing means,
A hold display unit (hold number display area 1810) capable of displaying hold displays (hold icons 1812) corresponding to the number of pieces of information for which execution of variable display is held by the holding means corresponding to the number of pieces of information. When,
In a situation where the execution of at least one variable display is suspended by the suspension means, a predetermined display (scheduled reservation icon 1811) corresponding to the satisfaction of the next start condition scheduled thereafter is displayed on the suspension display section. A game machine characterized in that it is provided with a hold display control means (sub-control board 940).

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, the starting condition is established by entering the starting opening provided in the game area, and the lottery is performed, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening (see, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in such a conventional gaming machine. For example, a player may not be able to recognize whether a lottery is performed for a pachinko machine in the game when the start condition is satisfied, or whether the lottery is not performed when the start condition is satisfied. is there.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature P0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to preferably recognize whether or not the lottery will be performed when the start condition is satisfied. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variation execution means variably displays the identification information on the variation display portion, and then the identification information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stopped and displayed. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the stop display of the identification information corresponding to the first result, the game control means causes a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state.

When the start condition is satisfied when the fluctuation display means is performing the fluctuation display, the holding means stores the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means in a predetermined storage section, thereby storing the information. With the predetermined number as the upper limit, it is possible to suspend the change display means until the change display corresponding to the information is executed. The hold display corresponding to the number of pieces of information for which the execution of the variable display is held by the holding means is displayed on the hold display unit corresponding to the number of pieces of information.

In a situation where the execution of the at least one variable display is suspended by the suspending means, the suspend display control means displays a predetermined display corresponding to the fulfillment of the next start condition scheduled thereafter on the suspend display portion. .. For this reason, the player can previously recognize the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the establishment of the next start condition, so that the progress status of the game can be easily recognized.

<Feature P1>
In the gaming machine according to feature P0, the hold display control means changes the display mode of the predetermined display according to the elapsed time since the start condition was last satisfied, and the next start condition is A gaming machine characterized by displaying the hold display corresponding to establishment of the next starting condition in a display form corresponding to a display form of the predetermined display when newly established.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature P1, the display mode of the predetermined display is changed by the hold display control means according to the elapsed time since the last start condition was satisfied, and the next start condition is newly updated. When it is satisfied, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the satisfaction of the next starting condition is determined.

Therefore, the display mode of the predetermined display that changes according to the elapsed time since the last start condition is satisfied is the hold display corresponding to the satisfaction of the next start condition when the next start condition is newly satisfied. The player can recognize the elapsed time from the last satisfaction of the starting condition to the satisfaction of the new starting condition from the determined pending display. Thereby, the player can grasp the degree of ease of establishing a short-term starting condition at a certain time. Therefore, when adjusting the position of the firing operation, it is possible to easily understand the ease with which the short-term starting condition is satisfied.

In particular, since the display mode of the hold display changes according to the elapsed time since the start condition was last satisfied, the player can see the change of the display mode from the last satisfaction of the start condition. The elapsed time can be grasped intuitively.

In the gaming machine described in the feature P1, "When the next start condition is newly satisfied, the display mode of the predetermined display is determined as the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the satisfaction of the next start condition. ``Yes'' means that the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the establishment of the next start condition does not necessarily need to be determined by taking over all of the display modes of the predetermined display, at least among the display modes of the predetermined display, The configuration may be such that a part or all of the portion changed according to the elapsed time since the start condition is finally established is succeeded and determined.

<Characteristic Q0>
A variable display unit (reel device 710, decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying the identification information in a variable manner,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the variation display unit variably displays the identification information, and then the variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) stops and displays the identification information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. ,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, the variation execution means stops and displays the identification information corresponding to the first result, and a special game state which is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated. Game control means (main control board 920) to
If the new start condition is not satisfied even after the predetermined first period has elapsed after the start condition is satisfied during a predetermined game period, a predetermined display (base state icon 1821) is displayed. And a display control means (sub-control board 940) for updating the display content of a predetermined display section (table state icon display area 1820).

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, the starting condition is established by entering the starting opening provided in the game area, and the lottery is performed, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening (see, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in such a conventional gaming machine. For example, a player may perceptually grasp the degree of ease of establishing a starting condition for a given pachinko machine based on a game played over a certain period of time, but it is difficult to satisfy the starting condition. If you feel it, it is difficult to judge whether it is due to chance or due to a malfunction of the platform.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature Q0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can easily judge the state of the gaming machine. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variation execution means variably displays the identification information on the variation display portion, and then the identification information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stopped and displayed. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the stop display of the identification information corresponding to the first result, the game control means causes a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state.

During the predetermined game period, even if the predetermined first period elapses after the start condition is satisfied, if a new start condition is not satisfied, a predetermined display of a predetermined display unit is displayed. The display content is updated by the display control means.

Therefore, as the display content of the predetermined display unit is updated, there is a high possibility that there is some trouble that makes it difficult to satisfy the starting condition. Therefore, the player should confirm the display content of the predetermined display unit. Thus, the state of the gaming machine can be determined.

Further, since the display content of the predetermined display unit is updated based on the satisfaction interval of the start condition during the predetermined game period, an event in which the satisfaction interval of the start condition is long due to the absence of a game is excluded. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the reliability of the display content of the predetermined display unit.

In the gaming machine described in the feature Q0, "during a predetermined game period" may be a period during which a player is playing a game, a period during which a game ball is being shot, or a game ball. May be during a period in which a condition for being fired is satisfied, during a predetermined game state (for example, during a normal game state), or during a period during which the variation display of the identification information is performed. It may be during a period in which a plurality of conditions including the above condition or other conditions are satisfied.

<Characteristic Q1>
The gaming machine described in the feature Q0,
The display control unit gradually displays the display content of a predetermined display unit (base state icon display area 1820) on which the predetermined display (base state icon 1821) is displayed in a predetermined direction (direction in which the base state icon 1821 decreases). A gaming machine characterized by being updated to.

Note that the display control means may update to a plurality of types of modes according to the number of times that the new start condition is not satisfied even after the predetermined first period has elapsed after the start condition is satisfied.

<Characteristic Q2>
The gaming machine described in the feature Q1,
The display control means,
During a predetermined game period, if the new start condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times before the predetermined second period shorter than the first period has elapsed after the start condition is satisfied, A game machine characterized by returning the display content of the predetermined display unit in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (a direction in which the platform state icon 1821 increases) by a predetermined amount.

With the gaming machine described in the feature Q2, it is predetermined that a new start condition is satisfied during a predetermined game period before a predetermined second period shorter than the first period has elapsed after the start condition was satisfied. When the number of times is continuous, the display content of the predetermined display unit for displaying the predetermined display is returned by the display control means in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction by a predetermined number of steps.

If the new start condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times before the second period elapses after the start condition is satisfied, it is unlikely that there is a problem that makes it difficult to satisfy the start condition. By returning the display content of the predetermined display unit by a predetermined step in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately reflected in the display content of the predetermined display unit.

<Feature R0>
Determination means (a part of the processing of the main control board 920) for determining whether or not a predetermined specific game start condition is satisfied when a predetermined start condition is satisfied,
Determination information display means (special symbol display device 471, 472) for displaying information corresponding to the determination result of the determination means,
When it is determined by the determination means that the specific game start condition is satisfied, a specific game state (special game state, probability variation game state and time saving game state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal game state is generated. Specific gaming state control means (each process for controlling the special gaming state, the probability variation gaming state and the time saving gaming state of the main control board 920),
A gaming machine provided with display control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling a display means for displaying a result corresponding to whether or not the specific game start condition is satisfied,
The specific game state control means,
As the specific game state,
A special game state in which a variable winning portion, to which a predetermined game value is given when a game ball enters, is controlled to a predetermined entry allowable posture,
A first game state (probability variation game state) in which the start condition is more easily established than the normal game state, and the specific game start condition is established with a higher probability than the normal game state,
At least a second game state (time saving game state) in which the start condition is more easily established than the normal game state and the specific game start condition is established with a lower probability than the first game state, ,
When it is determined by the determination means that the first specific game start condition (big hit 1) is satisfied, the special game state and the first game state are generated, and the first game state is next , Control to continue at least until the specific game start condition is satisfied,
In the first game state, when the determination unit determines that the second specific game start condition (big hit 2) is satisfied, the special game state and the second game state are generated, and the first game state is generated. 2 game state, the unit game based on the satisfaction of the start condition (one game from the start of the variable display to the result display) is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times), or the unit game of the predetermined number of times. At least continue during execution until the specific game start condition is satisfied, and when the unit game is executed the predetermined number of times in the second game state, control is performed to shift to a normal game state,
The display control means,
Display contents displayed when the second specific game start condition is satisfied in the first game state and when the second specific game start condition is not satisfied in the first game state (battle standby Is continuously displayed, and after the unit game is executed a predetermined number of times or more (80 times) in the second game state transitioned by the establishment of the second specific game start condition, Means for displaying a predetermined performance display (battle defeat performance display) corresponding to the satisfaction of the second specific game start condition when the specific game start condition is not satisfied in a unit game of a predetermined number of times or more. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In a conventional typical pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting opening provided in the game area and a starting prize is awarded, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. Further, it is known that after the special game state, a transition is made to a probability variation game state or a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time saving game state, and then returns to the normal game state.

Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, in the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed. Then, during the variable display of the symbols, it is known that various character symbols and the like are displayed for effect to suggest to the player the degree of expectation of a big hit according to the type of the displayed symbol symbols. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-153699).

However, if the probability of transition to the advantageous game state or the probability of continuing the advantageous game state is set to be high, the emissivity will be high, so it is sometimes desirable to set the probability to be low. On the other hand, if the probability of transition to the advantageous game state or the continuation probability is set low, and the probability of transition from the advantageous game state to the normal game state is set high, the effect display suggesting the transition to the normal game state is correspondingly set. The execution frequency becomes high, and it is possible that the player is discouraged from continuing the game by visually confirming the effect display, and may move to a gaming machine having high emissivity. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to perform a suitable effect display for the player while suppressing the probability of transition to the advantageous game state and the probability of continuing the advantageous game state to be low.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature R0, when the first specific game start condition is satisfied, the special game state and the first game state as the specific game states occur, and the second specific state in the first game state is generated. When the game start condition is satisfied, the special game state and the second game state occur. This second game state continues at least until the unit game based on the satisfaction of the starting condition is executed a predetermined number of times, or the specific game start condition is satisfied during the execution of the unit game of the predetermined number of times.

Then, when the second specific game start condition is satisfied in the first game state, the display content displayed when the second specific game start condition is not satisfied in the first game state is continuously displayed. To be done. Therefore, even if the player visually recognizes the display content of the display means, he/she cannot recognize that the first game state has transitioned to the second game state, and after the unit game is executed a predetermined number of times or more. By visually observing a predetermined effect display, the second specific game start condition is satisfied, and when the unit game is finished a predetermined number of times, it is possible to recognize with a delay that the game state returns to the normal game state.

On the other hand, even if the game state shifts to the second game state, if the specific game start condition is satisfied before the predetermined effect display is displayed, another game state such as the first game state is passed through the special game state. Or the second game state is started again, and in this case, the predetermined effect display at the scheduled timing is not displayed. Therefore, for the player, by visually recognizing the predetermined effect display, the situation in which the second specific game start condition is satisfied and the possibility of returning to the normal game state is increased is recognized by the display content. Opportunities can be reduced. Therefore, of the satisfaction of the specific game start condition, the probability of visually recognizing the predetermined effect display can be suppressed to be lower than the probability of the satisfaction of the second specific game start condition of returning to the normal game state. The probability that the second specific game start condition is satisfied is set low, and it is possible to easily give the impression that the game machine has a high probability that the specific game state will continue. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a performance display suitable for a player while suppressing the probability of transition to an advantageous game state and the probability of continuation of an advantageous game state.

It is to be noted that the display control means to continuously display the displayed content means that the display mode of the character is displayed when the character is displayed, and the second specific game start condition is set in the first game state. It is sufficient that the unit game in the case of being established and the unit game executed before the unit game are the same as long as they can be visually recognized by the player as long as no change occurs, and they are always completely the same. Not only the case but also the case may be different. Further, the display content that is continuously displayed is not limited to the case where the character is displayed, and as the variable display of the symbols, the display in which the variable display is executed and the substantially same result display is performed in the substantially same variable time. It may be the content.

Further, the probability of displaying the predetermined effect display by the means for displaying the predetermined effect display of the display control means is a unit of a predetermined number of times or more in the second game state shifted by the establishment of the second specific game start condition. After the game is executed, if the specific game start condition is not satisfied in the unit game over the predetermined number of times, the probability of 100%, that is, a predetermined effect display is always displayed. However, it is only necessary to display the predetermined effect display with a high probability exceeding at least 50%, and it is preferable to set the predetermined effect display with a high probability exceeding 70%, and with a high probability exceeding 90%. It is preferable to set to display a predetermined effect display.

<Feature R1>
A gaming machine according to feature R0, wherein the display control means is
If the specific game start condition is not satisfied until the last or near-predetermined unit game of the predetermined number of times in the second game state is executed, the predetermined or predetermined number of unit games are performed. The first effect that causes the display means to display the first effect display corresponding to the establishment of the second specific game start condition, which is the effect display in which the character moves and is to be shifted to the second game state. Control means,
In the case where the first specific game start condition is satisfied before the last unit game of the predetermined number of times in the second game state or a predetermined number of unit games close to the last is executed, the first specific game is satisfied. In a unit game in which the start condition is satisfied, a second effect control for causing the display means to display a second effect display corresponding to the satisfaction of the first specific game start condition in the effect display in which the predetermined character operates Means and
In the unit game in which the second specific game start condition is satisfied in the first game state, the effect display in which the predetermined character operates is not displayed on the display means, and the predetermined display that is displayed in the first game state is made. And a predetermined display continuation means for continuously displaying the display content of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature R1, the player can know which specific game start condition is satisfied by the effect that the same character operates, and the specified specific game start condition is partially satisfied. It can be easily known by the common performance contents. Further, even if the second specific game start condition is satisfied, if the first specific game start condition is satisfied within a certain period thereafter, the second effect display is executed, and the game state shifts to the normal game state. It is possible to avoid visually recognizing the first effect display corresponding to the establishment of the second specific game start condition which has become, and not to recognize the establishment of the second specific game start condition. Therefore, it is easy to give the impression that the first gaming state has continued, and to know the situation where the first gaming state has transitioned to the second gaming state or the transition to the normal gaming state is approaching. Opportunity can be suppressed.

<Feature R2>
The gaming machine described in the feature R0 or R1,
The display means includes a display unit capable of variably displaying identification information,
The display control means repeatedly displays, as the predetermined display content, a short-term variable display (variable display of 5 seconds or less or variable display of 2 seconds or less) every time the unit game is executed. And the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature R2, even if the player visually recognizes the contents of the variable display, it is not necessary to visually recognize the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. It is possible to make it easier to give an impression as to whether the gaming state is continuing.

<Feature R3>
A gaming machine according to feature R2,
The display control means executes, as the variable display for the short time, a specific variable display when the second specific game start condition is satisfied in the first game state, before and after the variable display. A gaming machine, which displays in a shorter time than a fluctuation time of a normal fluctuation display when the specific game start condition is not satisfied.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature R3, the specific variable display when the second specific game start condition is satisfied in the first game state is a variable display executed before and after the variable display. It is displayed in a shorter time than the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation display when the specific game start condition is not satisfied. Therefore, even if a special game state that ends in a short time is set as the special game state during the time difference of the fluctuation time, it is difficult for the player to recognize the occurrence of the special game state. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the variable display of the unit game in which the second specific game start condition is satisfied and the special game state generated by the unit game, and whether the first game state is continued. It is possible to further give the impression of.

<Feature R4>
A gaming machine according to feature R3,
When the second specific game start condition is satisfied, the specific game state control means is a special game state different from when the first specific game start condition is satisfied, and the specific variation display And a gaming machine characterized by generating a special game state for a short time which ends at a time substantially the same as the time difference of the normal variable display.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature R4, it is more difficult for the player to recognize the establishment of the second specific game start condition, and it is easier to give the impression that the first gaming state is continuing. be able to.

<Feature S0>
Determination means (a part of the processing of the main control board 920) for determining whether or not a predetermined specific game start condition is satisfied when a predetermined start condition is satisfied,
Determination information display means (special symbol display device 471, 472) for displaying information corresponding to the determination result of the determination means,
When it is determined by the determination means that the specific game start condition is satisfied, a specific game state (special game state, probability variation game state and time saving game state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal game state is generated. Specific gaming state control means (each process for controlling the special gaming state, the probability variation gaming state and the time saving gaming state of the main control board 920),
A gaming machine comprising: a display control means for controlling display contents including a display means for displaying a result corresponding to whether or not the specific game start condition is satisfied,
The specific game state control means (sub control board 940),
When it is determined by the determination means that the specific game start condition of restriction on the number of times (big hit 2) is established, the unit game (variation) based on the establishment of the start condition is set as the specific game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. (1 game from display start to result display) is executed a predetermined number of times, or at least a number-of-times limited game state is continued until the specific game start condition is satisfied during execution of the unit game of the predetermined number of times. Control to generate,
The display control means,
If the specific game start condition is not satisfied until the unit game is executed a predetermined number of times (80 times) of the predetermined number of times in the number-of-times limited game state, a predetermined character operates. A first display control is performed which causes the display means to display a first effect display (battle defeat) corresponding to the establishment of the specific game start condition of the number-of-times limitation, which is a display and shifts to the number-of-times limitation game state. Production control means,
It is an effect display in which a predetermined character operates when the specific game start condition is satisfied before the final or near-predetermined unit game of the predetermined number of times in the limited number of times game state is executed. Second effect control means for controlling the display means to display a second effect display (battle victory) corresponding to the establishment of the specific game start condition.
And a period effect control means for performing a period display (invincible time and invincible period display) indicating a predetermined fixed effect period when the number of times the unit game is executed remains above a certain number in the number-limited game state. A game machine characterized in that during the fixed production period, the second production display is displayed and the production display in which the predetermined character operates is executed only when the specific game start condition is satisfied.

In a conventional typical pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting opening provided in the game area and a starting prize is awarded, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. Further, it is known that after the special game state, a transition is made to a probability variation game state or a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time saving game state, and then returns to the normal game state.

Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, in the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed. In addition, display conditions (so-called mission) such as an instruction to display a predetermined effect display during variable display are issued, and, for example, a display of "Let's reach with the symbol of (7)" is displayed on the display screen. In some cases, when a production display satisfying the instruction is displayed on the display screen in a variable display that is executed during the display period, then a production that decides to be a big hit is performed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-136553). See the bulletin).

However, as a control of the effect display in which the display condition is given, the effect display is controlled not to be displayed on the display screen unless a predetermined lottery is won. For this reason, even if the player is interested in the effect contents, there may be a case where the contents cannot be confirmed. In this case, there is a possibility that you may be anxious about the content of the production, or, in reality, you overlooked the production even though it was displayed and overlooked the big hit. is there.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature S0, it is possible to provide the gaming machine capable of suitably executing the effect display control in which the display condition is given. That is, in the number-of-times limited game state, if the specific game start condition is not satisfied until the last or near-predetermined unit game of the predetermined number of times is executed, it is a performance display in which a predetermined character operates. Since the effect display in which the predetermined character that causes the display means to display the first effect display corresponding to the non-establishment of the specific game start condition is executed after the fixed effect period has elapsed, the player determines the effect. If the game in the advantageous game state is continued after the lapse of the period, the effect can be surely confirmed by the first effect display. Further, since the period display showing the final production period is performed when the number of times of execution of the unit game remains above a certain number in the number-limited game state, the first production display is executed after the end of the final production period. Can be set to. Then, if the specific game start condition is satisfied within the fixed effect period, the second effect display is displayed and the effect display in which the predetermined character is operated is executed. It is possible to present a display condition such as displaying a predetermined character, and provide the player with game playability in which a special game state occurs when the display condition is satisfied. Therefore, after the period display is displayed, it is possible to generate an opportunity for the player to visually confirm the effect display in which the predetermined character is operated, and the player is dissatisfied with the effect contents. It is possible to reduce the situation in which the player holds the game and make it easy to continue the game.

<Feature S1>
The gaming machine described in the feature S0,
The period effect display control means is for performing a plurality of types of period display showing fixed effect periods having different period lengths, and the number of remaining unit games in the number-of-times limited game state is a predetermined number or more. A gaming machine characterized by performing a period display including a period display of a long fixed production period selected in a case.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature S1, a plurality of types of period displays showing fixed effect periods having different period lengths are displayed, and as a part thereof, it is selected when the remaining number of unit games is equal to or more than a predetermined number. Since the period display of the long fixed effect period is included, it is possible to add the game playability of estimating the remaining number of times of the unit game in the number-limited game state by the displayed period display.

The number of remaining unit games in the number-limited game state is the unit game in which the specific game start condition is not established even if the start condition is satisfied in the number-limited game state, and the variable display is still executed. It may be the number of remaining unit games that have not been played (may not be started or have not ended).

<Feature T0>
A game area (game area) in which the game balls that have entered from the specified entrance flow down,
A plurality of ball entrances (general winning devices 2439A, 2439B, etc.) provided in the game area, into which game balls can enter
When a game ball enters a predetermined entrance of the plurality of entrances, a privilege giving means (main control board) for giving a predetermined privilege according to the entrance into which the game ball entered 920),
Setting storage means (main control board 920) that stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in a game. RAM) and input means (rear surface setting switch) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities. 905, initialization switch 907),
Setting changing means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means,
Setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means when a predetermined condition regarding entry of a game ball into the predetermined entrance is established among the plurality of entrances. A game machine characterized by comprising setting output means (main control board 920, sub-control board 940) for outputting.

In the gaming machine described in the feature T0, the "predetermined condition regarding entry of the game ball into the predetermined entrance" may include, for example, one or more predetermined ones of the plurality of entrances. A game ball enters the entrance of the player, a game ball enters a predetermined order of two or more entrances of the plurality of entrances in a predetermined order, among the plurality of entrances It is updated according to the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into one or more predetermined entrances, and the entry into a predetermined entrance of a plurality of entrances. That a predetermined condition is satisfied with respect to the number-of-entry information to be entered, or the correspondence information to be counted in correspondence with the number-of-entry information, a predetermined one of a plurality of entrances during a predetermined game period. Or, even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start condition based on the entry of the game ball into the two or more entrances has been satisfied, a new predetermined start condition is not satisfied. The number of occurrences is included.

<Feature U0>
A game area (game area) in which the game balls that have entered from the specified entrance flow down,
A plurality of ball entrances (general winning devices 2439A, 2439B, etc.) provided in the game area, into which game balls can enter
When a game ball enters a predetermined entrance of the plurality of entrances, a privilege giving means (main control board) for giving a predetermined privilege according to the entrance into which the game ball entered 920),
Setting storage means (main control board 920) that stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in a game. RAM),
Input means (backside setting switch 905, initialization) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities. Switch 907),
Setting changing means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means,
Setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means when a predetermined condition including entry of the game ball into the predetermined entrance is established among the plurality of entrances. And a setting output means (main control board 920, sub-control board 940) for outputting the game machine.

As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function capable of setting a winning probability in a lottery for transition from a normal gaming state to a gaming state that is advantageous to a player. In a typical conventional gaming machine having such a function, the manager of the game arcade or the like can change the winning probability setting by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, (See Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-202870).

However, there is still room for improvement in the game playability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery, such as the winning probability in the game state transition lottery, can be set in multiple stages.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the characteristics T0 and U0, it is possible to provide the gaming machine capable of suitably improving the playability. That is, the setting storage means stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in a game. It The operation information corresponding to the operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input means. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input means.

Within the game area where the game balls that have entered from the specified entrance flow down, there are provided multiple entrances into which the game balls can enter, and among these multiple entrances, a predetermined entrance When a game ball enters, the privilege granting means grants a predetermined privilege according to the entrance into which the game ball entered. When a predetermined condition regarding entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance of a plurality of entrances is satisfied, setting output information corresponding to probability information stored in the setting storage means is output by the setting output means. To be done. Therefore, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, information corresponding to the probability currently set as the lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in a predetermined lottery is suggested to the player based on the output from the setting output means. can do. Therefore, the player can add the game playability by which the probability information about the gaming machine under the game is estimated through the establishment of the predetermined condition including the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entrance. For example, the probability information estimated as one of the selection factors as to whether to continue the game or to move to another game machine, considering whether the game machine is suitable for one's taste or a different game machine. Since it is possible to use, it is possible to improve the playability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

In addition, in order for the player to fulfill the predetermined condition for estimating the probability information, it is necessary to establish the predetermined condition regarding the entrance of the game ball into the predetermined entrance in the game area. be able to. Therefore, in a gaming machine that tends to pay attention to a lottery result such as a game state transition lottery, it is possible to increase the opportunity to pay attention to the entry of the game ball into a predetermined entrance, and the predetermined entry It is possible to improve the playability in a gaming machine that utilizes the flow of the game balls, such as diversifying the game by arranging the ball openings and setting the number.

Particularly, in the gaming machine described in the characteristic U0, when a predetermined condition including entry of the game ball into a predetermined entrance of the plurality of entrances is satisfied, the setting storage means stores the setting. Since the setting output information corresponding to the probability information is output by the setting output means, the player predetermines information corresponding to the probability currently set as a lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in a predetermined lottery. It can be obtained as a privilege to enter the game ball into the entrance. Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying the game ball entering the predetermined entrance.

<Feature U1>
A gaming machine according to feature U0,
The setting output means, as at least a part of the predetermined condition, that the game balls enter the two or more predetermined entrances of the plurality of entrances in a predetermined order. The game machine characterized in that the setting output information is output under the condition.

In the gaming machine described in the feature U1, if the game balls enter the predetermined two or more entrances of the plurality of entrances in a predetermined order, a predetermined condition (ie, , Setting output information corresponding to probability information stored in the setting storage means as at least a part of predetermined conditions including entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance of the plurality of entrances) is established Is output by the setting output means. As a result, the player is currently set as a lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in a predetermined lottery as a privilege that the game balls are introduced into two or more predetermined entrances in a predetermined sequence. It is possible to enjoy the game nature of obtaining information corresponding to the probability of being played. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game in which the game balls enter the two or more predetermined entrances in the predetermined order.

<Characteristic V0>
Launching means (launching device 330) for launching a game ball,
A game area (game area) in which a game ball that has been launched by the launch means and entered from a predetermined entrance flows down,
A ball entrance (general winning devices 2439A, 2439B) provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter,
Privilege granting means (main control board 920) for granting a predetermined privilege when a game ball enters the ball entrance,
Setting storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) that stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a predetermined lottery result being selected in a predetermined lottery in a game. ) And input means (backside setting switch 905, which can input operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities. Initialization switch 907),
Setting changing means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means,
An entry number storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) that stores entry number information (general winning number) updated according to the entry of the game ball into the entrance.
A predetermined condition including at least a condition to be satisfied corresponding to the approach number information stored in the approach number storage means or the correspondence information (nail state level) counted corresponding to the approach number information is satisfied. In this case, the gaming machine is provided with setting output means (main control board 920, sub-control board 940) for outputting setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means. ..

As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function capable of setting a winning probability in a lottery for transition from a normal gaming state to a gaming state that is advantageous to a player. In a typical conventional gaming machine having such a function, the manager of the game arcade or the like can change the winning probability setting by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, (See Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-202870).

However, there is still room for improvement in the game playability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery, such as the winning probability in the game state transition lottery, can be set in multiple stages.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature V0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the playability. That is, the setting storage means stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in a game. It The operation information corresponding to the operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input means. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thereby, the lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery can be changed to information corresponding to the probability according to the operation information input by the input means.

In the game area where the game balls that have been launched by the launching means and entered from the predetermined entrance flow down, there is provided a ball entrance into which the game ball can enter, and when the game ball enters the ball entrance, The privilege granting means grants a predetermined privilege corresponding to the entrance. When a predetermined condition regarding entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance is satisfied, setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage unit is output by the setting output unit. Therefore, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, information corresponding to the probability currently set as the lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in a predetermined lottery is suggested to the player based on the output from the setting output means. can do. Therefore, the player can add the game playability by which the probability information about the gaming machine under the game is estimated through the establishment of the predetermined condition including the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entrance. For example, the probability information estimated as one of the selection factors as to whether to continue the game or to move to another game machine, considering whether the game machine is suitable for one's taste or a different game machine. Since it is possible to use, it is possible to improve the playability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

In addition, in order for the player to fulfill the predetermined condition for estimating the probability information, it is necessary to establish the predetermined condition regarding the entrance of the game ball into the predetermined entrance in the game area. be able to. Therefore, in a gaming machine that tends to pay attention to a lottery result such as a game state transition lottery, it is possible to increase the opportunity to pay attention to the entry of the game ball into a predetermined entrance, and the predetermined entry It is possible to improve the playability in a gaming machine that utilizes the flow of the game balls, such as diversifying the game by arranging the ball openings and setting the number.

Further, the entry number storage means stores entry number information updated according to the entry of the game ball into the entrance. Setting corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied with respect to the number-of-entry information stored in the number-of-entry storage means or correspondence information counted corresponding to the number-of-entry information The output information is output by the setting output means. Since the entry number information and the correspondence information are information that reflects the entry status of the game ball into the entrance, a predetermined result is selected in a predetermined lottery according to the entry status of the game ball into the entrance. It is possible to output the information corresponding to the currently set probability as the selected lottery probability.

Thereby, for example, when the predetermined condition is a value indicating that the number of entries and the correspondence information indicate that the performance of the gaming machine may not be the designed value with respect to the entry of the gaming ball into the entrance, Therefore, it is possible to indicate that there is a possibility of suffering a disadvantage, and the information output by the setting output means is also used to make the player judge whether or not the game is continued by the gaming machine in the game. It becomes possible.

<Feature X0>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying identification information,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entrance as establishment of a predetermined start condition,
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit variably displays the identification information, and then the variation execution is performed to stop and display the identification information (stop symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means. Means (sub-control board 940),
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, the variation executing means stops and displays the identification information corresponding to the first result (stop symbol indicating the first result), which is advantageous over the normal game state. Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a different game state,
Of the plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery, the predetermined probability Setting storage means (main control) that stores probability information corresponding to the probability of being selected as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the lottery or the probability of being set as the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery. (RAM of substrate 920) and input means (rear surface) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities. Setting switch 905, initialization switch 907),
Setting changing means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means,
During a predetermined game period, even if a predetermined first period elapses after the start condition is satisfied, a predetermined condition is satisfied, including a situation in which the new start condition is not satisfied occurs a predetermined number of times. In this case, the gaming machine is provided with setting output means (main control board 920, sub-control board 940) for outputting setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means. ..

As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function capable of setting a winning probability in a lottery for transition from a normal gaming state to a gaming state that is advantageous to a player. In a typical conventional gaming machine having such a function, the manager of the game arcade or the like can change the winning probability setting by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, (See Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-202870).

However, there is still room for improvement in the game playability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery, such as the winning probability in the game state transition lottery, can be set in multiple stages.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature X0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the playability. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variation execution means variably displays the identification information on the display unit, and then the identification information corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is stopped and displayed. .. At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined first result, a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after being stopped and displayed with the identification information corresponding to the first result. To do.

The setting storage means has a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability that a first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. Among them, probability information corresponding to the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the probability that the predetermined result is selected as the lottery probability in the second lottery is stored. The operation information corresponding to the operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input means. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input means.

When a predetermined condition regarding entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance is satisfied, setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage unit is output by the setting output unit. Therefore, it corresponds to the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the probability currently set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery. Information can be suggested to the player based on the output by the setting output means. Therefore, the player can add the game playability by which the probability information about the gaming machine under the game is estimated through the establishment of the predetermined condition including the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entrance. For example, the probability information estimated as one of the selection factors as to whether to continue the game or to move to another game machine, considering whether the game machine is suitable for one's taste or a different game machine. Since it is possible to use, it is possible to improve the playability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

In addition, in order for the player to fulfill the predetermined condition for estimating the probability information, it is necessary to establish the predetermined condition regarding the entrance of the game ball into the predetermined entrance in the game area. be able to. Therefore, in a gaming machine that tends to pay attention to a lottery result such as a game state transition lottery, it is possible to increase the opportunity to pay attention to the entry of the game ball into a predetermined entrance, and the predetermined entry It is possible to improve the playability in a gaming machine that utilizes the flow of the game balls, such as diversifying the game by arranging the ball openings and setting the number.

Further, during a predetermined game period, even if a predetermined first period elapses after the start condition is satisfied, if a new start condition is not satisfied for a predetermined number of times, it is stored in the setting storage means. Setting output information corresponding to the probability information is output by the setting output means. A situation in which a new start condition is not established even after a lapse of a predetermined first period after the start condition is established is an unfavorable situation for the player, and compared with the case where a game is played in another gaming machine. May suffer disadvantages. On the other hand, under the circumstance, it is possible to make the player judge whether or not the game by the game machine in the game is continued by utilizing the information output by the setting output means.

In place of the description of the setting output means in the gaming machine described in the feature X0, when a predetermined condition including entry of the game ball into a predetermined entrance is established as the satisfaction of a predetermined start condition is satisfied. A setting output unit for outputting setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage unit may be provided.

<Characteristic Y0>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying identification information,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entrance as establishment of a predetermined start condition,
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit variably displays the identification information, and then the variation execution is performed to stop and display the identification information (stop symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means. Means (sub-control board 940),
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, the variation executing means stops and displays the identification information corresponding to the first result (stop symbol indicating the first result), which is advantageous over the normal game state. Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a different game state,
Of the plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery, the predetermined probability Setting storage means (main control) that stores probability information corresponding to the probability of being selected as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the lottery or the probability of being set as the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery. (RAM of substrate 920) and input means (rear surface) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities. Setting switch 905, initialization switch 907),
Setting changing means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means,
At least a part of the period from when the start condition is obtained in which the first result is obtained in the predetermined lottery to when the change execution means performs stop display of the identification information corresponding to the first result. The effect selection means (main control board 920, sub-control, which selects the effect of the effect time according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means, from among a plurality of kinds of effects having different effect times. Control board 940),
An effect display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying the effect selected by the effect selecting means on the display section, and a gaming machine.

As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function capable of setting a winning probability in a lottery for transition from a normal gaming state to a gaming state that is advantageous to a player. In a typical conventional gaming machine having such a function, the manager of the game arcade or the like can change the winning probability setting by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, (See Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-202870).

However, there is still room for improvement in the game playability of the gaming machine in which a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state transition lottery, can be set in multiple stages. On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature Y0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the playability. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variation execution means variably displays the identification information on the display unit, and then the identification information corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is stopped and displayed. .. At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined first result, a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after being stopped and displayed with the identification information corresponding to the first result. To do.

The setting storage means has a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability that a first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. Among them, probability information corresponding to the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the probability that the predetermined result is selected as the lottery probability in the second lottery is stored. The operation information corresponding to the operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input means. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input means.

The effect of the effect time corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means is selected from a plurality of kinds of effects having different effect times, and the effect selection means determines the start condition in which the first result is obtained in the predetermined lottery. It is selected as an effect composed of at least a part of the period from the establishment to the stop display of the identification information corresponding to the first result by the variation executing means, and is displayed on the display unit by the effect display control means. It

Therefore, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the probability that is currently set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery is predetermined. A production consisting of at least a part of the period from when the starting condition for obtaining the first result in the lottery is established until the change execution means performs stop display of the identification information corresponding to the first result. Will be reflected in the production time. Therefore, the player infers, from the effect time of the effect, the probability currently set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery. Can be added. For example, the probability information estimated as one of the selection factors as to whether to continue the game or to move to another game machine, considering whether the game machine is suitable for one's taste or a different game machine. Since it is possible to use, it is possible to improve the playability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

Moreover, since the player estimates the probability information, it is possible to increase the chances of paying attention to the length of the presentation time. For this reason, in a gaming machine that tends to pay attention to a lottery result such as a game state transition lottery, it is possible to increase the number of objects to be noticed, so that it is possible to improve the game performance of the gaming machine that uses the flow of the game ball.

<Characteristic Y1>
A gaming machine according to feature Y0,
The effect selecting unit selects an effect with a probability that an effect having the longest effect time among the plurality of kinds of effects is likely to be executed with respect to the probability that is most advantageous to the player among the plurality of effects. A gaming machine.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature Y1, among the multiple probabilities that can be set, the probability that is most advantageous to the player is selected with the probability that the production with the longest production time among the multiple types of production is likely to be executed. Therefore, the player can expect that the most advantageous probability is set when the effect is performed for a long time.

<Characteristic Y2>
A gaming machine according to feature Y0 or feature Y1,
An operation unit (press operation device 261) that can be operated by the player is provided,
The effect selected by the effect selecting means is the identification information corresponding to the first result by the variation executing means after the start condition for obtaining the first result in the predetermined lottery is satisfied. With a special effect executed when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit at a predetermined operation time set within an executable period of the effect including at least a part of the period until the stop display is performed. A gaming machine characterized by being.

If it's a gaming machine with characteristics Y2,
A performance consisting of at least a part of a period from when the starting condition in which the first result is obtained by the predetermined lottery is satisfied until the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation executing means. The operation time is set within the feasible period. The effect selected by the effect selecting means is a special effect executed when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit at the operation time. Therefore, the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit at the operation time, and from the effect time of the special effect executed based on the operation, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability. The probability currently set as the lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be estimated.

<Characteristic Z0>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of variably displaying identification information,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entrance as establishment of a predetermined start condition,
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit variably displays the identification information, and then the stop display of the identification information (stop symbol) corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit is executed (sub-control board). 940),
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, the variation executing means stops and displays the identification information corresponding to the first result (stop symbol indicating the first result), which is advantageous over the normal game state. Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a different game state,
Of the plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery, the predetermined probability Setting storage means (main control) that stores probability information corresponding to the probability of being selected as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the lottery or the probability of being set as the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery. (RAM of substrate 920) and input means (rear surface) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities. Setting switch 905, initialization switch 907),
Setting changing means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means,
Control execution means (main control board 920, sub-control) for executing control according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means when a predetermined condition including a condition that can be satisfied during the special game state is satisfied. A substrate 940), and a gaming machine.

As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function capable of setting a winning probability in a lottery for transition from a normal gaming state to a gaming state that is advantageous to a player. In a typical conventional gaming machine having such a function, the manager of the game arcade or the like can change the winning probability setting by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, (See Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-202870).

However, there is still room for improvement in the game playability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery, such as the winning probability in the game state transition lottery, can be set in multiple stages.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine having the feature Z0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the game playability. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variation execution means variably displays the identification information on the display unit, and then the identification information corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is stopped and displayed. .. At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined first result, a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after being stopped and displayed with the identification information corresponding to the first result. To do.

The setting storage means has a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability that a first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. Among them, probability information corresponding to the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the probability that the predetermined result is selected as the lottery probability in the second lottery is stored. The operation information corresponding to the operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input means. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input means.

When a predetermined condition including a condition that can be satisfied in the special game state is satisfied, the control execution unit executes the control according to the probability information stored in the setting storage unit. Therefore, the player, based on the contents revealed by the control by the control execution means, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the lottery probability or the second lottery in which the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery. It is possible to add a game property for estimating a probability currently set as a lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected. For example, the probability information estimated as one of the selection factors as to whether to continue the game or to move to another game machine, considering whether the game machine is suitable for one's taste or a different game machine. Since it is possible to use, it is possible to improve the playability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

In the gaming machine described in the feature Z0, it is preferable that the condition that can be established during the special game state includes the entry of the game ball into a predetermined entrance in the special game state. In order for the player to fulfill the predetermined condition for estimating the probability information, it may be necessary to fulfill the predetermined condition regarding the entrance of the game ball into the predetermined entrance in the game area. it can. Therefore, in a gaming machine that tends to pay attention to a lottery result such as a game state transition lottery, it is possible to increase the opportunity to pay attention to the entry of the game ball into a predetermined entrance, and the predetermined entry It is possible to improve the playability in a gaming machine that utilizes the flow of the game balls, such as diversifying the game by arranging the ball openings and setting the number.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the feature Z0, as a condition that can be established during the special game state, an operation unit different from an operation unit that performs a shooting operation for the player to shoot a game ball in the game area during the special game state. It is preferable to set the condition that can be satisfied by the operation for. As a result, in the special game state, it is possible to add the game playability of paying attention to an operation different from the launch operation, and not only simply continuing the launch operation, but also adding another operation, the probability of the player It is possible to add a new game property that makes it possible to acquire information.

<Characteristic α0>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying a design,
Launching means (launching device 330) for launching a game ball,
A starting opening (a winning opening of the middle starting winning device 431, a winning opening of the right starting winning device 432) that satisfies the starting condition when the game ball shot by the launching device enters.
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when the starting condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, after the variable display of the symbols is performed on the display unit, a variation execution means (sub-control board 940) that stops and displays a symbol according to the lottery result as a stopped symbol,
When the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation executing means, a game control means for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state (Main control board 920),
Among the lottery results, the lottery result in which the variation display of the symbols by the variation executing means is suspended can be stored in a predetermined suspension storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Means (main control board 920),
When the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage unit by the holding storage unit reaches the upper limit, a predetermined first probability (a winning probability in the holding full production effect lottery) is set in a predetermined first period. A special effect executing unit (sub-control board 940) for executing a special effect,
The special effect executing means is a period provided after the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage unit reaches the upper limit, and is the same as the ending time of the first period or the ending time of the first period. A game characterized by comprising period extension means for extending the end period of the first period when a predetermined extension condition is satisfied within a predetermined second period which reaches the end period earlier. Machine.

The predetermined extension condition may be a condition that can be satisfied by the game ball that is launched by the launching device, or a condition that can be established regardless of the game ball that is launched by the launching device, For example, the execution of a part of the effects whose execution is already determined in the variable display that has already been suspended (for example, the appearance of a specific character) may be satisfied as the extension condition. You may make it materialize.

<Characteristic α1>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying a design,
Launching means (launching device 330) for launching a game ball,
A starting opening (a winning opening of the middle starting winning device 431, a winning opening of the right starting winning device 432) that satisfies the starting condition when the game ball shot by the launching device enters.
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when the starting condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, after the variable display of the symbols is performed on the display unit, a variation execution means (sub-control board 940) that stops and displays a symbol according to the lottery result as a stopped symbol,
When the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation executing means, a game control means for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state (Main control board 920),
Among the lottery results, the lottery result in which the variation display of the symbols by the variation executing means is suspended can be stored in a predetermined suspension storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Means (main control board 920),
When the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage unit by the holding storage unit reaches the upper limit, a predetermined first probability (a winning probability in the holding full production effect lottery) is set in a predetermined first period. A special effect executing unit (sub-control board 940) for executing a special effect,
The special effect executing means is a period provided after the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage unit reaches the upper limit, and is the same as the ending time of the first period or the ending time of the first period. If a predetermined extension condition that can be satisfied by the game ball launched by the launching means is satisfied within a predetermined second period when the end time is reached earlier (the number of holdings is increased by 1 A gaming machine characterized by comprising period extension means for extending the end time of the first period in the case of winning the production extension lottery in which the probability is 2).

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, in the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine, if the game ball enters the starting port while the variable display of the symbol is being displayed on the display device, the hit information used for the big hit lottery (corresponding to the lottery result) There is information configured such that information, which corresponds to a lottery result, is reserved and stored with a predetermined number (for example, four) set in advance as an upper limit (see, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the game machine having the conventional structure capable of storing the lottery result on hold. For example, if the number of stored lottery results reaches the upper limit, even if a game ball enters the starting opening after that, the lottery results for the entered balls are not stored and are simply wasted. There is a possibility that the shooting of the game balls is stopped before the number of the stored memories reaches the upper limit, the consumption of the game balls is small, and the operation is reduced.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature α1, it is possible to preferably execute the effect in the gaming machine that can store the lottery result in a reserved manner. That is, when the starting condition is satisfied by entering the game ball launched by the launching means into the starting opening, the variation executing means displays the variation of the symbol on the display unit, and then the lottery result by the lottery means. The symbol corresponding to is stopped and displayed as a stopped symbol. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state, which is more advantageous than the normal game state, is generated by the game control means after being stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the first result.

Among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results in which the execution of the variable display of the symbols by the variation executing means is suspended can be stored in the predetermined suspending storage unit by the suspending storage means with a predetermined number as an upper limit. When the number of lottery results stored in the hold storage unit reaches the upper limit, the special effect display unit causes the display unit to display a predetermined special effect with a predetermined first probability. Is displayed. Therefore, the player can face the game aiming at the establishment of the starting condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage unit. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play a game with respect to the gaming machine capable of storing the lottery result up to a predetermined number (upper limit) in the holding storage unit by the holding storage means.

Here, as a period after the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage unit reaches the upper limit, a predetermined period is reached at the same time as the ending period of the first period or earlier than the ending period of the first period. If the predetermined condition is satisfied by the game ball launched by the launching means within the second period, the period extending means extends the end time of the first period. Is configured as follows.

Thereby, in the gaming machine capable of executing the special effect when the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage unit reaches the upper limit, the player shoots the game ball in the first period during which the special effect can be revealed. By doing so, it is possible to add playability that can be extended.

The "special effect" in the gaming machine described in the features α0 and α1 may be an effect displayed on the display unit, an effect by sound, an effect by light, or an effect by the operation of an operable structure. Alternatively, some or all of these effects may be combined. In addition, the special effect may be an effect that is executed only in the first period, or is an effect that has a high probability of being executed in the first period before and after the start of the first period. Good. The period extension means may extend the first period and the second period. Also, the second period may be a fixed period in which the first period is extended by the period extending means or is not extended, or is variable when the first period is extended by the period extending means. It may be a regular period.

<Characteristic α2>
A gaming machine according to feature α0 or α1,
The special effect executing means,
When the lottery result showing the first result is included in the lottery results in which the symbols are stopped and displayed by the variation executing means during the first period, the lottery result showing the first result is not included. In some cases, a certain effect that is not executed may be executed as the special effect,
The period extension means, as the predetermined condition within the second period provided after the number of lottery results stored in the pending storage unit reaches the upper limit, as a predetermined condition, execution of variable display of symbols by the variation execution means. When a lottery result in which is reserved is newly stored in the pending storage unit, the end time of the first period is extended with the predetermined second probability.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the characteristic α2, when the lottery result stored in the hold storage unit by the hold storage unit includes the lottery result indicating the first result, the lottery stored in the hold storage unit. A predetermined effect that is not executed when the result does not include the lottery result indicating the first result is configured to be executed at least as a special effect.

Then, as a period after the number of the lottery results stored in the holding storage unit reaches the upper limit, the second end of the second period is reached at the same time as the end time of the first period or earlier than the end time of the first period. When a predetermined second period is provided, and during the second period, as a predetermined condition, the lottery result in which the execution of the variable display of the symbols by the variation executing means is suspended is newly stored in the suspension storage unit. Is configured to extend the end time of the first period.

Therefore, even when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery results in the situation where the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage unit has reached the upper limit, When the lottery result indicating the first result is newly stored in the holding storage unit, a predetermined effect is executed as a special effect, so that the player can increase the chances of visually recognizing the predetermined effect. It is possible to suppress dissatisfaction with not being able to see a predetermined effect.

<Characteristic β0>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying a design,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit performs a variable display of the symbols, and then a variation execution unit (sub-control board) for stopping and displaying a symbol according to a lottery result of the predetermined lottery as a stop symbol. 940),
When the lottery result by the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, after the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation executing means, a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated. And game control means (main control board 920)
Of the lottery results by the predetermined lottery, the lottery results in which the execution of the variable display of the symbols by the variation executing means is suspended are stored in a predetermined suspension storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) with a predetermined number of upper limits. Possible storage means (main control board 920),
Predetermined setting information corresponding to a probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or a probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. An information storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) capable of storing at least
One of a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. An input means (back surface setting switch 905, initialization switch 907) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to the operation of selecting the setting information corresponding to the probability;
When the operation information is input by the input unit, setting information storage unit (main control board 920) that stores the setting information selected by an operation corresponding to the operation information in the information storage unit,
When the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage unit by the holding storage unit satisfies a predetermined condition, the setting output information corresponding to the setting information stored in the information storage unit is output with a predetermined probability. And a setting output means (main control board 920, sub-control board 940) for performing the game machine.

The predetermined condition in the feature β1 is not limited to the case where the number of lottery results stored in the hold storage unit reaches the upper limit, and the case where the number of holding of the special symbol is increased from 3 times to 4 times, or fluctuation Select whether or not to output the setting suggestion information triggered by the satisfaction of the condition for other holding times, such as when the holding occurs during the stop and the variable display starts once after that. The setting suggestion information may be displayed, and any one condition may be satisfied, or two or more conditions may be satisfied.

<Characteristic β1>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying a design,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit performs a variable display of the symbols, and then a variation execution unit (sub-control board) for stopping and displaying a symbol according to a lottery result of the predetermined lottery as a stop symbol. 940),
When the lottery result by the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, after the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation executing means, a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated. And game control means (main control board 920)
Of the lottery results by the predetermined lottery, the lottery results in which the execution of the variable display of the symbols by the variation executing means is suspended are stored in a predetermined suspension storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) with a predetermined number of upper limits. Possible storage means (main control board 920),
Predetermined setting information corresponding to a probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or a probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. An information storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) capable of storing at least
One of a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. An input means (back surface setting switch 905, initialization switch 907) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to the operation of selecting the setting information corresponding to the probability;
When the operation information is input by the input unit, setting information storage unit (main control board 920) that stores the setting information selected by an operation corresponding to the operation information in the information storage unit,
Setting to output setting output information corresponding to the setting information stored in the information storage unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage unit by the holding storage unit reaches an upper limit An output device (a main control board 920, a sub-control board 940), and a gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, in the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed. In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine, if the game ball enters the starting port while the variable display of the symbol is being displayed on the display device, the hit information used for the big hit lottery (corresponding to the lottery result) There is information configured such that information, which corresponds to a lottery result, is reserved and stored with a predetermined number (for example, four) set in advance as an upper limit (see, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the game machine having the conventional structure capable of storing the lottery result on hold.

On the other hand, if it is the gaming machine described in the feature β0, it is possible to preferably execute the effect in the gaming machine capable of storing the lottery result on hold. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variation execution means variably displays the identification information on the display unit, and then the identification information corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is stopped and displayed. .. At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined first result, a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after being stopped and displayed with the identification information corresponding to the first result. To do.

The information storage unit has a predetermined probability corresponding to a lottery probability that a first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. Is configured to be able to store at least the setting information. One of the multiple probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. When the operation information corresponding to the operation of selecting the corresponding setting information is input by the input unit, the setting information selected by the operation corresponding to the operation information is stored in the information storage unit by the setting information storage unit. Memorized in. Thereby, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be set to the probability according to the operation information input by the input means.

Further, among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results for which the execution of the variable display of the symbols by the variation executing means is suspended can be stored in the predetermined suspending storage unit by the suspending storage means up to the predetermined number. .. When the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage unit reaches the upper limit, the setting output unit outputs the setting output information corresponding to the setting information stored in the information storage unit with a predetermined probability. It

Thereby, the setting information stored in the information storage unit, that is, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the predetermined lottery result that is selected in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. Information corresponding to the probability currently set as the probability can be suggested to the player based on the output from the setting output means.

Therefore, by increasing the number of lottery results stored in the hold storage unit until the number reaches the upper limit, it is possible to add the game playability of guessing the setting information about the gaming machine being played. For example, the estimated setting information as one of the selection factors as to whether to continue the game or to move to another game machine, considering whether it is a game machine suitable for one's taste or a different game machine. Since it is possible to use, it is possible to improve the playability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

<Characteristic β1>
A gaming machine described in feature β0,
When the number of lottery results stored in the hold storage unit by the hold storage unit reaches an upper limit, the setting output unit stores the setting information stored in the information storage unit with the plurality of probabilities. Of the above, when the setting information corresponds to at least one of the highest probability and the lowest probability, the setting output information corresponding to the setting information is output with a predetermined probability.

In the gaming machine described in the feature β1, when the number of lottery results stored in the hold storage unit reaches the upper limit, the setting information stored in the information storage unit is the first result in the predetermined lottery. Of the multiple probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that the selected lottery probability is selected or the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery, at least one of the highest probability and the lowest probability If the setting information corresponds to the setting information, the setting output unit outputs the setting output information corresponding to the setting information stored in the information storage unit with a predetermined probability.

Therefore, by the setting output means, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery in the game, or the highest probability or the lowest probability is set as the predetermined lottery result in the second lottery. The player can be inferred based on the output setting output information. As a result, the player can make various selections regarding the continuation of the game, such as whether to continue the game with the game machine in the game or move to another game machine based on the output setting output information. It is possible to preferably improve the game playability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

<Characteristic γ0>
A light guide member (light guide plate 715C) composed of one or a plurality of parts capable of displaying a predetermined effect image using light traveling in a continuous direction of the plate surface,
First light emitting means (left side light emitting means, right side light emitting means) that emits light so that light can travel in a first direction (left and right direction) where the plate surface is continuous in the light guide member;
Second light emitting means (lower light emitting means) that emits light so that light can travel in a second direction (vertical direction) that is a direction that is continuous with the plate surface in the light guide member and that intersects the first direction. And
The light guide member,
The first path through which the light input to the light guide member by the first light emitting means travels in the first direction, and the light input to the light guide member by the second light emitting means are the first path. An intersection area (intersection area 3021) where the second path traveling in the direction 2 intersects,
A non-crossing region (where the light, which is provided on at least one side along the second path with respect to the crossing region and is input to the light guide member by the second light emitting means) advances in the second direction ( And a non-intersecting region 3022),
In the intersecting area, the light output by the first light emitting means is reflected to perform a processing capable of displaying (outputting) a first effect image (first effect image 3001) on the player side. 1 display section (display area of the first effect image 3001) is provided,
The second output image (second effect image 3002) different from the first effect image is displayed on the player side by reflecting the light output by the second light emitting means in the non-intersecting area. A game machine characterized by being provided with a second display section (display area of the second effect image 3002) which has been subjected to possible (outputtable) processing.

<Characteristic γ1>
A light guide member (light guide plate 715C) composed of one or a plurality of parts capable of displaying a predetermined effect image using light traveling in a continuous direction of the plate surface,
First light emitting means (left side light emitting means, right side light emitting means) that emits light so that light can travel in a first direction (left and right direction) where the plate surface is continuous in the light guide member;
Second light emitting means (lower light emitting means) that emits light so that light can travel in a second direction (vertical direction) that is a direction that is continuous with the plate surface in the light guide member and that intersects the first direction. And
The light guide member,
The first path through which the light input to the light guide member by the first light emitting means travels in the first direction, and the light input to the light guide member by the second light emitting means are the first path. An intersection area (intersection area 3021) where the second path traveling in the direction 2 intersects,
A non-crossing region (where the light, which is provided on at least one side along the second path with respect to the crossing region and is input to the light guide member by the second light emitting means) advances in the second direction ( And a non-intersecting region 3022),
In the intersecting area, the light output by the first light emitting means is reflected to perform a processing capable of displaying (outputting) a first effect image (first effect image 3001) on the player side. 1 display section (display area of the first effect image 3001) is provided,
The second output image (second effect image 3002) different from the first effect image is displayed on the player side by reflecting the light output by the second light emitting means in the non-intersecting area. A second display unit (display area of the second effect image 3002) that has been subjected to possible (outputtable) processing is provided,
A gaming machine characterized in that a variable display area for displaying variable display of a symbol is provided at a position where the intersection area does not overlap the front side (or the player side).

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In recent years, a pachinko machine is known in which production is diversified by providing a light guide plate capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined effect image in a game area by light that is incident from an end face and proceeds while repeating total reflection on the front surface and the back surface. (For example, JP-A-2015-80625).

However, there is a possibility that there is room for improvement in the configuration for performing an effect using the light guide plate capable of emitting a predetermined effect image.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the characteristics γ0 and γ1, it is possible to provide the gaming machine that can suitably display the effect image using the light guide member. That is, the light guide member configured by one or a plurality of components capable of displaying a predetermined effect image using light that travels in a continuous direction of the plate surface (light that travels in a continuous direction of the plate surface) is crossed. It has a region and a non-intersecting region.

The intersecting region is guided by the first light emitting means and the second path through which the light input to the light guide member travels in the first direction in which the plate surface of the light guide member is continuous. This is a region where the light input to the optical member intersects with the second path that is continuous in the plate surface of the light guide member and that travels in the second direction that intersects the first direction. The non-intersecting region is a region provided on at least one side along the second path with respect to the intersecting region, and the light input to the light guide member by the second light emitting means is directed in the second direction. It is an area where progress is made.

The intersecting area is provided with a first display unit that has been processed to reflect (output) the first effect image on the player side by reflecting the light output by the first light emitting means. As a result, the first display image is displayed on the first display unit by the light output by the first light emitting unit (light traveling in the first direction in which the plate surface is continuous in the light guide member).

On the other hand, in the non-intersecting area, a process capable of reflecting (outputting) a second effect image different from the first effect image on the player side by reflecting the light output by the second light emitting means The applied second display portion is provided. As a result, the second display image is displayed on the second display unit by the light output from the second light emitting unit (light traveling in the second direction where the plate surface is continuous in the light guide member).

Therefore, while the first effect image is displayed by the light input to the light guide member by the first light emitting means (light traveling in the first direction in which the plate surface continues), the second light emitting means causes the first effect image to be displayed. Since the second effect image is displayed by the light input to the light guide member (light traveling in the second direction where the plate surface is continuous and intersects the first direction), the first light emitting unit and the first light emitting unit are displayed. By controlling the output of each light by the two light emitting means, it is possible to display the first effect image and the second effect image on the light guide member at different timings. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performance performed using the light guide member.

The non-intersecting region is provided on at least one side along the second path with respect to the intersecting region, and the light input to the light guide member by the second light emitting means travels in the second direction. Therefore, the light output by the first light emitting means does not enter the non-crossing region. Since the second display unit capable of displaying the second effect image is provided in the non-intersecting area, the second effect is generated by the light output by the first light emitting means for causing the first effect image to emit light. The possibility that an image will be displayed can be reduced. That is, it is possible to prevent the second effect image from being displayed together with the first effect image at the time when the first effect image should be displayed.

As a result, for example, the degree of expectation or probability that an event advantageous to the player will occur after the display of the first effect image is set lower than the degree of expectation or probability that the advantageous event will occur after the display of the second effect image. In the above configuration, since the second effect image is displayed together with the first effect image at the time when the first effect image should be displayed, it is unnecessary (or excessive) for the player to generate the advantageous event. As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation where, as a result of expectation, it is rather disappointing.

The "expected degree or probability of occurrence of an advantageous event" is, for example, expected degree or probability of transition to a special game state after variable display of symbols, or a game unit (round) executed during the special game state. The degree of expectation or the probability that the number increases (promotes) is exemplified.

In particular, in the gaming machine described in the feature γ1, the intersection area is provided at a position that does not overlap the front side of the variable display area where the variable display of the symbols is performed. Therefore, the first effect image is displayed only slightly on the first display portion provided in the intersection area by the light output by the second light emitting means to emit the second effect image ( Even if it appears lightly or lightly), it is possible to prevent the visibility of variable display of symbols from being impaired by displaying the first effect image.

In the gaming machine described in the features γ0 and γ1, the “second effect image” may be an image composed of a target (symbol, shape, character, etc.) different from the first effect image. Alternatively, the image may be composed of the same object as the first effect image.

<Characteristic δ0>
A light guide member (light guide plate 715C) composed of one or a plurality of parts capable of displaying a predetermined effect image using light traveling in a continuous direction of the plate surface,
First light emitting means (left side light emitting means, right side light emitting means) that emits light so that light can travel in a first direction (left and right direction) where the plate surface is continuous in the light guide member;
Second light emitting means (lower light emitting means) that emits light so that light can travel in a second direction (vertical direction) that is a direction that is continuous with the plate surface in the light guide member and that intersects the first direction. And
The light guide member,
The first path through which the light input to the light guide member by the first light emitting means travels in the first direction, and the light input to the light guide member by the second light emitting means are the first path. An intersection area (intersection area 3021) where the second path traveling in the direction 2 intersects,
A non-crossing region (where the light, which is provided on at least one side along the second path with respect to the crossing region and is input to the light guide member by the second light emitting means) advances in the second direction ( And a non-intersecting region 3022),
In the intersecting area, the light output by the first light emitting means is reflected to perform a processing capable of displaying (outputting) a first effect image (first effect image 3001) on the player side. 1 display section (display area of the first effect image 3001) is provided,
The second output image (second effect image 3002) different from the first effect image is displayed on the player side by reflecting the light output by the second light emitting means in the non-intersecting area. A second display unit (display area of the second effect image 3002) that has been subjected to possible (outputtable) processing is provided,
A game machine characterized in that a variable display area for variable display of symbols is provided at a position where the non-crossing area overlaps with the front side (or the player side).

<Characteristic δ1>
A light guide member (light guide plate 715C) composed of one or a plurality of parts capable of displaying a predetermined effect image using light traveling in a continuous direction of the plate surface,
First light emitting means (left side light emitting means, right side light emitting means) that emits light so that light can travel in a first direction (left and right direction) where the plate surface is continuous in the light guide member;
Second light emitting means (lower light emitting means) that emits light so that light can travel in a second direction (vertical direction) that is a direction that is continuous with the plate surface in the light guide member and that intersects the first direction. And
The light guide member,
The first path through which the light input to the light guide member by the first light emitting means travels in the first direction, and the light input to the light guide member by the second light emitting means are the first path. An intersection area (intersection area 3021) where the second path traveling in the direction 2 intersects,
A non-crossing region (where the light, which is provided on at least one side along the second path with respect to the crossing region and is input to the light guide member by the second light emitting means) advances in the second direction ( And a non-intersecting region 3022),
In the intersecting area, the light output by the first light emitting means is reflected to perform a processing capable of displaying (outputting) a first effect image (first effect image 3001) on the player side. 1 display section (display area of the first effect image 3001) is provided,
The second output image (second effect image 3002) different from the first effect image is displayed on the player side by reflecting the light output by the second light emitting means in the non-intersecting area. A second display unit (display area of the second effect image 3002) that has been subjected to possible (outputtable) processing is provided,
At the position where the intersecting area does not overlap the front side (or the player side) and the non-crossing area overlaps the front side (or the player side), a variable display area for variable display of symbols is provided. A gaming machine characterized by that.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In recent years, a pachinko machine is known in which production is diversified by providing a light guide plate capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined effect image in a game area by light that is incident from an end face and proceeds while repeating total reflection on the front surface and the back surface. (For example, JP-A-2015-80625).

However, there is a possibility that there is room for improvement in the configuration for performing an effect using the light guide plate capable of emitting a predetermined effect image.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the characteristics δ0 and δ1, it is possible to provide the gaming machine that can suitably display the effect image using the light guide member. That is, the light guide member configured by one or a plurality of components capable of displaying a predetermined effect image using light that travels in a continuous direction of the plate surface (light that travels in a continuous direction of the plate surface) is crossed. It has a region and a non-intersecting region.

The intersecting region is guided by the first light emitting means and the second path through which the light input to the light guide member travels in the first direction in which the plate surface of the light guide member is continuous. This is a region where the light input to the optical member intersects with the second path that is continuous in the plate surface of the light guide member and that travels in the second direction that intersects the first direction. The non-intersecting region is a region provided on at least one side along the second path with respect to the intersecting region, and the light input to the light guide member by the second light emitting means is directed in the second direction. It is an area where progress is made.

The intersecting area is provided with a first display unit that has been processed to reflect (output) the first effect image on the player side by reflecting the light output by the first light emitting means. As a result, the first display image is displayed on the first display unit by the light output by the first light emitting unit (light traveling in the first direction in which the plate surface is continuous in the light guide member).

On the other hand, in the non-intersecting area, a process capable of reflecting (outputting) a second effect image different from the first effect image on the player side by reflecting the light output by the second light emitting means The applied second display portion is provided. As a result, the second display image is displayed on the second display unit by the light output from the second light emitting unit (light traveling in the second direction where the plate surface is continuous in the light guide member).

Therefore, while the first effect image is displayed by the light input to the light guide member by the first light emitting means (light traveling in the first direction in which the plate surface continues), the second light emitting means causes the first effect image to be displayed. Since the second effect image is displayed by the light input to the light guide member (light traveling in the second direction where the plate surface is continuous and intersects the first direction), the first light emitting unit and the first light emitting unit are displayed. By controlling the output of each light by the two light emitting means, it is possible to display the first effect image and the second effect image on the light guide member at different timings. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performance performed using the light guide member.

The non-intersecting region is provided on at least one side along the second path with respect to the intersecting region, and the light input to the light guide member by the second light emitting means travels in the second direction. Therefore, the light output by the first light emitting means does not enter the non-crossing region. Since the second display unit capable of displaying the second effect image is provided in the non-intersecting area, the second effect is generated by the light output by the first light emitting means for causing the first effect image to emit light. It is possible to prevent the image from being displayed. That is, it is possible to prevent the second effect image from being displayed together with the first effect image at the time when the first effect image should be displayed.

As a result, for example, the degree of expectation or probability that an event advantageous to the player will occur after the display of the first effect image is set lower than the degree of expectation or probability that the advantageous event will occur after the display of the second effect image. In the above configuration, since the second effect image is displayed together with the first effect image at the time when the first effect image should be displayed, it is unnecessary (or excessive) for the player to generate the advantageous event. As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation where, as a result of expectation, it is rather disappointing.

The "expected degree or probability of occurrence of an advantageous event" is, for example, expected degree or probability of transition to a special game state after variable display of symbols, or a game unit (round) executed during the special game state. The degree of expectation or the probability that the number increases (promotes) is exemplified.

In particular, in the gaming machine described in the feature δ1, the non-crossing area is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the variable display area in which the variable display of the symbols is performed. As described above, the second effect image displayed on the second display unit provided in the non-intersecting area is displayed by the light output by the first light emitting means for causing the first effect image to emit light. Since this can be suppressed, it is possible to prevent the visibility of variable display of symbols from being reduced at an inappropriate time.

In the gaming machine described in the features δ0 and δ1, the “second effect image” may be an image composed of a target (symbol, shape, character, etc.) different from the first effect image. Alternatively, the image may be composed of the same object as the first effect image.

<Characteristic δ2>
A gaming machine according to the characteristic δ0 or δ1,
The game machine is characterized in that the light guide member is arranged in a direction in which a moving direction of a symbol variably displayed in the variably display area and the second direction are on the same direction side.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature δ2, the moving direction of the symbol variably displayed in the variable display area and the second direction (that is, the direction in which the light output by the second light emitting means travels in the light guide member). ) And the light guide members are arranged so as to be in the same direction side, so that, for example, by providing a non-intersecting region at a position overlapping the front side of the variable display region, the movement of the symbols that are variably displayed It is possible to display the effect image extending along the direction in front of the variable display area. As a result, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the variable displayed symbols from being impaired by the display of the effect image.

<Characteristic δ3>
The gaming machine according to any one of features δ0 to δ2,
The second light emitting means divides the non-intersecting region into a plurality of non-intersecting region constituting parts (non-intersecting region constituting parts AQ1 to AQ10) arranged on the side intersecting the second direction. A plurality of light-emitting bodies (a plurality of lower light-emitting means) that emit light so as to be able to travel (toward each) corresponding to each of the intersection region constituent parts;
In the non-intersecting area, at least a non-intersecting area composing portion in which the second display portion is not provided among the plurality of non-intersecting area composing portions is included so that the player is provided with another non-intersecting area image. A third display unit provided with a process capable of displaying (outputting) a third effect image (third effect image 3003) is provided,
At least a part of the third effect image is displayed on the player side when a light-emitting body corresponding to the non-intersecting region forming section among the plurality of light-emitting bodies included in the second light-emitting means is caused to emit light A game machine characterized by being configured to be possible.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature δ3, the second light emitting means intersects the non-intersecting region in the second direction (that is, the light emitted by the second light emitting means intersects in the traveling direction). It is configured to include a plurality of light emitters that emit light so that light can travel in correspondence with each of the plurality of non-intersecting region constituent parts that are sectioned so as to be arranged side by side. Therefore, the light traveling in the second direction can be input in units of individual non-intersecting region constituent parts by the plurality of light emitting bodies.

A third effect image different from the second effect image can be displayed on the player side so as to include at least a non-intersection area constituent section in which the second display section is not provided among the plurality of non-intersection area constituent sections. A third display unit is provided which has been processed (outputtable). As a result, the second display portion in the non-intersecting region is caused by the light output from the plurality of light emitting elements included in the second light emitting means (light traveling in the second direction where the plate surface is continuous in the light guide member). At least a part of the third effect image can be displayed in the area not provided separately from the second effect image displayed on the second display unit. Therefore, the second effect image and at least a part of the third effect image can be displayed at different timings, so that the effect performed using the light guide member can be more diversified.

<Characteristic ε0>
A light guide member (light guide plate 715C) composed of one or a plurality of parts capable of displaying a predetermined effect image using light traveling in a continuous direction of the plate surface,
First light emitting means (left side light emitting means, right side light emitting means) that emits light so that light can travel in a first direction (left and right direction) where the plate surface is continuous in the light guide member;
Second light emitting means (lower light emitting means) that emits light so that light can travel in a second direction (vertical direction) that is a direction that is continuous with the plate surface in the light guide member and that intersects the first direction. When,
Production control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling light output by the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means,
The light guide member,
The first path through which the light input to the light guide member by the first light emitting means travels in the first direction, and the light input to the light guide member by the second light emitting means are the first path. An intersection area (intersection area 3021) where the second path traveling in the direction 2 intersects,
A non-crossing region (where the light, which is provided on at least one side along the second path with respect to the crossing region and is input to the light guide member by the second light emitting means) advances in the second direction ( And a non-intersecting region 3022),
In the intersecting area, the light output by the first light emitting means is reflected to perform a processing capable of displaying (outputting) a first effect image (first effect image 3001) on the player side. 1 display section (display area of the first effect image 3001) is provided,
The second output image (second effect image 3002) different from the first effect image is displayed on the player side by reflecting the light output by the second light emitting means in the non-intersecting area. A second display unit (display area of the second effect image 3002) that has been subjected to possible (outputtable) processing is provided,
The effect control means, when the first effect image and the second effect image are compared with each other, a phenomenon advantageous to the player after the first effect image is displayed (special game state, promotion of the number of rounds). ) Occurs, the output of the light is controlled by a control set to be lower than the expectation that the advantageous event occurs after the display of the second effect image.

<Characteristic ε1>
A light guide member (light guide plate 715C) configured by one or a plurality capable of displaying a predetermined effect image by using light traveling in a continuous direction of the plate surface,
First light emitting means (left side light emitting means, right side light emitting means) that emits light so that light can travel in a first direction (left and right direction) where the plate surface is continuous in the light guide member;
Second light emitting means (lower light emitting means) that emits light so that light can travel in a second direction (vertical direction) that is a direction that is continuous with the plate surface in the light guide member and that intersects the first direction. When,
Production control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling light output by the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means,
The light guide member,
The first path through which the light input to the light guide member by the first light emitting means travels in the first direction, and the light input to the light guide member by the second light emitting means are the first path. An intersection area (intersection area 3021) where the second path traveling in the direction 2 intersects,
A non-crossing region (where the light, which is provided on at least one side along the second path with respect to the crossing region and is input to the light guide member by the second light emitting means) advances in the second direction ( And a non-intersecting region 3022),
In the intersecting area, the light output by the first light emitting means is reflected to perform a processing capable of displaying (outputting) a first effect image (first effect image 3001) on the player side. 1 display section (display area of the first effect image 3001) is provided,
The second output image (second effect image 3002) different from the first effect image is displayed on the player side by reflecting the light output by the second light emitting means in the non-intersecting area. A second display unit (display area of the second effect image 3002) that has been subjected to possible (outputtable) processing is provided,
The effect control means, when the first effect image and the second effect image are compared with each other, an event advantageous to the player after the display of the first effect image (special game state, promotion of the number of rounds). ) Occurs, the output of the light is controlled by the control set to be lower than the probability that the advantageous event occurs after the display of the second effect image.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when entering a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, it becomes a special game state. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In recent years, a pachinko machine is known in which production is diversified by providing a light guide plate capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined effect image in a game area by light that is incident from an end face and proceeds while repeating total reflection on the front surface and the back surface. (For example, JP-A-2015-80625).

However, there is a possibility that there is room for improvement in the configuration for performing an effect using the light guide plate capable of emitting a predetermined effect image.

On the other hand, if the gaming machine described in the characteristic ε0 and the characteristic ε1, it is possible to provide the gaming machine that can suitably display the effect image using the light guide member. That is, the light guide member configured by one or a plurality of components capable of displaying a predetermined effect image using light that travels in a continuous direction of the plate surface (light that travels in a continuous direction of the plate surface) is crossed. It has a region and a non-intersecting region.

The intersecting region is guided by the first light emitting means and the second path through which the light input to the light guide member travels in the first direction in which the plate surface of the light guide member is continuous. This is a region where the light input to the optical member intersects with the second path that is continuous in the plate surface of the light guide member and that travels in the second direction that intersects the first direction. The non-intersecting region is a region provided on at least one side along the second path with respect to the intersecting region, and the light input to the light guide member by the second light emitting means is directed in the second direction. It is an area where progress is made.

The intersecting area is provided with a first display unit that has been processed to reflect (output) the first effect image on the player side by reflecting the light output by the first light emitting means. As a result, the first display image is displayed on the first display unit by the light output by the first light emitting unit (light traveling in the first direction in which the plate surface is continuous in the light guide member).

On the other hand, in the non-intersecting area, a process capable of reflecting (outputting) a second effect image different from the first effect image on the player side by reflecting the light output by the second light emitting means The applied second display portion is provided. As a result, the second display image is displayed on the second display unit by the light output from the second light emitting unit (light traveling in the second direction where the plate surface is continuous in the light guide member).

Therefore, while the first effect image is displayed by the light input to the light guide member by the first light emitting means (light traveling in the first direction in which the plate surface continues), the second light emitting means causes the first effect image to be displayed. Since the second effect image is displayed by the light input to the light guide member (light traveling in the second direction where the plate surface is continuous and intersects the first direction), the first light emitting unit and the first light emitting unit are displayed. By controlling the output of each light by the two light emitting means, it is possible to display the first effect image and the second effect image on the light guide member at different timings. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performance performed using the light guide member.

The non-intersecting region is provided on at least one side along the second path with respect to the intersecting region, and the light input to the light guide member by the second light emitting means travels in the second direction. Therefore, the light output by the first light emitting means does not enter the non-crossing region. Since the second display unit capable of displaying the second effect image is provided in the non-intersecting area, the second effect is generated by the light output by the first light emitting means for causing the first effect image to emit light. It is possible to prevent the image from being displayed. That is, it is possible to prevent the second effect image from being displayed together with the first effect image at the time when the first effect image should be displayed.

Here, in the gaming machine described in the feature ε1, the effect control means is configured such that the expectation or probability that an event advantageous to the player will occur after the display of the first effect image is the same as that after the second effect image is displayed. The light output to each of the first and second light emitting means is controlled by the control set lower than the degree of expectation or probability that an advantageous event will occur. As a result, the second effect image is displayed together with the first effect image at the time when the first effect image should be displayed, which is unnecessary (or excessive) to the occurrence of the advantageous phenomenon for the player. As a result of expectation, it is possible to suppress the situation where the user is rather disappointed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the loss of playability for displaying the effect image that indicates the degree of expectation or probability that the advantageous event will occur after the display.

The "expected degree or probability of occurrence of an advantageous event" is, for example, expected degree or probability of transition to a special game state after variable display of symbols, or a game unit (round) executed during the special game state. The degree of expectation or the probability that the number increases (promotes) is exemplified.

<Characteristic ε2>
A gaming machine according to feature ε0 or feature ε1,
The first display unit is arranged at a position where at least the first effect image does not overlap the front side of the variable display area in which the variable display of the symbols is performed,
When the first light emitting unit divides the intersecting region into a plurality of intersecting region constituting parts (intersecting region constituting parts AP1 to AP4) arranged in a direction intersecting with the first direction, the intersecting region constituting part is divided. A plurality of light emitting bodies (a plurality of left side light emitting means, a plurality of right side light emitting means) that output light corresponding to each of
The effect control means,
With respect to the second effect image (or variable display area of the pattern) displayed on the second display unit, a predetermined (emission intensity is set in the first effect image displayed on the first display unit. A gaming machine characterized in that the plurality of light emitting bodies included in the first light emitting means are controlled so that a part that emits light of (color) approaches or moves away from the part.

In the gaming machine described in the feature ε2, the c first light emitting means is a side of the intersection area that intersects the first direction (that is, the light emitted by the first light emitting means intersects in the traveling direction). It is configured to include a plurality of light emitters that emit light so that light can travel in correspondence with each of the plurality of intersecting region constituent portions that are sectioned so as to be arranged in the (direction direction). Therefore, it is possible to input the light traveling in the first direction in units of the individual intersecting area constituent portions by the plurality of light emitting bodies.

The effect control means emits a predetermined light in the first effect image displayed on the first display section with respect to the second effect image (or the variable display area of the symbol) displayed on the second display section. However, the plurality of light emitters included in the first light emitting means are controlled so as to approach each other or move away from each other. As a result, the portion of the first effect image that emits predetermined light is moved toward or away from the second effect image (or variable display area of the symbol) displayed on the second display unit. Can be made

Since the first display unit is arranged at a position where at least the first effect image does not overlap with the front side of the variable display area in which the variable display of the symbols is performed, compared to the variable display area of the symbol that the player can easily pay attention to. , The first effect image is unlikely to receive the player's attention. In the first effect image, the part that emits predetermined light is moved toward or away from the second effect image (or the variable display area of the symbol) as described above, By the movement, the player's attention can be easily directed to the first effect image. Thereby, the player can be prevented from missing the display of the first effect image.

<Characteristic ζ0>
Sound control means (production control means, sub-control board 940) for controlling the output of sound (execution of production),
Variation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling variable display of symbols displayed on a predetermined display section when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied,
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a first result in which a special game state occurs after the end of the variable display or a second result in which the special game state does not occur after the end of the variable display can be selected. Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery,
In the normal game state, the special game state, and the game state in which the variable display can be executed a plurality of times by shifting after the special game state ends, the display result of the variable display corresponding to the second result is Game state control means for performing control to generate a plurality of types of game states including at least a predetermined game state (time-saving game state) that ends when a variable display is repeatedly displayed until the last time a variable display that satisfies a predetermined end condition is established ( A main control board 920),
The sound control means (production control means),
From the start of the variation display of the last time (last loss before the game state transition), during the execution of the variation display of the last time, a continuous musical tone is output,
In a certain period before the end including the stop (end) timing of the variable display in the final variable display, the output of the musical sound is made smaller than before the start of the final variable display, or the musical sound is not output. In addition, a game machine having means for controlling the output of the musical sound.

<Characteristic ζ1>
Sound control means (production control means, sub-control board 940) for controlling the output of sound (execution of production),
Variation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling variable display of symbols displayed on a predetermined display section when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied,
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a first result in which a special game state occurs after the end of the variable display or a second result in which the special game state does not occur after the end of the variable display can be selected. Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery,
In the normal game state, the special game state, and the game state in which the variable display can be executed a plurality of times by shifting after the special game state ends, the display result of the variable display corresponding to the second result is Game state control means for performing control to generate a plurality of types of game states including at least a predetermined game state (time-saving game state) that ends when a variable display is repeatedly displayed until the last time a variable display that satisfies a predetermined end condition is established ( A main control board 920),
The sound control means (production control means),
In the final variation display, a musical sound including the same melody as the intermediate variation display executed before the final variation display is output,
The output of the musical sound is made smaller than the output of the musical sound in the intermediate variable display in a certain period before the end including the stop (end) timing of the variable display in the final variable display, or the musical sound is changed. A gaming machine comprising means for controlling the output of the musical sound so that the musical sound is not output.

As a typical example of the game machine, there is a pachinko machine or a slot machine as a ball game machine, and in the conventional game machine, a game machine that generates a plurality of game states is known. For example, in the normal game state, a lottery is performed when a player enters a starting opening provided in the game area, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered and a large number of game balls enter the winning opening. There is known a gaming machine which becomes possible and, after the special gaming state, shifts to a time saving gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP-A-2015-144670).

However, there is a possibility that there is room for improvement in the configuration for switching and controlling the gaming state. For example, if it is displayed such that the remaining number of variable displays is subtracted by the time when the predetermined game state advantageous for the player ends and the time when the game state is switched to the normal game state, the player may enjoy the game rather than enjoy it. There was a possibility that it would give the impression of being hunted down or impatient, and could hinder the desire to play games casually.

On the other hand, if the gaming machine described in the characteristic ζ0 and the characteristic ζ1, it is possible to provide the gaming machine capable of suitably notifying the time when the predetermined gaming state ends and switches to another gaming state. That is, in the gaming state in which the variable display can be executed a plurality of times by transitioning after the end of the special game state, the display result of the variable display corresponding to the second result is the last variation in which a predetermined ending condition is satisfied. In the predetermined game state that ends when the display is repeated until the display, the musical sound output in the variation display of the last time in the plurality of times (for example, before the start of the last time, the variation display of the last time is displayed. Continuous musical tones and musical tones that include the same melody as the midway variation display executed before the final variation display) before the end including the stop timing of the variation display in the final variation display. In a certain period, the output is smaller than the output before the start of the final fluctuation display or the output in the midway fluctuation display that is executed before the final fluctuation display, or is not output. As described above, the output of the musical sound is controlled by the sound control means.

Therefore, the player can recognize that the variation display of the musical sound is in the process of performing the variable display for the final time (that is, the time when the predetermined ending condition is satisfied) in the predetermined game state, and thereby, The player can be made aware of the end of the predetermined game state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the game without noticing the end of the predetermined game state.

Further, since it is possible to let the player recognize that it is the final display of the variable display in the predetermined game state without relying on the sight or hearing by the direct output of information, the final display of the variable display. It is not necessary to visually display the information that can identify the thing on a liquid crystal display device or the like, or to output the information auditorily by voice. Thereby, for example, even when a spinning body (reel) is used as a symbol display device instead of an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device, the player can display the last variation in the predetermined game state. Can be recognized. Further, even when an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device is adopted as a symbol display device, it is possible to omit the display of information that can be identified as the last variable display in the predetermined game state. Therefore, the display area of the information in the image display device can be effectively used as much as the display of the information is omitted.

In the gaming machines having the characteristics ζ0 and ζ1, the information regarding the wording that causes the player to recognize the end of the game state at the start of the next variation display of the normal game state from the last variation display in the predetermined game state ( For example, it is preferable not to output by voice such as “end” or “end” or output by characters, and at least in the variable display area and its periphery in accordance with the switching of the game state. It is preferable to change at least one of changing one of the colors and changing the tone of the variable display.

Further, in the gaming machines having the characteristics ζ0 and ζ1, it is not always necessary to reduce the musical tone or to silence without outputting the musical tone in the final variable display, and instead includes at least the final variable display. In the variable display at the final stage, which is constituted by a plurality of variable displays, the musical tone may be reduced, or a period may be generated in which the musical tone is not output and is silent.

<Characteristic ζ2>
A gaming machine according to the characteristic ζ0 or ζ1,
The sound control means, in a variable display different from the final display and displaying a display result of the variable display corresponding to the first result, produces a musical sound substantially the same as that of the final display. Means for continuing at least until after the start of the certain period of time, displaying a display result of a variable display corresponding to the first result after the start of the certain period of time, and outputting a musical sound corresponding to the display result A gaming machine characterized by having.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the characteristic ζ2, it is a variation display different from the last variation display (variation display of the times when the predetermined ending condition is satisfied), and corresponds to the first result. In the variable display for displaying the display result of the variable display, the musical tone substantially the same as the final variable display is output at least continuously until after the start of the certain period, and after the certain period is started, The display result of the variable display corresponding to the result of 1 is displayed, and the musical sound corresponding to the display result is output. As a result, in the variable display that displays the display result of the variable display corresponding to the first result, substantially the same musical tone as that of the final variable display is output, and the variable display corresponding to the first result is displayed. A musical tone corresponding to the result is output.

It should be noted that at least one feature described in Features 10 to ζ2 may be applied in combination with any other feature or multiple features. The following is a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied.

Pachinko machine: A launching operation means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the launching operation means, and a passage portion for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in a game area, and gives a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

Rotating drum type game machines such as slot machines: The rotation of the revolving body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the revolving body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player is responsive to the design after the stop. A gaming machine that gives benefits to.

As described above, the present invention is suitable for a game machine such as a ball game machine.

100... Gaming machine, 261... Push operation device, 263... Selection operation device, 479... Decorative symbol display device, 710... Reel device, 711L... Left reel, 711M... Middle reel, 711R... Right reel, 712... Main symbol, 713B ...Second sub-pattern, 730...lottery result display device, 920...main control board, 940...sub-control board, 401...base body, 701...base body, 702...side wall part, 715...resin cover, 715A...outer cover, 715A1... Curved part, 715B, 715C... Light guide plate, 715B1... Curved part, 715B4, 715B5... End face, 717A... Reel side lamp, 720... Hold lamp, 741, 742, 743... Picture, 753... Information display part, 761A, 761B... Half mirror, 771... Wave lamp, 781, 782, 783... Gear, 1441A, 1441B... Start prize switch, 1610... Entrance, 1612... Guide passage, 1613A, 1613B... First passage, 1614A, 1614B... Second passage, 1631 ...First rear side part, second rear side part, 1631A, 1631B... passage wall part, 811... pressing member, 812, 813... light source unit, 824, 834... light emitting means, 892, 893... protruding part, 841A, 841B , 843A, 843B, 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B... Through hole, 844A, 844B, 854A, 854B... Projection part, 842A, 842B, 852A, 852B... , D2... Region, Z... Recess, Z1, Z2, Z3... Side, C1... Left end of side Z1, C2... Right end of side Z1, 1701... First reel body, 1702... Second reel body, 1711... Drive solenoid, 1731... Drive solenoid, 1751... Light guide plate, 1761... Picture, 1771... Light guide plate, 1781... Picture, 1772... Light guide plate support part, 1773... Gear, 1810... Hold count display area, 1811... Hold scheduled icon, 1812... Hold Icon, 1820... Stand state icon display area, 1821... Stand state icon, 2439A, 2439B... General winning device, 905... Back setting switch, 907... Initialization switch, 3001... First effect image, 3002... Second effect image, 3003... 3rd production image, 3021... Intersection area, 3022... Non-intersection area, AP1-AP4... Intersection area constituent part, AQ1-AQ4... Non-intersection area constituent part

Claims (2)

Production control means for controlling execution of production,
Variation control means for controlling variable display of symbols displayed on a predetermined display section when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied,
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a first result in which a special game state occurs after the end of the variable display or a second result in which the special game state does not occur after the end of the variable display can be selected. A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery,
In the normal game state, the special game state, and the game state in which the variable display can be executed a plurality of times by shifting after the special game state ends, the display result of the variable display corresponding to the second result is A game state control means for performing control to generate a plurality of types of game states including at least a predetermined game state that ends when a variable display is displayed repeatedly until the final variation display in which a predetermined end condition is satisfied, Machine,
The effect control means,
From the start of the final display of the variable display, while outputting the final display of the variable display, output a continuous musical tone,
In a certain period before the end including the stop timing of the variable display in the final variable display, the output of the musical sound is made smaller than before the start of the final variable display, or the musical sound is not output, A game machine having means for controlling the output of a musical sound. Production control means for controlling execution of production,
Variation control means for controlling variable display of symbols displayed on a predetermined display section when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied,
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a first result in which a special game state occurs after the end of the variable display or a second result in which the special game state does not occur after the end of the variable display can be selected. A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery,
In the normal game state, the special game state, and the game state in which the variable display can be executed a plurality of times by shifting after the special game state ends, the display result of the variable display corresponding to the second result is A game state control means for performing control to generate a plurality of types of game states including at least a predetermined game state that ends when a variable display is displayed repeatedly until the final variation display in which a predetermined end condition is satisfied, Machine,
The effect control means,
In the final variation display, a musical sound including the same melody as the intermediate variation display executed before the final variation display is output,
The output of the musical sound is made smaller than the output of the musical sound in the intermediate variable display during a certain period before the end including the stop timing of the variable display in the final variable display, or the musical sound is not output. In addition, a game machine having means for controlling the output of the musical sound.